Princenton Proposal

Princeton University

Office of Design and Construction

PRINCETON UNIVERSITY
FACILITIES DEPARTMENT
DESIGN STANDARDS MANUAL

RELEASE 9.0

MARCH 2012

Princeton University Design Standards:
Release 9.0 Table of Contents

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual TOC page 1

SECTION NAME PAGES

Introduction Introduction 1 to Introduction - 2

1.0 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES
1.1 University Administrative Departments 1.1-1 to 1.1-5
Introduction Index of References Facilities Department
Organization and Function University Services Department
Organization and Function Department of Public Safety
Organization and Function / Office of Information Technology
Organization and Function / Facilities Department Organization
Chart
1.2 Sustainable Building Guidelines 1.2-1 to 1.2-10
Introduction / Contacts / Index Of References/
Outline of Process / Life Cycle Cost Analysis /
LEED Rating System / Material Selection / Waste Management /
Site Planning

1.3 Project Responsibility Checklist 1.3-1 to 1.3-16
Introduction Pre-Contractual Phase /Pre-Schematic Design Phase
Schematic Design Phase Tasks Prior to Design and
Development Phase Tasks During Design Development Phase/
Tasks Prior to Construction Document Phase / Tasks During Construction
Phase / Tasks During Bidding and Negotiation Phase /Task During
Administration Phase / Tasks During Project Closeout Phase / A/E Fee
Proposal Budget Outline
1.4 Regulatory Agencies 1.4-1 to 1.4-6
Introduction State Review Local Review Contacts /
Index of References Review Guidelines Procedural
Guidelines-Preliminary Design and Design Development Procedural
Guidelines-Code Review Applications and Submittals Procedural
Guidelines-Organization of Submittal Drawings Procedural Guidelines-
Timely Response to Review Comments Procedural Guidelines-Code
Variances and Variations Procedural Guidelines-Permit Application to
Local Agency Procedural Guidelines-Approved Construction Documents
Periodic Testing Requirements
1.5 Documentation and Archiving 1.5-1 to 1.5-7
Introduction Contacts Index of References
Code References Room Numbering Requirements Existing
Documentation Availability and Distribution Archiving Requirements-
Printed Archiving Requirements-Electronic Closeout
Documentation Review Summary of Archiving Requirements
Formatting of Printed Deliverables-Drawings Formatting of Electronic
Deliverables Existing Digital Data Positional Tolerance Requirements

FACILITIES DEPARTMENT STANDARDS

2.0 OFFICE OF DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
2.1 Accessibility 2.1-1 to 2.1-7
Applicable Codes and Federal Standards University Review
Guidelines Design and Procedural Guidelines
Guidelines and Requirements for Documentation Other Considerations
for Accessible Design

2.2 Audio-Visual Standards 2.2-1 to 2.2-14
Code References Review Guidelines Procedural
Guidelines Guidelines and Requirements for Documentation
Guidelines for Audio-Visual Equipment Warranty and Licensing /
Requirements for Testing and Personnel Instruction Requirements
for As-Built Drawings and Project Closeout
2.3 Classroom and Conference Room Design 2.3-1 to 2.3-10
Guidelines for Classroom Design Requirements for As-
Built Drawings
2.4 Dormitory Design 2.4-1 to 2.4-20
Code References Review Guidelines-General Procedural
Guidelines-Approach to Regulatory Agencies Procedural Guidelines-
Code Review Applications and Submittals Guidelines and Requirements
for Documentation Considerations for Dormitory Design Custodial
Closets Signage Requirements Environmental Issues
Requirements for As-Built Drawings
2.5 Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment 2.5-1 to 2.5-9
Review Guidelines Design Guidelines / Requirements for
As-Built Drawings and Project Closeout
2.6 Office of Information Technology 2.6.1 to 2.6-7
Code References Review Guidelines Procedural Guidelines-
Preliminary Design and Design Development Guidelines and Requirements
for Documentation Considerations for OIT Systems Design
2.7 Security 2.7-1 to 2.7-8
Procedural Guidelines-Programming and Schematic
Design Review Guidelines / Design Guidelines Passive Security Features
Design Guidelines-Active Security Features Requirements for As-Built
Drawings


2.8 Environmental Graphics 2.8-1 to 2.8-4
Review Guidelines Procedural Guidelines-Preliminary Design
and Design Development Guidelines for Installation and
Performance Guidelines for Door Number Label
2.9 Site Planning 2.9-1 to 2.9-14
Code References Design Guidelines Internal Review Guidelines
Site Plans-Landscaping Internal Review Guidelines-Utilities Municipal Review
Guidelines-Landscaping Guidelines and Requirements for
Documentation Sustainability Considerations for Exterior
Design-Circulation Considerations for Exterior Design-Planting
Concepts Considerations for Exterior Design-Reunion
Sites Considerations for Exterior Design-Lighting General
Survey Requirements Requirements for As-Built Drawings
2.10 Laboratory Design 2.10-1 to 2.10-10
Guidelines for Laboratory Design Requirements for As-Built Drawings
2.11 Graduate Apartment Design 2.11-1 to 2.11-15
Code References Review Guidelines-General Procedural
Guidelines-Approach to Regulatory Agencies Guidelines and Requirements
for Documentation Considerations for Apartment Design
Custodial Closets Signage Requirements Environmental
Issues Requirements for As-Built Drawings

3.0 ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT STANDARDS
3.1 Access Control Systems 3.1-1 to 3.1-5
Guidelines for System Installation and Performance
Requirements for Testing and Commissioning

3.2 Automatic Temperature Controls
and Energy Management System 3.2-1 to 3.2-9
Guidelines Requirements for Documentation
Requirements for Automatic Temperature Control System Testing
Master BAS Spec Implementation Guidance


3.3 Energy Guidelines 3.3-1 to 3.3-11
Code References Requirements for Documentation
Energy Performance Targets/ Modeling Procedures /
Systems Performance Daylighting Renewable Energy /
Measurement and Verification

3.4 Fire Alarm Systems 3.4-1 to 3.4-7
Guidelines Requirements for Documentation
Requirements for Room and Device Designations Requirements
for Fire Alarm System Commissioning Requirements for As-Built
Drawings
3.5 Lighting Design 3.5-1 to 3.5-5
Lighting Controls Requirements for As-Built Drawings
Requirements for Spare Lamps
3.6 Utility Guidelines 3.6-1 to 3.6-5
Guidelines Positional and Tolerance Requirements for Existing
Conditions Survey / Guidelines and Requirements for Documentation
Requirements for As-Built Drawings Service Requirements for
Underground Utilities
3.7 Fire Suppression Sprinklers and Standpipes 3.7-1 to 3.7-8
Requirements for Suppression System Testing Requirements for
As-Built Drawings Requirements for Spare Parts
3.8 Fire Suppression Chemicals 3.8-1 to 3.8-6
Guidelines Requirements for Documentation Guidelines
for System Installation and Performance Requirements for Suppression
System Testing Fire Extinguishers Requirements for As-Built
Drawings

3.9 Reserved


3.10 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems Design 3.10-1 to 3.10-22
Introduction Contacts Index of Appendices
Guidelines / Guidelines and Requirements for Documentation
Guidelines for System Installation and Performance Requirements for Heating,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning System Testing Requirements
For As-Built Drawings O&M Documentation
3.11 Plumbing Systems Design 3.11-1 to 3.11-8
Guidelines Preliminary Design and Design Development
Guidelines and Requirements for Documentation Guidelines
for System Installation and Performance Requirements for
Plumbing System Testing and Sterilization Plumbing System
Electrical Alarm Requirements Requirements for
As-Built Drawings
3.12 Electrical Systems Design 3.12-1 to 3.12-10
Code References Review Guidelines
Requirements for Documentation Design Guidelines-General
Programming Issues Design Guidelines-Schematic Design Phase
Design Guidelines-Design Development Phase Design
Guidelines-Construction Documentation of Equipment and Devices
Design Guidelines-Emergency and Stand-By Power Systems Procedural
Guidelines-Other Design Considerations Procedural Guidelines-
Commissioning, Warranty Notification Requirements for As-Built
Drawings
3.13 Commissioning 3.13-1 to 3.13-5
Review Guidelines Procedural Guidelines Commissioning
Approach / Requirements for Documentation / Building
Commissioning Process /Measurement and Verification /
Requirements for Commissioning Documentation

4.0 MAINTENANCE AND BUILDING SERVICES STANDARDS
4.1 Communication Closets 4.1-1 to 4.1-2
Standards for Communication Closets-Office of Information
Technology Communication Closets

4.2 Corridors 4.2-1 to 4.2-3
Standards for Corridors-Grounds and Building Maintenance; Building
Services Hallways/Corridors/Stairwells

4.3 Custodial Closets, Storage and Special Facilities 4.3-1 to 4.3-3
Standards for Custodial Closets and Storage-Building Services; Grounds
and Building Maintenance Custodial Closets Custodial
Supply Areas


4.4 Door Hardware 4.4-1 to 4.4-6
Standards for Door Hardware- Site protection General
Standard: Non Electrified Hardware Key Schedule and Core Installations
Electrified Hardware and Access Control Considerations Requirements for Mechanical Rooms,
Penthouses,Roof Access Millwork and Cabinetry Locks Access Panel
Locks / Requirements for As-Built Drawings

4.5 Electrical Rooms 4.5-1 to 4.5-4
Standards for Electrical Rooms-Building Services; Grounds and Building
Maintenance
4.6 Elevators 4.6-1 to 4.6-6
Standards for Elevators-Grounds and Building Maintenance
Contacts Index of References Codes and Standards
Review and Procedural Guidelines Design and Installation
Guidelines-General Design and Installation Guidelines-Elevator
Machine Rooms Design and Installation Guidelines-Elevator
Hoistway and Pit Design and Installation Guidelines-Related Work
Requirements for Testing and Training Requirements for
As-Built Drawings Non-conformance with Standards
4.7 Laundry Rooms 4.7-1 to 4.7-2
Standards for Laundry Rooms-Building Services
4.8 Mechanical Rooms 4.8-1 to 4.8-4
Standards for Mechanical Rooms-Building Services; Grounds and Building
Maintenance
4.9 Painting 4.9-1 to 4.9-3
Standards for Painting-Grounds and Building Maintenance
Interior /Exterior / Special Coatings / Requirements for As-Built Drawings /
Recommendations for New Building and Major Renovations
4.10 Masonry, Roofing & Waterproofing 4.10-1 to 4.10-10
Standards for Masonry, Roofing and Waterproofing
-Grounds and Building Maintenance
Contacts Index of References Codes and Standards
Review Guidelines Guidelines and Requirements for
Documentation Guidelines for Installation and Performance-
Roofing Guidelines for Installation and Performance-Waterproofing
Guidelines for Protection and Maintenance Design
Guidelines for Safety in Roofing Maintenance Garden or
Landscaping Walls-Exterior Masonry Non-conformance With
Standards Requirements for As-Built Drawings
4.11 Toilet Rooms 4.11-1 to 4.11-5
Standards for Toilet Rooms-Building Services; Grounds and Building
Maintenance Index of References Toilet Rooms
4.12 Waste Removal and Loading Docks 4.12-1 to 4.12-4
Standards for Waste Removal and Loading DocksBuilding Services /
Index of References Guidelines for Installation and Performance / Vehicular Access
4.13 Carpentry Standards 4.13-1 to 4.13-6
Introduction Contacts / Index of References / Code References / Review
Guidelines General / Considerations for Design

Introduction

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual Intro - page 1

The Princeton University Design Standards Manual is a living document established to guide
Design Consultants through many phases of project development. It serves to consolidate and
organize the range of institutional knowledge retained by the University Facilities Department
Staff. It is intended to be updated bi-annually, although more current individual sections or
supplements may be distributed or posted on an as-needed basis. Items in green text represent
these bi-annual updates. In addition, a web-based version of the document is available on the
Princeton University Facilities Department Web Page @
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/.

Compliance with the Princeton University Design Standards Manual is a contractual obligation
of consultants retained under Article VI (j) of the university standard Architect/Engineer Design
Services Contract. Responsibility for any non-compliant design and/or resulting installation falls
within the respective consultants scope of services. It is important that this document be
reviewed, understood and any exceptions noted prior to entering into any such agreements. The
Designer is expected to comprehend all aspects of the standards, including document preparation
and review guidelines covering requirements for all submissions from schematic design through
closeout requirements. In addition, dissemination of all pertinent sections of this manual to sub-
consultants or appropriate members of the project team is the responsibility of the lead consultant
under contract.

Please note that this document is not distributed to contractors. Therefore, items herein
identified as part of Contractor or CM responsibility will only become known when shown on
consultants contract documents. The Designers documents are to include information
pertinent to the contractors scope of work (such as as-built information) so that the standards
may be consistently applied. Therefore, consultants document coordination effort must include
those items in the Princeton University Design Standards Manual that impact a contractors or
CMs ability to conform as well. This requires that consultants include all such contractor
requirements from this manual in respective CSI specification sections and/or Drawings prior to
document release.

The format for all sections contained in the Princeton University Design Standards Manual is
consistently presented for ease of use. In addition to Design and Review Guidelines, each topic
or section contains an introduction, list of internal contacts, appropriate code references, as well
as an appendix of further informational references pertinent to the topic. Access to these
appendices may be achieved through the respective Project Manager or through a web-based
version available on the Princeton University Facilities Department Web Page @
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/dept/design_construction/_pdf/DSM.pdf . Consultants are
encouraged to take advantage of these resources to supplement information found in this manual.

The information contained within the Princeton University Design Standards Manual is not
intended to limit design expression or material selections, but rather guide Designers in ways to
expedite project completion within acceptable university guidelines. Exceptions to any design
standard herein may be openly discussed and modified if the designer obtains written approval
through the Project Manager. This process must be initiated through the Project Manager to
assure proper notification and review, as well as to assure accurate and timely updates to the
Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual Intro - page 2
manual. The use and inclusion of these standards in bid documents does not relieve the
consultant or Architect of the responsibility and legal liability for any bid documents created
from these standards.

Questions regarding content, cost or schedule impact to respective projects are to be directed
through the Project Manager or Facilities Procurement Office before commencement of Design
Services. Additional technical feedback may come from the internal contacts listed in each
section. Any comments or improvements to this manual shall be welcome through these contacts
or the AVP Office of Design and Construction (609) 258-3403. The Princeton University
Design Standards Manual is intended for sole use on Princeton University related buildings and
Facilities Department projects and may not be disseminated for any other purpose.

1.1 University Administrative Departments

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 1.1 Univ Admin - page 1

1. Introduction

Four (4) of Princetons large and diverse group of administrative departments support the
physical needs of the universitys educational mission. They plan, design and care for the
buildings and grounds, house and feed students, and generate the energy that heats, cools and
powers our buildings. Within the Facilities Department, the majority of design team interaction
occurs with the Office of the University Architect, Office of Design and Construction, Facilities
Engineering, Real Estate Development and Grounds and Building Maintenance. These are most
actively involved in development of plant and facility design, construction and preservation.

Although design consultants form a contractual relationship with the Facilities Department, it is
often necessary to incorporate standards from related university administrative clients in the
course of a project. The primary non-Facilities client is often University Services, primarily
consisting of Dining Services, Housing & Real Estate Services, Conference & Event Services
and Parking & Transportation Services.

In addition to Facilities and University Services, The Office of Information Technology (OIT)
and Department of Public Safety (DPS) represent the balance of administrative departments
that maintain design standards in this document. These clients are equal stakeholders in the
planning of each construction or renovation project, although additional administrative
departments may contribute programming needs on an individual basis.

2. Index of References
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/dept/design_construction/

1. Princeton University Campus Directory Information section listing all officers of the
University, annually updated September of each year.

2. Princeton University Facilities website
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/

3. Facilities Department Organization and Function

The Facilities Department responsibilities and staff complement are described below.
All functions are located in MacMillan Building unless noted otherwise.

Depar tments/ F uncti ons

Of f i ce of the V i ce Pr esi dent
The Office of the Vice President provides leadership to the numerous departments that comprise
the entire Facilities Organization. The OVP coordinates efforts across those departments to
ensure that the skills and resources of the Facilities Organization support the University's
academic mission. They also support the sustainability mission of the University as they lead the
effort to steward Princeton's resources in the most efficient and effective manner.

Uni ver si ty A r chi tect
The University Architect provides long-range planning support, including land use, zoning
considerations and regional developments; coordinates and participates in Campus architectural
development. Other services include environmental graphics and landscape design.

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 1.1 Univ Admin- page 2

Of f i ce of Desi gn and Constr ucti on
The Design and Construction Office manages capital projects (whether new construction or
renovations) from design through construction phases. They act as liaison between the
University department sponsoring the project and the rest of the project team, including
designers, subcontractors, and contractors. Other services include coordination of interior design
and furniture planning. (about half located at 200 Elm Drive)

Engi neer i ng Depar tment
The Engineering Department provides a full range of engineering services including the civil,
mechanical, electrical, and environmental disciplines. It also administers utilities and
infrastructure construction projects, operates the utility plants, and drives the Universitys energy
and water conservation programs.
Of f i ce of Sustai nabi l i ty
The Office of Sustainability coordinates and advocates comprehensive sustainability efforts in
university affairs through collaboration with students, faculty, staff, and administrators. The Office
works in close collaboration with the Princeton Sustainability Committee (PSC) and its working
groups to continue developing Princeton's leadership in addressing the intersection of economics,
environment, and culture that defines a sustainable campus. The Office also administers the High
Meadows Foundation sustainability fund which supports the research, education, and civic
engagement components of the Princeton Sustainability Plan.

Gr ounds and Bui l di ng Mai ntenance Depar tment
Grounds and Building Maintenance maintains the buildings, grounds, roads, and utility
distribution systems on the Main and Forrestal Campuses, as well as off-campus graduate
housing, faculty and staff housing, and commercial properties. The department operates a
transportation garage and fire and security alarms systems and provides operational support for
Richardson and Taplin auditoriums.

L i f e Saf ety and Secur i ty Systems
Life Safety & Security Systems (LSSS) oversees the design, management and administration of
the University's campus-wide building access control system (CACS), Fire Systems Management
System (FSMS), Campus Video Management System (CVMS) and the Keyless Locking System
(KLS). LSSS plays a leadership role in the design and implementation of these installations, and
provides project coordination with other university departments and end users. Additionally
LSSS is responsible for the development and dissemination of policies, procedures, code
compliance and practices as it pertains to the use of the systems. LSSS facilitates continued
process improvement through collaboration with all University departments. (main office
located at 306 Alexander Street)

F i nance A dmi ni str ati ve Ser vi ces
Finance and Administrative Services (FAS) provides the Facilities operating departments with
shared services including: budget, finance, materials management, procurement and contract
administration, and support for information technology hardware and enterprise systems,
including space planning and mapping (Archibus), work order and asset management (Maximo)
and construction management (Centric Project and Primavera). FAS also operates the Facilities
Service Center, which provides a central point of contact for the campus community, whether in
person, by phone, email or via the web. The FSC resolves facilities related questions or
problems (including custodial services, repairs, housing, pest control etc.) by direct action or
referral.

Real Estate Devel opment
The Office of Real Estate Development reports to the Vice President for Facilities, and provides
property development and project management services for properties located off-campus. We
seek to leverage our staff through outside partners, and we leverage our real estate assets for their
highest and best uses. We entertain traditional project structures as well as those uniquely
available on a project-by-project basis. Projects range from administrative buildings, to
residential, to multi-user projects.

Bui l di ng Ser vi ces
Building Services provides janitorial and logistical support services to academic, administrative,
and dormitory buildings on both the Main and Forrestal Campuses. Other services include
management of solid waste and recycling stream, replacement of light bulbs up to 10,
extermination services, furniture and equipment moving, maintenance of undergraduate student
laundry rooms, provision of special setups for commencement and other major events, student
storage, warehousing and supply of rental equipment needed for functions and events. (main
office located at 180 Alexander Street)

4. University Services Department Organization and Function

Depar tments/ F uncti ons
Di ni ng Ser vi ces
Dining Services provides food services to the Princeton University community. It operates the
University dining halls and related facilities for students, faculty, staff, and visitors. This
department serves more than 3,000 student contract dinners in addition to operating several
cafeteria facilities that rely mainly on cash business, as well as providing catering services for
special events, luncheons, receptions, and dinners. (main office located at 26 College Road
West)

Housi ng and Real Estate Ser vi ces
With support from the rest of the Facilities organization, the Housing and Real Estate Services
Department handles all aspects of the Universitys housing program. Currently, Princeton
provides housing for over 5000 undergraduates and 1600 graduate students. Housing also
manages several hundred units of faculty and staff housing. The Housing and Real Estate
Services Department is responsible for on-campus dormitories, as well as a diverse stock of
apartment buildings and single family homes. The department provides comprehensive property
management services and monitors the use and condition of University housing facilities and
furnishings, with special emphasis on concern for fire and life safety and sanitation. As such,
Housing and Real Estate Services is a primary stakeholder for all work performed in any
University dormitory or residential rental unit. Work in Princeton Housing units must be
performed according to established protocols for notification and security. (main office located
at New South)

Conf er ence and Event Ser vi ces
Conference and Events Services promotes appropriate use of available University facilities in
periods of lower usage, especially during the summer months. Coordinates conferences and
meetings for official University functions. It administers University policies concerning the use
of University resources by external organizations and groups. Conference and Event Services
assists University departments sponsoring conferences. (main office located at 71 University
Place)

T r anspor tati on and Par ki ng Ser vi ces
Princeton Universitys Transportation & Parking Services provides reliable and safe parking and
transportation services that enhance the quality of life while promoting sustainability,
accessibility and mobility on campus for the Princeton University community. The office is
responsible for all campus transportation and parking operations as well as event parking and
TigerTransit shuttle services. Transportation & Parking Services also provides Transportation
Demand Management (TDM) - reduction of single occupancy vehicle commutes to campus to
the campus community by offering car and van pool, car sharing, mass transit subsidy, and biking
programs. (main office located at New South)

5. Department of Public Safety Organization and Function

The Department of Public Safety is the primary department at the University charged with
creating a safe and secure environment. This task, however, is not one we can accomplish alone.
Our efforts to maintain a safe and secure environment rely on our ability to develop
collaborative relationships with the many communities that make up the University. We believe
that through partnering and problem solving, we can make Princeton one of the safest
universities in the nation. Please refer to Section 2.7

6. Office of Information Technology Organization and Function

The Office of Information Technology OIT has responsibility for overseeing Princetons
academic and administrative systems and the information technology infrastructure that supports
them. We are proud of the fact that Princeton is widely seen as a leader in providing a robust
infrastructure for campus computing and in identifying and deploying new technologies that
enable academic innovation in teaching, learning, research, and scholarship. Please refer to
Sections 2.6 and 4.1

END OF DOCUMENT
R
e
l
e
a
s
e

9
.
0

(
M
a
r
c
h

2
0
1
2
)

P
r
i
n
c
e
t
o
n

U
n
i
v
e
r
s
i
t
y

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s

D
e
p
a
r
t
m
e
n
t

D
e
s
i
g
n

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s

M
a
n
u
a
l

1
.
1

U
n
i
v

A
d
m
i
n
-

p
a
g
e

5

1.2 Sustainable Building Guidelines

Release 8.0 (March 2010) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 1.2 Sustainability - page 1

1. Introduction

One of the Universitys Guiding Principles for Future Expansion, as articulated by the
Administration in 2003, is to build in an environmentally responsible manner - a manner which
is sensitive to geography, sensitive to energy and resource consumption and works to sustain
strong community relations.

These Sustainable Building Guidelines are intended to provide direction and resources for the
sustainable design and construction of new buildings and the comprehensive renewal of existing
buildings for capital projects at Princeton. The requirements of this process are described in this
Section of the Princeton University Design Standards Manual (DSM), which complements other
Sections containing requirements particular to specific building programs or systems. These
Guidelines are summarized as follows:

1. Set goals and benchmarks for each project.
2. Conduct site survey and evaluation of existing conditions.
3. Model various methods of meeting goals and benchmarks and use results to make
decisions.
4. Repeat the modeling and analysis as the design is developed to refine decisions.
5. Review and monitor the expected outcome during documentation and construction.
6. Measure outcome to determine success, and establish benchmarks for future projects.

By employing Life-Cycle Cost Analysis and Social and Environmental Impact Assessment the
University is better equipped to make informed decisions regarding expenditures of resources.

These Guidelines describe a process to be implemented along with the requirements of the
Energy Guidelines found in Section 3.3 of the DSM. Many of the Life-Cycle Analyses will draw
on data and analyses conducted in response to the Energy Guidelines. The Office of Design and
Construction and Office of Sustainability are resources for both consultation on sustainable
project planning as well as current initiatives underway on campus.

The LCCA process is applicable to projects of all sizes. However, for small scale renovation
projects with existing envelopes, and predetermined HVAC system selections, a shortened
version of this LCCA approach is appropriate. On these small scale projects, the Project
Manager will assist in determining the limits of the LCCA to apply to the project.

In addition, new construction and major renovation projects will benchmark against the
equivalent to a LEED silver rating, exclusive of certification. The University will determine if
formal project certification will be sought.

2. Contacts

A. The Project Manager (in Office of Design and Construction, the Engineering Department,
Grounds and Building Maintenance, the Construction Office, or as applicable)

B. Program Manager for Standards MacMillan Building, 609-258-1330

C. Director of Facilities Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5472

D. Facilities Sustainability Manager MacMillan Building, 609-258-1518

E. Institution Recycling Network (IRN) http://ir-network.com/
PDF MS Word MS Excel
A Social and Environmental
Impact Assessment
Considerations
Appendix 1.2-2
B Cost Components of Life-
Cycle Cost Analysis
Appendix 1.2-3

C Building Component Useful
Life Data
Appendix 1.2-4

D Life-Cycle Comparative
Studies Worksheet
Appendix 1.2-5 Appendix 1.2-5
E Commissioning Process Appendix 3.3-3 Appendix 3.3-3
F Outline of MEP Design
Intent
G MEP Basis of Design Appendix 3.3-5 Appendix 3.3-5
H Final Commissioning Report Appendix 3.3-6 Appendix 3.3-6
I Index of MEP Prefunctional
Tests
J Index of MEP Functional
Tests
K Index of Commissioning
Specifications

L Sample of High-Performance
Systems Matrix
Appendix 3.3-10

4. Outline of Process

A. Integrated Design

Building in a sustainable manner requires consideration of the network of complex systems as
well as the individual systems through an integrated design process. The Project Team will be
defined at the outset of each project, and will include university representatives for the
client/user, the Facilities Project Manager, the Office of Sustainability, the Office of the
University Architect, the Design Team, and the Construction Manager. The Design Team will be
comprised of all of the project design consultants including the architect, civil, structural and
building systems engineers, the landscape architect, and any specialized consultants. All of the
members of the Project Team must collaborate to find the beneficial relationships among site and
building systems that result in an environmentally sustainable outcome in support of the
program. The Design Team must be committed to working through a collaborative process to
learn new ways of considering these systems.

In addition, new construction and major renovation projects will benchmark against the
equivalent to a LEED silver rating, exclusive of certification. The University will determine if
formal project certification will be sought.

B. Organizational Meetings

In order to work collaboratively as a Project Team, the Design Team will plan and facilitate
workshops and meetings with university representatives specifically to further the integrated
design process:

1. Sustainability Charrette Planning Meeting: During the Pre-Schematic Design
phases (Scoping / Feasibility / Programming) the Project Team will meet with the
University to discuss the format of the Charrette. The University will lead off the
meeting with a more global view of campus goals and expectations. The University
can also lend support to the design team discussing what has been learned from
previous projects.
2. Sustainability Charrette: During the Pre-Schematic Design phases the Project Team
will meet to establish goals and objectives with respect to sustainable building design,
benchmarking and metrics. Ideally this will be done as part of a broader agenda
focused on overall project goals including program, campus planning and project-
budgeting. If those goals have already been set, a meeting focusing specifically on
sustainable design objectives which are mutually supportive of other project goals will
be conducted
3. Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) Workshop: During the Pre-Schematic Design
phases, after the Sustainability Charrette, the Project Team will hold an LCCA
Workshop. While the Sustainability Charrette will set project intentions and outcome,
the LCCA Workshop begins to set focus on the specific paths to those outcomes. The
intent of this workshop is for the Design Team to identify the study categories
recommended for LCCA, the method(s) of analysis proposed, the social and
environmental impacts proposed for evaluation in conjunction with the Life Cycle
Cost Analysis (LCCA), and to confirm project parameters and data, including that
required to be provided by Princeton. The LCCA Workshop must occur after the
Sustainability Charrette in order for the Design Team to make recommendations in
support of the Project Sustainability Goals.
4. Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) Reviews: During Schematic Design the Project
Team will meet to review the initial findings of the LCCA studies. The Design Team
will prepare the analysis to compare alternatives. The purpose of the review is to
enable the Project Team to make decisions based on the Project Sustainability Goals.
This process will be repeated before the conclusion of Design Development.
5. Sustainability Charrette Recap: At each design milestone the Project team will
meet with the University to discuss the project sustainability goals and ongoing
reports.
6. Construction Meetings: During the Pre-Bid meeting, the Facilities PM and the
Design Team will convey project sustainability objectives to bidders. Requirements
will be reviewed again at the Pre-Construction meeting and at Pre-Installations
meetings for relevant trades.

C. Required Documentation

Following is a summary of documentation requirements for the sustainable design and Life-
Cycle Comparative Studies (LCCA) process:

PS-5
1. Record of Initial Project Sustainability Goals from the Sustainability Charrette, including
benchmarking objectives and metrics (including the LEED checklist). Include in the project
Scoping, Programming or Feasibility Study Report as required.
2. Project Sustainability Goals Ongoing Report to be delivered at SD, DD 50% and 85%
review. Overview of how the projects is tracking towards its sustainability goals
o Overall Goals notated with what the project is tracking towards and or achieving
o Projected Energy Usage
o LCCA Reports (including final decisions with VE notations if applicable)
o LEED checklists
o Stormwater Goals
3. Record of Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) categories selected, including social and
environmental impacts, project parameters and data Include in the project Scoping,
Programming or Feasibility Study Report as required.
4. Record of largest energy impacts & priorities based on preliminary energy model in
conjunction with the MEP Design Intent document. Refer to Appendix 3.3-4 for MEP
Design Intent documentation requirements.
5. Record of the initial LCCA results in a format as outlined in Appendix 1.2-5 (Sample Life-
Cycle Cost Analysis Comparative Studies) in conjunction with the MEP Design Intent
document submitted at the conclusion of Schematic Design. Refer to Appendix 3.3-4 for
MEP Design Intent documentation requirements.
6. Record of the refined LCCA results in a format as outlined in Appendix 1.2-5 (Sample Life-
Cycle Cost Analysis Comparative Studies) in conjunction with the MEP Basis of Design
document submitted at the conclusion of Design Development. Refer to Appendix 3.3-5 for
MEP Basis of Design documentation requirements.
7. Final Energy Model report see Appendices 3.3-12 through 3.3-19.
8. Records of the Pre-Bid, Pre-Construction and Pre-Installation meetings to be included in
minutes or reports of those sessions.
9. Final Sustainability Report

CO-8
Pre-Schematic Design:
Activity Schedule Goals Design Team Responsibilities

Sustainability
Charrette
During pre-schematic
design
Identify project sustainability goals,
benchmarking and metrics
Submit report summarizing overall
goals with status, projected energy
usage, LCCA reports, LEED checklists,
stormwater goals.
Massing Energy
Model
design
Develop a preliminary energy model
based on conceptual massing. Use
ASHRAE maximum allowable lighting,
envelope, and HVAC parameters. Use the
energy model to identify target areas for
energy savings.
LCCA Workshop
design after
development of
Massing Energy
Model

Identify group of energy efficiency
measures to study.
Conceptual
Envelope
Workshop
design after
development of
Massing Energy
Model

Identify basic envelope strategy and peak
heating and cooling load targets, as per
Envelope Design Guidelines.

Schematic Design:


LCCA
Review 1
Beginning of
schematic design

Review energy efficiency measures /
materials selections to develop during
schematic design.

Submit LCCA studies including
complete Excel files
Envelope Review 1
100% schematic
design
Demonstrate prescriptive or trade-off
envelope compliance. Review daylighting
strategy, perimeter thermal comfort,
and perimeter HVAC strategy.
Submit Preliminary COMcheck report.
SD Energy Model
100% schematic
design
Develop ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Appendix G
compliant model with all three baselines. If
lighting is not designed yet, set targets for
lighting power densities.
Submit input/output spreadsheet with
zoning diagram.
Daylight Review 1
100% schematic
design
Glazing factor calculation for typical rooms.
Submit glazing factor calculation
spreadsheet OR report of results from
daylight model.

Energy /
Commissioning
100% schematic
design

Identify and prioritize largest project
energy impacts
Submit preliminary Commissioning Plan
and MEP Design Intent
Sustainability
100% schematic
design

Track performance from set pre-schematic
goals.
Submit report summarizing overall goals
with status, projected energy usage,
LCCA reports, LEED checklists,
stormwater goals.

SD-15
SD-16
SD-24
SD-27
PS-5
PS-9
PS-8

Design Development:


LCCA
Review 2
Beginning of
design
development

Review energy efficiency measures /
materials selections to develop during
schematic design.
Submit LCCA studies including complete
Excel files
Envelope Review 2
100% design
development
strategy, perimeter thermal comfort, and
perimeter HVAC strategy.

Submit updated COMcheck report.
DD Energy Model
50% design
development
compliant model with all three baselines.
Check progress against energy targets.
Test any additional measures identified in
LCCA Review 2. Test a minimum of six
energy efficiency measures individually.
Submit updated input/output spreadsheet
with zoning diagram.
Daylight Review 2
100% design
development
Glazing factor calculation for typical rooms
OR daylight simulation.
Submit updated glazing factor calculation
daylight model.

Energy /
Commissioning
100% design
development
Identify and prioritize largest project energy
impacts
Submit updated Commissioning Plan and
MEP Basis of Design
Sustainability
100% design
development

goals.
with status, projected energy usage, LCCA
reports, LEED checklists, stormwater
goals.

Construction Documents:
CD Energy Model 1
Beginning of
construction
documents
Develop ASHRAE 90.1-2007Appendix G
compliant model with all three baselines. Check
progress against energy targets. Model only what
has been kept in the design after any value
engineering exercises.
CD Energy Model 2
85% construction
documents
Develop ASHRAE 90.1-2007Appendix G
compliant model with all three baselines with no
approximated values.
Submit updated COMcheck report, zoning
diagram, input/output spreadsheet, fan
power spreadsheet, glazing factor
calculation spreadsheet and final energy
modeling report.
Energy /
Commissioning
50% construction
documents
Document and track project energy impacts
Submit project specification and list of
equipment to be commissioned.
85% construction
documents
Document and track project energy impacts
Submit list of pre-functional and functional
tests
Sustainability
50% construction
documents

goals.
with status, projected energy usage,
LCCAreports, LEED checklists, stormwater
goals.
85% construction
documents

DD-7
DD-8
DD-23
CD-14
5. Life-Cycle Cost Analysis

In adopting Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) as part of a process of sustainable design and
construction, Princeton establishes the life-cycle cost of a building element or system as a unit of
measure for decision-making. LCCA requires that the Project Team consider not only the initial
construction costs of a building system, but also the long-term costs including utilities,
operations and maintenance and, ultimately, disposal or re-use.

The primary goal of implementing this approach is to create transparency in the design and
decision-making process so that decisions are made considering whole life-cycle implications of
a project. Cost-effective solutions are not inherently sustainable solutions, but decisions based
on an understanding of economic performance, when considered in conjunction with social and
environmental performance, will result in effective and efficient choices of the greatest value to
the University.

Princeton University Standards and Metrics have been established for use in Life-Cycle Cost
Analysis. The utilization of these standards is critical to ensure that there is consistency and
comparability of life-cycle data across projects as well as to inform decision-making in future
projects.

LCCA Process / Procedural Guidelines
The primary method of Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) will be a comparison between two or
more alternatives for each of the topics identified for study during the LCCA Workshop. The
alternatives should be viable options under consideration for the project.

Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) will be formally documented and reviewed twice during the
design process, in the Schematic Design and Design Development phases. However, the
principles and knowledge gained by these studies are applicable at any stage in the design
process. The Project Team will work together in the preliminary design stages to lay out the
schedule and study categories to maximize the value of these studies for each specific project.

Project Benchmarking
As part of the sustainable design process, the Project Team will establish the performance of
other industry or University projects as benchmarks against which to compare the present project.
time, these performance benchmarks will establish a broad basis of comparison for new work.
Project LCCA documentation to be stored on the project Centric Project page.

Study Categories
The following building systems shall serve as the basis for the selection of the LCC studies:
1. Energy Systems
2. Electrical Systems
3. Building Envelope
4. Siting / Massing Strategies
5. Structural Systems
6. Mechanical Systems
7. Water Systems
8. Interior Materials

Six (6) or more Life-Cycle Cost Analyses are required at both the Schematic Design and Design
Development phases. At least one (1) of these studies shall be within the Building Envelope
category, one (1) within the Energy Systems category, and one (1) from the Interior Materials
category. No more than three (3) of the studies shall be conducted within a single study category.

The LCCA of interior materials is of particular interest to the University as they represent a
widely expanding area of building and finish components and play a significant role in the
overall sustainable characteristics and performance of the project. Designers are encouraged to
explore and study and report on the cost-effectiveness of materials within this category.

Certain study categories may be more relevant to particular building types or projects and
project-specific priorities will be established at the initial LCCA Workshop in the Pre-Schematic
Design phase. However, the above study categories/ building systems do not operate in isolation.
The energy model and Life-Cycle Cost Analyses shall be developed with an understanding and
acknowledgement of the inter-relationship of building systems on the life-cycle costs and impacts
of the project.

Energy Modeling and Design Tools
Energy modeling is a prerequisite to conducting the Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA)
component of the comparative studies. A preliminary energy model will be developed in the
Schematic Design phase in order to identify and document the largest energy impacts of the
project. Refer to Appendix 3.3-5 (MEP Basis of Design). The energy model will also serve as the
platform from which to analyze energy consumption rates of the alternate options in both the
Schematic and Design Development phases. The energy model will continue to be refined
throughout the design phases. A final run of the model incorporating the selected LCCA
elements will be performed and documented prior to the conclusion of Construction
Documentation phase.

CO
2
Tax
There may be added future cost for electric power due to potential government mandated CO2
emissions reduction legislation. Therefore, a CO2 tax shall be included in the energy analysis
to account for these anticipated costs. This tax represents the monetary value on the
environmental impact of foregoing a proposed supplemental conservation effort to the project.
Standard cost information, including utility costs, maintenance costs and building components as
well as CO2 tax for use in the LCCA studies is included in Appendix 1.2-3 (Cost Components of
Life-Cycle Cost Analysis) for this data.

Social and Environmental Impact Assessment
Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) does not directly address the social and environmental life-
cycle impacts of design alternatives. These costs and benefits should be presented and evaluated
in conjunction with the results of the LCCA studies performed. While tools are available to
assist the Project Team in conducting this analysis, it is ultimately up to the Project Team to
determine the method of assessment most compatible with project objectives. See Appendix
1.2-2 for a list of considerations for social and environmental impact assessment. This list is not
intended to be all-inclusive, but to highlight anticipated issues for review and discussion.

Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) information shall be presented in conjunction with social and
environmental impacts to facilitate decision-making. The University standard deliverable of this
format is illustrated in Appendix 1.2-5 (Life-Cycle Comparative Study Worksheet).

6. LEED Rating System

While the University may not require certification, an annotated LEED checklist is to be
provided with sufficient back up documentation as required for specific credits. This is to ensure
compliance with credit requirements.

7. Materials Selection

Conscientious design is the first step towards controlling the generation of solid waste on a
building project. Effective design-stage waste reduction strategies include existing building
reuse, optimization of building program, envelope and systems energy efficiency, the use of
alternative building materials (salvaged, recycled content and rapidly renewable materials),
detailing and dimensioning to limit material waste, proper planning for the storage and collection
of recyclables, and sustainability-oriented design specification language and contractor
requirements.

Durability, maintenance and aesthetics are the primary criteria for materials selection. Over its
history, Princeton has developed a number of materials standards which can be referenced
throughout the pertinent sections of the Princeton University Design Standards Manual. These
standards have been developed based on a materials proven ability to meet the programmatic,
maintenance and aesthetic performance goals of the University through the test of time and use.

Changing technologies have resulted in a wealth of new materials on the market and the potential
for their application in Princeton building projects is encouraged provided adequate evaluation of
the primary criteria cited above. Where identified as critical to the support of project goals and
objectives, a Life-Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) of a newly proposed material (in comparison to
an existing material standard or precedent) may serve as the basis of this evaluation. Evaluation
of the life cycle cost implications of any suggested new material is recommended when not
specifically identified for evaluation through the LCCA process or on small-scale projects. The
social and environmental impacts of proposed materials selection should also be included in this
evaluation. Refer to Section 1.2 (7. Social and Environmental Impact Assessment) for a selected
list of potential criteria. Please note that pertinent criteria for materials selection are cited under
this subtitle and the other subtitles of section 1.2.7, such as reduction of heat island effects
through the selection of high-reflectance, high-emissivity roofing materials listed under Land
Use, Water and Ecosystem Quality.

There is ample opportunity with the campus small projects to make conscientious design
decisions pertinent to material selections. Design teams should submit selections/studies to the
Project Team for consideration.

8. Waste Management

Design Specifications and Construction Waste Management
Establishing waste reduction goals and implementing cost-effective Construction Waste
Management techniques can significantly reduce environmental impact and provide economic
CD-1
advantages for projects of all types and scales. Currently, the Universitys established goal is for
the recycling of 95% of all eligible materials post-abatement.

Project specifications shall require the contractor to submit a Construction & Demolition Waste
Management Plan for approval by the University at the beginning of the submittal and review
period (or earlier when applicable). This plan must include but is not limited to:
- Analysis of the proposed job site waste to be generated, including the types of recyclable and
waste materials generated (by volume or weight).
- A list of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled during the Project
- A list of proposed recycling facilities to be used in the project
- An outline of proposed Project Waste Management meetings (At a minimum, waste
management goals and issues shall be discussed at the Pre-bid meeting, Pre-construction
meeting and regular jobsite meetings).
- Materials Handling Procedures for removal, separation, storage, and transportation.
- A Communication Plan for informing subcontractors and crews about the Waste Management
Plan, establishing job-site instruction, notification and signage procedures for waste management
and providing a methodology for documenting and reporting quantities and types of materials
reused, salvaged, recycled, and disposed.
- Proof of distribution times, weights, etc from trucks removing debris from the project site

9. Site Planning

The campus master plan speaks to both campus-wide and neighborhood-specific strategies for
- utility distribution
- stormwater management
- energy efficiency goals/targets
- sustainable landscape strategies and planting materials
- paving materials
- exterior lighting plan
- transportation & parking plan
- potable water use plan

A significant percentage of exterior site work on campus is associated with capital projects.
Design teams are thus encouraged to select Life-Cycle Cost Analyses(LCCA) that are both
appropriate to project specific goals and might contribute to the overall implementation of the
Campus Plan.

The greatest potential for understanding and managing the environmental impacts of a project is
through early and multi-disciplinary consideration of site selection criteria, building siting,
orientation and massing, water usage, stormwater management and landscaping strategies The
Sustainability Charrette (to be conducted during the Pre-Schematic phases) and the Life-Cycle
Cost Analysis (LCCA) process are intended to ensure that these critical issues are addressed by
the design team in a timely and holistic manner (Refer to Section 1.2.4 Outline of Process).

END OF DOCUMENT

PS-5
1.3 Project Responsibility Checklist

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 1.3 Proj Checklist page 1

1. I ntroducti on

The project responsibility checklist is intended to assist Project Managers in developing
consistent approaches to respective phases of every project. Although not every task herein is
listed or necessary, the overall method of project delivery commonly follows this format and
serves as the Universitys standard. Dates are to be inserted by the Project Manager as each task
is completed by the University or A/E. Shaded areas indicate the responsible party. Please note
that many tasks have a dual responsibility between the University and A/E. The following
symbol will be used as a cross reference throughout the manual noting the respective item
number within the checklist:

List of Acronyms Used
BIM Building Information Management
DCA Department of Community Affairs
EHS Environmental Health and Safety
FPG Facilities Planning Group
FPO Facilities Procurement Office
GIS Geographic Information Systems
LCCA Life Cycle Cost Analysis
PACA President's Advisory Committee on Architecture
PMG Project Management Group
PRPB Princeton Regional Planning Board
SPMIS Space & Property Management Information Systems

Tasks During A/E Pre-Contractual Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
Item # Task Description A&E P.U. N/A
PC-1
Establish pertinent project control numbers

* Department project number

* Contract Administration Office

* Account / Grant #

PC-2 Notice to Proceed Letter through FPO

PC-3
Determine Basis of Service: A/E

* Basic Service Agreements
* Designated Services Agreements

PC-4
Ascertain method contemplated for award of construction
contract:
* Competitive / Non-Competitive
* Lump Sum / Fixed Price
* Time and Materials

PC-5 Review Program requirements with University for completeness
and suitability; review development density and building scale
proposed

PC-6
Review the relationship of project to Campus Master Plan with
OUA. Outline the Campus Plan goals for the Project and review
the relevant technical appendices with the design team.

#AA-00

A&E P.U. N/A
PC-7
Include sustainability in Scope of Work; outline preliminary
sustainability goals and targets (refer to Section 1.2)

PC-8
Determine University's time schedule for contracting,
construction and occupancy

PC-9
Determine if cost estimating is required (Reference A/E Contract
Article VII (d), (8,9))

Cost estimate is to be provided by:
1. A/E
2. CM
3. Independent
4. Not provided

PC-10
Assign an LCCA benchmark budget for the project and include
in Capital Planning Process (refer to Section 1.2)

PC-11
Design Services (See "Fee Proposal Budget Outline" attached to
the end of this section)

PC-12 Pre-contractual review meeting for items 1-11

PC-13
University to reserve the right to review all sub-consultant
agreements (non-proprietary design, etc)

PC-14 Discuss billing format; shall agree with A/E contract

PC-15
Meet with Facilities Procurement Office to discuss A/E
agreement, including:

a. Standard University General Conditions
b. Princeton University Facilities Design Standards Manual

c. Standard University Professional Services Agreement (as
applicable)

d. Project Description
e. Requirement for BIM as part of design documentation
f. Other

PC-16 Establish authorized signature for party signing

PC-17 Complete execution of A/E Agreement, including contract date

PC-18 Discuss Schedule, cost and need for existing condition survey

PC-19
Discuss role that Construction Manager may play in survey prior
to schematic design phase


A&E P.U. N/A
PC-20 Initiate project Programming Book to include:
1. Approval Sheet
2. Project Data Sheet
3. Executive Summary
4. Value Proposition
5. Existing Conditions Assessment
6. Program
7. Budget
8. Schedule
9. Project Team and Responsibility Matrix
10. Contracts
11. Regulatory Issues
12. Risk Management
13. Appendix
Tasks During Pre-Schematic Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
PS-1
Review and agree upon budget parameters with respect to any
proposed concept designs

PS-2 Meet with Accessibility Review Committee to discuss
requirements for Accessibility Programming Document

PS-3
Review site sustainability issues in relation to campus master
plan

PS-4
Coordinate parking impacts of projects, including department
relocations with OUA.

PS-5
Sustainability Charrette: Project Team education and goal-
setting

* review site sustainability issues in relation to campus master
plan, including stormwater management strategies
* explore options with respect to life cycle implications

* meet with Facilities Sustainability Manager to discuss
sustainability issues for project

* consider siting, orientation and design parameters/
assumptions

* determine Project Sustainability Goals and targets to include
in program (refer to Section 1.2)

PS-6 Record of Project Sustainability Goals (Section 1.2), Daylighting
Coverage Goals and Energy End-Use Targets (Section 3.3)

PS-7 High-Performance Systems Matrix (refer to Section 3.3)

PS-8 Conceptual Envelope Workshop (refer to section 3.3)
* Identify Solar Transmission & Envelope Heat Gain Limits
* Identify preliminary envelope and systems strategies

PS-9
LCCA workshop to determine which LCCA study categories
might render the highest cost benefit for the project; verify LCCA
parameters

PS-10
Record LCCA study categories selected and benchmark
assumptions to be used

A&E P.U. N/A
PS-11

Review University commissioning process and commissioning
goals (refer to Section 3.13)

PS-12
Meet with Facilities Engineering Department to review project
utility interconnects and regional campus MEP parameters,
including OIT (refer to Section 3.6) Assess the opportunity to
bury overhead utility wires with OUA.

PS-13
Meet with University Energy Plant Manager to ascertain the
anticipated utility demands (refer to Sections 3.3 and 3.9)

PS-14 Confirm Property ownership

PS-15
Consult with PM and University Code Analyst and OUA to
determine needs for site plan and zoning approvals (refer to
Section 1.4)

PS-16
Review need to discuss zoning issue with OUA, University Land
Use Attorney and consulting Civil Engineer

PS-17
Meet with University Code Analyst to ascertain local / state
project review jurisdictional issues (refer to Section 1.4)

PS-18
If classroom design is contemplated, meet with PM and
University Registrar to gain oversight during programming (refer
to Section 2.3)

PS-19
For existing structures, determine information and resources
required for a comprehensive building survey.

PS-20
If dormitory design is contemplated, meet with PM and University
Housing Office to ascertain program review committee
constituency (refer to Sections 2.4 and 2.11)

PS-21
Meet with Associate Director of the Department of Public Safety
to determine level of security assigned to project (refer to
Section 2.7)

PS-22
Meet with University Coordinating Architect to determine the
need for LCC and LPC reviews. Schedule reviews at each
design milestone if necessary. (refer to Section 2.9)

PS-23
Meet with University Code Analyst to define code strategies and
discuss ADA and NJ barrier-free code interpretations affecting
the project (refer to Section 3.1)

PS-24 Meet with Accessibility Review Committee to review final
Accessibility Programming Document

PS-25
Meet with University Code Analyst to determine code strategies
and discuss fire alarm / fire suppression code interpretations
affecting the project

PS-26
Meet with Manager of Facilities Mechanical & Electrical
Engineers to ascertain types of MEP systems to be installed
(refer to Sections 3.10, 3.11, 3.12)

PS-27
Meet with EHS to review hazardous materials and environmental
modeling requirements. Baseline radon level testing needs to be
recorded and submitted for any project disturbing basement slab
or slab on grade conditions (new projects and renovations)


A&E P.U. N/A
PS-28
Meet with SPMIS for archived drawings requirements to be used
as background

PS-29
Coordinate with OUA on need for vehicular traffic analysis
around proposed site, including deliveries, accessibility
requirements, university grounds vehicular access, etc (refer to
Sections 2.9 and 4.12)

PS-30
Discuss collateral programming and site issues that relate to
adjacent buildings with OUA

PS-31
Assist University with selection of CM

* Assist with preparation of project description and schedule

* Schedule and attend CM interviews as applicable

* Assist with reference checks

PS-32 Initiate CM pre-construction services contract

PS-33
Initiate set-up of "Centric Project" website collaboration tool and
verify training on procedures and requirements with project team

PS-34
Confirm that Program requirements have been completed and
reviewed with the end user

PS-35
Coordinate any requirements for renderings and fundraising
documentation with University Development Office
Representative and OUA

Tasks During Schematic Design Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
SD-1
Update Programming Book

SD-2
Project Meetings to determine / refine program and sustainability
goals with:

* End User
* Building Services
* Engineering

* Grounds and Building Maintenance

* Administrative Representative

* Dining Services
* EHS

* Public Safety
* OUA
* Others

SD-3
Establish Project Schedule, including completion dates for each
phase. Provide to owner and consultants

SD-4
Review requirements for site analysis test pits and testing (such
as borings, perc tests, etc.) necessary for proper execution of
site work and request such information from the University.
Assist University in securing proposals for this work.

SD-5
Review site survey including building, mechanical, electrical and
structural surveys

A&E P.U. N/A
SD-6
Review all data supplied, including program, budget, legal, site,
code, space and special owner requirements. Record all data.
Verify design complies with established requirements.

SD-7 Prepare functional space diagrams

SD-8
Meet with Facilities Engineering to gather load and performance
data associated with proposed MEP systems

SD-9 Prepare basic design documents to include:
* Site plan with diagrammatic indicators showing relationships
* Vertical sections through the site as required
* Principal floor plans
* General descriptive views
* Illustrative sketches, models or renderings as required
(Reference A/E Contract Article VII (b))

SD-10
In coordination with OUA, assemble Site Plan approval
documentation, including traffic and parking analysis, in
accordance with PRBP requirements per University Land Use
Attorney's recommendations

SD-11
Meet with Asst Manager for SPMIS to review methodology for
calculating net and gross areas/ ratios in conformance with
University requirements

SD-12 Meet with Asst Manager for SPMIS to review CAD quality
assurance

SD-13
Prepare general description of the project and construction and
equipment outlines

SD-14 Preliminary Energy Cost Budget Model (see section 3.3)

SD-15
Envelope Review 1 - identify and prioritize the largest project
energy impacts

SD-16 Perform preliminary LCCA comparative studies

SD-17
LCCA Review 1 of initial comparative study results; select
appropriate LCCA elements to incorporate into the project

SD-18
Record of LCCA Review 1 - include updated project schedule
and budget with incorporated LCCA elements (see Section 1.2)

SD-19 Submit Statement of Design Criteria to University for review and
comment to clarify expectation of deliverables
* Schematic Design documents
* A/E Building requirements
* Program data
* Other

SD-20
Calculate areas and volumes and analyze plan efficiency of the
design by usable area, area per person or other method; review
programmatic/ performance assumptions to look for
opportunities for shared spaces, volume reduction, increased
space efficiency, material use and reduction, optimization of
water and energy use

SD-21 If CM is on board, start preparing cost estimates


A&E P.U. N/A
SD-22
Prepare Schematic Design documents in conformance with PU
Facilities Department Design Standards Manual (latest Release)
and the phased submission requirements listed within each
respective section.

SD-23
Submit Schematic Design documents (drawings, descriptions,
calculations, outlines and statements of probable construction
cost) to University, post to Centric

SD-24
Submit preliminary Commissioning Plan and MEP Design Intent
(see Section 3.13)

SD-25 Submit civil drawings to stormwater management consultant for
review and comment

SD-26 Meet with LCC to discuss landscape and stormwater design.

SD-27 Sustainability strategy and progress update.

SD-28 Meet with Life Safety and Security Systems to develop Security
Programming Document

SD-29
Submit documentation that major system equipment has
adequate space allotments in all major MEP spaces

SD-30
Discuss need for PMG meeting with Executive Sponsor and
User to review project status, scope, unreconciled budget items,
schedule, etc.

SD-31
Review and update schedule of completion dates for this and all
subsequent phases

SD-32
FPG Committee meeting to discuss schematic presentation and
authorization to proceed to Design Development

SD-33
Provide documentation for trustee approval prior to proceeding
to Design Development phase

Tasks Prior to Starting Design Development Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
SD-34
Update Programming Book

SD-35
Review need for special consultants and confirm that schedule
and budget is met

SD-36
Update list of owner-supplied or existing owner equipment and
respective utility requirements to be transferred into new facility

SD-37 Confirm all systems requiring owner-supplier labor

SD-38
Meet with Asst Manager for SPMIS and Architectural Engineer
for Standards to discuss room numbering strategies

Tasks During Design Development Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
DD-1
Discuss need for any phasing of project and site logistics; review
project schedule to ensure/ include adequate time for
sustainability activities (construction monitoring, commissioning,
other documentation, training)

A&E P.U. N/A
DD-2 "Pre-meeting" to review DCA code issues with University Code
Analyst, review Project Code Checklist

DD-3 Prepare cover sheet to include site/ location plan as well as:

* Index of drawings

* Directory of consultants with contact information

* Building data

* Applicable code summary data

DD-4
In coordination with OUA, assemble/submit site plan approval
documentation in accordance with PRPB requirements per
University Land Use Attorney's recommendations, including
traffic and parking analysis

DD-5
Prepare site/ location plan indicating building locations and
extent of site improvements

DD-6 Refine / develop LCCA comparative studies

DD-7 Envelope Review 2 (see Section 1.2)

DD-8
LCCA Review 2 - verify alignment with Project Sustainability
Goals and benchmarks

DD-9
Record of LCCA Review 2, include updated project schedule
and budget

DD-10 Submit net and gross area and volume calculations

DD-11 Prepare preliminary draft of the Project Manual. Have
consultants prepare their portions and coordinate. Identify
sustainable strategies / LCCA elements that require
coordination/ development in specifications. Solicit CM input for
opportunities in construction and delivery of sustainability issues

DD-12
Prepare area calculations (net and gross) and volume
calculations with keyed floor plans

DD-13
Confirm front-end documents are coordinated with University's
respective standard construction agreements, Standard General
Conditions and Facilities Design Standards Manual. Be sure to
include the standard University specifications for the following
topics:

* Elevators

* Fire Alarms
* Commissioning

DD-14
Provide timely and coordinated responses to all DD review
comments prior to submission of all future Construction
Documents.

DD-15
Identification of alternates generated in review of 100% DD
documents.

DD-16
Review of unreconciled budget items in submissions from
Construction Manager and Independent Estimator. Attend
Budget Reconciliation meeting with CM.

DD-17
Committee meeting to discuss DD presentation and
authorization to proceed to construction documentation phase

A&E P.U. N/A
DD-18 Determine schedule for Owner's pre-purchased items

DD-19 Site Logistics meeting

DD-20
Confirm Discipline Review meetings have been completed for
Schematic and Design Development Phases

DD-21
Submit civil drawings to stormwater management consultant for
review and comment

DD-22 Meet with LCC to discuss landscape and stormwater design.

DD-23 Sustainability strategy and progress update

DD-24
Submit final MEP "Basis of Design" Document and updated
Commissioning Plan (see Section 3.13)

DD-25
Discuss need for PMG meeting with Executive Sponsor and
User to review project status, scope, unreconciled budget items,
schedule, etc.

DD-26
authorization to proceed to Construction Documentation

Tasks Prior to Starting Construction Document Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
DD-27 Complete Program Book

DD-28
Review the project program and verify compliance with the
design documents

DD-29
Review scope of items to be provided by owner or otherwise not
included in construction documents

DD-30
Review Princeton University's instructions regarding issuance of
bonds, construction agreement and bid procedures

DD-31
Review Princeton University's General Terms and Conditions for
all construction contracts as they relate to the project-specific
general requirements

DD-32
Meet with University SPMIS Administrator to ascertain all CAD
documentation procedures prior to initiation of CDs

Tasks During Construction Document Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
CD-1
Prepare 50% CDs in conformance with PU Facilities Department
Design Standards Manual (latest Release) and the phased
submission requirements listed within each respective section

* Waste Management Plan
* Site Protection / Health & Safety Plan

* List of equipment to be commissioned and commissioning
specifications

* Final Energy Cost Budget Model

CD-2
Submit 50% CDs to Project Manager for University Tech Teams
and post on Centric Projects

A&E P.U. N/A
CD-3
Attend all 50% CD Tech Team review meetings and record all
minutes and review commentary

CD-4
Provide timely and coordinated responses to all CD review
comments prior to submission of all future documentation

CD-5
Identification of add/ deduct alternates generated in review of
50% Construction Documents

CD-6
Budget Reconciliation meeting with CM

CD-7
Discuss need for PMG meeting with Executive Sponsor and User
to review project status, scope, unreconciled budget items,
schedule, etc. after 50% CD milestone

CD-8 Coordination of anticipated site logistics planning

CD-9
Prepare 85% CDs in conformance with PU Facilities Department
Design Standards Manual (latest Release) and the phased
submission requirements listed within each respective section.
Provide list of pre-functional and functional commissioning tests
to be performed (see Appendices 3.3-7 and 3.3-8)

CD-10
Submit 85% CDs to Project Manager for University Tech Teams
and post on Centric Projects

CD-11
Attend all 85% CD Tech Team review meetings and record all
minutes and review commentary

CD-12
Submit civil drawings to stormwater management consultant for
review and comment

CD-13 Meet with LCC to discuss landscape and stormwater design

CD-14 Sustainability strategy and progress update

CD-15
Provide timely and coordinated responses to all CD review
comments prior to submission of all future documentation

CD-16
Identification of add/ deduct alternates generated in review of
85% Construction Documents

CD-17
Budget Reconciliation meeting with CM

CD-18
Attend all Value Engineering meetings to assist in budget
reconciliation

CD-19
Review Contractor's temporary power requirements for
coordination with university Engineering Department

CD-20 Determine alternates to be documented and priced

CD-21 Review list of potential sub-contractors for project

CD-22 Prepare documents for filing of permits and approvals

A&E P.U. N/A
CD-23 Coordination of final Project Manual

CD-24
Discuss need for PMG meeting with Executive Sponsor and User
to review project status, scope, unreconciled budget items,
schedule, etc.

CD-25
authorization to proceed to Bidding & Negotiation Phase

Tasks During Bidding and Negotiation Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
BN-1
Determine submission requirements for Trustee Finance
Committee Approval

BN-2
Attend Pre-Bid Conference to review contractor responsibilities
including:

* Waste Management Plan implementation
* Materials certificate collection
* Health & Safety Plan Implementation
* Site Management / Protection
* Commissioning data collection
* Contractor parking / access to site
* Noise Issues
* Considerations regarding the Academic Calendar

BN-3 Evaluation of proposed substitutions and add/ deduct alternates

BN-4
Review all discipline scope documents prepared by Construction
Manager and propose changes

BN-5
Final logistics plan review with Construction Manager, including
review of University temporary offices and power requirements,
as well as contractor parking requirements and provisions

BN-6
Evaluation and documentation of changes made to LCCA
elements as a result of the budget reconciliation process

BN-7 Review of bid lists

BN-8 Attend all Subcontractor bid openings

BN-9 Attendance at Descoping of contractor bids

BN-10 Final determination of items in / out of scope

BN-11 Review of projected construction schedule

BN-12
authorization to proceed to Construction Administration Phase

Tasks During Construction Administration Phase Responsibility
& Date Completed
CA-1 Pre-Construction Meeting to discuss:
* Submittals / Tech Reviews
* Construction Document Control Process
* Role of Centric Project collaboration tool
* Project Sustainability goals and design features

* Contractor input - opportunities for construction innovation
and efficiencies

* Sustainability and Commissioning protocols

CA-2
Post 100% Construction Documents in Centric Projects; update
throughout CA to include revised drawings, addenda, etc.

CA-3 Ongoing Monitoring and Certificate Collection
* Construction Waste Management
* Construction IAQ Plan
* Collect Materials Certifications

CA-4
Maintain Phase 2 Commissioning documentation (see Section
3.13)

CA-5
Attendance at regular project site meetings with Construction
Manager

CA-6
Submission of regular Field Observation Reports for ongoing
construction contingencies

CA-7
Response to RFIs, Submittal reviews and building component
preconstruction reviews

CA-8 Ongoing Review of Project Schedule and Expenses

CA-9
Review and reconciliation of contractor's proposed changes,
project change orders and scope changes

CA-10
Submit individual Change Order review recommendation letters
for each proposed CO

CA-11
Assist University Commissioning Agent in documentation of pre-
functional and functional testing

CA-12 Punch list preparation and follow-up

CA-13
Inspect project for substantial completion, provide notification to
government agencies who require inspection prior to occupancy

CA-14
Provide FA Testing and Certification Letter in conformance with
University standard specifications (refer to Section 3.4)

CA-15 Provide written certification of substantial completion

CA-16 Attend acceptance testing for all major building components
* UL
* ASTM
* Other

Tasks During Project Close-Out Responsibility
& Date Completed
CO-1
Review submitted Operations and Maintenance Manuals/
Programs as required, including any specific information related
to LCCA elements (section 1.5)

CO-2 Review submitted As-Built Documents from CM

CO-3
Review systems training requirements and attend selected MEP
training sessions

* Fire Alarm
* ATC
* Mechanical Systems

CO-4
Final radon level testing needs to be recorded and submitted to
EHS for any project disturbing basement slab or slab on grade
conditions (new projects and renovations)

CO-5
Best Practices meeting to evaluate process, strategies, role of
LCCA guidelines and procedures

CO-6
Record of Best Practices meeting comments.

CO-7 Provide Final Commissioning Report (see Section 3.13)

CO-8 Provide Final Sustainability Report

CO-9
Ongoing monitoring, commissioning and Annual Cost
documentation of:

* Energy Consumption
* O&M Costs

CO-10
Post-Occupancy Evaluations regarding LCCA elements

CO-11
Follow-up Best Practices meeting and record comments

CO-12
Schedule end-of-warranty walk-throughs at 1 year post-C of O
date

END OF DOCUMENT

A/E FEE PROPOSAL BUDGET OUTLINE Date: __________________

Party
Responsible
Baseline
Budget
Revised
Budget
Committed
Amount
A. Site Acquisition

1. Land costs (off campus)

2. Survey

3. Title Insurance

4. Real estate fees

5. Rezoning

6. Legal fees

7. Others

B. A/E Fee Structure
(include MEP structural design)

1. Design fees

2. Reimbursables

3. Construction Admin. fees

4. Construction Admin.
reimbursables

C. Special Consult Fee Structure

1. Site design fee
reimbursables

2. Civil engineering fee
reimbursables

3. Interior design fee
reimbursables

4. Furniture procurement
reimbursables

5. Acoustical fee
reimbursables

6. Food service


Party
Responsible
Baseline
Budget
Revised
Budget
Committed
Amount
7. Traffic

8. Graphics

9. Landscaping

10. Zoning/Planning

11. Lighting

12. Cost Estimating

13. Energy

14. Model Making

15. BIM Requirement

16. Other

D. Special Environmental Consult.

1. Asbestos P.U.

2. Radon P.U. / A/E

3. Lead Paint P.U.

4. Other

E. Permitting

1. Zoning/Planning

2. Plan review fee State/Private

3. Sewer Allocation

4. Building permit preparation

5. Other permits street work,
barricades, sewer connection,
soil erosion, etc.


Party
Responsible
Baseline
Budget
Revised
Budget
Committed
Amount
6. Utility connections P.U.

a. Gas P.U.
b. Electric P.U.
c. Water P.U.
d. Steam/Condensate P.U.
e. Chilled Water P.U.
f. OIT/Telephone P.U.
g. Fire Protection Water P.U.

F. Miscellaneous

1. Survey topographical,
boundary, utilities and discuss
need for existing conditions
survey

2. Adjacent building damage
survey

3. Soils report

4. Full-size mock-ups

5. Construction testing laboratory
inspection

6. Construction soils inspection

7. Full-time project representatives

G. Escalation

H. Other

TOTALS

1.4 Regulatory Agencies

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 1.4 Regulatory Ag - page 1

1. Introduction

The main campus of Princeton University occupies land in two municipalities, the Borough of
Princeton and the Township of Princeton, in Mercer County, New J ersey. Each municipality has
a building department which is responsible for review and inspection of construction activity
within its boundary. Full compliance with Federal, State and Local regulatory requirements on
any project is the responsibility of the prime professional of record.

2. State Review

Construction projects in the state are regulated by the New J ersey Uniform Construction Code
(NJ UCC or simply UCC). The UCC adopts - and modifies - model codes that provide control
and standards for construction. These model codes, such as the IBC (International Building
Code), the National Standard Plumbing Code, and the National Electrical Code (among others)
are listed in subchapter 3 of the UCC.

Fire safety projects may be initiated under the New J ersey Uniform Fire Code (NJ UFC or UFC),
which is more condensed in scope than the UCC; however, fire safety work is often undertaken
as part of a larger project requiring UCC compliance. It is incumbent upon the Designer to
become familiar with the UFC and UCC and the applicable sections of adopted subcodes: in part,
those design elements that require periodic testing in accordance with those sections.

Construction plan review is also regulated by the UCC and, depending on the size and use of the
building, is the responsibility of the local building department or comes under the purview of the
New J ersey Department of Community Affairs (DCA), the agency empowered by the UCC.

3. Local Review

Prior to becoming eligible for building permit review, new buildings and building additions
typically require approval by a number of municipal and county agencies. Site plans must be
reviewed by the Princeton Regional Planning Board, a joint agency of both municipalities. In
some instances, site plan review becomes the responsibility of a municipal Zoning Board of
Adjustment; both of the Princeton municipalities have municipal zoning offices and boards.

Prior to permitting in local municipalities, construction documents for most Class 1, Class 2, or
Class 3 structures require a formal plan review by a State or Local plan review agency. Local
agencies sometime use private plan review companies to assist them. Determining which agency
will conduct this review shall be determined through consultation with the Project Manager and
University Code Analyst.

The Designers must be prepared to offer support in the efforts needed to provide this necessary
information to apply for and obtain Permits. The legal intricacies of site plan approval are
typically addressed by the Universitys legal counsel. The Designer must be prepared to offer
support in the effort to obtain site plan approval, which might require presentation drawings,
providing the University Code Analyst building characteristics information for preparation of a
Fire Protection Plan, appearances at the meetings of the Regional Planning Board or the
municipal zoning boards, pre-meetings with a key subcommittee that supports all the agencies,
the Site Plan Review Advisory Board (SPRAB), and close coordination with civil/site Engineers,
Landscape Architects, and University personnel.
PS-17
PS-17

The Project Manager for the University, in coordination with the Office of the University
Architect, provides direction in the efforts required for site plan approvals, construction permit
review and approval, and subsequent contacts with the municipal building departments during
construction and closeout.

4. Contacts

Grounds and Building Maintenance, or as applicable)

B. University Code Analyst MacMillan Building, 609-258-6706

C. University legal counsel (contact through Project Manager)


A. Princeton University campus utility plan, cover sheet indicating
boundary lines between Borough and Township, in Facilities
Engineering Department

B. Application for Plan Review, State of New J ersey Department of
Community Affairs, Division of Codes and Standards Public Document

C. Project Review Application, State of New J ersey Department of
Community Affairs, Bureau of Construction Project Review Public Document

D. Variation Application, State of New J ersey Department of
Community Affairs, Bureau of Construction Project Review Public Document

E. How Do I Develop My Property In Princeton?, Borough of
Princeton, Department of Engineering Public Document

F. Development Guidelines, Princeton Sewer Operating Committee Public Document

G. Site Plan Instruction Packet, Regional Planning Board of Princeton Public Document

H. Environmental Safety Risk Management Master Plan, 2002 Consult Project Manager

I. Notice to New J ersey Licensed Architects Appendix 1.4-1

J . Code Sheet Information Checklist Appendix 1.4-2

6. Review Guidelines

Initial planning and preliminary design will be conducted through the Office of Design &
Construction with the University department responsible for project initiation. FM Global is the
Universitys current property insurance carrier. Effort should be made to comply with FM
standards. If FM designs are not feasible the design team is to communicate no compliance
with the Project Manager. As the project moves toward the construction documentation and
code review phases, it is required that the project be submitted to the University for an internal
Tech Team review process through the Office of Design and Construction for compliance with
University standards. Plans are to be submitted for review at:

A. Completion of Schematic Design;

B. Completion of Design Development

C. At 50% completion of construction documents;

D. At 85% completion of construction documents;

E. At 100% completion of construction documents, if required, at the discretion of the
Project Manager

With the assistance of the Project Manager and Facilities Tech Teams, discipline review
meetings will be held with respective University shops, University Project Engineers, and other
Tech Team representatives as required. The A/E is responsible for documenting minutes of all
these meetings. There, review comments or recent revisions will be discussed and documented.
The Designers shall provide timely and coordinated responses to all review comments. The
purpose of the Tech Team review process is to confirm A/E compliance with the current version
of the Facilities Design Standards Manual including each respective section and associated
appendices.

7. Procedural Guidelines - Preliminary Design & Design Development

During preliminary design, the Designer is to consult with University Project Manager to
ascertain the need for site plan and zoning approvals, and the need for legal counsel for the early
stages of a project. The Designer is to cooperate with any adjunct professionals providing
assistance to the University, and is to coordinate his work with other disciplines so a cohesive set
of documents is produced for local board review. Refer section 2.9 Site Planning for further
information on zoning and site planning issues.

During preliminary design and design development the Designer is to consult with the Project
Manager and the Universitys Code Analyst to define code strategies and to discuss any code
interpretations affecting the project.

During Design Development conduct a "Pre-meeting" with the University Code Analyst to
review DCA code issues.

The Designer is also to review and incorporate the Code Sheet Information Checklist, refer to
Appendix 1.4-2.

8. Procedural Guidelines - Code Review Applications and Submittals

Prior to submitting an application for project review, the Designer will prepare the project
application forms, including (where applicable) the DCAs Project Review Application, the
Application for Plan Review, request for Return to Local (RTL) letter and the forms for local
review. The Designer is to meet again with the Code Analyst to review the application forms and
any supporting documentation. All submissions made to the Department of Community Affairs
or to the Division of Fire Safety are to be channeled through the Universitys Code Analyst.
Official Applications will be made by the University with the Code Analyst responsible for
signing all applications and RTL letters. Likewise, all communications during the review
PS-15
PS-25
DD-2
process are to be made through the Code Analyst; this individual acts as liaison between the
University and the State construction agencies, and is responsible for continuity in the
applicability of code issues from project to project. It is imperative that this continuity be
maintained.

Insofar as is practicable, only 100% complete documents are to be submitted to DCA for review.
The intent is to prevent needless and time-consuming review by the State agency, and review
comments brought on by incomplete information. The Designer is to refer to the plan
submission checklist in the Application for Plan Review.

Documents submitted to DCA are to be signed and sealed; the UCC outlines requirements for
original signature and raised seal. The signatory Architects license number must appear on the
Drawings and his/her name must be listed in the drawing title block, and on the cover page of
Specifications, Calculations, Detail Books, and Reports. All Drawings must be signed and
sealed, as well as specification booklets, structural calculations, ventilation calculations, energy
calculations, etc. For DCA Projects, a minimum of three sets of signed and sealed documents are
generally required for release; four sets are required for elevator release; a single set may be
submitted for DCA project review, with at least two additional sets submitted when the project
has been cleared for release.

Upon submittal of the design documents to DCA, a DCA Project Number will be assigned. Once
that number is known, all subsequent submissions to DCA must include that number on all
documents.

All Architectural and Engineering Firms are required to be licensed to practice their professions
in New J ersey. In addition, the firm or firms, as the case may be, must be registered with the
New J ersey Treasury Department for state Architects or with the New J ersey State Board of
Architects for out-of-state firms, or equivalent for Engineering Firms (refer to Appendix 1.4-1).

9. Procedural Guidelines - Organization of Submittal Drawings

In order to maintain project schedule it is sometimes necessary to request partial release of
Drawings from the DCA, and to obtain construction permits from the local agency for discrete
parts of the project. The likelihood of this necessity should be discussed early with the
University Project Manager and the Code Analyst. In order to facilitate partial release, the
Drawings and specifications should be set up with easily separable sections related to the
following categories:

A. Footings and Foundations
B. Structural Framework
C. Exterior Building Components
D. Interior Building Components
E. Elevator
F. Other Building Elements
G. Underground & Underslab Utilities
H. Plumbing
I. HVAC & Mechanical
J . Electrical
K. Fire Suppression/Sprinklers
L. Fire Protection/Fire Alarms
10. Procedural Guidelines - Timely Response to Review Comments

During code review, time is of the essence in responding to inquiries and comments from the
review agencies. Designers and their consultants are to respond to DCA comments within one
week, unless technically infeasible. DCA comments are to be referenced and quoted in
responses, to simplify re-review by the agency.

Again, these responses are to be channeled through the University Code Analyst for actual
submittal to DCA.

11. Procedural Guidelines - Code Variances and Variations

During the course of code review, or during construction, it often becomes necessary to apply for
relief from some requirement of the UCC or a subcode. The Designer will be responsible for
preparing such an application (a variance under the UCC, a variation under the NJ Fire Code) in
consultation with the Code Analyst. The application is made to the agency responsible for code
review. The application typically includes a written narrative outlining difficulties in complying
with code requirements, and a description of the proposed alternative with any mitigating
features which might offset the code deficiency. The application might include sketches and
photos in support of the request for relief. Official application will be made by the University,
with the Code Analyst responsible for signing and submitting to the applicable agency.

12. Procedural Guidelines - Permit Application to Local Agency

Permit applications to local municipalities consist of at least two signed and sealed sets of project
documents; in the case of documents reviewed by DCA (or a private code reviewer) these sets
are the two final release sets from the agency. Documents are submitted to the municipality with
completed application forms for each major trade involved in the project (building, fire safety
and protection, plumbing, HVAC, electric, elevator).

The Designer shall be responsible for assisting the Project Manager in gathering the required
information for permit application, including fixture and device counts, equipment ratings,
incoming utility service sizes, etc. to facilitate a complete submission. Permit application,
delivery, pick-up, and fee responsibility are determined by the Project Manager and the Code
Analyst.

Plumbing, Electrical and Fire Protection sub-code application forms must be signed and sealed
by the licensed Contractor responsible for the work; the Designer will cooperate in this procedure
as well.

13. Procedural Guidelines - Approved Construction Documents

During construction, site conditions often necessitate changes in the work. Revisions to
Drawings are to be submitted to the DCA (or the responsible review agency) for approval, and
are to be incorporated into the approved set of Drawings that is to be kept at the job site. It is a
UCC requirement that the approved permit release Drawings are kept at the site.

Frequency of Updates:

The State Uniform Construction Code requires all structures to be built from approved
Documents at all times. As field changes occur, Construction documents are required to be
updated and resubmitted to the Plan Review Authority having jurisdiction for Amended Review
and Release. For State DCA projects, the documents are required to be upgraded continuously
over the course of the project. As Built Documents, only, are not acceptable, and are not
submitted to the State for approval unless specifically requested by the DCA. The same
procedure should be followed for field changes on Local Plan Review Projects, but less frequent
updates and or submission of As Built Drawings at the end of the job have been allowed by the
Local Construction Officials on a case by case basis. Advance permission from the Construction
Official is required for this exception to be allowed. Otherwise the documents are required to be
upgraded continuously. The Code Analyst can assist the Designer with the exact frequency and
packaging requirements for submitting for Amended Releases.

Drawings illustrating revisions must be submitted for review on full sized sheets that can easily
be incorporated into and maintained with the full approved set at the worksite.

Changes to documents that have been submitted for Plan Review, or that have already been
Released for construction, must be reviewed, and approved by the Plan Review Authority
Having J urisdiction. To minimize the time and effort needed to review the document again, all
changes must be identified on the documents in a clear manner for the reviewer, and a written
narrative describing each change must accompany the submission. A sentence or two is all that
is required for each change, provided it adequately conveys the general idea of it to the reviewer.

A courtesy copy of all changes submitted to DCA should also be submitted to the local
Permitting Authority if the project is under construction. Failure to do so could result in
problems during scheduled or periodic inspections of the work.

Revisions made to documents that have already been Released for construction by DCA will
be subject to additional Plan Review fees. The cost for such reviews will be calculated on an
hourly basis. All additional fees due must be paid in full prior to receipt of the Amended
Release. Reimbursement of costs for changes made to Released documents shall be the
responsibility of the organization that initiated them unless that organization is Princeton
University, or if Princeton University specifically agrees to assume them.

14. Periodic Testing Requirements

Periodic testing requirements of non-commissioned fire related building elements will be
determined by the Project Manager and University Code Analyst. A list of required periodic
tests will be developed during Design Development and distributed to the Design Team.
Beginning with the 50% CD submission, the Design Team shall initiate detailed documentation
of the testing procedures (a step by step guide to aide in administering the test). These
procedures shall be complete and documented for review by all authorities having jurisdiction.

Outside consultants may be available as needed to help develop these procedures. Consult with
the Project Manager should the project require the aide of outside consultants.

END OF DOCUMENT
1.5 Documentation and Archiving

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 1.5 Doc/Archiving - page 1

1. Introduction

This section will provide the requirements for documentation and procedures for archiving all
University Project Documents. The University is committed to utilizing digital technology in the
creation of building information, including 2D Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) and Building
Information Modeling (BIM). In addition to assisting the design and construction process, these
technologies, as organizational tools, provide the basis for a number of important future
University functions, including space management and maintenance and operations.

This section includes requirements for specific formatting and procedural requirements for
drawing production, particularly related to CAD, but also pertaining to BIM as well as printed
materials.

During the Schematic Design Phase, the Designer must meet with the Facilities Space and
Property Management Information Systems (SPMIS) Assistant Manager to review the process
for the square foot calculation of areas and classification of operational uses for the various
elements of the building program (see Appendices 1.5-4A and B)..

2. Contacts

A. The Project Manager (in the Office of Design and Construction, the Engineering
Department, Grounds and Buildings Maintenance, or as applicable).

B. SPMIS Assistant Manager./ GIS In-Site Planning MacMillan Bldg. 609-258-0320

C. CAD Archivist - MacMillan Bldg. 609-258-7685

D. SPMIS Administrator - MacMillan Bldg. 609-258-6794

E. Engineering - Mgr of CAD Dept./ GIS Planning MacMillan Bldg. 609-258-1689

F. Architectural Engineer for Standards 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-6247

G. GIS Analyst MacMillan Bldg. 609-258-8205

H. Digital Deliverables Specialist 200 Elm Drive 609-258-9339


Princeton University Standard A/E Design Services Contract Article XIV
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/audiences/suppliers/contracts/

Princeton U Standard General Conditions -For All Construction Contracts Clause F2
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/audiences/suppliers/contracts/

PDF DWG
A. Princeton University CAD Standards / Template Appendix 1.5-1 Appendix 1.5-1

B. Princeton University BIM Requirements Appendix 1.5-2

C. Princeton University Building Drawing
located in Planning Vault, Office of Design
and Construction MacMillan Building See Project Manager

D. National CAD Standard (approved by http://www.nationalcadstandard.org/
NIBS, AIA and CSI)

E. Fire Alarm / Signage Nomenclature Spreadsheet
Sample, Princeton University Appendix 2.8-2

F. Princeton University Room Numbering
Guideline Appendix 1.5-3

G. FICM (Facilities Inventory and
Classification Manual), Chapter 3 Building
GSF/NASF calculation standards Appendix 1.5-4A

FICM Chapter 4 Room Category
and Type Space Standards Appendix 1.5-4B

4. Code References

A. Uniform Construction Code Form 7-2708 Public Document
Application for Certificate of Occupancy
(Requirement for amended Drawings)

5. Room Numbering Requirements

It is the intent of all projects to have permanent room numbers assigned during the Design
Development Phase. It is the responsibility of the Designer to initiate and complete this process,
and the Project Managers responsibility to gather required approvals. All Drawings shall
reference the University approved final room numbering system.
Guidelines have been established for the process to be followed in the assigning of numbers and
designations for both net assignable and non-net assignable spaces. The Designer should
anticipate the incorporation of these standards into the construction documents for the project
and should work with the Project Manager to conform to the system set forth in Appendix 1.5-3.
To facilitate the establishment of room numbers, a meeting with the Architectural Engineer for
Standards and Design team should occur before the start of Design Development. This meeting
will clarify the appropriate method for assigning room numbers based on previous University
Projects.

6. Existing Documentation Availability and Distribution

A. Paper documents available in the Office of Design and Construction vault.

B. Electronic documents are available and accessible in a variety of formats. Please see
the CAD Archivist for details.

7. Archiving Requirements Printed

A. For the preparation of As-builts and Close Out Documents there is a requirement of
coordination between the A/E and Contractor per Clause F2 of theGeneral Conditions
For All Construction Contracts and Article XIV of thestandard A/E Design Services
Contract.
SD-38
PS-28

1. Record Drawings and Project Manual Consists of A/E-produced versions of the
latest Construction Document set sent. The A/E is to produce a set of documents that
include all changes (sketches, bulletins, RFIs, addendums, etc) authored by the design
team. These documents will be included in a full size set of drawings and not as
separate attachments.

2. As-Builts Consists of Contractor or Sub-Contractor produced documentation of work
in place of respective systems. Submission requirements may be found in individual
Specification sections of the Contract Documents. At a minimum, all systems listed in
Specification shall be submitted by the Contractor. Refer to the Summary of
Document Archiving Requirements in this section for details.

8. Archiving Requirements Electronic

A. For the preparation of As-built Drawings, the same coordination procedures apply per
Clause F2 of theGeneral Conditions For All Construction Contracts and Article XIV of
the standard A/E Design Services Contract. This procedure is initiated by A/E
providing latest design information to the Contractor in the field. Once received by
Contractor, the following procedures apply:

1. Record Drawings and Project Manual the final issue of Construction Drawings
verified in the field by the Contractor per Article XIV and Clause E3 as mentioned
above will be electronically posted to Centric Project and transmitted on CD Rom by
the A/E to the University. Refer to Princeton University Guidelines for the
Transmittal/Acquisition of CAD Data for electronic transmission formatting
requirements. The Project Manual is not typically included in electronic transmission.

2. As-Builts Refer to the Summary of Document Archiving Requirements matrix
(below) for electronic scanned image files. Scanned or PDF converted files are both
acceptable.

9. Closeout Documentation Review

Prior to submission to the University all closeout documentation listed herein as either
contractor-produced or A/E-produced shall bear the equivalent review process as all prior
submittals to date. This likely requires the A/E certification that the version sent to the
University meets requirements of its respective CSI section. Second and third submissions may
be necessary for quality assurance.

Summary of Document Archiving Requirements
6

Paper-
ODC Vault

(MacMillan)
Paper
Project File

(755 Alex.)
Electronic
Scanned
Image
1,2
of
Paper File
(Centric Proj)
Electronic
CAD Drawing
1

(Centric Proj)
1 COPY EACH
I. RECORD DRAWINGS
5

(A/E-PRODUCED)

ascii compliant or
.pdf formatted index

Latest Construction Document Issue of:
Landscape, Site and Civil Drawings X X X
Architectural Drawings X X X
Structural Drawings X X X
Mechanical Drawings X X X
Plumbing Drawings X X X
Fire Protection Drawings X X X
Electrical X X X
Special Consultants X X X

PROJECT SPECIFICATION MANUAL
Latest Construction Issue

X
1 COPY EACH
II. THIRD PARTY FILE DRAWINGS
(P.U.-PRODUCED)

U/G Utilities X X
Site Plan (see section 2.9.10) X X
Land Survey (see section 2.9.16) X X
1 COPY EACH
III. MAINTENANCE / AS BUILT DOCUMENTS
(CM or GC -PRODUCED)
3

Final Approved Submittals & Product Data
(PER CSI SECTION)

X X

O&M Manuals (PER CSI SECTION) X X
Include any final approved submittals for ea. item
of product data in O & M manuals.

Warranties (PER CSI SECTION) X X

CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS / SPECS
Final Approved Signed and Sealed Permit Sets
X
Footnotes:
1
Only one copy of the digitals are required
2
Scanned images may also include converted electronic files in .PDF format
3
For projects w/out a CM or GC, consult with Project Manager to determine required As-Built documents
4
Amended refers to the As-Built condition conforming to the latest construction document issue.
5
Collecting and submitting this info from all sub-consultants is the responsibility of the lead Designer under contract.
6
Project Field Manager to coordinate additional on-site set requirements of GBM

Summary of Document Archiving Requirements (continued)
1 COPY EACH

Paper-
ODC Vault

(MacMillan)
Paper
Project File

(755 Alex.)
Electronic
Scanned
Image
1,2
of
Paper File
(Centric Project)
Electronic
CAD Drawing
1

(Centric Proj)
IV. MAINTENANCE / AS BUILT DOCS (contd)
(CM or GC-PRODUCED)
3

ascii compliant or
.pdf formatted index

As built requirements are listed at the end of each section
of the Princeton University Design Standards Manual

X

X

In addition, any amended
4
Architectural or
Engineering elements including:
Amended reflected ceiling plans with room heights

X

X

Amended building floor plans with actual room
numbers, built-in furniture and equipment, and
door swings

X

X

As-built room finish schedule annotated with all
mfr., colors, model nos., styles, sizes, of all
installed finishes including:

X

X

a. ceilings X X
b. floors (for tile include grout details) & stairs X X
c. trim X X
d. installed accessories (coat hooks, blackboards,
screens, etc.)

X X
e. window treatments X X
f. all schedules (amended with as-built
information: room number, model, qty, etc.)

X X
Amended envelope details: mixed designs, color
additives, manufacturers, or masonry suppliers,
flashing details

X X
Actual stone identification and source X X
Grout/Caulking actual mfr., type, color X X
Amended window installation details X X
Fire Detection X X X
Security and Access Control System X X X
Fire Suppression X X X
Air Temperature Controls X X X
Final Approved Shop Drawings for:
Steel X X X
Pre-Cast X X X
Duct work X X X
Curtain Wall X X X
As required by Project Manager X X X
MEP Coordination Drawings X X X

10. Formatting of Printed Deliverables As Built Drawings

A. Document Identification

1. Project Title
2. Drawing Title
3. Project Location
4. Document Submission Date
5. Name and Address of Subcontractor
6. Contact Name and Telephone Number
7. Revision Dates
8. Scale and North Arrow include the specific reference (NAD83, Grid or Magnetic) to any
applicable information such as deed, filed plan
9. Datum and Grid/Ground Scale Factor Notes

11. Formatting of Electronic Deliverables

A. Document Identification
All requirements for document identification from printed deliverables apply to electronic
deliverables. Princeton University maintains both 2D CAD standards and BIM specifications
which include requirements such as pen weights, layers, layer naming, file naming and title
blocks. (Keynotes are not acceptable in documents. All notes to appear on the detail sheets)

Refer to appendix 1.5-1 for 2D CAD standards and templates.
Refer to appendix 1.5-2 for BIM requirements

At the end of Schematic Design the team is to publish both the CAD and PDF files so that
PU can internally review the CAD documents for compliance with the 2D CAD standards
(1.5-1).

B. Formatting of CAD Deliverables

Contact the CAD Archivist for options regarding transferring of data.

AutoCAD
TM
is the CAD software employed by Princeton University. The AutoCAD
TM

DWG format is file format used by Princeton University to store and manipulate CAD
drawings. Princeton University utilizes the current version of AutoCAD
TM
To guarantee the
compatibility with Princeton University CAD/CAFM Systems, all CAD files must be in
AutoCAD
TM
file format within 2 releases of the current version. More information regarding
file structuring layering can be found in Appendix 1.5-1

C. BIM Deliverables: The use of BIM is required as indicated in the specific-project A/E
Design Services Contract. Refer to Appendix 1.5-2 for detailed BIM requirements

1. Software: Autodesk software, including Revit and Navisworks will be used. See
Appendix 1.5-2.
2. Project Level BIM Execution Plan: Project Team will develop a project BIM Execution
Plan, as well as a BIM Level of Development Matrix, which will include both the
minimum BIM requirements as specified, and project-related BIM goals, processes,
protocols and levels of development identified by the project team. This plan will be
updated and modified periodically to reflect the needs of the upcoming project phases.
3. A copy of Record Model and As-Built Model will be submitted by A/E and Contractor
respectively at project completion.

D. PDF Deliverables:
1. Drawings: 1 consolidated file per discipline (i.e. architectural, mechanical) bookmarked
and layered from CAD export
2. Specifications: 1 consolidated file per volume bookmarked per spec section and named
informatively
E. Deviations: Deviations from these requirements are only permitted with written approval of
Princeton University.
12. Use of Princeton University Existing Digital Data

The University strives to be completely digital and therefore have been focused on converting the
existing hard copy utility plans to digital CAD drawings. The utility data has been compiled over
the Universities CAD Planimetric Base Map which was developed through a Aerial Photography
and Orthophotography mission in 1999, supplemented by yearly planimetric updates and GPS
collection of additional features both surface and subsurface when exposed for maintenance
purposes.

Authorized Users can acquire the latest Princeton University digital campus map by contacting
the SPMIS Assistant Manager/ GIS In-Site Planning.

The Princeton University digital campus map conforms to the New J ersey Stateplane NAD 83
US Survey Feet (horizontal datum) and NAVD 88 US Survey Feet (vertical datum).

The Designer shall not base designs on vertical data from any Princeton University supplied
source. All vertical and horizontal values shall be independently verified by the consultant.

13. Positional Tolerance Requirements for Internal Bldg Conditions, Surveys and As-Builts

All CAD drawing models should be drafted at full scale in architectural units, such that one
drawing unit equals one inch.

As-builts should meet or exceed the following:

It is typically required that exterior building dimensions recorded within CAD drawings must
reconcile to within one inch of actual building dimensions as measured in the field, and interior
building dimensions must reconcile to within one-half inch of actual field dimensions. However,
individual project specifications may vary slightly. Confirm dimensional error tolerances for
each project with the University Project Manager.

For information regarding external conditions, refer to Section 2.9, Site Planning.

END OF DOCUMENT
2.1 Accessibility

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.1 Accessibility - page 1

1. Introduction

Much of Princeton Universitys historic campus was originally designed in ways which may not
have provided for accessible routes and features to all parts of its buildings. Nevertheless, one of
the goals of every University project is to enhance and improve the accessibility of the campus
and its buildings, and to create accessible routes to and through University facilities,
accomplished without assistance or special knowledge.

Moreover, it is the goal of the University that all new construction and renovation be designed
and include features to allow for independent use to the highest extent possible of all campus
facilities by all individuals regardless of disability. The University is committed to ensuring
access for individuals with disabilities, including but not limited to students, employees,
occupants, spectators, participants, consumers, or visitors.

Princeton University is subject to regulations under the federal laws known as the Rehabilitation
Act and the Americans with Disabilities Act, as well as the New J ersey Law Against
Discrimination. Under applicable law, disabilities may include physical, mental, sensory or
cognitive impairments or disorders.

The Designer is responsible for meeting all applicable codes as referenced in the New J ersey
Uniform Construction Code, as well as all regulations implementing the Americans with
Disabilities Act, specifically the ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) as adopted by the
Department of J ustice. For all projects, in addition to meeting the above referenced codes and
standards, project-specific goals identified by the University to enhance and improve the
accessibility of the campus and its buildings must be considered and incorporated by the
Designer. No modification may be undertaken that makes the campus less accessible. It is the
Universitys long term goal to have an accessible campus.

For projects involving ground up construction, the design team shall meet with the University
Code Analyst early in the programming phase to discuss accessibility with respect to the project
design. New buildings will follow accessibility code requirements to the full extent of both state
and federal law; in the event of a conflict, the design must comply with the more restrictive
standard.

For renovation work, The Designer shall meet with the University Code Analyst and accessibility
consultant as directed by the Project Manager early in the programming phase to discuss the
project goals with respect to accessibility. Refer to Section 6 below.

2. Contacts

A. The Project Manager Office of Design and Construction


C. University Accessibility Consultants NK Architects, Morristown, NJ
Contact Project Manager to coordinate

PDF AutoCAD
A. Campus Accessibility Map
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/services/printable_maps/pdf/Accessibility.pdf

B. Princeton University
Typical Barrier Free Details Appendix 2.1-2 Appendix 2.1-2

C. Sample Accessibility Program Document Appendix 2.1-3

4. Applicable Codes and Federal Standards

Refer to Princeton University Design Standards Chapter 1.4 Regulatory Agencies for additional
information regarding applicable codes and regulatory procedures

Some Codes and Regulations that are of primary importance include but are not limited to:

A. U.S. Department of J ustice, Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
(ADAAG)

B. New J ersey Uniform Construction Code (NJ UCC)
http://www.nj.gov/dca/codes/

C. NJ UCC subchapter 6 for requirements in rehabilitated structures

D. NJ UCC subchapter 7 for barrier-free requirements

E. ICC/ANSI A-117.1 American National Standard for Accessible and Useable Buildings
and Facilities

It is the responsibility of the Designer to comply with the currently adopted versions of the
applicable codes and current federal standards at the time of submission to NJ DCA and/or other
authority having jurisdiction. In the event of a conflict between the State and Federal standards,
the designer shall design to the more restrictive standard unless directed by the University in
writing.

Designers should not simply design to code minimum or maximum dimensions so that installed
work will always fall within federal and state guidelines.

5. University Review Guidelines

Construction with the University department responsible for project initiation.

For new construction projects, while all projects shall comply with codes and standards
identified earlier in this section, the Designer shall also meet with the University Code Analyst
early in the programming phase to discuss the project goals that supplement code requirements
with respect to accessibility. The Accessibility Consultant may be included at the discretion of
the Project Manager for initial project review. The designer shall then develop an Accessibility
Program Document restating the agreed goals and supplemental code requirements for the
project.

PS-23 PS-24
For renovation projects, the Designer shall meet with the Accessibility Review Committee to
discuss the project goals with respect to accessibility. In addition to the client/user, the
committee is comprised of the University Program Manager, University Code Analyst, The
Office of Disabilities Services, the Design Professional and the University Accessibility
Consultant. During this phase, the Designer shall develop an Accessibility Program Document
for review by the committee (See Appendix 2.1-3). This document shall be submitted during the
programming phase and will serve to determine the scope of the accessibility improvements to be
included in the final scope of work for the project.

As all projects move toward the construction documentation and code review phases, it is
required that the project be submitted to the University for an internal Tech Team review
process thru the Office of Design and Construction for compliance with University standards.
The following deliverables and milestone reviews are to be included:

A. Accessibility Program Document(s);

B. Completion of Schematic Design;

C. Completion of Design Development


E. At 85% completion of construction documents;

F. At 100% completion of construction documents, if required, at the discretion of the
Project Manager

Tech Team representatives and the University Accessibility Consultant as required by the Project
Manager. The A/E is responsible for documenting minutes of all these meetings. There, review
comments or recent revisions will be discussed and documented. The Designers shall provide
timely and coordinated responses to all review comments. The purpose of the Tech Team
review process is to confirm A/E compliance with the current version of the Facilities Design
Standards Manual including each respective section and associated appendices.

The accessibility consultant will be included in the Accessibility Committee and the Tech Team
in the above referenced reviews at the direction of the Project Manager, but at a minimum will be
consulted during the Program Document Phase, at the completion of Design Development and at
85% or 100% completion of construction documents.

6. Design and Procedural Guidelines

First and foremost, no alterations may be made to buildings or areas on campus that make the
campus less accessible.

The Designer must become familiar with the barrier-free requirements in the NJ UCC and the
sub-code ICC/ANSI A117.1, and should also be familiar with requirements promulgated by the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Refer to Chapters 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) and 2.9
(Site Planning) for additional information.

As identified above in Section 5, accessibility goals for each project shall be established during
the programming or pre-schematic phase of each project. The Universitys goal for all addition
and renovation projects is to provide accessible facilities in areas served by accessible entries and
along accessible routes, and to provide those entries and routes whenever feasible as part of the
project.

For all projects, new and or renovation, the Designer in conjunction with the Project Manager
and the University Accessibility Review Committee, shall meet as required to review all project-
specific goals at the pre-schematic phase of the project. The result of the meeting(s) shall include
the Accessibility Program Document (See Appendix 2.1-3). This document shall serve to
identify and coordinate access considerations with adjacent portions of the building(s) and
campus. The content goal of the Accessibility Program Document shall include at a minimum, a
review of the following project-specific accessibility goals:

Connection of the new or existing building with the existing campus accessible routes
and or transportation features. These include but are not limited to the Tiger Tram and
the Campus Accessibility Map. (See Appendix 2.1-1)
If applicable, modification of existing entrances to provide accessible ingress
Access to Primary Function spaces in the building
Access to accessible Toilet facilities in the building
Access to all public services in the building
Identification of existing non-compliant conditions as related to the Project Program
If applicable, workplace accommodations as appropriate for the building type
If applicable, accommodations for Housing

For any project with exterior component(s), zoning or planning approval may be required. This
process normally incorporates all accessible features such as exterior ramps, so the Designer
should consult the Project Manager at the beginning of the project regarding this process as it can
be time consuming and projects are often time-sensitive. Each Project Manager for a project
which disturbs an exterior site in any way should meet with the University Architect to determine
whether the extent of the disturbance requires formal review by the Landscape Coordinating
Committee, or informal review by the University Coordinating Architect, or whether the
University Landscape Project Manager simply needs to be informed so that appropriate site
restoration can be undertaken after completion of the project. Refer to Chapter 2.9, section 6 for
additional information.

The Designer is responsible (in consultation with the Project Manager) for preparing construction
documents and applications for project review by local and State code agencies. Prior to
submitting an application for project review, the Designer will meet with the University Code
Analyst and will then prepare the project application forms, including (where applicable) the
DCAs Project Review Application, the Application for Plan Review and the forms for local
review. The Designer is to meet again with the Code Analyst to review the application forms and
any supporting documentation.

Should a variation from NJ ACC code requirements be necessitated by the design of the project,
the Designer will be responsible for preparing the application for relief, along with supporting
documentation. A variation application will normally be prepared and submitted prior to
completion of 100% Construction Documents. It should be noted that there is no process for, nor
permission of variation from Federal Standards.
PS-2

Designers should be cognizant of normal construction tolerances, and as such, exercise
appropriate judgment in applying code minimum or maximum dimensions so that installed work
will always fall within federal and state guidelines

7. Guidelines and Requirements for Documentation

The Designer shall provide documentation in adequate detail for accessible features such that
will allow review agencies to approve the project. Typical information that is inadequately
documented includes door sizes and specific related hardware, clearances required for accessible
passages, bathroom layouts, operating features, mounting elevations of devices and equipment,
etc. Proposed conditions shall be shown to comply with the requirements of the New J ersey
Uniform Construction Code and its barrier free subcode, and with ICC/ANSI A-117.1 American
National Standard for Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities, a referenced subcode to
the NJ UCC and the Federal standards as identified by the Americans with Disabilities Act.

Survey data (elevation/grade along paths; ground to floor differential; floor to floor
measurements, change of level within a story) will prove useful for both design and review.
Site plans need to show, at a minimum, the accessible parking spaces needed for the project
along with a compliant wheelchair route to each accessible entrance.

8. Other Considerations for Accessible Design

Designers should review the following with the Project Manager and University Code Analyst, to
ascertain approaches to accessibility and design features that might be unique to Princeton
facilities which are above and beyond the requirements of the Code Requirements, (but never
less accessible than that required by the Code Requirements):

Site Related Design Issues:

1. Parking
Code required signage
Slope and surface
Striping
Parking accounting
Van accessible requirements
Accessible connections to buildings and transit
2. Curb Ramps, Curb Cuts & Accessible Routes
Tactile surface as required
Changes in level and material
Handrails
3. Walking / Travel
Lighting
Site stairs and required handrails
Handrails
4. Exterior and Interior Ramps
Coordination of Cross Slope with proper drainage
Appropriate slope
Appropriate lighting
Ramp size and cross slope
Layout of landings
Handrails and associated reduction in clear width
5. Exterior Signage
Directional Signage (Wayfinding)
Refer to Section 2.8 Environmental Graphics
Building Related Design Issues:
6. Building Entrances
Automatic door openers size & placement
Vestibule depth
Pull clearances in relation to wall thickness and recess of door
7. Floor Surfaces
Flooring material transitions
Thresholds
Slip resistance
8. Doorways
Door width
Clear floor space and arrangement
Push and pull clearances
Landings
Clearance related to designed furniture layout
9. Toilet and Bathing Rooms
Clear floor space
Plumbing fixtures
Toilet accessories
Toilet vestibule clearances
Mounting heights for towel dispensers
10. Elevators
Minimizing use of chair/stair lifts
Locations that maximize accessiblity to public/common spaces
11. Operational Building Components (See Appendix 2.1-2)
Mounting heights
Clear floor space
Reach range
12. Protruding Objects
13. Clear Floor Areas
14. Interior Signage
Braille Requirements
15. Handrails
16. Dormitory/Dwelling Units
Clear floor space
Furniture layout (fixed and movable)
17. Laboratory Equipment and Features
Emergency eyewash, sinks, fume hoods, etc.
18. Classroom Accommodations and Features
19. Business and Office spaces
Furniture
Clear aisleways
Fixed and movable furniture and equipment clearances
Path of travel & aisleways
Door and fixture clearances

END OF DOCUMENT
2.2 Audio Visual Standards

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.2 AV Standards - page 1

1. Introduction

Audio-visual systems and equipment play a fundamental role in space design at Princeton
University. Designers must be aware of the technological requirements of the educational spaces
they are working in, and must consider legacy and future technology needs as well. This
document introduces some of the issues a Designer must consider in projects at Princeton.
Audio-visual requirements for projects may contain spaces such as classrooms (Registrar and
non-Registrar), meeting and conference rooms, public spaces (lobbies and lounges) and seminar
rooms.

Properly designed AV systems carefully integrate tel/data systems, room acoustics, lighting,
shading, floor, wall, ceiling, structural and architectural elements, seating configurations and
sight lines, instructor and student interactivity, the established campus AV standards, and ADA
and local code requirements. As such, AV system design should be considered a building system
with the same level of planning and preparation of infrastructure as, for example, an HVAC
system.

As with other major building systems, programming during the pre-schematic and schematic
design phases will inform the project budget, user performance expectations, and the
architectural room design. Because the installed costs of AV systems are significant (sometimes
as high as 5% of the total construction budget), it is critical that an AV systems program and
budget estimate be provided during the initial project budgeting phase.

If the program calls for video-conferencing (Media Services), Rich Media streaming
equipment or video recording (Broadcast Center), many aspects of the room design will be
significantly affected, including room acoustics, lighting design, tel/data specifications, seating,
surface colors and finishes

2. Contacts

Grounds and Building Maintenance, or as applicable).

B. University AV/Classroom Planner see Project Manager

C. Manager, Media Services New South, 609-258-2240

D. Manager, Broadcast Center Lewis Library, 609-258-3322

E. A/V Consultant see Project Manager

F. Manager, OIT Network Installation 171 Broadmead, 609-258-6015


A. Princeton University, Media Equipped Rooms
http://www.princeton.edu/mediaservices/PUonly/equipdrms0708.shtm

B. Princeton University, Broadcast Center website: http://www.princeton.edu/bc/

C. Princeton University, Media Services website: http://www.princeton.edu/mediaservices/
PDF AutoCAD

D. Audio Visual As-Built Requirements Appendix 2.21

E. Drawing of typical classroom media
equipment cabinet and lectern Appendix 2.3-2 Appendix 2.3-2

F. Audio Visual Touch Panel Layout Appendix 2.2-2

G. Teaching Space Master Plan Appendix 2.3-4

H. A/V Master List Spreedsheet Appendix 2.2-3 (excel)

I. Recording System Standardization
for Campus Lecture Halls Appendix 2.2-4

J . AV Programming Document Appendix 2.2-5

4. Code References

A. New J ersey Uniform Construction Code (NJ UCC)

B. NJ UCC subchapter 3 for listing of applicable subcodes and subcode sections


D. New J ersey Uniform Fire Code (subchapter 4 for retrofit requirements)

E. NEC requirements for line voltage and low voltage power and signal


Initial planning and preliminary design will be conducted thru the Office of Design &
Construction with the University department responsible for project initiation. As the project
moves toward the construction documentation and code review phases, it is required that the
project construction documents be submitted to the University for an internal Tech Team
review process thru the Office of Design and Construction for compliance with University
standards. Plans are to be submitted for review at:





E. At 100% completion of construction documents, if required, at the discretion of the Tech
Team

these meetings. There, review comments or recent revisions may be discussed and documented.
The Designers shall provide timely and coordinated responses to all review comments. The role
of the Tech Team review process is to confirm compliance with the current version of the
Facilities Design Standards Manual and each respective section and associated appendices.

6. Procedural Guidelines

In consultation with Media Services and the Project Manager, a decision must be made about the
level of AV and IT technology desired in the classroom/lecture facilities and in the building
itself.

The A/V program should be initiated and developed during schematic design of the building or
renovation project in the form of a Design Intent document. A needs assessment should be
performed with the Project Manager, and an evaluation of the effects those needs will have in
terms of space requirements and infrastructure demands. In this phase, the Project Manager acts
as the primary client and source of information, with support from the Manager of Media
Services. Depending on the level of connectivity, additional planning support may be provided
by Office of Information Technology, O.I.T.

In developing the program, compile a set of display parameters for the project. The parameters
should address room layout, optimal seating arrangement, lighting considerations, A/V display
and control standards, IT connectivity and methods for mounting, storing and securing all
equipment.

An AV Programming Document is to be created (see Appendix 2.2-6) listing the following at a
minimum per room
1. Owned by
2. Maintained by
3. Classroom Tier (if applicable)
4. Video Capabilities
5. Room Features
6. Ongoing maintenance, warranty and licensing requirements
This document is to be reviewed with the Project Manager, University AV/Classroom Planner,
Media Services, Broadcast Center, Architectural Engineer, Standards. It is also important to
review the document with the user/department so they are aware of which spaces where
ownership/maintenance will be their responsibility.


Along with the design documents, the Designer is to produce sufficient documentation to allow
for code review of the project and for contract bidding of the work. A/V system information will
have to be incorporated into the code review sets to an extent that allows the code review
agencies to ascertain that the proposed work meets code requirements, where they apply. This
typically will include all line voltage wiring and outlets, and diagrammatic layouts of any low
voltage power and signal wiring and raceway that falls under the purview of the National Electric
Code. Generally, the A/V consultant will provide the Electrical Engineer with this information,
which is then included in the electrical drawings prepared for review and pricing.

See Section 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) for requirements for code review and permits.

The A/V consultant will be expected to advise the A/E team on equipment and seating layout,
site lines and floor slopes for optimizing viewing; screen location, elevation, size, and
orientation; configuration of the projection booth, if one is to be included; and the
interconnection of equipment and control locations. Coordination of the equipment with the
structure and infrastructure is critical in producing a successful, sophisticated teaching facility.
For claritys sake, separate documentation should be included in the construction documents for
the A/V work. The equipment locations and power/control wiring, rack elevations, patch panel
details, connector plate details and mounting requirements, control diagrams, etc. should all be
shown on the A/V drawings. The A/V consultant will submit all conduit runs and sizes, floor-
and wall-box locations and sizes, grounding requirements and details, and power requirements to
the consulting Electrical Engineer for inclusion in the electrical construction documents in the
general construction bid set.

Any information on the necessary separation of power and A/V line wiring runs should be
included on both the A/V and electrical contract documents.

Clear information regarding responsibility for A/V system wiring and responsibility for
installation of raceways and line voltage systems is critical. Electrical contract drawings and A/V
contract drawings must be carefully coordinated by the consulting Electrical Engineer, the A/V
consultant, and the lead design consultant.

Requirements for specific areas of documentation are as follows:

Documentation SD DD 50% CD 85% CD
AV Design Intent X
AV Programming Document X X X
AV Basis of Design X
Space Requirements X X X
AV Functional Diagram X X
AV Plans Include notes,
symbols, finishes for the following:
Equipment Rack, Media
Equipment, Projection Screens,
Data/Video Projecto, Instructor
Location Receptacles, Stereo
Loudspeaker, Overhead Projector,
Other ( Rich Meadia, Video
recording, Cameras, etc.), Floor
Boxes, Lectern, Media Equipment
Cabinet, AV Touch panel Layout
X X X
Coordination Coordinate AV
Plans with the following:
Lighting, HVAC, Acoustics,
Security, Signage, Door Hardware
X
Details X
Outline Specifications X
Full-Length Specifications X X


8. Guidelines for Audio-Visual Equipment

A. General

1. Provide each A/V station (equipment rack, media cabinet, etc.) with a standard OIT
wiring bundle connections vary depending on tier (1-1/4 conduit, quad AC and 2
gang to OIT only). Floor box to be approved by Media Services, OIT, Project
Manager, University Classroom Architect and AV Consultant.

2. Provide dedicated power circuits for A/V equipment. All AV power circuits including
in floor boxes, at equipment racks, video projectors and flat-panel displays to be wired
on SAME PHASE at the electrical panel serving the space. If requested by the AV
consultant or Media Services, provide isolated grounding of AV circuits. Power
circuits are to be 120VAC and 20A, minimum.

3. In small classroom/seminar configurations where data/video projection is provided,
install desktop connections for A/V signal and control (AC power, data, laptop display
and audio and AV control connections). The location will depend on the room
configuration, the furniture size and layout, etc., which underscores the need for early
planning of the A/V and furniture systems.

B. Requirements for equipment

Media equipment should generally be:

1. Simplified AV Classroom (Tier 1)
The simplified AV classroom system is required where only laptop and occasional
portable video equipment display is required:
a. Ceiling-mounted data/video projector with security cable
i. Or a flat panel television
b. Motorized video projection screen
i. Or a flat panel television
c. Program and speech mounted speakers (where applicable)
d. Wall or floor box receptacles, conveniently located for:
i. Laptop (VGA) and composite video (HDMI) and audio connection to the
video projector
ii. Laptop Ethernet connection to Princeton LAN (OIT) at instructor location
iii. Duplex receptacle for laptop power via cable cubby
iv. Floor box, if required, for OIT, laptop interface and quad AC
e. Wall switch plate with projector and volume controls.
f. AV control system connection to Media Service RoomView and eControl remote
management systems.
g. 1 wall mounted clock
h. Optional, if requested:
i. 3M Overhead projector, 3000 ANSI lumens minimum, with standard lens and
rolling cart

2. Simplified AV Classroom (Tier 1A)
This simplified AV classroom system contains all the same components as Tier 1
rooms with the addition of the following:
i. Princeton-provided PC, mouse and keyboard (keyboard drawer required) with
a secure mounted screen at lectern or counter computer and screen furnished
by owner.
ii. Quad power receptacle at PC location
iii. FSR floor box as required for program (quad power at all floor boxes)
iv. Height adjustable lectern

3. Standard AV Classroom (Tier 2)
The standard AV classroom system is required where permanent source equipment is
required in addition to laptop and occasional portable video equipment display:
a. Ceiling or cabinet mounted data/video projector with security cable
b. Motorized video projection screen
c. Program and speech mounted speakers (where applicable)
d. Millwork media equipment cabinet housing:
i. AV equipment rack with storage drawer and AC surge protection
ii. Stereo audio amplifier
iii. AV control system/video router
iv. Security rack covers (i.e. program amp, AC surge protection)
v. Auxiliary RGB
vi. Networkable AC surge protection
vii. AV signal input/output plate
viii. Flash recorder
i. Quad power receptacle
e. Instructor location receptacles, conveniently located for:
i. Laptop (VGA) and two composite video (HDMI) and audio connection to the
video projector
ii. Laptop Ethernet connection to Princeton LAN (OIT)
iii. Quad power receptacle for laptop power
iv. AV control system with small touch panel, programmed to conform to
Princeton layout standard.
v. AV control system connection to Media Service RoomView and eControl
remote management systems.
vi. Floor box for OIT, laptop interface and quad AC
i. Princeton-provided PC, mouse and keyboard (keyboard drawer required) with
a secure mounted screen at lectern or counter computer and screen furnished
by owner.
vii. Height adjustable lectern, if applicable
f. Speech support sound system including wired and wireless microphones,
distributed loudspeakers flush-mounted in the ceiling. Under-balcony
loudspeakers may be required in some venues. Wireless microphones must
include at least two handheld and two lapel/belt pack microphone combos on
separate channels.
g. ADA-compliant assistive listening system, infrared type with full coverage to
entire audience area with transmitters for 4% of seat count, minimum.
h. Back of room connections:
i. Duplex receptacle for laptop power
ii. AV control system with small touch panel, programmed to conform to
Princeton layout standard.
iii. AV control system connection to Media Service RoomView and eControl
remote management systems
i. 1 wall mounted clock
j. Optional, if requested or appropriate:
i. 3M overhead projector, standard lens, 3000 ANSI lumens minimum, and
rolling cart
ii. FSR floor box as required for program (quad power at all floor boxes)

4. Lecture Hall (Tier 3)
A lecture hall AV system is required where speech support sound system is required.
Reference appendix 2.2-5: Recording System Standarization for Campus Lecture Hall
for more detailed information. A lecture hall configuration may include:
a. Lockable, sound-isolated projection booth with:
i. Independent HVAC zone and in-booth controls
ii. Dimmable track lighting over the counter
iii. Unobstructed sightlines to audience seating, front wall and teaching areas.
iv. Unobstructed sightlines for counter and ceiling-mounted projection equipment
with 6 standing clearance in front of booth.
b. Audio visual equipment at front of room location (rack or lectern).
c. Programmable light dimming system with multiple preset scenes and luminaire
zones coordinated with various front-wall projection screen and writing board
configurations. With owner (local) control/programming capacity of presets.
i. Classroom lighting requirements
ii. Broadcast Center lighting requirements
d. One or more data/Video projectors ceiling-mounted within the projection booth.
The brightness and resolution of the display(s) are to be determined by the AV
consultant or by specific request by the users.
e. Motorized video projection screen(s) flush-mounted in the ceiling. Wall-mounted
high-performance stereo loudspeakers
f. Speech support sound system including wired and wireless microphones,
distributed loudspeakers flush-mounted in the ceiling. Under-balcony
loudspeakers may be required in some venues. Wireless microphones must
include at least two handheld and two lapel/belt pack microphone combos on
separate channels.
g. ADA-compliant assistive listening system, infrared type with full coverage to
entire audience area with transmitters for 4% of seat count, minimum.
h. Rear-wall audio output receptacle
i. Height adjustable millwork lectern configured to accommodate:
ii. Wired gooseneck microphone
iii. Princeton-provided PC, mouse and keyboard (keyboard drawer required)
iv. Laptop audio and video connections (one VGA and two HDMI connections)
to the display system
v. Laptop power and data connections to the Princeton LAN (OIT)
vi. Intercom phone to the projection booth
vii. Reading lamp
viii. Clock/timer
ix. AV control system touch panel
x. FSR floor box(es) with connections as required for lectern connection to AV
system (quad power at all floor boxes)
xi. Wireless microphones, with designated storage location
j. AV equipment racks, housing:
i. CD player
ii. Digital audio recorder
iii. NTSC HD TV tuner
iv. Stereo and speech audio amplifier(s)
v. AV control system hardware
vi. Video amplification, routing, and processing equipment
vii. Rack plate (and patching if requested)
Video
a. Composite video in/out (BNC connectors)
b. Component video in/out (BNC connectors)
c. VGA input (VGA female)
d. VGA output (VGA male)
e. HDMI in/out
Audio
a. All connectors XLR unless noted
b. Inputs (female)/Outputs (male)
Line level program audio stereo inputs/outputs
Speech stereo line level output speech only
Stereo speech/program mix output
VGA input/output stereo mini
viii. Storage drawers
ix. Networkable AC surge protection
x. Wire management hardware
xi. Blu-ray DVD player
xii. UPS
k. AV control system with one or more large touch panels, programmed to conform
to Princeton layout and graphic standards. In addition to the AV controls
indicated in the Princeton standard, touch panels may require:
i. Video preview capability
ii. Computer viewing capability
iii. Control of lighting presets, motorized projection screens, drapery, shades and
writing boards, as determined by the Princeton project manager. University
AV/Classroom Planner, Media Services and the Broadcast Center.
l. AV control system connection to Media Service Room View and eControl remote
management systems.
m. 3M overhead projector, standard lens, 3000 ANSI lumens minimum and rolling
cart.
n. 2 wall mounted clocks
o. Analog line
p. Optional, if requested or appropriate:
i. Subwoofer and/or surround sound loudspeakers
ii. Infrastructure for 16mm film and 35mm slide projector(s)
iii. Digital document camera and cart
iv. Ceiling-mounted camera located in the ceiling above lab benches
v. Rich Media web recording and distribution system and associate a/v outputs
vi. Rear wall confidence monitors
vii. Auxiliary laptop, video, audio and AV control system connection locations
viii. Video recording capability and streaming (appendix 2.2-5)
ix. FSR floor box as required for program (quad power at all floor boxes)
x. 4 SHURE SM58 microphones, 4 stands and four XLR cables

5. Lecture Hall (Tier 3A)
This lecture hall contains all the same components as Tier 3 rooms with the addition
of the following video conference capability and any associated coordination items
(lighting, sound, layout)
Reference appendix 2.2-5: Recording System Standardization for Campus Lecture
Hall for more detailed information.

6. Specialty Rooms (can be Tier 4)
Specialty AV systems include spaces that do not fall into the types outlined above, and
generally include Tier 3 requirements in addition to:
a. Sound systems for theatrical or musical performance, background music, sound
masking, paging, intercom, or other specialized applications.
b. Display and sound systems for video conferencing, immersive or 3D
visualization, security monitoring, portable use, outdoor events, and digital
signage or recreational displays for student lounges, cafes, common areas, etc.
Specialty systems may have significant impact on the physical and architectural
design as well as the structural and electrical infrastructure and acoustical attributes of
the space (and building) and will require significant planning and design coordination
between the architect, structural, electrical, mechanical and audiovisual systems
engineers. To avoid unnecessary architectural redesign expenses, these systems must
be evaluated, programmed and budgeted during the schematic design phase.

7. Legacy Equipment
Infrastructure for legacy equipment (rack space, audio/video interfacing and routing,
power, conduit, junction boxes, and receptacles) must be provided where requested.
This includes:
a. 16mm and 35mm film projection
b. 35mm slide projection
c. Transparency overhead projection
d. Multi-region or NTSC VHS videotape display
e. Audio cassette playback
Designers can inquire about the availability of legacy devices and support with the
Princeton Media Services Department at (609) 258-2240.

8. Portable Equipment:
Portable equipment systems dedicated to a facility such as cart-based projection and
sound systems are discouraged. Portable equipment requires secure storage, is prone
to theft and abuse, and requires user expertise or technical support to operate. As such,
portable equipment may fall into disuse and is a generally poor investment.
Where no alternative exists, the Princeton Project Manager must assure that support
personnel are available to deliver, remove, manage and maintain the equipment as
needed by the users.

C. Projection Rooms (Tier 3/4)

During Schematic Design the layout of any projection rooms should begin. As the
project scope is developed, A/V equipment should be planned and enumerated, and the
projection room developed as well.

Except where room configuration prevents adequate space allotment to a projection area,
standard (front) projection is preferred to a rear projection system. The projection room
should have direct access to the room it serves.

Projection rooms become the operational center of a lecture facility, and virtually all
controls for systems should be in (or duplicated in) the projection room. Critical controls
must be near at hand to the projectionist. The projection room should include the
following systems and characteristics:

1. Lighting and controls

a. The projection room itself is to have two separate lighting systems, an energy efficient
system (lighting levels at floor level per IES and PU Standards) for work in the room,
and a dimmable system for use during projection. The dimmable system is typically a
track lighting system for maximum flexibility. Controls for this system need to be
near the projectionists work position.

b. The main dimming controls for the lecture room need to be in the projection room,
again near to the projectionists work position. The University standard for lecture
room dimming controls is Lutrons GraphicEye system.

The dimming panel itself need not be in the projection room and in fact will add to
the space required for the room and to the heat load in the room. If the dimming
panel is installed in the projection room, code-required clearances must be provided,
without impinging on space required for projection equipment.

Additional locations for lecture room dimming controls are near the lectern where
pre-set scenes and an on/off control should be provided, and at all entrances to the
room, where on/off controls should be installed. The preset scenes are to agreed upon
by the user, University AV/Classroom Planner, Media Services, Broadcast Center

The need for an emergency override switch for the lecture room system should be
reviewed with the Universitys code analyst; one location for such an emergency
switch should be at the projectionists work station.

2. HVAC and controls

The projection room needs adequate ventilation and cooling, both for the equipment
and for the operator. If feasible, the room should be on its own zone, with its own
controls. Cooling load calculations should include all equipment, panels, and controls,
and allowance for two operators.

3. Electrical provisions

All conduit and raceways for power and line/data/signal necessary for the A/V system
are to be provided and installed by the electrical subcontractor as part of the general
construction for the project.

Circuiting for projection room and equipment should be dedicated to that purpose. A
separate power panel for the room, placed in the room, should be considered. Circuits
should be provided with isolated ground to avoid the possibility of interference from
any other source in building.

The projection counter should be outfitted for its full length with plugmold, either
mounted above the counter or below with grommets or slots for equipment cords.

Controls for lighting, screen, any masking, and any window shades or draperies should
have manual overrides, both in booth and at speakers position.

If occupancy sensors are included, they should be designed to coordinate with room
use.

4. Connectivity (dependant on the equipment specified)
a. Ethernet connections to include, two at each equipment rack (verify counts may
need more than two), two at the counter and two at the lectern.
b. Campus TV connection for each TV tuner in projection room (Tier 3/4).
c. Campus telephone in projection room, near operating controls.

5. Glazing

Standard plate glass is to be used for projection room wall, sized to accommodate all
equipment in a side-by-side configuration. Tinted or laminated glazing should not be
used, due to complications with color rendition of projected images. Glazing should
be sloped to prevent reflection back to projectionist, without causing undue refraction
(approximately five degree slope toward projector). Cameras are never to be placed
behind glazing.

6. Finishes

a. Flooring: rubber tile is preferred; carpet is not an appropriate finish.

b. Ceiling: acoustic tile is preferred. Color may be muted, but not black. Lighting
used during projection should be positioned to avoid affecting the projected image
or the lecture space, and so reflection from the projection room is minimized
(reducing the need for dark colors in the projection room).

c. Walls: as with the ceiling, color may be muted, but not black. Light reflection
should be controlled during projection. It should be remembered that additional
time in a projection room will be spent in setting up equipment and presentation
material and, in maintaining equipment and in supporting recording production, so
it is important that the room function well as a work space as well as a projection
space.

d. Counters: counters should be wide enough to accommodate all planned
equipment set up side-by-side. Consideration should be given to the need for
additional equipment in the future. Counters must be deep enough to
accommodate the equipment installed on them, with additional depth to allow for
power plug configurations and any A/V connections and wire runs. Counters
should have provisions incorporated for wire management, including grommets
for wire penetrations, or finished wireway slots.

Counters must be strong enough to support equipment, and should be durable
enough to support those who might lean on it during equipment installation and
wire-up. Counter must be strong enough to prevent any shaking of image on
screen during projection.

Provide open storage under counter; provide adequate storage at or near counter
for equipment operating manuals.

Chairs in the space should match the situation (office/projection). Chairs of the
appropriate height with built in adjustability are preferred.

7. Equipment rack
Provide equipment racks to hold all AV equipment, routing and distribution, patch
panels, monitoring, storage drawers, etc. OSHA clearance of 30 behind stationary
racks to allow access for service and maintenance is required.


8. Miscellaneous features

a. Monitor speaker (sufficient to be heard over projector fan noise) so projectionist
can monitor sound quality in lecture room; speaker should be driven by ceiling
microphones, speech and program sources.

b. Coordinate equipment security with Media Services including specific lock and
keying requirements.

c. Audience microphones shall be controlled separately from podium microphones.

D. Lecterns

1. Sufficient area for open three-ring binder, microphone, lighting controls (if not wall
mounted), A/V and projection controls or velcro-mounted remote, laser pointer,
aimable lectern light and dimmer, clock timer, water glass or bottle. A duplex power
outlet should be mounted on the lectern, with a grommetted opening on the lectern top
to allow access to the outlet if it is mounted below.

2. Connectors for all accessories including designated storage locations.

3. Provisions for lectern computing (OFE) where room has A/V control system.

E. Power, A/V, and data boxes

Floor boxes are typically used to provide power and A/V connection to free-standing
furnishings such as lecterns and conference/discussion tables. To provide maximum
flexibility, several floor boxes are often provided to allow a variety of presentation
configurations at the front of a lecture facility.

Because of the need to separate line voltage outlets from low voltage and signal wiring,
and because of the need for maximum flexibility, the floor boxes are often quite large.
Space must be allowed within the box for the various plugs and connectors for power,
A/V, and data; A/V connections will be terminated in the floor box. The box must be
deep enough to allow the cover to close over the connectors and the necessary strain-
relief fittings needed on wires leaving the floor box. The requirements for services to the
floor boxes should be reviewed with Media Services, OIT, and Facilities Engineering to
insure that the correct type of box and the configuration is specified and shown on
electrical contract drawings.

The Designer must also review the need for physical separation of line and voice wiring
conduit runs from those for power or devices that might cause interference across the
lines. This separation requirement, and the proper floor box configuration and location,
must be coordinated in design and construction, to guarantee proper system operation at
occupancy.

F. Connectivity

The Designer should also be aware of, and should consult with the Project Manager on,
the need for providing power, data, and A/V connections at the various locations
depending on layout. Because of the complexity of the A/V requirements for lecture
facilities and projection rooms, it is mandatory that a coordination meeting be held with
all trades at construction kickoff to review the projection room layout and floor box
locations. The meeting will be set up by the construction manager, and attended by
general construction, HVAC, and electrical job superintendents, with the Universitys
Project Manager, and representatives of the Architect, the Design Engineer, and the A/V
consultant.

The trades will produce coordination drawings (including camera locations) for the
projection room and the presentation end of the room, under the construction managers
oversight. A second meeting will be held just prior to the start of rough-in for the
systems, with the same parties in attendance.

9. Warranty and Licensing

Warranty and licensing requirements to be discussed with University AV/Classroom Planner,
Media Services, Broadcast Center and the Users. All Information to be completed on the AV
Programming Document (See Appendix 2.2-6)

10. Requirements for Testing and Personnel Instruction

The AV Consultant is to submit the AV Master List Spread Sheet prior to testing (see appendix
2.2-3)

A final acceptance test will be conducted by the A/V consultant, with the installer and a
representative of Media Services and Broadcast Center present during testing.

Initial training of personnel in the operation of A/V equipment and systems will be conducted by
a qualified representative of the installer; subsequent training will be provided by Media
Services. Discuss any requirements for video recording of the training to be turned over to the
owner.

11. Requirements for As-Built Drawings and Project Closeout

The A/V consultant is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built drawings prepared by the
systems installer, the Electrical Subcontractor, and the Construction Contractor.

The A/V consultant is responsible, at regular intervals during the construction process, for
scheduling and attending meetings with the A/V installer, the Construction Contractor and
University personnel to review progress on the system and to ascertain that the contractor is
keeping accurate records of system installation. The A/V consultant will verify during these
regular meetings that the contractor is maintaining record drawings to convert to as-builts.

See Appendix 2.2-1 and Section 1.5 (Documentation and Archiving).

END OF DOCUMENT

2.3 Classroom and Conference Room Design

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.3 Class /Conf Rms - page 1

1. Introduction

Classrooms, meeting rooms, seminar rooms and public spaces are the heart of Princeton
Universitys mission. The Designer must be aware of the needs of the particular users, the ways
the room will and might be used, and the technical needs of the department involved and the
technical requirements of the space itself.

2. Contacts

Grounds and Building Maintenance Department, or as applicable).

B. University AV/Classroom Planner see Project Manager

C. Manager, Media Services New South, 609-258-2240

D. Chair, Faculty Committee on Classrooms
and Schedule (through Project Manager)

E. Manager, OIT Network Installation 171 Broadmead, 609-258-6015

PDF AutoCAD
A. Illuminating Engineers Society of North
America, website www.iesna.org

B. Princeton University, media
Equipped rooms http://www.princeton.edu/mediaservices/media-rooms/

C. Drawing of Typical Lecture Room
Lectern, Office of Design and Construction Appendix 2.3-1 Appendix 2.3-1

D. Drawing of Typical Classroom Media
Equipment Cabinet Appendix 2.3-2 Appendix 2.3-2

E. Audio Visual Touch Panel Layout Appendix 2.2-2

F. 2008 Teaching Space Master Plan Appendix 2.3-4

G. Recording System Standardization
for Campus Lecture Halls Appendix 2.2-4

H. AV Programming Document Appendix 2.2-5

4. Code References




D. NJ UCC subchapter 7 for requirements for accessibility

E. New J ersey Uniform Fire Code (subchapter 4 for retrofit requirements)

F. See Section 1.4 Regulatory Agencies for additional information



A. During the Programming Phase





F. At 100% completion of construction documents, if required, at the discretion of the Tech
Team

Note that at 85% completion the Designer should submit representative lighting calculations for
review, including horizontal calculations for instructional rooms, and vertical readings for
chalkboards, etc.


appendices.


Early in the programming phase of the project, the Project Manager will review the proposed
project with the University Registrar. Often before inception of a project, an academic
department will have made requests and recommendations to the Registrar, so that there is a clear
idea of how many Registrar classrooms will be needed, the sizes, and the types. The Faculty
Committee on Classrooms and Schedule, working through the Provosts Office, has University-
wide responsibility for classroom space on campus, and will provide oversight in the
programming phase. The Project Manager, with the Designer, should meet with the Registrar to
confirm the requirements for classroom space in preliminary programming. The Project Manager,
with the Designer should also ascertain the Departments required non-Registrar spaces.

The Project Manager remains the Designers primary contact and source of information. The
PS-18
Project Manager will involve other University sources in the project, including the University
AV/Classroom Planner in the Office of Design and Construction, the project representatives for
the Facilities Engineering Department, and Media Services and OIT personnel.

Meetings with the academic department/end user, Registrar, Media Services and the University
AV/Classroom Planner for the project will be arranged by the Project Manager.


Along with the Design Drawings, the Designer is to produce sufficient documentation to allow
for code review of the project and for contract bidding of the work. See Section 1.4 (Regulatory
Agencies) for requirements for code review and permits.

In addition to the documentation required for the permitting and construction of the project, the
Designer will (if specified in the contract for services) provide bidding documents for fixed
furniture and for the audio-visual systems in the building. These should be separate documents
prepared with the furniture and A/V consultants and coordinated with the electrical contract
documents (for conduit runs, junction and floor box selection and placement, lighting, power,
etc.). See Sections 2.2 (Audio-Visual Standards) and 2.5 (Furnishings, Fixtures, and Equipment)
for additional information.


Class/Conf Rm Design Intent X
Class/Conf Rm Basis of Design X
Space Requirements X X X
AV Programming Document X X X
Projection Booth - Coordinate
requirements early
X X X X
Class/Conf Rm Plans Include
notes, symbols, finishes for the
following: Furnishing, Equipment
Rack, Projection Screens,
Chalkboards, Lighting, Floor
Boxes, Lectern, Media Equipment
Cabinet.
X X X
Coordination - Coord. Plans with
the following: Lighting, HVAC,
Acoustics, Security, Signage, Door
Hardware
X
Details X

8. Guidelines for Classroom Design

A. General Approach

Classrooms in the project should be the primary focal point of the Designer. Meeting
the educational goals of the academic department and those for the project should be the
guiding principle for the Designer. There are 2 types of classrooms on campus: Registrar
controlled rooms and Non-Registrar controlled rooms.

Rooms discussed under this section will be typical instructional and lecture spaces.
Specialized facilities, such as laboratory classrooms, should be reviewed with the Project
Manager and the academic department/client to determine programmatic needs and
parameters.

There are different requirements for rooms depending on whether seating is to be fixed or
movable, and also depending on the educational and/or departmental approach to be used in
the room. Detail is extremely important to the success of a space; it is incumbent upon the
Designer to ascertain the needs of the various room types in a project, to thoroughly
understand the requirements for the systems to be incorporated into the rooms, and to detail
the space around those needs and requirements.

Area requirements are affected by the teaching style anticipated for the room; the Designer
must ascertain and understand the users needs. Is the room to be used in a straight-on
instructional style?; is it to be an interactive classroom?; is it to be a collaborative
arrangement?; are preceptorials held in the space?

B. Space Requirements

1. Area/Volume

As a rule of thumb, if an instructional space is to have fixed seating it will require 15
square feet of space per student (not including space required for A/V or other
specialized equipment). If a classroom is to be provided with moveable seating the
minimum area allowance per student rises to between 20 and 25 square feet for
typical instructional space and between 25 and 30 square feet for seminar or
preceptorial use. (In preliminary design it may prove useful to establish target
standards of 25 to 30 square feet per student in typical classrooms and to aim as high
as 50 square feet per student in media-rich facilities.)

If possible, instructional rooms should have a minimum ceiling height of 10-6. This
will allow inclusion of indirect lighting in the space, with proper throw for the fixture
and clearance from the floor. Larger rooms should allow for proper proportioning of
rooms, of course, for aesthetic as well as acoustic considerations.

2. Layout

a) Instructive: generally designed with seating facing a podium, lectern, or
instructors desk;

b) Collaborative: laid out in an open circular, elliptical, rectangular, or U-shaped
fashion;

c) Interactive: laid out in a variety of shapes, with groupings of two or more seats at
a common workstation.

Allow adequate space in the front of each classroom for the instructor and for
overhead projection.

3. Location/Orientation

Classrooms should not be isolated in a building but should be near or on public spaces
such as lobbies and major hallways. Amenities such as bathrooms should be nearby.

Classrooms should be oriented to take advantage of natural lighting (with
consideration for controlling sunlight and glare). Operable windows are desirable but
must be in conformance with the intent of the project and space, and must be
accounted for in the HVAC design.

It is preferred to have room entrances located away from the front of classrooms;
students arriving late should be able to sit down without disrupting class in progress.
In large lecture halls, the use of an entry vestibule is desirable to control external
noises and light.

C. Finishes

Acoustic considerations should be the primary concern in finishes for classrooms.
Acoustic control between classrooms is also important, so that sound transmission
classification (STC) ratings of structural components and finishes should be taken into
account when selecting materials and systems.

1. Walls and Doors
There is no standard wall material or finish, but the Designer must remember that the
facility needs to be finished in a way that allows for normal cleaning, upkeep, and
maintenance. See Section 4.9 (Painting) for additional information. Chair rail trim is
encouraged where moveable tablet-arm chairs are to be used, or where stacking chairs
provide extra seating in a room.

The Designer should attempt to incorporate breaks, reveals, or other architectural
details to divide large expanses of painted surface, particularly in the vertical direction.
This is especially true in high traffic areas, areas using high pigment paints, or
locations that are especially subject to abuse.

Doors into classrooms should be provided with vision panels to allow students to see if
room is in use.

2. Floors

In smaller classrooms, it is common to use vinyl composition tile, linoleum, or carpet.
Proximity to the building entrance and out-of-doors may affect the choice between
carpet or tile. Carpet is common in lecture rooms; the Designer must detail material
interfaces where carpet meets floor, where carpet runs to or under seating, and at fixed
equipment such as lecterns (with A/V and power outlet receptacles), etc. The Designer
must make an informed decision based on the use of the space, anticipated traffic
patterns, type of substrate, frequency of cleaning and maintenance and ease of
replacement; all these factors must be taken into consideration.

In larger spaces, detail the location of carpet seams carefully to avoid the possibility of
ragged edges and subsequent problems with upkeep and excessive wear. If a section
of the carpet must be replaced, the seaming should not be immediately obvious.

3. Ceilings

Concern for proper acoustics should prevail in selection of ceiling materials. For
acoustic tile ceilings, the overwhelming preference is for suspended lay-in ceilings,
2x2 or 2x4. Concealed-spline ceilings should not be specified, unless there is a special
condition that must be accounted for; review with the Project Manager and the
Director of Maintenance before including concealed-spline ceilings in a project.
Generally, concealed spline ceilings are appropriate only in locations without ceiling
access requirements.

With the increasing importance of A/V and data systems in classrooms (and the
emergent nature of the technologies involved), the Designer is encouraged to create
terminal points that are as flexible as possible. Serious consideration should be given
to under-floor access for boxes serving A/V, data, and power at locations such as
lecterns. If the classroom is above grade level, this access can be provided from the
ceiling below, provided the ceiling is not constructed with fine finishes which cannot
be disturbed.

D. Furnishings

1. Seating

Seating should be relatively comfortable, should be durable and easily maintained, and
should be replaceable, without extraordinary effort.

Classrooms will typically be fitted with tablet arms; the tablets should be oversized, if
possible. Seminar seating may be armchairs or be armless, depending on space
constraints and registrar and/or departmental preference. Fixed lecture seating will
typically include retractable tablet arms, preferably oversized. Laminate facing is
preferred on the tablets (not veneer), and painted edges to exposed plywood. At least
10% of tablets should be positioned for left-hand use.

When using fixed furniture, include required spacing provisions from the New J ersey
Uniform Construction Code. Leave spaces, with companion seats, to meet the
requirements of New J erseys barrier-free subcode, and attempt to comply with federal
ADA requirements. See Section 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) for additional information.
Provide 5% Attic stock for tablets, brackets, seat springs, etc.

2. Tables

Tables may be fixed or movable, depending on the way any required power or data
connections are to be handled. Tables that integrate power and data must be
thoroughly reviewed by the Universitys OIT office and approved prior to inclusion in
a project. Method of delivering power and data to tables, and the distribution details
involved, must also be reviewed with OIT. Tables that include infrastructure wiring
(i.e.: instructors table) must be mounted to the floor.

For seminar or conference use, provide a minimum of twenty-seven to thirty inches of
table length per person. Typically a residential college seminar room requires seating
capacity for 15 students plus one instructor (at head of table). For department seminar
rooms, the requirements may be more lenient.

3. Lectern and Equipment Cabinets

While the lectern may be seen by the Designer as a focal point in a small lecture
facility and as an interesting design opportunity, first and foremost the lectern must
serve its function. Likewise, the projection booth for a lecture facility, and the
equipment cabinet provided many classrooms must operate properly. See Drawings
for lectern, and for equipment cabinet, Appendices 2.3-1 and 2.3-2. See Section 2.2
(Audio-Visual Standards) for additional information.

If applicable, make sure the lecturn/equipment cabinet accomodates the wiring and
ventilation requirements of all equipment being housed within. Coordination of all
cutout within the lecturn or equipment cabinet is important. Coordinate with Media
Services as well as the AV Consultant during design as well as shop drawing phases of
the project.

4. Chalkboards, marker boards, display boards

Requirements for instructional boards should be reviewed with the Project Manager,
the Architect/Planner for Classrooms, and with the academic department or Registrars
Office. The Designer must coordinate the locations and installation of chalkboards
with any projection screens planned for the project. Installation of chalkboards is the
standard practice in classrooms, seminar rooms, and lecture halls. Markerboards
cannot be properly maintained by the Registrars Office, and thus are generally not
used.

A typical coordination sketch should be prepared, including switch locations for
lighting and screens, and any A/V controls and data and communications outlets.

Fixed boards are a non-proprietary product, and can be provided by Claridge,
Greensteel, etc. Sliding chalkboards are to combine a fixed board and a single slider
(unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager) and are to be supplied by
Educational Equipment of Ohio.

Black or charcoal color is standard; provision of map rail is to be at direction of
Project Manager.

5. Projection screens

Screens for video, data, slide, and film projection should be specified by the
Audio/Visual consultant, but should be included in general construction specifications
for installation by the builder. Screen location, quantity and size must be coordinated
with chalkboards and pendant light fixture mounting heights.

6. Window treatment

Review need for sunlight filtering in classrooms, and for room darkening for
projection. Standard room darkening shades are produced by Mecho Shade or equal,
and may be manual or motorized; if motorized, coordinate controls with A/V
equipment locations and instructors furnishings.

E. Lighting

1. General

Lighting should be even across the room, with a maintained light level per IES and PU
Standards on the work surface. A combination of lighting zones, dimmable fixtures,
and controlled daylight in the room is ideal. Fixtures should control glare and should
not produce veiled reflection in the room or on equipment. Indirect/direct fixtures are
favored.

If a room is multi-functional, take into account in the lighting design the various tasks
that are to occur in the different sectors of the room.

If a space has a ceiling above 12 in height, the project team shall review all access
requirements for light fixture maintenance and incorporate any fixed requirements
such as access panels, cat walks, etc. into the documents.

Emergency lighting shall be installed in each classroom with occupancy of more than
50 people.

If a classroom has multiple entrances, provide switches (and occupancy sensors, if
applicable) for ease of access at each entrance.

Lighting should always be on in the vestibules adjacent to larger classrooms.

2. Chalkboards

Chalkboards should be lit to produce lighting levels per IES and PU Standard, across
the board, without glare or bounce.

3. Special Features

Much of the public space lighting on the University campus is controlled by
occupancy sensors. Typically, at least one light in a space will not be controlled by
the sensor but will be on an emergency circuit (review this requirement in rooms that
are to be totally blacked out for projection). The occupancy sensor is to be wired so
that it can be bypassed with a conventional light switch. If occupancy sensors are to
be included in a project, the operation should be carefully coordinated with the room
use.

Review the need for daylight control and for blackout capability in classrooms.

4. Lighting Types

For instructional spaces (as with interior lighting in general) energy efficient lighting is
standard for Princeton. Indirect/direct lighting is preferred for its even quality. For
any needed downlighting or highlighting, energy efficient fixtures are preferred over
incandescent.

To minimize the need for storing a large variety of replacement tubes and bulbs,
Designers should attempt to use two- and four-foot tubes as a standard, and PL tubes
with a common base configuration throughout a project.

If fluorescent tubes are selected, consider similar lamp types and bases. Programmable
start electric ballasts are standard and, where applicable, should be dimmable to 10%
without flickering.

5. Lighting Controls

In general, the Designer should attempt to provide for separately-controlled lighting
over the seating area of a classroom or lecture room, over the display end of the room,
and for presentation areas such as lecterns, podiums, daises, etc. Lighting at the
display end should be zoned for multi-media presentations allowing for a variety of
chalkboard and projection scenarios.

Adequate lighting for safety should be controlled at entrances to rooms, with system
controls at the instructors position and at the A/V operators position, if the room is
provided with fixed equipment. Lighting should be zoned, where applicable for
increased media sophistication. Lighting over seating should be sufficient for taking
notes during media presentations.

The Designer should review the need for lighting control with the Project Manager; the
standard control is a Lutron GraphicEye, typically providing four preset lighting
scenes.

F. Power

The design team is to provide adequate power for general use and for audio/visual
equipment needs in classrooms. The Designer should also be aware of, and should
consult with the Project Manager on, the need for providing power and data outlets at
each fixed seat in new and renovated lecture facilities and to classroom furniture such as
seminar tables.

G. Equipment

Audio/Visual equipment should be specified by the Audio/Visual consultant; the
Designer must coordinate construction Drawings - Architectural, Electrical, and HVAC
in particular - to provide the necessary and proper shell and support for the physical
installation of equipment. Special care should be taken to provide adequate and clean
power for equipment, flexible and effective raceway and conduit for A/V, data, and
communication lines throughout the facility, code-required clearances and proper
operating areas for equipment, and adequate cooling and ventilation for equipment and
operator loads.

Control of lighting and any light control features within the classroom is also important;
see Section 2.2 (Audio-Visual Standards) for information.

H. HVAC

The design team must provide adequate heating, cooling, and fresh air to classroom
lecture spaces and control booths, and must do so without intruding on the classroom
mission. Careful selection and placement of equipment, and attention to the design of
delivery systems are important to the success of instructional spaces.

I. Acoustics

Design team should use ANSI standard S12.60-2002 titled Acoustical Performance
Criteria, Design Requirement, and Guidelines for Schools as a guideline. This
benchmark for acoustical performance is as follows:

CLASSROOMS Background Noise Level Reverberation Time at 500
Hz, 1 kHz, and 2 kHz
Less than
10,000 ft
3

Less than 35 dBa

Less than 0.6 seconds
Between 10,000
And 20,000 ft
3

Less than 35 dBa

Less than 0.7 seconds
Greater than
20,000 ft
3

Less than 35 dBa

Not applicable
Regarding background noise levels, the following limits should be adhered to:
<L35 dBa new classrooms, NC 30.
35-42 dBa renovated classrooms, NC 30-35.

J . Security

Review the need for security control of classrooms with Project Manager. The University
employs access control, as part of a campus-wide system, at the entrances of many of its
buildings, and to some interior spaces as well. Consider A/V equipment requirements
when reviewing classroom security.

K. Signage

Determine the signage requirements for the space. Note the University has a no eating /
drinking policy for its classrooms and should be taken into account for the signage
package.

9. Requirements for As-Built Drawings

The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built Drawings prepared by the
construction contractor and any systems installer.

The Designer is responsible, at regular intervals during the construction process, for scheduling
and attending meetings with the contractor and University personnel to review progress on the
system and to ascertain that the contractor is keeping accurate records of system installation.
Designer will verify during these regular meetings that the contractor is maintaining record
Drawings to convert to as-builts.
See Section 1.5 (Documentation and Archiving).
END OF DOCUMENT
2.4 D0rmitory Design

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.4 Dorm Design - page 1

1. Introduction

Princeton University has over forty undergraduate dormitory buildings, built between 1886 and
the present in a wide variety of Architectural styles and configurations. There are six residential
colleges on campus, designed for freshman and sophomore housing and social accommodations.
The residential colleges account for more than half the undergraduate population, with over three
thousand bed spaces in thirty three dormitories. Upperclass housing accounts for the balance of
the undergraduate dorms, with just under two thousand bed spaces in thirteen dormitories.

Graduate student housing consists of approximately one hundred eighty seven bed spaces within
the original Graduate College. The complex known as the New Grad College houses an
additional two hundred thirty- six students. There are also a number of wood-frame housing
annexes for approximately eighty-eight graduate students and thirty upperclass students.

The Designer should be aware that undergraduate dormitories are occupied by students nine
months of the year, while graduate dormitories are occupied year-round. Undergraduate
dormitories also provide housing for summer events and sports camps, so access for survey and
planning purposes must be coordinated with the Housing and Real Estate Services and
Conference and Event Services during summer months. (Note that italics will be used to indicate
statements that apply only to dormitory renewal design work.)

2. Contacts



C. Associate Director for Student Housing New South Building, 609-258-2517

D. Deputy Director of Housing Operations New South Building, 609-258-1908

E. University Architect MacMillan Building, 609-258-3356

F. Director of Facilities Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5472

G. Associate Director of Grounds
and Building Maintenance MacMillan Building, 609-258-3591

H. University Fire Marshall 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-6805

I. CAD Archivist MacMillan Building, 609-258-1838

PDF AutoCAD
A. Existing Conditions Reports (for dorm
renewal process, by various consultants) Consult Project Manager

B. Dormitory Renovation Study,
Volumes I & II, dated J anuary 2000 Appendix 2.4-1

C. Standard 36 Month PERC Schedule,
Office of Design and Construction Appendix 2.4-2
D. Master Fire Alarm Technical Specification Appendix 3.4-1
E. Memo: Standard Dormitory Paint Colors Appendix 2.4-3
F. Fire Alarm/Signage Nomenclature
Spreadsheet Sample, Princeton University Appendix 2.8-2

G. Plan of Minimum 4-person suite size
for a University Dormitory Appendix 2.4-4 Appendix 2.4-4
H. Shower Base Installation Detail Appendix 4.13-3 Appendix 4.13-3
I. Typical Full Service Graduate Student
Suite Kitchenette Appendix 2.4-5 Appendix 2.4-5
J . PU Fire Extinguisher Use Matrix Appendix 3.8-2

4. Code References

E. International Building Code (in edition adopted and modified by NJ UCC); dormitories
are typically R-2 use group
F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Handbook
G. NFPA 13, 13R - Sprinkler System Installation Guidelines
H. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code
I. See 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) for additional information

5. Review Guidelines General

Construction with the Housing and Real Estate Services. As the project moves toward the
construction documentation and code review phases, it is required that the project construction
documents be submitted to the University for an internal Tech Team review process thru the
Office of Design and Construction for compliance with University standards.

For dormitory renewal projects, planning begins at least two years in advance of construction.
Planning for new construction may take a similar course. As the project moves toward the
construction documentation and code review phases, it becomes important that the project be
reviewed with the Housing and Real Estate Services, the Engineering Department, the Grounds
and Building Maintenance Department, the Office of Design and Construction, Office of the
University Architect, Conference Services, the Department of Public Safety and to any
department affected by the work.

For new dormitory projects, and for the dorm renewal program, each project has a specific
review committee. The committee is made up of representatives from the Office of the
PS-20
University Architect, Office of Design and Construction, the Facilities Engineering Department,
Grounds and Building Maintenance, the Housing and Real Estate Services, and the office of the
Vice President for Facilities. Additionally, committee members come from the Office of the
Dean of Undergraduate Student Life and from the Office of the Vice President and General
Counsel for the University.

Meetings are held regularly during the pre-construction phase of a dormitory design project. All
decisions regarding programming and design require a consensus of the full representation of the
review committee.

After preliminary design is complete, additional departments may be brought into the design
development and construction planning phases. Departments such as Public Safety, Dining
Services, and Building Services may be included in the review process, and may act as in-house
consultants for specific aspects of the project.

During this pre-construction phase mockups are constructed (and may include complete full-
scale models of rooms) to aid the review committee in selecting room finishes and accessories,
window types, light fixtures, heating units, piping enclosures, etc. Every visible finish and
system component is designed, constructed, tested, and reviewed. Mockups are also used to test
the effectiveness of cleaning methods on building stone and other finishes to remain in place. A
significant amount of effort is necessarily put into the design and documentation of mockups, for
they are the tools that lead to final design decisions and to the aesthetic that ultimately forms the
project. Mockups are typically constructed during the summer of the year prior to the projects
construction start date, and lead into final construction documentation for the project.

During the process of design, plans are to be submitted for review by Facilities departments at:
Team

meetings will be held with respective University shops, University Project Engineers, Housing,
and other Tech Team representatives as required. The A/E is responsible for documenting
minutes of all these meetings. There, review comments or recent revisions will be discussed and
documented. The Designers shall provide timely and coordinated responses to all review
comments. The purpose of the Tech Team review process is to confirm A/E compliance with the
current version of the Facilities Design Standards Manual including each respective section and
associated appendices.

6. Procedural Guidelines - Approach to Regulatory Agencies

During preliminary design, Designer is to consult with University Project Manager to ascertain
the probable need for site plan and zoning approvals. Altering the outside of the building often
triggers the need for community review. Exterior alterations to buildings may require local
zoning/planning review and approval. Consult with Project Manager and see description of
zoning and planning issues in Section 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies).

During the early stages of design the Designer is to consult with the Project Manager and the
Universitys Code Analyst to define code strategies and to discuss any code interpretations that
might affect the project. Some design decisions may require relief from strict code requirements
as interpreted by the State and local code reviewers. The design team is responsible for
formulating the relief request (variation or variance) and providing support documentation for the
request, including any alternatives for providing life safety in lieu of code conformance.


for code review of the project and for contract bidding of the work. Preparation of contract
specifications is to be done in conjunction and in cooperation with the Universitys Contracts
Office.

See Section 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) for requirements for code review and permits, including
the organization of construction Drawings and documents for timely release of permits.

8. Considerations for Dormitory Design

A. General Approach

1. In new construction and in dormitory renewal projects, providing opportunities for
interaction between students and facilitating the development of a feeling of collegial
unity is encouraged. However, the mix of social spaces with living spaces, the density
of bed spaces in living spaces, the inclusion of educational spaces in a dormitory, and
the type and number of support/utility spaces in a dorm, along with other design
considerations, is highly dependent upon the purpose the dormitory serves.

In residential colleges, the density within units is typically higher; a higher percentage
of space may be given over to social and educational programs within the building;
and service-type spaces may be shared among a group of buildings. Consideration is
given to the provision in each college of communal study space, lounge, kitchenette,
game and vending room, and a variety of arts-related rooms such as theater, music roo.
The design review committee will provide direction for the Designer regarding the mix
of spaces.

In upperclass dormitories the individuals living space is typically larger (in terms of
square feet per occupant) than in the residential colleges, and providing a variety of
living arrangements is a desirable goal. Single-occupancy rooms are popular, with
two-room doubles and three-room quads sought after as well. Students are typically
self-directed in their studies at this point and, for some, privacy for work is an
overriding concern. Along with providing a wide choice of living arrangements, each
upperclass dormitory will typically contain a full complement of service and support
spaces such as laundry, kitchen, and lounge.

The Graduate College dormitory buildings at Princeton serve much the same function
as the residential college dorms, although the independence and relative maturity of
graduate students affect design considerations.

2. The initial step in a dormitory renewal project is to determine a preliminary scope of
work and to conduct a full-scale survey of the building. This survey should be
performed after discussions with the Project Manager and the Universitys Grounds
and Building Maintenance Department, to assemble available information on systems
in the building, and to gain insight on any known defects in a building. In interviews
prior to surveying a building, the Designer can be advised of any environmental issues
that might affect the project; see section 10 below for additional information on this
subject. A report on existing conditions is produced from the survey, including
information on the building finishes, envelope, and systems. The report will be
presented to the review committee, which may make suggestions for revisions or
modifications before a final version of the report is produced.

The report is used as a tool to develop the building program and to guide the
professional in the schematic design process. Input from the design review committee
is critical at this point in the process. The committee will prescribe the desired bed
count, the mix of singles, doubles, and quads, the bathroom fixture ratio, etc.
Additional survey work may be needed to measure critical areas after initial planning
and design is completed. Some core samples of building systems may be required to
ascertain existing construction, and investigative demolition might be carried out in
this effort.

Because space is at a premium in dormitories, it is important during the early phases
of design that thought is given to capturing underutilized space in the building --
basement or attic space that can be economically converted to living or social spaces
without the cost of constructing foundation and shell.

3. After schematic plans are approved by the review committee, the Designer is to
provide a furniture layout plan, which will be used to develop the design of electrical
and mechanical systems in the dorm rooms. This step is important in developing plans
for new construction as well as in dormitory renewal.

As electrical and mechanical systems are developed for the building (with the chases,
duct shafts, etc. that these systems require), the Designer will need to coordinate the
mechanical systems with the furniture layout. The intent is to produce a plan that
integrates building systems into the overall layout, without sacrificing utility and
comfort to aesthetics, or vice versa. The review committee will be presented with the
final building layout and furniture plan for approval before the project is carried into
the Construction Documentation Phase.

4. Room Numbering Requirements

It is the intent of all projects to have permanent room numbers assigned during the
Design Development Phase. It is the responsibility of the Designer to initiate and
complete this process, and the Project Managers responsibility to gather required
approvals. All Drawings shall reference the University approved final room number
system.

See Appendix 2.8-2 for a sample spreadsheet for coordinating this process and
Appendix 1.5-3 for room/space numbering system guidelines.

SD-38
B. Exterior

1. Accessibility
Some of Princetons dormitories were originally designed in ways that make it nearly
impossible to provide barrier-free access to all parts of a building. Nevertheless, one
of the goals of the dorm renewal projects is to create accessible routes to as many
dormitory spaces as is reasonably possible, and to create accessible social and
support spaces. (See Accessibility Section 2.1)

The project review committee will advise the Designer on the level of accessibility
desired in the project, based on options presented by the Designer and influenced by
campus-wide accessibility needs.

Code minimums must be met for accessible and adaptable units within a dormitory,
code requirements for mounting heights of switches and controls are to be met by the
design, and placement of special devices such as audible-base detectors and strobe
alarms are to be carefully planned. For more technical information see Section 3.4
(Fire Alarms).

2. Safety/Security
Consideration for both vehicular and foot traffic is to be given to the routes into and
along buildings, so that cul-de-sacs and dead-ends are eliminated. (The same
considerations should apply to interior circulation.)

Exterior lighting should be sufficient to provide safety and security to passers-by and
to building occupants. NJ UCC/ICC code requires emergency lighting of egress paths
on the exterior of dormitories.

In addition, handrails are to be installed at site stairs, where required.

Refer to procedures within Section 2.7, Security for the Security Programming
Document.

3. Site Accessories
Card access and telekey phones (where required) are to be installed at dormitory
entries. See Section 3.1 (Access Control Standards). The Designer is to consult with
the Project Manager to assess the need for exterior emergency phones.

Consideration should be given to site furnishings, particularly bike racks, picnic
tables, benches, shuttle stops, bollards, etc.

4. Finishes

Exterior finishes are of paramount importance in the perception of the quality of
buildings at Princeton University. The exterior envelope of the dorm should be
studied carefully during the building survey, and the existing conditions report should
concisely describe the findings of the survey.

Envelope components that must be considered in the study include walls, copings,
parapets, chimneys, and decorative and trim masonry; flashings, gutters, leaders,
leader boxes and roof; windows, louvers and vents, doors, door accessories, entry
steps, handrails, and paving.

5. Site Utilities

When a building is a candidate for renewal, the Facilities Engineering Department
may decide to take the opportunity to replace services into the building or site utilities
near the building. New buildings also require extensive investigation for utility work.
The Designer will be asked to enumerate and evaluate the utility loads for heating,
cooling, electrical, and similar systems in new and renewal work, as well as the
effects on water supply, sanitary, and storm lines on and around the site. The
Designer will need to coordinate the efforts required for documentation, review and
construction of this work, and may be requested by the Engineering Department to
provide design services for the utility work. See Section 3.6 (Utilities Guidelines).

C. Interior Circulation

Interior circulation must provide reasonable access to all areas of the dorm and must, at a
minimum, meet the requirements of the building and life-safety codes in effect in New
J ersey see Section 1.4 (Regulatory Codes).

1. Entries

Entries must be carefully and skillfully treated to enhance the Designers intent.

The Designer should integrate a number of standard elements into the design for each
entry. These include:

a) Card access on entry doors (see Section 3.1 Access Control Standards). Door
entry hardware (VonDuprin rim-type panic device) is modified to incorporate
electric release mechanism, or interlocked electric strike
b) Scrub mats or walk-off mats at the entrance, in a durable, cleanable, easily
maintained material; the design should feature mats which can be easily replaced
and slip resistant. See Appendix 2.4-5
c) Message boards, such as tackboards (meeting code requirements for finishes); a
variation on the standard types may be developed, either metal-framed or trimmed
in wood.
d) Specify durable, cleanable wall and floor finishes.

2. Stairs

a) There is no standard stair material. The Designer may choose a durable and
inherently safe material from wood to stone, to reflect the building aesthetic.
b) Doors and hardware must meet code requirements for size, operation, fire rating,
and temperature rise. Doors and frames should be of a durable construction to
withstand the wear and tear of daily use by students and custodial staff. Smoke
detector-activated hold-open devices are often used on stair/corridor doors to
reduce wear and tear, and to create a more open appearance.
Princeton University standard hardware set for stair doors leading to corridors is a
cylindrical passage set by Best Locking Systems; Precision non-electromechanical
panic devices are standard for interior stairwell doors and, as noted above,
VonDuprin or Precision (access-controlled) panic devices are the standard for
exterior entry doors. Refer to Section 4.4 (Door Hardware) for additional details.
c) Guards, balusters, and handrails should be designed consistent with safety codes
to enhance the finished appearance of the stairway.
d) Specify durable wall and floor finishes that are easily maintained.
e) Meet minimum lighting requirements, including exit and emergency lighting (for
required distance area to refuge); use lighting to enhance design.
f) Dry standpipes are preferred as a fire safety feature but may not be required in
all cases. In a dormitory renewal project, a Designer should assume that, if
standpipes existed in the building prior to the renewal project, standpipes will be
required as part of the renewal work.

If including a standpipe in the building presents a major problem (due to space
constraints, e.g.) the University may appeal to the State to remove the standpipe.
The decision to file an appeal requires the approval of the AVP for Facilities,
Design and Construction and the AVP for Facilities, Plant.

Those buildings that do not have a pre-existing standpipe can be evaluated on a
case-by-case basis. The AVP for Facilities, Design and Construction and the
AVP for Facilities, Plant will make the final decision on the inclusion of
standpipes in such a case.

All dormitory standpipes will be dry systems charged using a post-indicator valve
located near the fire department connection outside the building.

g) Fire Extinguishers The design of the fire extinguisher in hallways/corridors shall
be incorporated with the overall stair design and enclosed in a fire-rated cabinet as
required. See Appendix 3.8-2

3. Hallways/corridors

a) Specify durable wall and floor finishes; research requirements for fire ratings in
corridors, provide listed assemblies where needed. At a minimum, use reinforced
gypsum board for walls, with skim-coat finish. (Gypsum board walls with taped
finishes are not to be used in dormitory halls.)

The project design review committee will advise the Designer on the use of
appropriate finishes in corridors.

There should be some form of base in corridors for housekeeping purposes,
compatible with floor finish; tile, stone, wood, rubber; review with Project
Manager.

Princeton University employs a range of standard colors for use in dormitories;
consult with the Project Manager.

details to divide large expanses of painted surface, particularly in the vertical
direction. This is especially true in high traffic areas, areas using high pigment
paints, or locations that are especially subject to abuse.

Fire Extinguisher The design of the fire extinguisher in corridors shall be
incorporated with the overall design and enclosed in a fire-rated cabinet as
required. See Appendix 3.8-2.
b) In rated corridors, doors and hardware must meet requirements for fire assembly
and accessibility. Princeton University employs a standard dorm room-to-corridor
cylindrical lockset, a storeroom function lever-handle lockset, as well as standard
hinges, closers, etc. See Section 4.4 (Door Hardware). More recently this lockset
is being replaced with a Salto keyless lock (with prox reader and keypad).
Confirm which lockset is appropriate for the project with the Project Manager and
LSSS. For corridor doors leading to public or social spaces, consider using smoke
detector-activated hold opens.
c) Ceilings: consider routing of utilities early in design; if corridor ceilings are to be
used for utilities, ceilings must be accessible. Minimizing MEP systems above
ceilings is desirable. Appearance is important, and utility runs must be thoroughly
planned and documented to minimize the need for multiple access doors in hard-
finished ceilings. See Section 4.2 (Corridors).
d) Lighting: must meet Code mandated minimum levels, and must meet University
standard levels. Hallways should have lights that are lit 24/7/365, and may be
lighted with ceiling lights, wall sconces, or a combination of both. The type of
lighting may be dependent on the style of the building. The Designer is
responsible for insuring that all components of lighting - lenses, lamps, ballasts,
wiring connections, etc. - are readily accessible for maintenance of fixtures. All
fixtures should also be easily procurable, should the University need to get
replacements. See Section 3.5 (Lighting Design). Code minimums for
emergency egress lighting levels must be met for the entire egress pathway.
Any surface mounted exit sign mounted on edge below 9-0 requires redundant
support along a second edge or side, preferably located at a wall/ceiling
intersection.
e) Sprinklers: sprinkler heads are to be concealed in corridors if possible; if sidewall
sprinklers are to be used, ONLY concealed type are to be used.
f) Accessories - message boards, drinking fountains with insta-hot water dispensers
g) Security and safety concerns - dead-ends, remote areas, emergency phone location
h) Air handlers and other mechanical equipment placed in eave spaces off corridors
require sound insulation, vibrant isolation and low db rating.
i) Trash Collection The Designer shall evaluate locations and methods for trash
collection and/or removal from each hallway. This includes possible design of
trash chutes or permanent Trash Room.
j) Electrical Outlets Maximum 25 on center dedicated 20 Amp circuit per corridor
or stair.
k) Drinking fountains comply with code for quantity and accessibility requirements.
In addition provide University standard Insta-hot water dispenser, or bottle filler
spigot at each location. See Section 3.11 Page 4. Consideration should be given
to protection of finishes in locations where drinking fountains are designed. In
addition to required drinking fountains, consider adding bottle filling stations.

D. Bathrooms

1. Fixture Requirements
Princeton University has dormitories with multiple-fixture bathrooms serving entire
floors or areas of dorms, and also has dormitories that have private or semi-private
shared single-fixture bathrooms. This section deals primarily with multiple-fixture
bathrooms. The project team shall also review gender-neutral toilet and shower
requirements for new dormitory construction projects.

At a minimum, requirements of NJ UCC and National Standard Plumbing Code must
be met for number of fixtures (including drinking fountains); however, Princeton
University Housing and Real Estate Services has developed the following ratios as a
desirable minimum goal in dormitories:

a) students per shower: 5.5/1
b) students per toilet: 5.5/1
c) students per lavatory: 4.5/1

Bathtubs are generally not installed in dorms at Princeton. Individual precast terrazzo
shower bases are typically specified for both gang and private baths. The Designer is
to be conscious of waterproofing requirements for these bases at all wall, floor and
drain locations, especially where occupied spaces may be below the showers.

At least one floor drain should be installed in each bathroom, more if layout dictates.

Floor drains should be installed in each barrier-free shower and directly outside of the
hc shower compartments. Use only University approved integrated drainers and
tailpieces per Section 3.11 (Plumbing Systems Design). Pitch tile towards drain.

In bathrooms that are not adjacent to a janitors closet with a service sink, hot and
cold hose bibbs should be installed for custodial use. The hose bibbs should have key
stops rather than handles. The preferred location is under a lavatory, approximately
18 above the finish floor.

Generally floor mounted toilets are preferred in concrete or steel construction. This
approach is preferred for both new and renovation construction.

2. ADA and Adaptability Requirements

The Designer must become familiar with the barrier-free requirements in the NJ UCC
and the sub-code ICC /ANSI A117.1. In renovations, the Universitys goal is to have
accessible bathrooms in areas served by accessible entries and along accessible
routes. The project design review committee will review the proposed location and
layout of accessible baths on a case-by-case basis, for continuity with the Universitys
Accessibility Standards per Section 2.1

3. Security

Bathroom entry doors are equipped with combination-lock hardware to provide a
measure of security within the dorms. See Section 4.4 (Door Hardware).

4. Finishes

Provide washable finishes; floors are typically ceramic tile or stone with colored grout,
as are walls to at least the height of mirrors.

Materials must be water-resistant; at a minimum, use water-resistant gypsum board for
walls and ceilings. A smooth plaster finish is preferred. Plan carefully for access
doors that are often needed in bathroom walls or ceilings; minimum 12 square doors
are standard, with screwdriver operation unless below 8-0 above finished floor, in
which case Best cylinder locks are to be installed.

For renovations in wood framed structures a double water proofing membrane should
be installed in all bathrooms, including beneath shower bases.

5. Lighting and Power

Provide area lighting for the room, and (generally) a light at each fixture or
compartment. Motion detectors may be used for control of selected light fixtures, with
at least one unswitched fixture per room on an emergency circuit, preferably over
lavatories/ mirror. Provide ground-fault-interrupted receptacles at lavatories, one
centered between every two lavatories, or at individual fixtures. Provide back-box and
power for electric hand dryers in the vicinity of the lavatories, where towel dispensers
are to be located.

Refer to Section 3.12 (Electrical Systems Design) for allowable electrical pathway and
conductor equipment.

6. Partitions

Provide toilet partitions with doors, shower stalls with curtains or doors, and a drying
area which is, at a minimum, screened. Princeton traditionally used marble for
partitions, but most recently has used the Solid Color Reinforced Composite (SCRC)
type. Metal partitions have been found to be too susceptible to damage and corrosion
and are generally not used, although stainless steel has been used successfully.

7. Accessories

a) Vendors for Building Services provide many of the accessories used in
Princetons dormitories, including soap and paper towel dispensers and large-roll
toilet tissue dispensers. Building Services provides shower curtains for the dorm
bathrooms. Consult Project Manager and Building Services for current
information.
b) The following need to be specified by the Designer: robe and towel hooks; large
volume trash disposal units; feminine napkin disposal units; surface mounted soap
dishes for shower stalls; mirrors (typically standard units, individually framed for
ease of replacement, often with attached stainless steel shelves).
c) Hot and cold hose bibbs may be required, as noted above.
d) The University may install electric hand dryers in multiple-fixture bathrooms in
lieu of paper towel dispensers. Paper towel dispensers may be temporarily
installed over dryer outlets, until the decision on hand dryers is finalized.

E. Social spaces/public common rooms

The mix of social spaces in a dormitory often depends on whether it is in a residential
college or if it is an upper-class dorm, whether some similar spaces are provided nearby,
etc., and should be determined in the preliminary design phase in consultation with the
review committee for the dormitory.

If a social space is proposed above or near a dormitory room, specific approval for the
location is required from the review committee.

Some comments on typically provided amenities follow.

1. Lounges

a) The size, shape, and number of lounges should be planned carefully. A lounge
should be provided with a kitchen or kitchenette if possible. The Project Design
Review Committee will determine whether a kitchen or kitchenette is to be
included in a project.
b) When approved by the design review committee, a flat screen television is to be
installed in lounges. The TV location is to be supplied with an OIT wiring bundle
and is to be equipped with an alarm. Consult Media Services for current model.
c) Provision should also be made for wired and wireless data communications.
d) Vending area is to be provided with an OIT wiring bundle.

Designer is to consider heat produced by vending machines in calculating the
HVAC requirements for lounge areas.
e) Social spaces are considered special areas, and the normal constraints on paint
colors do not necessarily apply to these spaces. Consult with the Project Manager.
f) All millwork / furnishings manufactured with foam and or fabric shall be
submitted for CAL 133 testing.

2. Kitchens/Kitchenettes

a) Snack kitchenettes are installed in dormitories for the purpose of providing
students unrestricted access to limited kitchenette facilities.
Snack kitchenettes are to be designed around standard appliances such as a full- or
half-sized refrigerator provided by the Housing and Real Estate Services (with
project funding). A stove or cooking surface shall not be installed in snack
kitchenettes. A microwave oven should be installed. Cabinets and countertops
should be included. An instant hot water dispenser with sink fixture should be
included. Consult with Housing for current standard appliances.
b) The full-service kitchenettes may be installed in residential college dormitories.
They would be installed for the purpose of providing undergraduate students
limited access to full-service kitchenette facilities. These kitchenettes may be
located adjacent to spaces that could be used for meal seating.
The full-service kitchenettes will contain the following items:
Freestanding electric range with four burners and an integral oven;
Hood suspended above the range with an integral recirculating fan. Although
direct venting to the building exterior is preferable, this requirement shall be
reviewed by the Tech Team on a project-specific basis. Designer shall take
note to locate any required Fire Alarm Smoke Detectors as far away from this
location as allowed by code.
Microwave oven (not a combination range hood unit), countertop or shelf
mounted
Sink with a bin, or bins, that is sufficiently sized for cleaning cooking utensils
and equipment;
Kitchen faucet;
Instant hot water dispenser installed on the sink;
Freestanding full-size refrigerator and freezer unit, without an automatic ice-
maker/dispenser;
Overhead and under-counter cabinets, flush panel doors preferred with
minimal hardware;
Cubbies for storage; and
Garbage disposals will not be installed.
The full-service kitchenettes will be located in secured rooms. The kitchen
facilities will be secured by lockable doors or integral appliance keyed control
device. Consult with Housing for appliance information.
c) Full-service kitchens located in Upper-class Student Dormitories; commonly
known as co-op kitchens. These full-service kitchens are located in unaffiliated
upper-class dormitories. They are used for daily preparation of meals for upper-
class students that do not have a meal contract.
Dormitory food preparation areas require discussion of the requirements for hood
suppression at cooking sources. Generally, the hood suppression requirement is a
function of the type of usages programmed for the dormitory considered. This
discussion must occur in conjunction with the Housing and Real Estate Services
and University Code Analyst. Generally, direct-vented hoods over ranges are
required in addition to a residential-grade hood suppression system.
Storage cubbies should be planned into the cabinetry, for storage use by
individuals in the kitchen. Cubbies should have doors with standard Best
5L7RD2 locks (see Section 4.4: Door Hardware). If space allows, an eating area
should be planned as part of the kitchen function.
d) Full-service Graduate Student Suite Kitchenettes. These full-service kitchenettes
are installed in graduate student suites located within residential college
dormitories. They are installed for the purpose of providing graduate students
kitchenette facilities that would be used for daily meal preparation.
The Graduate Student Full-service Kitchenette will contain the following items:
Freestanding electric range with four burners and an integral oven;
Hood suspended above the range with an integral recirculation fan. The
designer shall take note to locate any required Fire Alarm Smoke Detectors as
far away from this location as allowed by code.
Microwave oven (not a combination range hood unit), shelf mounted If
possible
Sink with bin, or bins, that is sufficiently sized for cleaning cooking utensils
and equipment;
Kitchen faucet;
Instant hot water dispenser installed on the sink;
maker/dispenser;
Overhead and under-counter cabinets, flush panel doors preferred with
minimal hardware;
Garbage disposals will not be installed; and;
Counter Space: refer to Appendix 2.4-5 for university minimum standard.
See Housing and Real Estate Services for supply current appliance information.

3. Laundries

Laundry facilities are to be included in each dormitory. Access to the laundry room is
to be through the interior of the building. Particular attention must be paid to the
nuisance factor of a laundry room - the effect of noise and heat on nearby rooms.
See Section 4.7 (Laundry Rooms).
Laundry rooms are to have easily maintained and durable floor finishes and need to
include a floor drain.

Typically, laundry rooms will contain the following:

a) Heavy-duty washers, not coin operated. Consult Building Services for current
model.
b) Stacking electric dryers, not coin operated, with individual vents running to a
plenum located at the discharge point. Generally, the individual vents consist of
4 diameter sheet metal duct. The Designer shall take care to assure lint build-up
and removal within these vents in addressed in the design. (Steam dryers are
preferable to electric if steam is available and space allows for the larger machines
and access area.) Plan to install one dryer for each washer in the laundry room.
Consult Building Services for current model, and for clearance requirements for
maintenance of units; see Section 4.7 (Laundry Rooms) and Appendix 4.7-3.
c) Motion sensor-activated light fixtures for general lighting (with an unswitched
light in each area).
d) A fixed table or counter with hanging rod for folding, with built-ins for bins.
e) Large-volume trash receptacles.
f) An adjacent waiting/study area is desirable; visual connection with adjacent space
or corridor is desirable.

g) Room ventilation system is necessary.
h) An emergency phone should be installed in the laundry area. (A panic button may
be necessary for remote location.)
i) For design purposes plan 1 washer for every 25 students and 1 dryer (stacked) for
every one washer.
j) Floor mounted laundry sink with a hose bib for janitorial purposes.
k) Coordinate installation of Laundry View laundry monitoring system with OIT

F. Living Units

1. Living/study/common rooms

a) Space Requirements

Area: quad, 400 square feet minimum in a renewal project, and 450 square feet
minimum in new dormitories. Approximately 180-200 square feet should
be devoted to the common room of quads. Refer to Appendix 2.4-4.

b) Layout

Based on positioning of standard University furniture (e.g. desks, bookshelves)
with consideration for student-provided couch, chairs, entertainment units, etc.
The option of having all beds un-bunked with two desks along one side of the
common room (or) the option of all desks in the bedrooms with the beds bunked
shall be considered.

c) Location/Orientation

Provide entry to common room off corridor; common room is to provide main
access to living unit (entry to suite is not to be through bedroom)

d) Finishes

1) Walls: durable finish; skim-coated impact resistant gypsum board or plaster
on gypsum lath.

2) Floors: durable finish such as, wood strip flooring, vinyl tile or approved
equal. For wood flooring, finishes must meet New J ersey requirements for
volatile organic compounds (VOC). (4-coat) water-based finishes have
proven suitable for private rooms.

3) Ceilings: typically gypsum board or plaster; if utilities are run in ceilings or in
soffits in rooms, carefully planned access panels may be required for valves,
junction boxes, etc. Refer to Section 4.4 for specifics regarding access panel
requirements.

e) Doors and hardware: rated doors and hardware may be required for corridors;
unrated doors may be used for doors interior to living units. Best Lock cylindrical
sets are standard. Door viewers shall be installed at all corridor doors.

f) Windows: dormitory renewal projects often include the reconstruction or
replacement of windows original to the building. During the building
investigation enough information should be gathered on the condition of windows
to determine whether rehabilitation/reconstruction is a viable option, based on
cost/life cycle.

New buildings should incorporate new window technology for energy
performance and for ease of maintenance. Within these basic guidelines, a wide
variety of types and designs are available.

Regardless of building type, the following requirements apply:

1) Ventilating sash: habitable rooms require natural ventilation if a mechanical
ventilation system is not being installed in the building.

2) Screens: all operable sashes require screens, and windows at grade or first
floor must be fitted with heavy-duty (.020 wire gage fabric) screens for
security. Emergency egress requirements must be met by screens and
windows; coordinate with building egress plans. Include positive latch from
inside of room only.

3) Shades: all windows in living units are to be supplied with shades. Simple
spring-loaded roll-up shades are standard on campus. Evaluate window trim
and screen operation to avoid conflict with shade operation. Princeton
University utilizes a custom shade fabric for its dorms. The shades may be
purchased through the University shade shop, or shade fabric may be
purchased (via the University supplier) and supplied to any shade vender.

g) Utilities: building systems are typically replaced in dorm renewal. System piping
and equipment, ductwork, etc. must be carefully planned and routed to produce an
integrated design for the building.

1) Heating/cooling: buildings are typically heated using hot-water radiation
driven by the campus steam system. In older buildings with window seats in
common rooms, the heating element is often housed in the window seat.
Careful attention should be given to requirements for insulation for piping run
in exterior walls (i.e. 2 min. fiberglass).

Ventilation with heated make-up air is generally provided for bathrooms,
laundry rooms, and other spaces with ventilation requirements. Dormitories
are not generally air-conditioned.

2) Power: wiring is typically replaced in dorm renewal projects, with one power
circuit per room. Wiring should be totally concealed. The number of duplex
power outlets is increased to meet current code levels (< 12 feet apart) and
the needs of student life. Outlet location should be carefully coordinated with
furniture plans. A quad outlet should be installed at OIT jack locations.

For both new construction and Dormitory renovation consideration should be
given to increasing this requirement to one power circuit per student, (i.e. 2
circuits per double occupancy, 4 circuits per Quad, etc.). This decision shall
be made in conjunction with Facilities Engineering after determining if
localized A/C units may be installed in the Living Unit.

Refer to Section 3.12 (Electrical Systems Design) for allowable electrical
pathway and conductor equipment. See Appendix 3.12-9 for acceptable use of
MC cable in dormitories.

3) Lighting: wall sconce fixtures are currently used for lighting in the living units
in dorms, typically three or four fixtures in a Study Room. One lighting
circuit per suite is standard. Review standard fixture with Project Manager to
ascertain requirements for backboxes, conduit, switching, etc. Of primary
concern for proper light distribution is the mounting height.

For rooms with 8 to 9 ceiling heights, the top of the sconce fixture should be
mounted even with the top of door casings, but never less than 18 below the
ceiling for best light distribution. For ceiling heights above and below these
heights, engineering photometrics should be used in combination with interior
elevation studies to achieve the optimal photometric and aesthetic
combinations. Avoid placement of these fixtures under soffits, exposed
beams, valance heating units, near windows, fireplaces and doors. Mock-ups
of typical Student Room lighting schemes are required to confirm final design
layout. All fixtures should also be easily procurable, should the University
need to get replacements.

4) OIT: one two-port data outlet with two phone outlets constitutes a standard
OIT outlet. One OIT outlet per room is standard, with adjacent quad power
receptacle.

h) Furnishings: the Housing and Real Estate Services, in concert with the Office of
the University Architect, will provide information to the Designer on furniture
sizes, manufacturers, etc. Currently furniture is supplied in plywood with a clear
finished red oak veneer; furniture may be plywood base or solid wood, but no
particle-core board or pressed-board is to be used.

A standard set of furniture includes a desk chair, desk, bed, dresser and a
bookcase. Wardrobe units are provided for rooms without closets or built-in
wardrobes; wardrobe units are customized only to size appropriate cut-out to
accept wall base. Bookcases are provided for rooms without shelving and for
rooms not meeting the minimum nominal requirement of six linear feet of built-in
shelving. Wardrobes are to be secured to the wall. Bookcases shall consist of a
minimum 6 linear feet of shelving to fit on top of chest or desk or on the floor.
See Section 2.5 (FF&E)

Furniture should be specified with felt footpads to prevent scratching of newly-
finished floors.

2. Sleeping rooms

1) Area: single room, 100 120 square feet minimum
double, 180 200 square feet minimum
quad sleeping rooms: 120-140 square feet, double occupancy,
including built-in closet or wadrobe unit

2) Layout: based on positioning standard University furniture, without
consideration for using bunkbeds in double-occupancy rooms.

3) Location/Orientation: entry from common room/study.

b) Finishes: the same considerations listed for common rooms apply to individual
sleeping rooms.

c) Doors and hardware: unrated doors with passage or privacy hardware may
typically be used for doors interior to living units. Sleeping rooms entered from a
rated corridor will require rated doors, frames, and hardware, including closer.

Bedroom doors in suites are equipped with privacy locks, as are bathrooms within
units.

Best Lock cylindrical sets and LCN closers are standard for both rated and unrated
doors.

The Designer is advised to review requirements for fire-rated enclosures (and the
lessening of requirements) in dormitories with full fire-suppression systems.
Door viewers shall be installed at all corridor doors.

d) Windows: the same considerations for common rooms apply to sleeping rooms.

e) Utilities:

1) Heating/cooling: as with common rooms, heating is usually provided by
radiators fed by hot water converted from campus steam in the buildings
utility room. Individual HVAC controls are to be installed in each living unit;
programmed temperature sensors are used in public spaces and bathrooms

Placement of student rooms over or near the buildings steam-to-hot-water
converter can be problematic.

Air conditioning is not typically supplied to the dormitories on campus,
although new dormitories may utilize systems that provide air conditioning.
Consider an additional power circuit if localized air conditioning is to be
installed in sleeping rooms

2) Power: duplex outlet placement should meet code requirements (< 12 feet
apart). Coordinate placement with proposed furniture layout; in rooms that
are not in accessible areas, outlets should be mounted at 11 (at renovations
only) above floor to avoid possible conflicts with bed frames. For new
construction, locate duplex outlets away from typical bed locations wherever
possible. Provide quad power outlet at OIT outlet.

pathway and conductor equipment. See Appendix 3.12-9 for acceptable use of
MC cable in dormitories.

3) Lighting: two wall sconce fixtures for each bedroom is typical, although
larger bedrooms may warrant additional fixtures. For single and double
occupancy rooms, one lighting circuit per four rooms is standard.

For rooms with 8 to 9 ceiling heights, the top of the sconce fixture should be
mounted even with the top of door casings, but never less than 18 below the
ceiling for best light distribution. For ceiling heights above and below these
heights, engineering photometrics should be used in combination with interior
elevation studies to achieve the optimal photometric and aesthetic
combinations. Avoid placement of these fixtures under soffits, exposed
beams, valance heating units, near windows, fireplaces and doors. Mock-ups
of typical Student Room lighting schemes are required to confirm final design
layout. All fixtures should also be easily procurable, should the University
need to get replacements.

4) OIT: one two-port data outlet with two phone outlets constitutes a standard
OIT outlet. One OIT outlet per room is standard. The University runs a
standard cable bundle to each outlet, including voice, data, cable TV, and fiber
optic; see Section 2.6 (Computer Information Technology).

5) Smoke detection: locate heads away from possible sources of interference or
damage such as doors, wardrobes, ceiling-mounted bike hangers, bunkbeds,
light fixtures, etc. Detectors must be 36 minimum from air supply outlets.

6) Fire suppression: concealed heads are preferred, either ceiling-mounted or
sidewall type. If a dry standpipe is run adjacent to a room, access doors for
inspection of the standpipe might be required within the room.

f) Furnishings: as listed above, the standard set of furniture for each occupant is a
desk chair, a desk, a bed, dresser; wardrobe and bookcase where not built in.

Each bedroom should have a closet, a built-in wardrobe, or a moveable wardrobe
unit that is secured to the wall; the choice is a programmatic decision, and should
be made in consultation with the project design review committee.

Because of possible requirements for sprinklers within closets, the Designer
should carefully review the issue of closet vs. wardrobe with the Project Manager
and the University Code Analyst.

All millwork / furnishings manufactured with foam and or fabric shall be
submitted for CAL 133 testing.

9. Custodial Closets

Each dormitory will require a custodial storage room of approximately 100 square feet (and
possibly larger in larger buildings) for paper products and cleaning supplies and equipment.
Exact janitorial requirements for each building are a program issue to be resolved during design
development. Refer to Section 4.3 Custodial Closets and Storage for more information.

Buildings up to 10,000 square feet will require at least one janitors closet of approximately 35
square feet, and one of equal size on each additional floor level of the building.

Buildings up to 50,000 square feet will require two to three janitor closets, a minimum of one per
floor level.

Buildings up to 100,000 square feet will need three to four janitors closets minimum, at least
one per floor level; larger buildings should be programmed for additional closets at the rate of
one per 25,000 square feet.

10. Signage Requirements

Prior to submitting signage design package the designer shall meet with the project manager to
determine required locations and signage types. Generally, interior signage for dormitories shall
include:
A. Emergency Room Evacuation Signage - To be located immediately adjacent to room side
of corridor door handle, indicating direction of all legal exits and installed with tamper
proof screws.

B. Room Identification Signage - To be located on corridor side at entrance to each suite.
Includes room number, ADA Braille requirements, name slot and message board. Each
room I.D. sign shall be designed individual to each project and reviewed with Housing
and Real Estate Services. 10% attic stock shall be specified for each type of signage in
the project.

C. Stair Egress Signage - Denotes level and levels down to exit. Assigns a stair number and
includes ADA Braille requirements.

D. Common Area Signage - Includes room name, number and ADA Braille requirements.

E. Elevator Signage In accordance with ANSI A17.1 requirements.

F. Electrical Signage In accordance with NEC requirements.

G. Fire Protection Signage In accordance with NFPA requirements.

11. Environmental Issues

Prior to undertaking renovation work in an existing dormitory, the University will arrange for a
survey of the building to determine the possible presence of hazardous materials. The University
will engage a separate consultant for any remedial consultation deemed prudent as the result of
this survey, and will attempt to abate any hazardous material prior to the start of construction,
using a separate contractor qualified to perform the abatement work.



drawings to convert to as-builts. See Section 1.5 (Documentation and Archiving).

END OF DOCUMENT
2.5 Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.5 FF & E - page 1

1. Introduction

Early in the project, the method to be used for delivery of interior design services should be
established. The project Designer should come to an agreement with the Universitys Project
Manager determining responsibility for furnishings: whether design is to be done under the
project Designers contract, whether a separate design professional will be engaged, or whether
the University will assume responsibility for the design and purchasing of furnishings under
another arrangement. The scope and budget for furnishings must be established early on so the
furniture systems will fall into its proper sequence in the project schedule. A first step in the
process may be conducting an inventory of the clients existing furniture and equipment, with an
evaluation recommending re-use or replacement.
Furniture fit-out for construction and renovation projects of a sizeable nature requires a level of
coordination with site activities and conditions that is not addressed in the scope of the
Universitys standard purchasing documents. For this reason, the furniture specifications are
amended and released by the ODC Interior Design Project Manager; or through the Facilities
Procurement Office if significant custom casework is involved; or through the contracted
Construction Manager where workstations interface with laboratory and complex building
systems, making it possible to track the progress of the furniture as it relates to the completed
construction and project as a whole. The General Conditions of the Contract, Appendix 2.5-4,
are amended as needed by Supplementary Conditions for Furniture, Furnishings, and Equipment
prepared for specific projects. The Contract Administrator will request the preparer of the
furniture package to provide a Unit Price Schedule in an agreed upon format for inclusion with
the Contract Bid Form.
Designers are not necessarily limited to using lines and manufacturers that are available through
Purchasing Contracts, but are encouraged to familiarize themselves with the available sources
and consider them for inclusion in a given project. Increasing attention should be given to
specifying office furniture from the same parent manufacturing or procurement source so that
multiple contracts are not required to implement a project.
Princeton University has purchasing contracts with Herman Miller Inc. and Steelcase Inc. that
encompass seating, steel, and wood casegoods, panel systems, and tables. Competitive furniture
products manufactured by Knoll International and Teknion are installed on campus in fewer
quantities but available through purchasing. Classroom furniture is available from these
manufactures as well; however, KI-Krueger International is offered on contract to specifically
address this need. Dormitory casegoods and beds are procured under contract with J ohn Savoy
and Son, Inc. Dormitory desk chairs are procured under contract with Sauder Manufacturing
Company. Custom library and laboratory furniture are also used. The Universitys Project
Manager for Interior Design can be contacted for information regarding representatives and
vendors.
It is not unusual to have multiple furniture vendors performing installation work on a project that
includes library custom furniture, wood and steel office and classroom products, and ergonomic
seating; however multiple sources for office furniture products increase not only the complexity
of the specification and award process, but often cost and successful coordination with the
general contract for construction. Aside from the economic benefits, maintaining continuity of
design over time will need to be possible, as the client/user replaces or supplements furnishings
through the Purchasing Office.

2. Contacts

A. The Project Manager (in Office of The University Architect, Office of Design and
Construction, the Engineering Department, Grounds and Building Maintenance, or as
applicable).

B. Interior Design Project Manager MacMillan Building, 609-258-3504

C. Assistant Buyer, Purchasing Department 701 Carnegie Center, 609-258-5887

D. Contract Administration Office MacMillan Building, 609-258-6752

3. I ndex of Ref erences
PDF

A. F F & E Programming Services Checklist Appendix 2.5-1

B. NFPA 260, Fabric Specifying Guide Public Document

C. General Conditions of the Contract, Princeton
University Contracts Office Appendix 2.5-4
D. Standard University Dormitory
Casegoods Purchasing Contract Appendix 2.5-6

E. Reference List of Contacts for Replacement
and Supplemental Office Furniture Appendix 2.5-7

F. CAL 133, California Technical Bulletin, Fabric Public Document
Open Flame Burn Test


Furniture plans are often begun when project planning - and even construction documents - are
well along toward completion. (This is not always the case; see comments in Section 2.4
Dormitory Design). The Interior Designer may or may not be a consultant to the principal
Project Designer. Review of furnishings for non-dormitory projects will typically begin with a
preliminary design, will continue through design development, and culminate in a furniture
order. Installation may be months beyond the actual order.

The Designer is expected to review the proposed design with the Universitys Project Manager,
with the departmental representatives (department chair and department manager, eg.), and any
adjunct professionals.

Since furnishing selections might involve colors, finishes, fabrics, carpets, etc., no definitive
number of review sessions can be laid down in general terms. The Designer must be prepared to
work on a coordinated effort with the other professionals involved in the project, and must
respond to the needs and wishes of the client/user while maintaining a clear understanding of
schedule and budget. The furnishing project cannot be done on its own schedule, but must be
timed to fit with the overall project schedule.

The Designer should be aware of the probable need to provide full-scale samples of furniture for
client review. This is particularly true if furniture not in standard use at the University is
proposed. Full-scale mockups must be provided during the early construction phase so that
purchase decisions can be made without adversely affecting the end date of the project.

The Designer will be expected to participate in coordination efforts during the mock-up phase, to
incorporate utilities such as power and data wiring. In addition, the Designer may be requested to
provide coordination services to administrate the move of furniture and occupants, and in some
cases, arrange an interim move so that existing space can be renovated.

appendices.

5. Design Guidelines

There is no real standard office, classroom, or lab at the University although there are
furnishing needs common to many uses. Depending on the department or discipline, there may
be a greater or lesser need for pieces such as shelving or filing cabinets, work tables or computer
stations, etc. Some of the common elements follow.

Attention should be made in supplying users with an ergonomic work environment, including but
not limited to considerations for:
Chair
Desk
Computer Workspace
Lighting

Finishes are dependent on a number of factors - budget, client taste, Designer aesthetic, etc.
and may be different for different functions and positions within a department. Public spaces
should reflect the nature of the buildings architecture, while private spaces may vary from such
design constraint and take on a more personalized character.

Princeton University requires fabric wall decorations, furnishings and millwork with foam and or
fabric be tested for CAL 133 compliance. This includes all furniture within residential
dormitories as well as any other areas required for code compliance.

A. Work Spaces / Office Spaces

The Designer should consider the following in specifying furniture for work areas:

1. Ergonomic chair in addition to pneumatic height adjustment, 5-star caster base,
swivel; features allowing reclining and tilting forward positions, locking in position,
arm rest height and position adjustments, back height and seat depth adjustments,
lumbar support and overall chair size variations.

2. Desk or work surface

a. of sufficient depth (min 24) to accommodate computer, multiple monitors
where needed: auxiliary equipment such as printer or laptop. Allows for
L and U shaped configurations as needed; acts as appropriate surface
for meetings; provides monitor positions that does not expose confidential
work;
b. wire management system, horizontal and vertical, with properly sized and
located grommets or other fittings required for connectivity;
c. an acceptable security system or method for protection of electronic
devices and other personal possessions;
d. layout and fit of furniture must not block access to power, data, and
HVAC controls and filters and other utilities;
e. all desks to come equipped with drawer locks. See Section 4.1 (Door
Hardware).

3. Computer accessories:

a. ergonomic keyboard with mouse pad;
b. monitor stand or support as appropriate (depth of work surface should
allow correct placement);
c. CPU holder where needed, mobile free standing;
d. mobility of components and access to components should be considered;
e. coordination of access to surge suppression and power backup devices.

4. Task lighting should be considered in conjunction with layout and overall lighting
design. Medium Edison screw-base socket fixtures must be capable of accepting LED
with compatible housing. Distribution concerns may eliminate tubular fixtures. Under
shelf lighting, magnetic or with fasteners, to be LED. Transformer coordination and
appropriate wire management required.

5. Shelving or bookcases, freestanding or secured to structure (with provision of
architectural blocking). Designers should be aware of the need for shelving in
University projects; extent of shelving is beyond the industry norm. Designer should
also be aware of the restrictions on height of shelving in projects that include sprinkler
systems.

6. Filing and storage cabinets, undercounter or freestanding. Keying of cabinetry should
be included as part of its order(master keying if needed). See Section 4.4.5 for
information on preferred lock types. File cabinets, lateral, 30 and 42 allow efficient
front to back as well as side to side filing. Specify hanging or other interior
requirements.

7. Need for seating area or meeting table.

8. Tack boards, marker boards, and chalkboards. Writing surfaces from base to door
height are not uncommon.

9. Coat hooks

10. Panel system workstations and hanging components: acoustical panel of 54 or more
in height to be effective. Panels must accommodate standard OIT Siemon RJ 45 and
provide sufficient space for cables with no sharp edges. Base entry is preferred with
top cap cable layin for ease of service. Beltway receptacles are common.

B. Dormitory Furnishings

See Section 2.4 (Dormitory Design) for information.

Some standards have been established for dorm renewal projects - consult with Project
Manager.

Standards for study spaces are currently in development.

Princeton University requires fabric wall decorations, furnishings and millwork with
foam and or fabric be tested for CAL 133 compliance. This includes all furniture within
residential dormitories (ie: built in benches, banquets, lounge furniture, etc)

C. Classroom Furnishings

See Section 2.3 (Classroom Design) for information.

D. Library Furnishings

The following considerations should apply in specifying library equipment and
furnishings:

1. Circulation, Reference and Control Desks

a. Provide dual-height standing and sitting surfaces (refer to ADA standards
and see Section 1.4 Regulatory Agencies);
b. Accommodate computer CPU and peripherals (flat screen monitor may be
used);
c. Accommodate printer and supplies,
d. Accommodate telephone and directories;
e. Accommodate credit card machines
f. Provide pencil and money drawers; credit cards
g. Provide appropriate surface for desensitizer and its access
h. Provide file cabinets below; use mobile pedestals if appropriate;
i. Provide space for book trucks;
j. Provide built-in task lighting, if possible;
k. Provide doors to limit access;
l. Design structure and supports to allow movement under and around work
surfaces to the greatest extent possible;
m. Locate reference and reserve books nearby.

2. Reading tables

a. Built-in lighting (LED preferred);
b. Table-top data (in some cases) and power connections; consider lamp base
as possible location as well as OIT and possible electronic component
requirements;
c. Durable solid wood chairs (unless adjustable height task chairs are
requested).

3. Study carrels

a. Knockdown construction is preferred for ease of relocation when
important, by pallet truck and reassembly. Readily available, sustainable,
and maintainable wood species and finishes are required ;
b. Built-in lighting (LED preferred);
c. Table-top data (where appropriate: verify with library) and power
connections;
d. Durable solid wood chairs (unless adjustable height task chairs are
requested);
e. Storage, to include bookshelf and occasional file drawers or pedestals;
bookshelves should not interfere with laptop computers;
f. Signage (with slide-in replaceable occupant name card). Confirm this
requirement based on assignable vs. non-assignable carrels.

4. Shelving

a. Adjustable shelving units, fixed in place (may include media and CD
holders and microfilm carriers);
b. Mobile/compact shelving; mechanical preferred over electrical;
c. Periodical shelving;
d. Newspaper racks and shelves;
e. Shelving for oversized or odd-shaped articles.

5. Reference computer terminals and clusters

a. Accommodate CPU and peripherals, with flexibility for equipment
changes;
b. Include wire management system with accessible connections;
c. May be systems furniture, if appropriate.

6. Other computer use areas

a. Review requirements for number and type of computers/peripherals with
Project Manager, client user, and OIT;
b. Accommodate CPU and peripherals (including printing stations, possible
scanning stations), with flexibility for equipment changes and accessory
storage (paper and toner);
c. Provide work surface- or table-top data and power connections, with wire
management;
d. Provide durable solid wood chairs (unless adjustable task chairs are
requested); Work surfaces vary from seated to standup match seating
needs.
e. Provide workspace on table for books, etc. Confirm height requirements

7. Display cases

a. Review need for display cases for normal use and special exhibits with
client user and Project Manager;
b. Review requirements for any necessary climate control or security features
in display cases.
c. Review need for cabinet locks with client user. See Section 2.5 (Furniture,
Fixtures and Equipment), 10 (H) and Section 4.4.5.

8. Book drop

a. Required at circulating libraries, not at non-circulating libraries
b. Review size requirements with Project Manager and client;
c. Determine whether CD slot and storage are needed;
d. Review additional special considerations -- oversize books, music scores,
etc.;
e. Consider locations both inside and outside Library, as appropriate.

9. Copy area

a. Review requirements for number and size of machines;
b. Provide capability for coin and credit card use; review possibility of
student ID card use for operation;
c. Review need for connectivity with CIT, client user, and Project Manager;
d. Provide for paper and toner storage in copy area.

10. Collection Security system

a. Review requirements and options for security with client user, Project
Manager, and Facilities Engineering Department. Magnetic strip system
for book security is standard.
b. Coordinate location of security reader to provide proper distance from
steel framing and other possible sources of interference. Confirm with
manufacturer specification.
c. Refer to section 2.7 Security for guidance on other security requirements

E. Lab Furnishings

Lab furniture is a very complex design issue -- consult with Project Manager for guidance
at the beginning of the design process.

F. Furnishings for Meeting Spaces

1. Coordinate table placement with power and data connections; provide table-top
connectivity;

2. Determine type of seating to be used -- stacking/non-stacking, ganged, task seating,
etc.;

3. Review need for power and data connections, A/V equipment and screens at
presentation wall.

G. Furnishings for Lounge Spaces and Lobbies

Because lounge spaces and lobbies are often areas that are closely tied to the architectural
aesthetic of a building, the Designer may place special emphasis on coordinating the
furniture and fixtures with the architectural character of the space.

In planning a lobby or building entry space, the Designer should allow for the practical
necessity of providing direction to the general public: a directory, either standard display
or electronic, should be included; key plans of the building could be useful; any display
boards for special events that are held in the building should be integrated with the room
design.

H. Cabinet and Furniture Locks

Confirm the requirement for individual locks for all contract furniture. For custom
millwork, specify Best deadbolt cabinet locks as primary choice; National or CCL
cabinet locks are also acceptable for heavy-duty wood applications, and for any custom
millwork furniture. See Section 4.4.5 (Door Hardware, Millwork and Cabinet Locks) for
more information.

I. Carpet

The University has a purchase agreement with a number of manufacturers for broadloom
and modular carpeting goods; manufacturers include Mohawk (World Contract, Mohawk
Commercial, Bigelow, Karastan Contract, Durkan, and Harbinger), J &J Industries, Shaw,
Milliken, and Interface. Term contracts are also in effect for several dealer/installers in
the local market area, if such services are needed on a project.

Whenever possible, the use of 100% solution-dyed nylon fibers is encouraged. Face
weights should be a minimum of 26 ounces, and generally at or above 28 ounces.
Consideration must be given to the use of soil-hiding patterns and colors for carpeting
being specified for student living and social spaces.

When a padded application is warranted, it is recommended that an attached-backing
system such as Mohawks Enhancer Back be utilized in lieu of carpeting stretched over
a foam or jute pad.

Modular carpet tiles are a desirable alternative to broadloom in certain installations such
as locker rooms, library shelving areas, food service locations, and office area with
numerous systems-style workstations. Cushion-backed tiles, as compared to lower-
profile PVC-backed tiles, offer increased foot comfort and are believed to lengthen the
life of the carpet product. The University recommends the use of modular carpet products
from Milliken, Mohawk, Interface, and Shaw.

J . Wall Coverings

Vinyl wall coverings are discouraged because of the difficulty in properly repairing
damage to the finish.

6. Requirements for As-Built Drawings and Project Closeout

Contractor/Vendor at the end of the project to supply in electronic format as-built furniture
installation plans indicating all wall mounted components, systems furniture and freestanding
case goods, locations of work surface supports, integral lighting and power and data
accommodation. Product identification and dimensions are to be included on the plans, as
well as walls, window and door openings, and elements requiring access such as HVAC units,
power and data receptacles. Office and workspaces, meeting, and library furniture
installations are critical areas; public spaces with freestanding loose furniture such as seating
or dining furniture are not critical in terms of installation Drawings.
All furniture, provided for all furnished spaces, is to be included in an electronic schedule of
furniture and accessories indicating manufacturers, product numbers, finishes, colors, and
quantities. Also required are lamp specifications for relamping task and ambient fixtures.
Information is to be formatted so that it can be tied to locations, and make it possible to derive
the contents on a room-by-room basis. One hard copy with actual finish samples and vendor
contacts to be provided for project library.


END OF DOCUMENT
2.6 Office of Information Technology

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.6 OIT - page 1

1. Introduction

The main campus of Princeton University is crisscrossed by a network of data and
communication lines which have been installed and are maintained by the University. The three
types of cables which comprise the network are telephone, which originates in Palmer Hall/Frist
Student Center; data, originating at 87 Prospect, the Computing Center; and video, which is also
located at 87 Prospect .

Office of Information Technology (OIT) operates and maintains this system throughout campus,
and provides services to extend and revise the system for the University.

2. Contacts


B. Manager of Hardware Support 171 Broadmead, 609-258-6042

C. Manager of Network Installations 171 Broadmead, 609-258-6015

D. Manager of Telecommunication Technical Operations 171 Broadmead, 609-258-6655

PDF
A. Horizontal Distribution, Siemon Cabling System
Training Manual IS-1821-01 Appendix 2.6-1

B. Backbone Distribution, Siemon Cabling System
Training Manual IS-1821-01 Appendix 2.6-2

C. Telecommunications Room, Siemon Cabling
System Training Manual IS-1821-01 Appendix 2.6-3

D. Equipment Room, Siemon Cabling System
Training Manual IS-1821-01 Rev H Appendix 2.6-4

E. Entrance Facilities, Siemon Cabling System

F. Installation Practices, Siemon Cabling System

G. Normative Annex A, Siemon Cabling System

H. Face Plate Detail Drawing, OIT Appendix 2.6-8

I. Elevator Phone Mounting Detail, Telephone Office Appendix 2.6-9

J . Cut Sheet of Elevator Phone, Telephone Office Appendix 2.6-10

K. Cut Sheet of Emergency Phone, Telephone Office Appendix 2.6-11

L. Specifications for Telephone
Terminations Appendix 2.6-12

4. Code References

A. New J ersey Uniform Fire Code (NJ UFC)

B. International National Building Code

C. National Electric Code


Construction and Facilities Engineering with the University department responsible for project
initiation. As the project moves toward the construction documentation and code review phases,
it is required that the project construction documents be submitted to the University for an
internal Tech Team review process thru the Office of Design and Construction for compliance
with University standards. Plans are to be submitted for review at:





Team.

purpose of the Tech Team review process if to confirm A/E compliance with the current version
appendices.

6. Procedural Guidelines - Preliminary Design and Design Development

the requirements for telephone, data and WIFI installation. The Designer is to cooperate with
any adjunct professionals providing assistance to the University, and is to coordinate his work
with other disciplines so a cohesive set of documents is produced for the telephone, data and
WIFI work.

Manager and with OIT to define system distribution strategies and to discuss any obstacles that
might be existing in a building, or problems inherent in a particular design or structural system.

OIT will provide information on design requirements for point-of-entry (POE), building
distribution frame (BDF), and intermediate distribution frames (IDFs). This information will be
based on the number of outlets anticipated for the project, the length of wiring runs in the project,
the distance of terminations from POE, BDF, and IDFs, and any other pertinent information. See
Appendices 2.6-3, 2.6-4, and 2.6-5 for thorough review of design considerations for these
facilities.


The preferred approach to documenting OIT requirements for a project is to provide Drawings
dedicated to OIT design and construction. Upon submission of DD and 50% CAD drawings,
OIT will then produce an Aruba WIFI design to be overlaid on the construction drawings. The
same process will be followed for the Salto WIFI keyless lock system, if it is called for. These
Drawings should be coordinated with the electrical Drawings (the electrical contractor will
typically install the raceway system for OIT work), with the Architectural Drawings for inclusion
of closets, backboards, etc. that support OIT work, and the Drawings for any other trades
affected.


At a minimum, the following are to be provided at the indicated phase:

MEP Design Intent X
MEP Basis of Design X
Floor Plans - BDF &IDF X X X X
Floor Plans System Backbone X X X
Floor plans - showing horizontal
and vertical routes of raceways
X X
Floor plans - showing locations of
all devices
X X
Conduit riser Diagram showing
all devices
X X X
Symbols & Notes X X X
Specifications X X
Details X X

8. Considerations for OIT Systems Design

Industry standard guidelines (see references for Siemon Design Manual) are to govern the
installation of equipment, raceways, wiring, outlets, etc., and govern distances of runs between
terminations and BDF/IDF. Princeton University does not use consolidation points.

Specific requirements for portions of the system are as follows:

A. Point of Entry

1. Minimum of three 4 conduits into building (1 telephone, 1 data and video, 1 spare).
These are minimum requirements, and should be reviewed in preliminary design with
Project Manager and OIT.

2. Conduit between POE and BDF to be (3) 4 minimum.

3. Telephone to have surge protection within 50 of POE (may be extended if cable is in
conduit outside building; review with Telephone Office);

4. Provide adequate work light (4 fluorescent preferred) and general purpose power
outlet and four (4) dedicated quad receptacles, one circuit per quad in closet. Two (2)
quads are to be placed on emergency power supply; two (2) quads on standard
building power.

5. BDF and IDF to have ground buss bar.

6. All closets are to be ventilated and cooled as necessary to maintain a room
temperature not exceeding 78 degrees F. Two complete air exchanges per hour as
required.

B. Building Distribution Frame (BDF)

1. Conduits between BDF and each IDF in building are to be, at a minimum, two 4
conduits to create a building riser system.

2. Wiring between BDF and IDF to be home runs, for fiber, telephone and (2) Cat. 5c.

3. Provide adequate work light (4 fluorescent preferred) and general purpose power
outlet and four (4) dedicated quad receptacles, one circuit per quad in closet. Two (2)
quads are to be placed on emergency power supply; two (2) quads on standard
building power.

4. BDF is to be ventilated. Two complete air exchanges per hour.

5. BDF to have ground buss bar.

6. Base closet size =12 0 x 12 0.

C. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)

1. OIT to provide area requirements for closets based on cable count; see section 4.1
Communications Closets for additional information. Base closet size =120x120.

2. If project includes emergency power installation in building, provide emergency
power to IDF (include IDF power outlets in emergency load calculation).

3. Provide adequate work light (4 fluorescent w/ guard preferred) and power outlets in
closet (1 duplex outlet per 24 station cables, plus additional work outlet): provide
four dedicated 20A circuits minimum to IDF.

4. Evaluate equipment heat load and provide adequate ventilation and cooling as
necessary to maintain a room temperature not exceeding 78 degrees F. At a
minimum, provide exhaust ventilation with tempered make-up air based on closet size
and volume; allow a minimum of two air changes per hour. Review anticipated
equipment heat load and configuration of equipment with OIT prior to calculating
HVAC requirements.

5. Cable design length, including service loops, cannot exceed 295, station terminal to
IDF terminal.

6. IDF to have ground buss bar.

7. No other services are to share IDF closet space, or to require access in closet (e.g., no
electrical pull or junction boxes, no valves for piping, no mechanical equipment, etc.).

8. Closets are to be keyed to the Universitys EM system.

9. Ceiling clearance of 8 0 maintained throughout the closet.

D. Individual Outlets (Stations)

1. OITs 5/8 diameter standard cable bundle to each outlet consists of: (2) cat 5e cable
for data, (1) cat 5e for telephone, (1) coax for CATV and a fiber optics cable for
future. OITs 5/8 high-density cable bundle consists of: (4) cat 5e cables for data
with fiber optic cable for future.

2. 1 EMT conduit from outlet to tray system or piped back to BDF/IDF. Tray system
path must return to the BDF/IDF; all turns are to be made with sweeps (no LBs in run
and must be in accordance with Siemon Guidelines for bending radius). If 1 EMT is
not practical, provide written argument detailing difficulties and suggested alternative
solution. NOTE: Flexible conduit may not be used without OIT review and approval.

3. Floor Boxes
a. Walker 880 Series for data/phone.
b. FSR Series for data/phone/AV
c. Steel City 655-SC Series for data/phone.

Note: Walker 880 and FSR Series floor boxes will have a 1 conduit installed with
an isolated 2-gang spot specifically dedicated for the data/phone. The Steel City 665-
SC Series floor box will have (2) 1 conduits installed ot two dedicated data/phone
compartments

4. LCD Displays

If a presentation box is desired it shall consist of:

A standard OIT wall box installed behind the LCD with a 1 conduit running to the
desired location in which the user would operate from, this end may go to a Standard
OIT wall box or it may go to a conference table box.

5. Conduit, Cable Tray & J unction Box Cable Capacity

a. Conduit Sizing and Cable Counts
1 Conduit =(1) Standard, High Density or CACS Cable
1.25 Conduit =(2) Standard, High Density or CACS Cable
1.5 Conduit =(3) Standard, High Density or CACS Cable
2 Conduit =(4-5) Standard, High Density or CACS Cable
2.5 Conduit =(6-8) Standard, High Density or CACS Cable
3.5 Conduit =(12-14) Standard, High Density or CACS Cable

b. Network WIFI, CVMS and Salto WIFI Cables
Each location is a 1 conduit with a standard OIT wall box at each antenna
location

c. DAS Cell and Radio Cables
Each location is a 1.5 conduit wuth a 12x12x4 J -box at each antenna
location

d. Flex Tray
OIT tray systems will carry all of the above cables and tray sizing shall be
based on a 70% fill ratio.
Note:
All Conduits shall have a pull string & conduit bushings installed by the installer

6. Minimum bending radius is governed by cat 5e and fiber optic requirement, in
accordance with the Siemon Specification.

7. Maximum 270 from any pull point.

8. Face plates to be by Siemon.

E. System Wiring

1. For data, cat 5e wiring by Belden, Berk-Tek, BICC General Cable, Champlain,
Commscope, Mohawk/CDT, or Optical Cable Corporation.

2. For video, 5704R cable by General Cable.

3. For voice, cat 5e cable by General Cable.

4. For fiber optics, Siecor cable.

5. Plenum-rated cable shall be used if cables are run without UL-listed conduit in ceiling
space or other space subject to use as return or supply air plenum.

6. Installers are to be Certified Siemon Installer.

Awarded installer shall provide updated certificate and have a minimum (1)
Siemons Certified Installer (technician) at all times per awarded project.
OIT supplies all cable and termination materials.

F. System Distribution

1. Raceways, cable trays, conduits, shall be utilized; review method of distribution with
OIT during the schematic design phase.

2. Cable shall be properly supported (cat 5e requirements); raceways and trays shall be
properly supported from the building structure

3. Any fireproofing material removed from the structure during installation of raceway
system shall be replaced in kind.

4. System components penetrating fire-rated assemblies shall be fire-stopped to meet
requirements for rated assembly breached; UL listed fire-stop systems by Hilti or 3M
shall be utilized. Review system to be used with the University Project Manager
prior to undertaking work.

G. WIFI Distribution

OIT views Wireless Ethernet a complimentary service to hard wired Ethernet, not a
replacement. OIT wireless application consists of (2) cat 5e wires from the BDF/IDF out
to Aruba WIFI access points located throughout the building; placement to be determined
by Aruba design software.

Confirm that no 2.4 GHZ fluorescent lighting (Fusion lighting) is designed in the Project;
this will cause Aruba WIFI system to malfunction.

H. Salto Keyless Lock WIFI

Salto Keyless lock system WIFI consists of (1) cat 5e wire installed from the BDF/IDF
out to the WIFI devices located throughout the building; placement to be determined by
OIT and SALTO.



As-built documents shall include all routing details, wall and floor box locations, and wireless
antenna locations.


See Section 1.5 (Documentation and Archiving)

END OF DOCUMENT
2.7 Security

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.7 Security - page 1

1. Introduction

Princeton maintains a campus that is open to the surrounding community and the University
encourages interaction between its members and the local community. This raises special
challenges towards balancing community spirit with personal safety and building security. To
this end, new building projects and major renovations are to be categorized into various Security
Programming Levels to inform the designer about baseline building security requirements.
Special consideration and/or additional security measures are applied to projects where the user
program needs and building security requirements cannot be reconciled within these defined
Security Programming Levels.

Attention to baseline requirements will enable initial design concepts to proceed unimpeded of a
formal security program. However, before Construction Documentation commences, a complete
security programming process must be undertaken to better understand specific university goals
to assure consistency on all projects. This process is outlined in this Section and associated
appendices. Formal sign-offs by appropriate administration officials will confirm the completion
of this effort.

Design strategies to accommodate open campus interaction involve utilizing interior separation
zones at user areas to establish security buffers during working hours. These zones are usually
secured by mechanical, electronic or other appropriate hardware, along with special attention to
wall construction assemblies commensurate with programs within user area. Review processes
of all such details are outlined in this section.

2. Contacts



C. Director of Public Safety 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-6688

D. Manager, Life Safety and Security Systems 306 Alexander, 609-258-4992

E. Program Manager for Standards 200 Elm Drive 609-258-1330

F. Security Advisory Group Chairperson 200 Elm Drive 609-258-6688

http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/design_construction/princeton_university_desi/
PDF AutoCAD
A. Exterior Pole Lamp Details (3), Facilities
Engineering Department Appendix 3.5-2

B. Exterior Emergency Telephone Detail Appendix 2.6-11

C. Elevator Emergency Telephone Detail Appendix 2.6-9

D. Blue Light Communication Tower Detail Appendix 2.7-1

PDF AutoCAD
E. Princeton University Typical Plan/Elevation
Security/ADA Features Layout Appendix 3.1-1 Appendix 3.1-1

F. Princeton University Typical Building
Processor Cabinet with UPS Diagram Appendix 3.1-2 Appendix 3.1-2

G. Princeton University Typical Single
Door Details Appendix 3.1-3 Appendix 3.1-3

H. Princeton University Typical Double

I. Princeton University Cash & Check-Handling Policy 2012
http://finance.princeton.edu/policy-library/cash-handling-receipts-1/cash-and-check-
handling-p/

J . Campus Video Management System Appendix 2.7-3

K. Security Programming Checklist Appendix 2.7-4 (excel)

L. Security Programming Document Appendix 2.7-5 (word)

M. BAS Specifications Appendix 3.2-1 Appendix 3.2-1

4. Procedural Guidelines Programming and Schematic Design

Prior to schematic design, Designer is to consult with University Project Manager and the
Director of Public Safety and the LSSS Manager to ascertain the level of security needed for the
project, and that required for specific building areas, and that needed in the area around a
building. Most projects will fall into one of the following Security Programming Safety Level
Categories based on analysis of the program, location and public interface desired by the
occupants:
PS-21

R
e
l
e
a
s
e

9
.
0

(
M
a
r
c
h

2
0
1
2
)

P
r
i
n
c
e
t
o
n

U
n
i
v
e
r
s
i
t
y

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s

D
e
p
a
r
t
m
e
n
t

D
e
s
i
g
n

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s

M
a
n
u
a
l

2
.
7

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

-

p
a
g
e

3

P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
i
n
g

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
e
v
e
l
s

f
o
r

N
e
w

B
u
i
l
d
i
n
g
s

a
n
d

R
e
n
o
v
a
t
i
o
n
s
C
V
M
S

=

C
a
m
p
u
s

V
i
d
e
o

M
o
n
i
t
r
i
n
g

S
y
e
t
e
m
C
A
C
S

=

C
a
r
d

A
c
c
e
s
s

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

S
y
s
t
e
m

E
x
t
e
r
i
o
r

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

R
e
q
u
i
r
e
m
e
n
t
s

I
n
t
e
r
i
o
r

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

R
e
q
u
i
r
e
m
e
n
t
s

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
y

E
x
a
m
p
l
e
s
_
D
P
S

=

D
e
p
a
r
t
m
e
n
t

o
f

P
u
b
l
i
c

S
a
f
e
t
y
(
P
e
r
c
e
n
t

o
f

P
U

S
p
a
c
e
)

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
e
v
e
l

I

(
S
L
-
1
)
-

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
s
K
e
y
e
d

L
o
c
k
s
P
u
b
l
i
c

Z
o
n
e
s
U
s
e
r

Z
o
n
e
s
G
r
a
d
u
a
t
e

H
o
u
s
i
n
g
S
i
n
g
l
e
-
S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
a
y
e
r
P
a
d
l
o
c
k
s

a
t

g
a
t
e
s
F
a
c
u
l
t
y

/

S
t
a
f
f

H
o
u
s
i
n
g

L
o
c
k
a
b
l
e

b
u
f
f
e
r
s

a
t

U
s
e
r

Z
o
n
e
L
o
c
k
s
e
t
s

p
e
r

H
a
r
d
w
a
r
e

S
t
d
s
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
s
M
o
d
e
r
a
t
e

r
i
s
k

l
e
v
e
l
W
i
n
d
o
w
s
L
a
t
c
h
e
d

c
a
t
c
h
e
s

N
o

e
g
r
e
s
s

t
h
r
o
u
g
h

u
s
e
r

Z
o
n
e
N
o

i
n
t
e
r
i
o
r

l
o
c
k
s

i
n

r
e
s
i
d
e
n
t
i
a
l
G
B
M

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s
N
o
n
-
s
t
u
d
e
n
t

P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
i
n
g
E
M

c
o
r
e
s

f
o
r

G
B
M

a
c
c
e
s
s

t
o

M
E
P
*

O
f
f

C
a
m
p
u
s

A
d
m
i
n
.
L
o
w

r
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

c
o
n
t
e
n
t

c
o
s
t
s
O
t
h
e
r
K
n
o
x

B
o
x

(
o
u
t
s
i
d
e

P
r
i
n
c
e
t
o
n

o
n
l
y
)
(
d
e
p
e
n
d
i
n
g

o
n

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
,

S
i
t
e

L
i
g
h
t
i
n
g

p
e
r

o
r
d
i
n
a
n
c
e
m
a
y

a
l
s
o

b
e

L
v
e
l

2
)
M
i
n
/
N
o
n
e

D
P
S

C
o
m
m

C
t
r

I
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
i
o
n
S
i
n
g
l
e
-
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

A
c
a
d
e
m
i
c
S
i
n
g
l
e
-
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n

A
d
m
i
n
2
1
%
S
a
m
e

a
s

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
e
v
e
l

1

P
L
U
S

:

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
e
v
e
l

2

(
S
L
-
2
)
-

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
s
C
A
C
S
P
u
b
l
i
c

Z
o
n
e
s
U
s
e
r

Z
o
n
e
s
U
/
G

&

G
r
a
d
u
a
t
e

D
o
r
m
s
D
u
a
l

-

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
a
y
e
r
s
V
a
n
d
a
l

R
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
t

L
a
t
c
h
e
s

L
o
c
k
a
b
l
e

z
o
n
e

p
e
r
i
m
e
t
e
r

b
a
r
r
i
e
r
s
K
e
y
l
e
s
s

L
o
c
k
s

a
t

h
i
g
h

v
a
l
u
e

c
o
n
t
e
n
t
R
e
s
i
d
e
n
t
i
a
l

C
o
l
l
e
g
s
(
K
e
y

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

l
a
t
c
h
e
s

o
n
l
y
)

N
o

e
g
r
e
s
s

t
h
r
o
u
g
h

u
s
e
r

Z
o
n
e
L
i
m
i
t
e
d

C
V
M
S

a
t

h
i
g
h

v
a
l
u
e

c
o
n
t
e
n
t
A
c
a
d
e
m
i
c

-

n
o

v
i
v
a
r
i
u
m
S
t
u
d
e
n
t

P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
i
n
g
W
i
n
d
o
w
s
F
i
r
s
t

F
l
o
o
r

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

S
c
r
e
e
n
s

O
R

R
e
v
i
e
w

z
o
n
e

p
e
r
i
m
e
t
e
r

c
o
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
A
d
m
i
n

M
a
i
n

C
a
m
p
u
s
C
a
m
p
u
s

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
t
y

A
c
c
e
s
s
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

L
i
m
i
t
e
r

h
a
r
d
w
a
r
e
B
o
o
k

A
n
n
e
x
e
s
C
l
e
a
r

u
s
e
r

s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s
O
t
h
e
r
R
e
v
i
e
w

C
A
C
S

a
t

N
o
n
-
d
o
o
r

o
p
e
n
i
n
g
s
*

O
f
f

C
a
m
p
u
s

A
d
m
i
n
.
P
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

C
a
s
h

C
o
n
t
e
n
t
s
B
l
u
e

L
i
g
h
t

P
h
o
n
e
s
(
a
c
a
d
e
m
i
c

b
l
d
g
s
.
,

d
e
p
e
n
d
i
n
g
R
e
g
u
l
a
r

a
f
t
e
r
-
h
o
u
r
s

u
s
e
D
P
S

C
o
m
m

C
e
n
t
e
r

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g
o
n

p
r
o
g
r
a
m

&

s
c
a
l
e

o
f

b
l
d
g
.
)
4
4
%
S
a
m
e

a
s

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
e
v
e
l

2

P
L
U
S

:
S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
e
v
e
l

3

(
S
L
-
3
)

-

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
s
C
V
M
S

a
t

C
r
i
t
i
c
a
l

E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
s
P
u
b
l
i
c

Z
o
n
e
s
U
s
e
r

Z
o
n
e
s
2

-

3

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
a
y
e
r
s
K
e
y
l
e
s
s

L
o
c
k
s

a
t

z
o
n
e

p
e
r
i
m
e
t
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
i
o
r

C
A
C
S

a
t

S
p
e
c
i
a
l

A
r
e
a
s
M
u
s
e
u
m

-

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

a
r
e
a
s
C
l
e
a
r

s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

p
u
b
l
i
c

r
e
a
l
m
C
V
M
S

a
t

H
i
g
h

V
a
l
u
e

l
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
L
i
b
r
a
r
y
L
i
m
i
t
e
d

C
a
m
p
u
s

A
c
c
e
s
s

W
i
n
d
o
w
s
(
N
o

o
p
e
r
a
b
l
e

w
i
n
d
o
w
s

a
t

t
h
i
s

l
e
v
e
l
)
N
o

e
g
r
e
s
s

t
h
r
o
u
g
h

u
s
e
r

z
o
n
e
D
a
t
a

C
e
n
t
e
r
s
H
i
g
h

V
a
l
u
e

C
o
n
t
e
n
t
s
/
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

C
o
s
t
R
e
v
i
e
w

b
u
f
f
e
r

w
a
l
l

c
o
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
S
c
i
e
n
c
e
/
V
i
v
a
r
i
u
m

B
l
d
g
s
M
i
s
s
i
o
n

c
r
i
t
i
c
a
l

u
s
e
r

a
c
t
i
v
i
t
i
e
s

O
t
h
e
r
I
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
d

F
o
o
t
c
a
n
d
l
e

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r

a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

R
e
q
u
i
r
e
m
e
n
t
s
2
2
%
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

u
s
e
r

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

n
e
e
d
s
D
e
c
r
e
a
s
e
d

L
a
n
d
s
c
a
p
i
n
g
U
p
g
r
a
d
e
d

D
P
S

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g
S
a
m
e

a
s

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
e
v
e
l

3

P
L
U
S
:

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
e
v
e
l

4

(
S
L
-
4
)

-

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
s
L
i
m
i
t
e
d

o
r

S
i
n
g
l
e

E
n
t
r
a
n
c
e
P
u
b
l
i
c

Z
o
n
e
s
U
s
e
r

Z
o
n
e
s
B
S
L

3

L
a
b
o
r
i
t
o
r
i
e
s

4
t
h

S
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

L
a
y
e
r
D
P
S

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

a
t

a
l
l

o
t
h
e
r

o
p
e
n
i
n
g
s
T
u
r
n
s
t
i
l
e
s

/

s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
d

v
e
s
t
i
b
u
l
e
s
D
u
a
l

V
a
l
i
d
a
t
i
o
n

/

B
i
o
m
e
t
r
i
c
s
M
R
I

L
a
b
o
r
i
t
o
r
i
e
s
S
t
a
f
f
e
d

a
c
c
e
s
s

p
o
i
n
t
s
M
u
s
e
u
m

d
i
s
p
l
a
y

c
a
s
e
s

L
i
m
i
t
e
d

U
s
e
r

a
c
c
e
s
s

a
r
e
a
W
i
n
d
o
w
s
F
i
l
m

o
r

l
i
m
i
t
e
d

v
i
e
w

g
l
a
s
s
I
n
t
r
u
s
i
o
n

D
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
-

A
r
e
a
/
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
s
H
i
g
h
l
y

H
a
z
a
r
d
o
u
s

M
a
t
'
l

A
r
e
a
s
E
x
t
r
e
m
e

s
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
i
t
y

o
r

h
i
g
h

v
a
l
u
e

c
o
n
t
e
n
t
I
n
t
e
r
i
o
r

P
a
n
i
c

A
l
a
r
a
m
s
<

1
%
P
r
i
m
a
r
y

U
s
e
r

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g
O
t
h
e
r
A
c
c
e
s
s

w
a
y

C
V
M
S

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
g
P
r
o
p
e
r
t
y

D
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

S
y
s
t
e
m
s

S
p
e
c
i
a
l

C
i
r
c
u
m
s
t
a
n
c
e
s
E
x
p
l
a
n
a
t
i
o
n
A
t
h
l
e
t
i
c

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s
C
r
i
t
i
c
a
l

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

o
n

C
a
m
p
u
s

A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

d
i
s
c
u
s
s
i
o
n

r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d

f
o
r

f
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s

w
h
e
r
e

p
a
r
t
i
c
u
l
a
r
l
y

c
o
m
p
l
i
c
a
t
e
d

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
s

o
r

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

q
u
e
s
t
i
o
n
s

a
r
i
s
e

d
u
r
i
n
g

d
e
s
i
g
n
.

L
o
c
k
e
r

R
o
o
m
s
N
o
n
-
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
i
n
g

T
h
e

d
s
e
s
i
g
n
e
r

i
s

r
e
m
i
n
d
e
d

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

P
r
o
j
e
c
t

m
a
n
a
g
e
r

w
i
l
l

f
a
c
i
l
i
t
a
t
e

t
h
e
s
e

d
i
s
c
u
s
s
i
o
n
s

a
n
d

s
e
e
k

a
d
m
i
n
s
t
r
a
t
i
v
e

a
p
p
r
o
v
a
l

p
r
i
o
r

t
o
P
o
w
e
r

P
l
a
n
t
s
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

C
h
a
l
l
e
n
g
e
s

t
h
e

s
t
a
r
t

o
f

C
o
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

d
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
s

i
f

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e
.
P
a
r
k
i
n
g

G
a
r
a
g
e
s
1
3
%
Once a Security Level (SL1 thru 4) is established for a project, then as per Appendix 2.7-4 a
Security Programming Checklist will be prepared by the Design Team and reviewed to
define additional categories of security programming for the project. These issues may include
but are not limited to the following:

1. Discussion and coordination of goals user requirements.
2. Card Access Control System (CACS) design.
3. Transition from mechanical (keyed) lock sets to keyless locks.
4. Campus Video Management System (CVMS)
5. Blue Light Phone Requirements
6. Building Access Points
7. Fire Safety Security Monitoring System (FSMS) building.
8. Fire alarm testing to the public safety Computer Graphics Response Monitoring
System (Simplex True Site Workstation (TSW).
9. Automatic Temperature Control Points Reporting
10. Hazardous Material Usage
11. Miscellaneous Safety and Security issues

Advice and direction for security-related programming decisions will come from members the
University Safety and Security Tech Team, consisting of various technical stakeholders with
expertise in CACS, FSMS, BAS and other related disciplines. The Project Manager facilitates
these discussions during execution of the Security Programming Checklist prior to formal
commencement of any security design documentation. Review of this document by the Director
of Public Safety or appointed designee is required before proceeding with Design Development.
After acceptance of the checklist, it is memorialized through a formal Security Programming
Document (Appendix 2.7-4) prior to the start of Construction Documents.

In certain situations, direction from the University Security Advisory Group (SAG) may be
necessary to resolve project security priorities within the current campus environment. SAG
provides the necessary policy oversight, leadership and guidance on physical security matters of
institutional importance as they relate among similar building occupancy types. Review of the
Security Programming Checklist may trigger additional design reviews by SAG at the discretion
of the Director of Public Safety or his designee.

Additionally, during schematic design and design development the Designer is to also consult
with the Project Manager and the Universitys Code Analyst to discuss any code issues that have
an impact on the planned security features of the project. The approved Security Programming
Document shall be used to document the final compliant security priorities.


As the project moves toward the construction documentation and code review phases, it is
required that construction documents be submitted to the University for an internal Tech Team
review process thru the Office of Design and Construction, Life Safety and Security Systems
(LSSS), Department of Public Safety (DPS) and, as needed, from Environmental Health &
Safety (EHS) for compliance with University standards. Documentation is to be submitted for
review at:
A. Completion of Pre-Schematic Design;

SD-28




F. At 100% completion of construction documents, if required, at the discretion of the
Project Manager

appendices.


Documentation Pre SD SD DD 50% CD 85% CD
Security Programming
Checklist
X X
Document
X
CVMS documentation X X
FSMS documentation X X
CACS documentation X X
BAS Commissioning
requirements
X
Details X X
Full-Length Specifications X

6. Design Guidelines - Passive Security Features

In designing the project, the professional should be aware of features that can be included to
enhance safety in and around the building, and should also be aware of problematic conditions
that might make a project inherently less safe. Some of the features to consider follow below:

A. Landscaping

Use landscaping to enhance a design, but avoid creating heavy cover, dark areas, and
isolated areas

B. Path Routing

Design paths with sufficient lighting, and avoid cul-de-sacs and dead-ends

C. Building Configuration

1. Exterior

Take care in the building layout to avoid, or at least to compensate for such features
as:
a) Alcoves
b) blind corners
c) enclosed courtyards

2. Interior

Inside the building, care should be taken in design of exit paths for fire safety, personal
protection, and prevention of theft of property. The location and travel paths for the
following are particularly important.

a) entry configuration
b) hallway configuration
c) common spaces / public spaces
(avoid uses which compromise access security in buildings)
d) emergency exits

7. Desi gn Gui del i nes - Active Security Features

The Designer should pursue solutions that will enhance the safety of the project, both during
construction and subsequent occupancy. Refer to the approved Security Programming Document
for guidance. During the security programming review consider the following with for
appropriate locations/ applications with the Tech Team.

A. Exterior

1. Lighting

See Section 3.5 (Lighting Design).

2. Fences/walls/enclosures

Site logistics are to be planned by the Designer, working with the Project Manager and
construction manager; logistics will be reviewed by Public Safety and Grounds.

3. Security telephones/Blue Light Towers

Security telephones are placed strategically around campus. On certain projects,
additional installations may be necessary depending on the site location. Alternatively,
a localized Blue Light Tower may circumvent the need for a Security telephone outside
a building. See Appendix 2.7-1.

4. Security cameras (CVMS)

Security cameras may be placed at selected areas of campus, where required. Any
proposed use of CVMS must be approved by LSSS and Public Safety in accordance
with the Review Guidelines above.

B. Interior

The emerging standard at Princeton University favors smart buildings with selective
access systems, doors that can be locked and alarmed, electronic latches for nighttime
security, and systems that will report to Public Safety through fire alarm and security
systems. A number of control and protective methods are used, some highly technical,
others less so. Many of the features that provide safety to building occupants and to the
public in general, can be arrived at simply through the process of thoughtful design, and
the employment of common-sense solutions.

1. Card access, using identification cards

a) Proximity (prox) cards for activation of locking hardware on dormitory entries
and selected other buildings and areas. See Section 3.1 (Access Control Systems).
b) Hotel-style card locks (Salto Keyless Locks). If keyless locks are selected the
intended use is for interior doors such as dormitory rooms and bathrooms. A
University ID card is to be the key that will operate the off-line electronic lock
system.

2. Combination locks in specific areas (Trilogy or Salto electronic locks, non-alarmed,
for use in dormitory bathrooms, and special-use areas such as computer rooms)

3. Although security cameras are generally not used, they may be placed at selected areas
of campus, where required. Any proposed use should be reviewed with Life Safety
and Security Systems and Public Safety. See Appendix 2.7-3.

4. Window screens (in residential buildings; heavy-duty frame and screen on ground-
level and first-floor rooms; must be lockable but operable). All screens should be
either lockable, provided with heavy duty magnetic operators, or have limiter hardware
to prevent forced entry in the open position.

5. Duress buttons/ emergency phones are generally only specified for public areas used
intermittently or at odd hours, such as laundry rooms, remote social areas in dorms,
and at building entries. Additionally, they may be required for code-mandated Areas
of Refuge within egress pathways.

6. Lighting, both normal lighting and motion-activated

7. Maintenance-only access to special uses/areas such as roof hatches and windows to
roofs or unprotected balconies. Review all locations on a case-by-case basis.

8. Maintenance-only access to service/mechanical areas (see Section 4.4 Door Hardware)

9. Use of magnetic door hold opens on rated door assemblies along required egress paths.

10. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be designed to incorporate the reporting
of all non-security related MEP system alarms, including high-water alerts,
maintenance breakdowns and other general building issues. See Appendix 3.2-1, BAS
Specifications, for specific University BAS requirements (including commissioning).



electrical and security contractors.


On the as-builts, the contractor is to highlight changes made to submittals and approved
documents. The as-builts are to include, as a minimum, security/utility/environmental and other
alarms layout plan with all other system interfaces, components, equipment schedule and riser
Diagrams. Card Access Control System (CACS) Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) will be
included with As-Built Drawings.


END OF DOCUMENT

2.8 Environmental Graphics

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.8 Env Graphics - page 1

1. Introduction

Environmental graphics includes both interior and exterior signs or lettering that are project
specific, as well as campus-wide sign systems for wayfinding and information. Project
Designers are encouraged to retain the services of a Graphic Designer for all project specific
signage and to coordinate their work with emerging campus-wide sign systems designed by
others. (See Wayfinding below).

Exterior Building Signage:
To be determined on a case by case basis - each building project may require at least two types
of exterior signs: 1) a building identification sign (building ID) showing the officially recognized
name of the building, and 2) information signs for ADA routes, service deliveries, parking, etc.
Generally, the building identification sign should be located near the primary entrance and its
design integrated into the architectural elements of the building faade. There are many existing
precedents on campus for building IDs. Some examples are: lettering carved directly into the
buildings stone, pin-mounted metal lettering on masonry, metal lettering incised into stone,
applied lettering on glass, and plaques of carved stone or non-ferrous metals. Another option is
to use the standard building ID sign type as shown in the Princeton University Wayfinding
Signage Handbook, (Appendix 2.8-1). For all other exterior informational signage associated
with the building and its site, the university recommends using the campus standard signage as
shown in the Handbook.

Interior Building Signage:
Although governed by ADA and NJ UCC guidelines, interior signage should be project specific
in its scope and should be designed to complement the architectural style of the particular
project.

Dedicatory Inscriptions:
In addition to the design of interior building signage, graphic design services may also include
design of a dedicatory, commemorative, or memorial inscription or plaque, as part of the project.
Whenever possible the requirements for same will be provided to the project team during the
schematic design phase

Print Graphics:
If needed, editorial and design guidelines, (Logos, typefaces, etc.), are available from the
Communications Office online. See www.princeton.edu/pr/

Wayfinding:
Princeton University is currently implementing a comprehensive, yet discreet, Campus
Wayfinding Program. The program consists of campuswide directional and informational sign
system, campus maps and directories, geared primarily for campus visitors. Wayfinding signage
will be designed by the Universitys Graphic Design Consultant and will be implemented over
time. Campus wayfinding is generally independent of project specific signage but may in some
instances be used to supplement exterior building identification.


2. Contacts

A. Project Manager (in Office of Design and Construction, Office of the University
Architect, the Engineering Department, Grounds and Building Maintenance, or as
applicable).

B. Landscape Project Manager 200 Elm, Drive, 609-258-8338

C. Graphics Coordinator 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-5176

D. University Coordinating Architect MacMillan Building, 609-258-1189

E. Architectural Engineer for Standards 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-6247

F. Associate Director of Grounds MacMillan Building, 609-258-7150

PDF
A. The New J ersey Uniform Construction Code
(With sub codes dealing with ADA requirements,
safety and occupancy requirements, etc.) Public Document

B. The New J ersey Uniform Fire Code
(subchapter 4 requirements for safety
and way finding) Public Document

C. Princeton University Wayfinding
Signage Handbook Appendix 2.8-1

D. Fire Alarm/Signage Nomenclature
Spreadsheet sample, Princeton University Appendix 2.8-2

E. Uniform Traffic Control Device Manual,
Federal Highway Safety Administration Public Document

F. Room/ Space Numbering System Guidelines Appendix 1.5-3


Documentation for interior signage typically comes late in a construction project, and review is
generally limited to the Project Manager, the University Coordinating
Architect, and representatives of the client department.

If the Project Manager determines that a consultant independent of the design firm will be used
for signage, then the signage is usually shown on plans specifically drawn for that purpose;
otherwise the signage will be included on the construction documents as shown in the chart
shown on page 3 of this section.

Typically, signage proposals will be reviewed in preliminary form, and may proceed directly to
the final plans, depending on the complexity of the project.

Designers shall provide timely and coordinated responses to all review comments. Preferably,
with the assistance of the Project Manager, review meetings should be held with respective
internal contacts as identified by the Project Manager to facilitate this process. The A/E is
responsible for documenting minutes of all these meetings. There, review comments or recent
revisions may be discussed and documented. If these review meetings are not held, or if any
non-compliant design or component is selected, the A/E shall provide the University written
documentation of respective changes prior to submission of the next round of documents.

Required Documentation SD DD 50% CD 85% CD
Compliant Room Number Designations
(per Appendix 1.5-3)

X X X
Interior Signage Schedule
X


The Project Designer should determine at the beginning of the project, in consultation with the
University Project Manager, whether a Graphics Consultant will be used on the project and what
the scope of graphic services will be for the project. The University, with the help of the
Designer, will establish a budget for the graphics work.

During preliminary design, Designer is to consult with Project Manager to ascertain the level of
signage needed for a building, that required for specific building areas, and that needed in the
area around a building. The Designer is to develop a code-conformance schedule, outlining the
minimum signage to meet code requirements.

The building signage should take its cue from the form and style of the building itself: the
signage should complement the architecture of the building.

To facilitate the establishment of room numbers, a meeting with the Architectural Engineer for
Standards, SPMIS Assistant Manager and Design team should occur before the start of Design
Development. This meeting will clarify the appropriate method for assigning room numbers
based on Appendix 1.5-3. Compliant room number designations, including all mechanical
rooms and circulation spaces, are due as part of Design Development Submission, see Appendix
1.5-3.
The Graphics Consultant may be asked to provide assistance to the University Project Manager
and the project Designer in determining the scheme for room numbering. This numbering
scheme may include nomenclature for the building fire alarm system; this nomenclature is
developed in coordination with the Department of Public Safety.

While in development, Designer is to review plans with the Project Manager, Office of the
University Architect, the client/user, Public Safety, and any other parties that might be affected
by the proposed installation. During development, full-scale mockups should be temporarily
installed on site and in context to aid in the final review of signage design.

In the final design, a sign schedule is to be created, with sign types listed on a room-by-room
basis, with floor plans keyed into the schedule. Typical elevations showing mounting heights
and relative location of sign types are to be prepared, as is a written specification that will allow
accurate pricing of the signage and installation.


6. Guidelines for Installation and Performance

A. Signage for room numbers is considered permanent, should comply with ADA and NJ
barrier-free requirements.

Names that may be attached to or be a part of a room number sign should be easily
adaptable and changeable. Window signs, for example, allow the client/user to maintain
the signs in the building.

B. Interior signage is typically installed using a silicone sealant, with double-faced foam
tape providing temporary adhesion.

C. For exterior signage, concealed fasteners are preferred. Through-bolts are not to be used
unless no other option is available, and then only with permission from the Project
Manager. Embedded anchors are typically used on masonry.

D. Building identification is often hand-carved into the masonry of a building facade. An
alternative is a plaque of carved stone, set into the building walls or anchored with
concealed fasteners. Cast metal and porcelain enamel are also acceptable options.

E. Dormitory signage (interior) See Section 2.4.

7. Guidelines for Door Number Labeling

For maintenance purposes, the University requires individual door numbering all spaces. For
locations not included in a formal signage package, these requirements shall be indicated on final
construction documents in table format for the following doors:

A. Exterior Card Access Doors: Each door with access control (CACS) hardware shall
receive a exterior grade vinyl label coordinated lettering and numbering from the
CACS design. These labels are to be adhered to the frame directly above the center of
the door from the exterior. Labels are available from the owner.

B. Interior Room Doors: The interior sign package often includes room signage /
numbering for most rooms. However, for rooms with doors that may not include
standard interior signage, each door shall include a 1/2 vinyl label supplied by the
owner. The consultant should review the signage package with the Architectural
Engineer for Standards to ascertain the projects need for labels.

END OF DOCUMNET
2.9 Site Planning

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.9 Site Planning - page 1

1. Introduction

Princeton University began as the College of New J ersey in 1746 in Elizabethtown in the
parsonage of the first president, J onathan Dickinson. The College moved to Princeton ten years
later to move into Nassau Hall and occupy the field surrounding, a total of four and a half acres.
That first plot has grown to a campus of over 660 acres today, with holdings in excess of 2,000
acres. The College expanded greatly in the 1870s under president J ames McCosh, a Scot who
brought with him from Britain a love of the English garden, and who first applied some of the
gardening concepts to what at the time was a rather austere campus.

In 1912 Beatrix J ones Farrand began what was to be a propitious association with the University,
when she was brought in to work on the project to create the Graduate College, with Architect
Ralph Adams Cram. Farrand became the University consulting Landscape Architect and was
associated with the University for some thirty years. She was responsible for the initial
landscape design that helped shape what is today the Historic Campus, and her basic design
principles are still evident - emphasize rather than conceal architecture; simplify and unify with
careful, controlled planting; and select materials with a view to the seasonal use of the campus.

The campus has historically grown as a series of plazas or quadrangles connected by walkways.
Today the main campus reflects that historic growth, and is organized along two east-west axes -
McCosh Walk near the north end of campus, and Goheen Walk farther to the south. North-south
paths are generally discontinuous. Elm Drive is the primary vehicular path through the central
campus and connects the north and south campus entrances.

The lasting impression that the campus has on visitors centers on the attention given to open
spaces. Careful design of outdoor spaces provides the continuity of experience for the campus.
In 2008 the University published the Princeton Campus Plan (Appendix 2.9-12) as well as a 10-
year Landscape Master plan to assist in determination of how it could accommodate significant
academic expansion while preserving the historic beauty and walkability of the Campus. This
plan breaks down the scale of the campus through the identification of campus neighborhoods:
to assess local site relationships within the vibrant diversity of the campus as a whole.
Consulting architects are encouraged to become familiar with the Campus Plan and embrace its
five guiding principles within each respective project design:

Maintain a pedestrian-oriented campus
Preserve the park-like character of the campus
Maintain campus neighborhoods while promoting a sense of community
Build in an environmentally-responsible manner
Sustain strong community relations

Site Planning implementation and corresponding internal review procedures for each project can
be found later in this section; item 6.

2. Contacts

A. The Project Manager (in Office of Design and Construction, Office of the University
applicable).

B. Landscape Project Manager (ODC) 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-8338

C. Coordinating Architect (OUA) MacMillan Building, 609-258-1189

D. Manager of Grounds (GBM) MacMillan Building, 609-258-7150

E. Manager, Civil Engineering (Eng) MacMillan Building, 609-258-5471

F. GIS Analyst (Eng) MacMillan Building, 609-258-8205

G. Assistant Director, Grounds & Landscape (GBM) MacMillan Building, 609-258-6046

PDF
A. Campus Utility Maps in Facilities Engineering Consult Project Manager

B. Campus-wide Tree Survey Consult Project Manager

C. Campus Accessibility Map
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/services/printable_maps/pdf/Accessibility.pdf

D. Historic Campus Master Plan , 2000 Appendix 2.9-2

E. Outdoor Lighting Master Plan Appendix 2.9-15

F. Campus Emergency Services Access Route Map
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/services/printable_maps/pdf/Emergency.pdf

G. Map of University-Owned Roadways
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/services/printable_maps/pdf/Roadways.pdf

H. Exterior Pole Lamp Details, Facilities
Engineering Department Appendix 3.5-2

I. Reunion Sites
http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/services/printable_maps/pdf/Reunions.pdf

J . Site Details Appendix 2.9-9 (PDF / ACAD)

K. General Survey Requirements Appendix 2.9-10

L. Geodetic Control Monument Detail Appendix 2.9-11

M. Princeton Campus Plan Appendix 2.9-12
The next 10 years and beyond 2008

N. Standard University Handrail Details Appendix 2.9-13

O. Standard University Outdoor Furniture Appendix 2.9-14

P. Campus Landscape Master Plan Appendix 2.9-16

Q. Stormwater Master Plan Appendix 2.9-17

4. Code References

A. New J ersey Uniform Construction Code (NJ UCC) - see Section 1.4 (Regulatory
Agencies)

B. ANSI/CABO A-117.1 (Barrier-Free Guidelines)

C. Shade Tree Ordinance, Borough of Princeton

D. Tree Removal Ordinance, Township of Princeton

E. Code of Laws, Volume II, Land Use, Borough of Princeton

F. Land Use Ordinance, Township of Princeton

G. Mercer County Soil Conservation Report

5. Design Guidelines

It is appropriate to think of buildings as backdrops to the exterior spaces that are, ultimately, the
cohesive factor in experiencing Princetons campus.

Buildings may give form to the exterior space, they may frame an exterior space, or they may
create circulation patterns for exterior space. Overall, the following concepts should be adhered
to in the site planning aspects of project design:

A. Hierarchy of Spaces

There should be a hierarchy of spaces which building placement and plantings should
reinforce and enhance. The most successful exterior areas on campus rely on a hierarchy
of spaces - the intimate ambulatory providing a vista through an archway to a grand
courtyard, for example. The open spaces are defined by sequence, making the
connections essential and the use of axis - or cross-axes - a major design consideration

B. Sequence

A design goal in developing Princetons outdoor spaces is to create a sense of continuity
between spaces, where major spaces are enhanced by the sequence of moving through
secondary spaces, where there is a play of expansion and contraction, of light and shade.
The campus is typically experienced by moving through exterior spaces, minor spaces
leading to major spaces by means of connectors.

C. Connection

It can be argued that, while the grand spaces may be the most beautiful aspect of the
campus plan, the connections or paths of travel are what provide the sense of campus.
The connections provide the views, the vistas, and the experience of coming upon or
into the artfully arranged courtyards and quadrangles.

D. Continuity

The buildings at Princeton are remarkably diverse, yet the campus is still perceived as
cohesive. It is a challenge to the Designer to work within that established context: to
impose what might be a unique volume upon an existing array of solids and voids, and to
have that volume - and the means of going through and around it - become a seamless
part of that whole.

6. Internal Review Guidelines Site Plans / Landscaping

The campus landscape is governed by two standing committees, the Landscape Policy
Committee (LPC) and the Landscape Coordinating Committee (LCC).

The LPC membership includes upper management and meets quarterly. It sets policy regarding
the campus landscape and approves design direction for all major landscape projects and long-
range site planning initiatives.

The LCC meets bi-weekly to review all substantive landscape projects and policies usually in
more detail than the LPC. LCC acts as a forum for design reviews of landscaping projects
especially in terms of horticulture, sustainability, maintenance and options for study.

The University Coordinating Architect should be contacted for any project which disturbs an
exterior site in any manner to determine if a review is required, the level of review and schedule
the review time.

The purpose of the review is to determine the appropriate scope and design concept for all site
work. The expectation is that the Design Team and University Coordinating Architect will come
to a complete agreement on each matter. If it is not possible for all to agree, differences will be
resolved by the Landscape Coordinating Committee, which meets bi-weekly. All final site plans
should be reviewed by the Landscape Coordinating Committee before implementation.

The University Coordinating Architect has the responsibility of insuring that the scope and
concept for all sitework has been approved.

During the process of design, plans are to be submitted for review by Facilities departments as
well as the LCC at:

A. Completion of Schematic Design; Existing Conditions Survey must be completed by
schematic design. Refer to this section, item 16 for more information.

B. Completion of Design Development; Proposed plant material should be represented on
drawing at 70% of size at maturity. Sections should show scale, form, and opacity of
proposed trees.

C. At 50% completion of construction documents

D. At 85% completion of construction documents

Team

PS-22
appendices.

7. Internal Review Guidelines - Utilities

At initiation of programming, it is useful to begin informal discussions about site utilities with
the Facilities Engineering Departments Manager, Civil Engineering. This department maintains
the campus utility plans and can also be a source of general knowledge about utilities the
University can provide about methods for involving agents for public utilities in the project.
Please see Section 3.6 (Utility Guidelines) for additional information.

Please see this section; item 13-D, for layout of trees over utilities.

8. Internal Review Guidelines Storm Water

The Designer should note that the University has developed stormwater management criteria that
address water quantity as well as quality for all projects with site impacts. Specific guidelines
can be found in the appendices for larger scale projects. See OUA for guidelines for small
projects. Design teams should coordinate stormwater management requirements with the Office
of the University Architect. Stormwater concepts should be developed in conjunction with all of
the appropriate design team members and reviewed periodically with the University for
conformance.

Sustainability Charrette Stormwater management goals and criteria should be identified.

SD, DD, 50% CD, 85% CD Princeton Universitys storm water management consultant in
conjunction with the tech teams and LCC will review the documents.

9. Municipal Review Guidelines - Landscaping

Building projects, major landscaping projects, and landscaping projects undertaken in
conjunction with building construction, are likely to require review by a number of municipal
and county agencies. Site plans must be reviewed by the Princeton Regional Planning Board. In
some instances, site plan review becomes the responsibility of a municipal Zoning Board of
Adjustment.

The legal intricacies of site plan approval are typically addressed by the Universitys legal
counsel. The Designer must be prepared to offer support in the effort to obtain site plan
approval, which might require presentation Drawings, appearances at the meetings of the
Regional Planning Board or the municipal zoning boards, pre-meetings with a key subcommittee
that supports all the agencies, the Site Plan Review Advisory Board (SPRAB), and with
municipal officials and professionals.

SPRAB takes the leading role in landscape review for the municipalities, and can have a major
impact on the details of a site plan. This board is well regarded in the municipalities, and
approval by SPRAB can ease the passage of a project through the subsequent hearings before the
Planning or Zoning Boards.

To expedite the review and approval of a project at the local level, close coordination with
civil/site Engineers, Landscape Architects, and University personnel is required of the landscape
Designer.

See Section 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) for additional information.


As noted above, the University maintains campus utility maps that can be used as the starting
point for site survey information. Auto CAD planimetric data covering the campus can be
obtained through Facilities Engineering to supplement the campus utility maps.

Site planning and development documents are generally prepared well in advance of construction
Drawings for a given building, at a time when the size, shape, and volume of a building may be
finalized, but the details may be in flux. The site documents are used in obtaining permission to
proceed into construction from the local planning and zoning agencies, and from county bodies
such as the Mercer County Soil Conservation Agency.

The local agencies have checklists for project documentation, and these play a crucial role in
successfully moving a project through preliminary review. A project will not be scheduled for a
site plan hearing (except in concept) until the project has been deemed complete by the board of
jurisdiction; that is, until each item on the checklist has been successfully addressed and
documented. As an example, a typical site development application, classified as a major site
plan, must provide documentation on each of the following:

A. Site plan, with existing and proposed site features
B. Fire protection plan
C. Variance appeals, if applicable
D. Site survey (see this section item 16.)
E. Drainage and utility plan
F. Landscaping, lighting, and signage plan
G. Soil map
H. Building Drawings
I. Soil erosion and sedimentation control plans
J . Environmental information statement
K. Traffic Impact Study

There is a sublist of required information for each of these checklist items, outlined in the
respective land use ordinances for the municipality. The Designer, working with the Project
Manager, Office of the University Architect, University legal counsel, and other University
consultants must address each of the requirements of the checklist to move the project forward.


Key Map
X X X X
Vicinity Map
X X X X
Existing Conditions Survey
X X X X
Site Utility Plan
X X X X
Preliminary Site Plan
X
Preliminary Landscape
X
Preliminary Stormwater Peer Review
X
Preliminary LCC Review
X
Stormwater Peer Review
X X X
LCC Review
X X X
Overall Site Plan
X X X
Demolition and Removals
X X X
Grading
X X X
Site Lighting
X X X
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
X X X
Construction Details
X X X
Outline Specifications
X
Full-Length Specifications
X X
Fire Protection Site Plan
X X
Landscape Layout
X X X
Landscape Materials
X X X
Planting Plan
X X X
Coord. Planting/Utility Plan
X X X
Planting Schedule
X X X
Accessibility Plan
X X X
Site Details
X X X
Planting Soils Plan
X X

See Section 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) for additional information.

11. Sustainability

One of the Universitys Guiding Principles for Future Expansion, as articulated by the
Administration in 2003, is to build in an environmentally responsible manner - a manner which
is sensitive to geography, sensitive to energy and resource consumption and works to sustain
strong community relations. These Guidelines are intended to provide direction and resources
for the sustainable design and construction of new buildings and the comprehensive renewal of
existing buildings for capital projects at Princeton. The requirements of this process are
described in Section 1.2 Sustainable Building Guidelines.

12. Considerations for Exterior Design - Circulation

Open space priorities are a major concern of the Landscape Policy Committee and should be the
starting point in site plan development. Designers should strive to enhance the experience of the
open spaces while guiding people through those spaces. Careful consideration must be given,
then, to laying out walks and drives, to the way such paths intersect, and to the materials of the
paths themselves.

The Designer should address building service issues as an integral part of the site design in order
to produce a comprehensive plan that will augment - or improve - existing services. Planning
should include delivery routes, loading areas and trash storage locations.

Although Princeton tries to minimize vehicular traffic in the main campus area, there are
undeniable requirements for access to each building such as trash and recycling pickups, mail
delivery and pickup, delivery of supplies, furniture delivery, shop vehicles for normal
maintenance of a building, etc. Certain academic disciplines may require frequent delivery of
equipment or materials, and dining facilities, for example, have extremely heavy service
requirements. There are periods of the year -- move-in and move-out days in the dormitories,
Reunions and Commencement - when unusual and unusually heavy traffic patterns are the norm,
and universal access to campus areas is needed. Additionally, emergency access to a building
must be provided for fire department and medical vehicles. Thus it is important to address
service access in the early stages of design.

On campus, circulation paths fall into several different categories, depending on use:

A. Vehicular Circulation

1. Primary: characterized by full-width travel lanes, curbing, and raised sidewalks;
typical of the main drive through campus (Elm Drive) and of the streets owned by the
University. Usually paved with asphalt, with granite or Belgin block curbs, and
sidewalks of bluestone, concrete or asphalt.

2. Secondary: these are typically pathways that serve both vehicular and pedestrian
traffic, characterized by an asphalt center section, with additional width to either side
in a different or contrasting paving material, set flush with the asphalt but defining the
pedestrian space. The approach drive to Prospect House (1996) is an example.

Secondary vehicular pathways often serve as fire lanes, and must provide an eighteen-
foot wide lane of stabilized base at a depth sufficient for fire truck criteria; refer to
Appendix 2.9-5 (Campus Fire Lane Map) for locations, and review requirements with
Project Manager.

3. Tertiary: these are primarily pedestrian paths that can be used occasionally by service
vehicles. Access is controlled by removable, lockable bollards spaced six feet on
center (allowing for snow removal equipment to pass, but excluding normal vehicles).
Minimum width for tertiary vehicular paths is five feet, maximum is fourteen feet.

B. Pedestrian Circulation

Introduction

Historically, Princeton walks featured a four-foot wide bluestone path to which gravel
borders were later added for increased width. The arrival of larger and heavier vehicular
traffic resulted in gradually replacing the gravel borders with asphalt. Overall width of the
walks with asphalt borders increased at varying locations to between eight and fourteen feet.

PS-29
In 1996, a successful variation of the bordered walk was introduced using two types of
concrete unit pavers, without asphalt borders. These walks have four- to six-foot wide center
sections of large-module concrete pavers or bluestone, bordered by bands of small-module
pavers of a different color. In heavily traveled areas, such walks are edged in low bluestone
curbing to protect adjacent lawns. Examples can be seen in McCosh/Dickinson courtyard
and around Prospect Houses south garden.

Recent walk designs for the Historic Campus and elsewhere continue this system using
bluestone as the center path material, flanked by borders of small-module concrete or
cobblestone pavers. Note that rough cobblestone pavements are best used for pathway
borders and corners, where they effectively reinforce path shoulders, rather than for the
center portion of the pathway walking surfaces. Rough or heavily textured pavements should
not be placed where they will interfere with pedestrian or accessible routes to doors and
entryways.

For walks seven feet wide or narrower, a single paving material without borders is
recommended. In such cases bluestone, brick, or concrete pavers are among the possible
material choices.

1. Primary paths: as noted above, the main campus pedestrian arteries such as McCosh
Walk and Goheen Walk, also serve as tertiary vehicular paths and are twelve to
fourteen feet in width.

The Designer should consult with the Project Manager and review the Campus Fire
Lane Plan for requirements for a particular project. If a walk must be designed to
carry emergency vehicles, there may be some increase in traffic-bearing capacity over
normal University design, and the stabilized width most certainly will be increased.
A common design variation is to provide the increased width using stabilized base
and structural soil, which can be then be planted with grass or mulched.

2. Secondary paths: secondary walks may lead from the main campus walks into
buildings, may occur within courtyards, or simply cross open areas. These paths are
constructed of durable materials such as stone, concrete pavers, or brick laid over
compacted stone or quarry blend sub-bases, with a variety of bases, such as concrete,
asphalt or sand, depending on the proposed paving material and the traffic
expectations. With the exception of walks leading into buildings (which may be as
wide as the building entry or form an entry plaza), these secondary walks are typically
five to seven feet wide. If vehicular traffic is anticipated on a secondary walk, bands
of unit pavers will be installed on either side of the walk, to increase the total width to
eight to ten feet.

3. Tertiary paths: tertiary walks are paths that lead to secondary entrances in buildings,
or crisscross a green area. They are designed for foot traffic across open areas (or are
sometimes installed after a traffic pattern has been established). The material may be
permanent in nature, such as bluestone, less permanent such as concrete, asphalt or
porous pavement, or may be renewable, such as compacted stone dust, stabilized
gravel systems or wood chips. Minimum width for tertiary paths is four feet.

4. In order to accommodate some changes in elevation, steps may have to be
incorporated into the design. Steps should be designed with a change in materials, or
color change, to alert the pedestrian of the difference in grade.

For all walks and some drives, the Designer should review any areas that need special
treatment, such as snow-melting equipment or weather protection. The Designer
needs to keep in mind that all walks and paths at the University are cleared of snow
using mechanical means (as far as possible) so access for the equipment is important,
as is the placement and finish of the path.

An emerging challenge in site design has to do with the use of steps and plazas by
roller-blade enthusiasts, skateboarders, and stunt bicyclists. This activity has abused a
number of elegant site amenities - stone-capped walls, memorial benches, handrails,
and the like. While a punitive policy of public space design should not result, the
Designer should be aware that what some would view as amenities become attractive
nuisances for others.

Along with circulation needs, the Designer should be aware of various parking needs -
for employees, visitors, and the disabled. Quite often, parking will be accommodated
in one of the University lots or garages. Nevertheless, it must be demonstrated that
parking requirements will be met by some means before a project will receive site plan
approval. The Designer should be prepared to compose a plan, working with the
Project Manager, Office of the University Architect, Transportation and Parking
Services, and other University consultants, outlining parking requirements and
provisions for use in the site plan review process at the municipal level.

13. Considerations for Exterior Design - Planting Concepts

The following concepts should guide the Designer in both building and landscaping projects on
campus at Princeton:

Note: While following the concepts listed below the Designer must co-ordinate with the
layout of proposed utilities throughout the project and make adjustments to the plantings as
necessary.

A. There is a hierarchy of open spaces which the planting (and any building) should
reinforce and enhance.

1. The size of outdoor spaces should determine the scale of the planting, i.e. large spaces
should contain large trees, while small spaces should have flowers, vines and
groundcovers, shrubs, and small trees.

2. Smaller, more defined spaces should be characterized by distinctive planting (color,
scale, texture).

3. Large spaces should be defined by structural tree planting (e.g. perimeter planting
and entrance definition).

4. Vistas should be demarcated by tree plantings where possible.

5. General foundation planting should be avoided. Plantings at buildings should
emphasize and enhance the character of the architecture. Plantings within the
landscape should define spaces.

B. Spatial sequences through the campus should be defined and enhanced.

1. Major entrances should be identified by planting.

2. The campus perimeter should be strengthened with planting.

3. Major campus axes should be defined by planting, as at McCosh Walk.

C. Plantings should provide solutions for various functional needs.

1. Provide shade for events and for outdoor use areas:
a) Commencement
b) Reunions
c) Outdoor gathering places

2. Conceal unattractive use areas:
a) Parking and loading areas
b) Refuse handling and recycling areas
c) Service areas

D. Layout of trees over subsurface utilities:

1. Trees shall be located with an offset distance equal to 3 x the diameter at maturity plus
two feet for most subsurface utilities and an offset distance equal to 3 x the diameter at
maturity plus six feet for gas, and public utilities such as water.

2. Conditions caused by backfilling of utilities should be examined before final location
of trees.

3. During Design Development, provide a coordinated utility/planting plan for review.

E. Maintenance Periods for Landscape Plans

1. A 60 day minimum maintenance period for lawns and plant material shall be specified
as part of the Acceptance and Maintenance section of the project specifications. Any
additional requirement shall be discussed with the Tech Team during design reviews.

F. Irrigation

1. When proposing irrigation for the site, factors such as area of planting beds, lawns,
type of soils, and establishment period should be carefully considered in the design of
the irrigation plan. All irrigation installations should be installed with a trace wire in
order to enable the location of the underground piping during utility markouts. It is
the goal of the University to be able to monitor all irrigation systems and water usage
from one point. The Designer should check with the Project Manager when
specifying the controller for the irrigations system to insure that it is compatible with
the Princeton University systems used on campus.

G. Tree Logistics

1. Proper tree protection guidelines are to be spelled out in the specifications. At a
minimum the industry standard of no disturbance within 5x the diameter is to be
adhered to.

In choosing planting material for a project, the Designer should bear in mind that diversity of
material and careful spacing of plantings are important factors. Diversity provides not only the
opportunity for a pleasant variety of color and shade, but also insures that if disease strikes a
particular variety, the entire bed is not lost.

The Designer should take care that no invasive species are used in site landscaping

14. Considerations for Exterior Design-Reunion Sites

Princetons Alumni reunions date back to the Universitys earliest years. Many courtyards on
campus are designated as reunion sites, see appendix 2.9-8. Individual Alumni classes set up
large tents for Reunion Weekend which is held each year around J une 1
st
. A reunion site may be
used each year by a large number of people concentrated in a relatively confined area. Special
design considerations such as open areas for tents, shade, drainage, soil compaction and
accessible access should be incorporated when a project site is proposed to be used as a future
reunion site.

15. Considerations for Exterior Design - Lighting

Lighting should be carefully considered in the design of the site. Thought needs to be given to
lighting for foot travel and safety around the site, but glare needs to be controlled and over-
lighting is to be avoided. A consistent, if low, level of lighting will provide a sense that the site
is well lighted and safe (an average of .1 to .2 footcandles for exterior lighting is considered
sufficient).

The local municipalities have requirements for the type of exterior lighting to be used, although
waivers can be sought from those requirements; the Designer should discuss the exterior lighting
with the Project Manager. The use of LED, metal halide or QL lamps is encouraged. Fixtures
using high-pressure sodium lamps are being phased out.

The University recommends using the campus standard gaslight light poles and fixtures seen
throughout campus (see Appendix 3.5-2). Review requirements for burial of power lines for
lighting with Facilities Engineering.
Photometric Diagrams of any proposed site and exterior building lighting must be presented as
part of a site plan application. The New J ersey Uniform Construction Code requires that
exitways be lighted (with emergency power backup) to the exterior of the building and at the
exterior of the exitway; these lights should be accounted for in site plan applications.

The Designer should review site lighting proposals with the Project Manager and the project
design review committee. Discuss the desirability of providing exterior building lighting and
lighting of any site features such as steps, ramps, or stairways. Review the Universitys policy
on motion-sensor activated lighting.

The Designer is also encouraged to study the Princeton University outdoor lighting Master Plan,
which provides recommended design guidelines. (Appendix 2.9-15)

16. General Survey Requirements

For all projects which require existing conditions survey, the Designer shall obtain the required
survey early in the project, and prior to design of utilities. The existing conditions survey must
be completed at Schematic Design. See this section, items 6 and 10.

In addition to the required survey content, each survey will have specific characteristics. The
following general list covers specific features which should be added if they are consistent with
the original survey purpose.
Boundaries
Boundary and other roads
Interior features
Trees and Foliage
Utilities
Topography

See Appendix 2.9-10, General Survey Requirements for more information.

If a project requires a tree survey, the survey should be reviewed by the Assistant Director
Grounds & Landscape for identification of invasive species.

All survey drawings are required to meet CAD Standards and digital submissions requirements.
See section 1.5 Documentation and Archiving.

Requirements for geodetic control monuments are as follows.

Installation of permanent monuments should be considered in the design of the site. At a
minimum, permanent monument should be installed on the north, east, south, and west sides of
the site. See appendix 2.9-11 for monument detail.

The permanent monuments should be surveyed by a Licensed Professional Surveyor in the State
of New J ersey. Upon completion of the project, the monuments should be included in the as-
built drawings.

Preservation of Geodetic control points

All geodetic control monuments, (horizontal and vertical) such as discs and official benchmarks
within the project site must be carefully protected and must not be disturbed by any construction
activity.

Where such markers are located within new construction and are in imminent danger of
destruction, the contractor shall retain a licensed land surveyor to ensure the markers relocation
prior to disturbing the original markers, in accordance with the manual for mark preservation
being prepared by Geodetic Mark Preservation Guidebook.


contractors.
Designed will verify during these regular meetings that the contractor is maintaining record

documents.

The as-builts are to include, as a minimum, the following site features:

Signs
Fencing
Bollards
Sculptures
Fixed seating
Planters
Bike racks
Lighting locations
Conduit runs
Controls and circuiting
Monuments
Irrigation

See Section 1.5 (Documentation and Archiving)

END OF DOCUMENT
2.10 Laboratory Design

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.10 Lab Design - page 1

1. Introduction

Laboratories are critical to Princeton Universitys mission in the 21
st
Century. The laboratory
Designer must be aware of the needs of the users, the ways the laboratory will and might be used,
and the technical needs of the department involved and the technical requirements of the space
itself. Critical to the success of the project will be the early involvement of the University
Facilities Engineering and Ground & Building Maintenance Departments.

Establishing parameters for energy consumption and sizing of utility services and distribution is
of paramount importance to the University. These parameters must be established early in the
project, (Pre Schematic phase), applying established benchmarks, projected usage with demand
& diversity factors. The Project Manager will meet with the academic department/end user, the
Design Team and Facilities Engineering to establish these parameters which will be included in
the Basis of Design.

The Designer should keep in mind that laboratory design is a highly specialized field. Adequate
research, programmatic development and due diligence are essential to their successful design
and construction. Codes and guidelines referred to in this (or any other) section of the Standards
Manual are not to be assumed as comprehensive. It is incumbent upon the Designer to properly
investigate the specific requirements of the lab to ensure compliance with all local, state, and
national codes and regulations.

2. Contacts

Grounds and Building Maintenance Department, or as applicable).

B. Program Manager - Sciences MacMillan, 609-258-9483

C. Manager, Mechanical Engineering MacMillan, 609-258-3934

D. Director of Facilities Engineering MacMillan, 609-258-5472

E. Project Engineer for Standards 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-8589


PDF

A. Princeton University - Laboratory Functional and Appendix 2.10 - 1
Technical Criteria Checklist

B. EH&S Appendix D: Health & Safety Design
Considerations for Laboratories
http://web.princeton.edu/sites/ehs//labsafetymanual/appd.htm

C. Labs21 www.labs21century.gov

4. Code References




D. NJ UCC subchapter 7 for requirements for accessibility

E. New J ersey Uniform Fire Code (subchapter 4 for retrofit requirements)

F. See Section 1.4 Regulatory Agencies for additional information

G. ANSI Z9.5 Laboratory Ventilation

H. ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard 2007







Team

meetings will be held with respective University shops, University Project Engineers,
Environmental Health & Safety Representative, and other Tech Team representatives as required.
The A/E is responsible for documenting minutes of all these meetings. There, review comments
or recent revisions will be discussed and documented.
The Designers shall provide timely and coordinated responses to all review comments.
The purpose of the Tech Team review process is to confirm A/E compliance with the current
version of the Facilities Design Standards Manual including each respective section and


Early in the programming phase of the project, the Project Manager will review the proposed
project with the University Facilities Engineering department. The Project Manager, with the
Designer, should meet with the Vice Provost of Space Planning to confirm the requirements for
laboratory space in preliminary programming. If animals are involved in the usage of the
laboratory, the Project Manager and Designer, should meet with the University Lab Animal
Resources Group to determine any special requirements.

The Project Manager remains the Designers primary contact and source of information. The
Project Manager will involve other University sources in the project, including the Program
Manager for Sciences in the Office of Design and Construction, the project representatives for
the Facilities Engineering Department, Grounds & Building Maintenance, EHS, and OIT
personnel.

Meetings with the academic department/end user for the project will be arranged by the Project
Manager.


At a minimum, the following are to be provided at the indicated phase:

Along with the Design Drawings, the Designer is to produce sufficient documentation to allow
for code review of the project and for contract bidding of the work. See Section 1.4 (Regulatory
Agencies) for requirements for code review and permits.

In addition to the documentation required for the permitting and construction of the project, the
Designer will (if specified in the contract for services) provide a Statement of Design Criteria
during the schematic design phase and a written Basis of Design (B.O.D.) document during
design development.

These documents are intended to establish the general design criteria against which the technical
and design specifications for the final project will be measured.

8. Guidelines for Laboratory Design

A. General Approach

Meeting the educational and research goals of the academic department and those for the
project should be the guiding principle for the Designer. Laboratory design should be
reviewed with the Project Manager and the academic department/client to determine
programmatic needs and parameters.

There are different requirements for Laboratories, teaching and research, depending on
the educational approach to be used in the laboratory. Detail is extremely important to
the success of laboratory space; it is incumbent upon the Designer to ascertain the needs
of the various laboratory types in a project, to thoroughly understand the requirements for
the systems to be incorporated into the laboratories, and to detail the space around those
needs and requirements. Based on these meetings a Statement of Criteria will be
developed.

Establishing parameters for energy consumption and sizing of utility services and
distribution is of paramount importance to the University. These parameters must be
established early in the project, pre schematic, applying established benchmarks,
projected usage with demand & diversity factors. The Project Manager will meet with
the academic department/end user, the Design Team and Facilities Engineering to
establish these parameters which will be included in the Basis of Design.

B. Space Requirements

Layout General Requirements

Laboratory space should be separate from offices and common space.
Laboratories should be oriented such that a common service corridor can serve
two laboratories (lab, service corridor, lab)
Occupants should not have to go through a laboratory space to exit from non-
laboratory areas.
Fire-rated hallway doors should have magnetic hold-open devices
Each door from a hallway into a lab should have a view panel and be at least 36
wide
Mechanical and Electrical devices shall be readily accessible

Laboratories should be oriented to take advantage of natural lighting (with consideration
for controlling sunlight and glare). Operable windows are acceptable in office areas, but
not laboratory space. This desire must be balanced against the Energy Modeling goals
established for Sustainability, therefore operable windows must be in conformance with
the intent of the project and space, and must be accounted for in the HVAC design.

C. Finishes

Acoustic considerations should be the primary concern in finishes for laboratories.
Acoustic control between laboratories is also important, so that sound transmission
classification (STC) ratings of structural components and finishes should be taken into
account when selecting materials and systems.

1. Walls and Doors
There is no standard wall material or finish, but the Designer must remember that the
facility needs to be finished in a way that allows for normal cleaning, upkeep, and
maintenance. See Section 4.9 (Painting) for additional information.

details to divide large expanses of painted surface, particularly in the vertical direction.
This is especially true in high traffic areas, areas using high pigment paints, or
locations that are especially subject to abuse.

Doors into laboratories should be provided with vision panels to allow students to see
if room is in use.

2. Floors

Wet chemical laboratories should have chemically resistant coved flooring consistent
with the use of the room.

Finished flooring shall be installed throughout the laboratory to accommodate flexible
laboratory conditions and room modifications.

Preferably, floors shall be level with no floor drains to accommodate flexible
laboratory conditions and room modifications. With the exception of safety showers,
at these locations the floor will be locally pitched to the drain.

Floors in predominantly wet areas shall be non-slip and floor drains are preferred

3. Ceilings

Concern for proper acoustics should prevail in selection of ceiling materials. If
acoustic ceilings are to be used, the preference is for a removable tile system framed on
a unistrut support system. Concealed-spline ceilings should not be specified, unless
there is a special condition that must be accounted for; review with the Project
Manager and the Director of Maintenance before including concealed-spline ceilings
in a project. Generally, concealed spline ceilings are appropriate only in locations
without ceiling access requirements.

4. Window treatment

Review need for sunlight filtering in laboratories. Standard room darkening shades are
produced by Mecho Shade, and may be manual or motorized.

Room Darkening vs. Solar Controls - Solar controls to support the HVAC needs must
be considered for both the exterior and interior of the laboratory space.

D. Furniture and Fixtures

Work surfaces should be chemical resistant, smooth, and readily cleanable. Work
surfaces, including computer areas, should incorporate ergonomic features, such as
adjustability, task and daylighting conditions, and equipment layout.

Benchwork areas should have knee space to allow room for chairs near fixed instruments,
equipment or for procedures requiring prolonged operation.

Handwashing sinks for particularly hazardous chemicals or biological agents may need
elbow or electronic controls.

Casework in Teaching Laboratories shall conform with ADA requirements. Casework in
non-teaching (research) laboratories shall be adapted to the requirements of the individual
users.

Limit the number of cup sinks in the laboratory (including in fume hoods) in order to
avoid dry traps and the ensuing odors.

Ensure autoclaves have adequate space for use, maintenance and materials storage.

E. Lighting

1. General

Daylighting shall be maximized where possible for user comfort. Lighting should be
even across the room, with a maintained light level for work surfaces in accordance
with IES standards. Non - laboratory space shall follow IES standards. A combination
of lighting zones, dimmable fixtures, and controlled daylight in the room is ideal.
Fixtures should control glare and should not produce veiled reflection in the room or
on equipment. Indirect/direct fixtures are favored.

If a room is multi-functional, the Designer shall take into account in the lighting design
the various tasks that are to occur in the different sectors of the room.

If a space has a ceiling above 12 in height, the project team shall review all access
requirements for light fixture maintenance and incorporate any fixed requirements
such as access panels, cat walks, etc. into the documents.

2. Special Features

Much of the public space lighting on the University campus is controlled by occupancy
sensors. Typically, at least one light in a space will not be controlled by the sensor but
will be on an emergency circuit (review this requirement in rooms that are to be totally
blacked out for projection). The occupancy sensor is to be wired so that it can be
bypassed with a conventional light switch. If occupancy sensors are to be included in a
project, the operation should be carefully coordinated with the room use. Occupancy
sensors should include additional contacts for integration with HVAC systems.

Review the need for daylight control.

3. Lighting Types

For instructional spaces (as with interior lighting in general) energy efficient lighting is
standard for Princeton. Indirect/direct lighting is preferred for its even quality. For
any needed downlighting or highlighting, PL-type energy efficient fixtures are
preferred over incandescent fixtures. No halogen lighting may be specified.

To minimize the need for storing a large variety of replacement lamps, Designers
should (if fluorescent lamps are used) attempt to use two- and four-foot tubes as a
standard, and PL tubes with a common base configuration throughout a project.

F. Storage

1. Cabinets for chemical storage should be of solid, sturdy construction and vented as
required. Hardwood or metal shelving is preferred.

2. Consider centralized space for any chemical and biological or radioactive waste
storage.

3. Flammable liquid storage is not typically allowed below grade or near a means of
egress; refer to applicable codes. The NJ Fire Code imposes limits on the quantity of
chemicals stored in a building. There are individual limits for each of various types
of chemicals, including flammable liquids, gases, acids, oxidizer, poisons, etc. The
storage limit quantities are also based on location, such that storage is more limited
below grade and above the ground level.

4. The requirements for the use and venting of flammable liquid storage cabinets shall
be in accordance with current code requirements.

5. Laboratories using compressed gases should have areas designated for cylinder
storage and be equipped with devices to secure cylinders in place.

6. Provide space for chemical waste collection containers other than in fume hoods and
sinks.

7. Provide space for storage of supplies and combustible materials, e.g., boxes of gloves,
spill kits, boxes of centrifuge tubes, etc.

G. HVAC / Plumbing

1. Ventilation rates are typically 6-10 air changes per hour minimum for occupied spaces
and 4 air changes per hour minimum when unoccupied, but may vary based on room
use/ program. Ventilation rates shall be reviewed with EH&S and Facilities
Engineering. Where feasible, high performance hoods are preferable to standard
hoods, except in student teaching environments.

2. A VAV system is preferred for laboratories

3. Unless otherwise specified (e.g., clean rooms), air pressure in the laboratory should be
negative with respect to the outer hallways and non-laboratory areas.

4. If a space has a ceiling above 12 in height, the project team shall review all access
requirements for HVAC equipment maintenance and incorporate any fixed
requirements such as access panels, cat walks, etc. into the documents.

5. Any RODI should be Orion type White line Socket Fusion in wall and mechanical
fittings where exposed.

6. Acid waste pipe for DWV shall be Orion (Blue) pipe. Heat welded when concealed
in walls, heat welded or mechanical fitting where exposed in labs.

7. If required, one meg-ohm water to be supplied throughout building. Add polishers as
needed at point of use for increased resistivity. If proportionate building occupants
have substantial RODI requirements based on overall user demands, consider central
piped system.

8. Duct and piping risers to be in separate accessible shafts. Plumbing riser shafts to
have a structural floor infill at each level. All concealed duct risers to be welded
stainless steel.

9. Show air balancing boxes on drawings.

H. Fume Hoods

1. Restricted bypass style fume hoods should only be used in laboratories with
constant volume exhaust systems. Newer ventilation systems generally allow for
lower ventilation rates. Though these rates must be reviewed by EHS, Facilities
Engineering and the end user for approval and verification.

2. Fume hoods should have recessed work surfaces to control spills.

3. The location of fume hoods, supply air vents, operable windows, laboratory furniture
and pedestrian traffic should encourage horizontal, laminar flow of air into the face of
the hood, perpendicular to the hood opening. Hoods should be placed away from
doors and not where they would face each other across a narrow isle. Air velocity
caused by supply vents should not exceed 25 feet per minute at the face of the hood.
Locate supply diffusers far enough away from hood to avoid draft disturbances at
face.

4. Hoods shall have an Auto-Sash closing device and a face velocity of 60 100 linear
feet per minute with the auto-sash fully open or at its standard configuration (e.g., at
the stopper height). For velocities less than 100 FPM, review and approval by both
EHS and the manager of mechanical engineering are required.

5. Each hood must have a continuous monitoring device, such as a magnehelic gauge.
The device should display either air velocity or static pressure, and have an audible
alarm.

6. Noise from the fume hood should not exceed 65 dBA at the face of the hood.

7. Fume hood exhaust ducts should be metal and not contain fire or smoke dampers.

8. Hoods for perchloric acid require stainless steel construction and a wash-down system
and a dedicated, isolated fan.

9. Hoods requiring filters (such as those for some radioisotopes or biological materials)
should be designed and located such that filters may be accessed and changed easily.
For particularly hazardous filtration (such as those for some radioisotopes or
biological materials), a bag in/ bag out system is strongly advised.

10. Single vertical sliding sashes are preferred over horizontal or split sashes.

11. Debris screens should be accessible and placed in the hood exhaust plenum.

12. Receptacles shall be GFCI, standard.

13. Provide atmospheric vacuum breakers for cup sinks as require by code. Ensure they
are accessible for maintenance.

14. Consider alternative to fume hoods based on the intended operations. Ventilated
enclosures, glove boxes, nanotechnology benches, downdraft tables, slot hoods and
fume extractors may be effective and more energy-efficient.

15. Provide emergency ventilation purge buttons at the laboratory exits for use in the
event of a spill or release. The style of the button should minimize potential for
accidental activation and allow for cancelling the purge without the need for a key.
Review potential with EHS and Facilities Engineering.

I. Eyewash & Safety Showers

All Eyewash & Safety Shower locations must be reviewed and approved by the
University EH&S group.

1. Laboratories using hazardous materials must have an eyewash and safety shower
within 100 feet or 10 seconds travel time from the chemical use areas.

2. Eyewashes and safety showers should have plumbed drains where possible.

3. Eyewashes and safety showers should be standardized within a laboratory building.

4. Flooring under safety showers should be slip-resistant.

5. Safety showers should have privacy curtains.

6. Safety Showers shall be piped with tempered water; use Lawler 911 mixing valves

7. Water service to emergency shower / eyewash should be discussed with code official
in early stages of project in order to confirm the use of non lab (potable) water.

J . Safety

1. Utility shut-off controls should be located outside the laboratory.

2. Environmental chambers where evacuation or other alarms cannot be heard should be
equipped with strobe lighting or additional alarms.

3. The requirements for monitoring and control of Laboratories using highly toxic gases
shall be reviewed with EH&S.

4. Include Laser in Use signs at all entrances to labs with lasers.

K. Power

1. Laboratories should have a sufficient number of electrical receptacles to eliminate the
need for extension cords and multi-plug adapters.

2. Each laboratory shall have a dedicated panelboard located in an unobstructed
accessible area.

3. Laser laboratories should have power interlocks for the laser to be tied into the Laser
On light (installed at the entrance to the laboratory).

4. Laboratories with lasers and/or high voltage equipment should have an emergency
power-off switch installed near the laboratory exit and not over the laser table.

5. Typically the University does not supply standby or emergency power for academic
research. The need for special circumstances should be reviewed early in the design
process with Facilities Engineering.

L. Security

Review the need for security control of laboratories with the Project Manager. The
University employs access control, as part of a campus-wide system, at the entrances of
many of its buildings, and to some interior spaces as well. Refer to Section 2.7 Security
for further assistance.

Laboratories classified by Environmental Health and Safety as Security Protection Level
2 (high value equipment or security-sensitive materials) or higher may require additional
security measures, such as card access, intrusion alarms, cameras, etc.

M. Clean Rooms

The use of a Design Build vendor for clean rooms is preferred. This sub consultant to
the primary designer approach is a function of the clean room requirements.

N. Animal Care and Use Facilities

Animal care and use areas must meet Association for Assessment and Accreditation of
Laboratory Animal Care (AAALAC) International guidelines. This includes guidance on
materials of construction, ventilation design, security and more.

Any renovation or new construction to house or study animals used in research need to be
planned with the research and the animals in mind. Principal Investigators (PIs), the
Attending Veterinarian, the Director of Laboratory Animal Resources (LAR) and his staff
need to be involved from the earliest concepts to the detailed planning. Since regulatory
oversight of all research activities, including housing of animals, has to be approved by
the Institutional Animal Care and Use Committee (IACUC), that committee should also
be consulted from design until commissioning. Depending on the species, multiple
regulations and/or guidelines may apply. While AAALAC has an excellent Handbook
of Facilities Planning, many other guidelines exist for classical laboratory animals, birds,
fish, farm animals, exotic animals, wildlife and others. Additional concerns when
building animal care space is occupational health and safety of animal care staff and
research personnel, as well as different levels of bio-containment or bio-exclusion of the
species and type of research being conducted. Special consideration needs to be given to
space for storage and logistics and separation of clean and dirty traffic flows and impact
on the surrounding activities.

O. Radioactive Materials Laboratories

For laboratories using radioactive material

1. Eating and drinking areas must be physically separated and conveniently located.
2. Allow for separate storage of radioactive materials.
3. Consider designing the laboratory to allow separation of radioactive materials use
from other laboratory spaces.


The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of As-built Drawings prepared by the

drawings to convert to as-builts.


END OF DOCUMENT
2.11 Graduate Apartment Design

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 2.11 Grad Apts - page 1

1. Introduction

Princeton University has several large apartment complexes housing graduate students. The
student population is approximately two thousand two hundred and students typically reside in
these units twelve months a year. These units vary from high-rise construction to wood frame
housing. (Note that italics will be used to indicate statements that apply only to apartment
renewal design work.)

2. Contacts



C. Associate Director for Student Housing New South Building, 609-258-2691

D. Deputy Director for Housing Operations New South Building, 609-258-1908

PDF AutoCAD
A. Interim Fire Code Reports Consult Project Manager

B. Existing Conditions Reports Consult Project Manager

C. Master Fire Alarm Technical Specification Appendix 3.4-1

D. Memo: Standard Dormitory Paint Colors Appendix 2.4-3

E. Fire Alarm / Signage Nomenclature Spreadsheet
Sample, Princeton University Appendix 2.8-2

4. Code References


B. NJ UCC subchapter 3 for listing of applicable codes and subcode sections



E. International Building Code (in edition adopted and modified by NJ UCC); apartments are
typically R-2 use group

F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Handbook

G. NFPA 13, 13R - Sprinkler System Installation Guidelines

H. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code

I. See 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) for additional information

5. Review Guidelines - General

For apartment renewal projects, planning begins at least two years in advance of construction.
Planning for new construction may take a similar course. As the project moves toward the
construction documentation and code review phases, it becomes important that the project be
reviewed with Housing and Real Estate Services, Facilities Engineering, Grounds and Building
Maintenance, the Office of Design and Construction, Office of the University Architect, the
Department of Public Safety and to any department affected by the work.

For new construction each Housing project has a specific review committee. The committee is
made up of representatives from the Office of the University Architect, Office of Design and
Construction, the Facilities Engineering Department, Grounds and Building Maintenance,
Housing and Real Estate Services, and the office of the Vice President for Facilities.
Additionally, committee members come from the Office of the Dean of the Graduate School and
Real Estate Development. Finally there is student representation from the Graduate Housing
Policy Committee.

After preliminary design is complete, additional departments may be brought into the design
development and construction planning phases. Departments such as Public Safety may be
included in the review process, and may act as in-house consultants for specific aspects of the
project.

During this pre-construction phase mockups are constructed (and may include complete full-
scale models of rooms) to aid the review committee in selecting room finishes and accessories,
window types, light fixtures, heating units, piping enclosures, etc. Every visible finish and
system component is designed, constructed, tested, and reviewed. Mockups are also used to test
the effectiveness of cleaning methods on building stone and other finishes to remain in place. A
significant amount of effort is necessarily put into the design and documentation of mockups, for
they are the tools that lead to final design decisions and to the aesthetic that ultimately forms the
project. Mockups are typically constructed during the summer of the year prior to the projects
construction start date, and lead into final construction documentation for the project.

During the process of design, plans are to be submitted for review by Facilities departments at:




Team

meetings will be held with respective University shops, University Project Engineers, Housing,
and other Tech Team representatives as required. The A/E is responsible for documenting
minutes of all these meetings. There, review comments or recent revisions will be discussed and
documented. The Designers shall provide timely and coordinated responses to all review
comments. The purpose of the Tech Team review process is to confirm A/E compliance with the
current version of the Facilities Design Standards Manual including each respective section and

6. Procedural Guidelines - Approach to Regulatory Agencies

the probable need for site plan and zoning approvals. Altering the outside of the building often
triggers the need for community review. Exterior alterations to buildings may require local
zoning/planning review and approval. Consult with Project Manager and see description of
zoning and planning issues in Section 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies).

During the early stages of design the Designer is to consult with the Project Manager and the
Universitys Code Analyst to define code strategies and to discuss any code interpretations that
might affect the project. Some design decisions may require relief from strict code requirements
as interpreted by the State and local code reviewers. The design team is responsible for
formulating the relief request (variation or variance) and providing support documentation for the
request, including any alternatives for providing life safety in lieu of code conformance.


for code review of the project and for contract bidding of the work. Preparation of contract
specifications is to be done in conjunction and in cooperation with the Universitys Contracts
Office; the front end of specifications is typically prepared by the Contracts Office, and
integrated with the project specifications by the Designer.


8. Considerations for Apartment Design

A. General Approach

1. In new construction and in renewal of Princetons apartments the mix of social spaces
with living spaces, the density of apartments and the type and number of support/utility
spaces in an apartment complex, along with other design considerations, is highly
dependent upon the purpose the community and who the apartment serves.

Graduate apartment complexes are generally high density and the premium space may
not be able to be given over to social and educational programs within the building;
and service-type spaces may be shared among a group of buildings.

All graduate apartments will typically contain a full complement of service and
support spaces such as laundry, kitchenette (with sink, outlets, refrigerator and
microwave), public restroom, computer cluster, and a community room.

2. The initial step in an apartment renewal project is to determine a preliminary scope of
work and to conduct a full-scale survey of the building. This survey should be
performed after discussions with the Project Manager, the Housing and Real Estate
Services, graduate property supervisor and the Universitys Grounds and Building
Maintenance Department, to assemble available information on systems in the
building, and to gain insight on any known defects in a building. In interviews prior to
surveying a building, the Designer can be advised of any environmental issues that
might affect the project; see section 10 below for additional information on this
subject. A report on existing conditions is produced from the survey, including
information on the building finishes, envelope, and systems. The report will be
presented to the review committee, which may make suggestions for revisions or
modifications before a final version of the report is produced.

The report is used as a tool to develop the building program and to guide the
professional in the schematic design process. Input from the design review committee
is critical at this point in the process. The committee will prescribe the desired bed
count, the mix of singles, doubles, and quads, the bathroom fixture ratio, etc.
Additional survey work may be needed to measure critical areas after initial planning
and design is completed. Some core samples of building systems may be required to
ascertain existing construction, and investigative demolition might be carried out in
this effort.

3. After schematic plans are approved by the review committee, the Designer is to
provide a furniture layout plan, which will be used to develop the design of electrical
and mechanical systems in the apartments. This step is important in developing plans
for new construction as well as in dormitory renewal.

As electrical and mechanical systems are developed for the building (with the chases,
duct shafts, etc. that these systems require), the Designer will need to coordinate the
mechanical systems with the furniture layout. The intent is to produce a plan that
integrates building systems into the overall layout, without sacrificing utility and
comfort to aesthetics, or vice versa. The review committee will be presented with the
final building layout and furniture plan for approval before the project is carried into
the Construction Documentation Phase.

4. Apartment Numbering Requirements

It is the intent of all projects to have apartment numbers assigned during the Design
Development Phase. It is the responsibility of the Designer to initiate and complete
this process, and the Project Managers responsibility to gather required approvals. All
Drawings shall reference the Universitys approved numbering system and the United
Stated Post Office requirements for street addresses.

See Appendix 2.8-2 for a sample spreadsheet for coordinating this process and
Appendix 1.5-3 for room/space numbering system guidelines.

B. Exterior

1. Apartment Accessibility

One of the goals of the apartment renewal projects is to create accessible routes to as
many apartment spaces as is reasonably possible.

The project review committee will advise the Designer on the level of accessibility
desired in the project, based on options presented by the Designer and influenced by
campus-wide accessibility needs. See Section 2.1 for a description of this process.

Code minimums must be met for accessible and adaptable units within each
apartment building, code requirements for mounting heights of switches and controls
are to be met by the design, and placement of special devices such as audible-base
detectors and strobe alarms are to be carefully planned. For more technical
information see Section 3.4 (Fire Alarms).

2. Safety/Security

Consideration is to be given to vehicular and foot traffic routes into and along
buildings, so that cul-de-sacs and dead-ends are eliminated. (The same considerations
should apply to interior circulation.)

Exterior lighting should be sufficient to provide safety and security to passers-by and
to building occupants. NJ UCC/BOCA code requires emergency lighting of egress
paths on the exterior of dormitories.

3. Site Accessories

Intercoms with magnetic/electric releases are preferred to be installed at apartment
entries. See Section 3.1 (Access Control Standards). The Designer is to consult with
the Project Manager to assess the need for exterior emergency phones.

Consideration should be given to site furnishings, particularly bike racks, childrens
play areas, passive recreation, shuttle stops, storage, smoking areas, picnic areas, etc.

4. Finishes

Exterior finishes are of paramount importance in the perception of the quality of
buildings at Princeton University. The exterior envelope of the building should be
studied carefully during the building survey, and the existing conditions report should
concisely describe the findings of the survey.

Envelope components that must be considered in the study include walls, copings,
parapets, chimneys, and decorative and trim masonry; flashings, gutters, leaders,
leader boxes and roof; windows, louvers and vents, doors, door accessories, entry
steps, handrails and paving.

5. Site Utilities

When a building is a candidate for renewal, the Facilities Engineering Department
may decide to take the opportunity to replace services into the building or site utilities
near the building. New buildings also require extensive investigation for utility work.
The Designer will be asked to enumerate and evaluate the utility loads for heating,
cooling, electrical, and similar systems in new and renewal work, as well as the
effects on water supply, sanitary, and storm lines on and around the site. The
Designer will need to coordinate the efforts required for documentation, review and
construction of this work, and may be requested by the Engineering Department to
provide design services for the utility work. See Section 3.6 (Utilities Guidelines).

C. Interior Circulation

Interior circulation must provide reasonable access to all areas of the apartment and must,
at a minimum, meet the requirements of the building and life-safety codes in effect in
New J ersey see Section 1.4 (Regulatory Codes).

1. Entries

Entries must be carefully and skillfully treated to enhance the Designers intent. The
Designer should integrate a number of standard elements into the design for each
entry. These include:

a) Card access on building entry doors (see Section 3.1 Access Control Standards).
Door entry hardware (VonDuprin rim-type panic device) is modified to
incorporate electric release mechanism, or interlocked electric strike to
accommodate door intercom and release system.

b) Scrub mats or walk-off mats at the entrance, in a durable, cleanable, easily
maintained material; the design should feature mats which can be easily replaced
and slip resistant. See Appendix 2.4-5

c) Lockable safety glass case message boards, such as tackboards (meeting code
requirements for finishes); a variation on the standard types may be developed,
either metal-framed or trimmed in wood.

d) Specify durable, cleanable wall and floor finishes.

e) Mailboxes, front loaded, keyed to individual apartments.

2. Stairs

a) There is no standard stair material. The Designer may choose a durable and
inherently safe material from wood to stone, to reflect the building aesthetic.

b) Doors and hardware must meet code requirements for size, operation, fire rating,
and temperature rise. Doors and frames should be of a durable construction to
withstand the wear and tear of daily use by students and custodial staff. Smoke
detector-activated hold-open devices are often used on stair/corridor doors to
reduce wear and tear, and to create a more open appearance.

Princeton University standard hardware set for stair doors leading to corridors is a
cylindrical passage set by Best Locking Systems; Precision non-electromechanical
panic devices are standard for interior stairwell doors and, as noted above,
VonDuprin or Precision panic devices are the standard for exterior entry doors.
Refer to Section 4.4 (Door Hardware) for additional details.

c) Guards, balusters, and handrails should be designed consistent with safety codes
to enhance the finished appearance of the stairway.

d) Specify durable and easily maintainable wall and floor finishes.

e) Meet minimum lighting requirements, including exit and emergency lighting; use
lighting to enhance design.

f) In an apartment renewal project, a Designer should assume that, if standpipes
existed in the building prior to the renewal project, standpipes will be required as
part of the renewal work.

If retaining a standpipe in the building presents a major problem (due to space
constraints, e.g.) the University may appeal to the State to remove the standpipe.
The decision to file an appeal requires the approval of the AVP for Facilities,
Design and Construction and the AVP for Facilities, Plant.

Those buildings that do not have a pre-existing standpipe can be evaluated on a
case-by-case basis. The AVP of the Office of Design and Construction will make
the final decision on the inclusion of standpipes in such a case.

All apartment standpipes will be dry systems charged using a post-indicator valve
located near the fire department connection outside the building.

g) Fire Extinguishers The design of the fire extinguisher in hallways/corridors shall
be incorporated with the overall stair design and enclosed in a fire-rated cabinet as
required. Interior common corridors that serve apartments should be equipped
with ABC extinguishers. See Appendix 3.8-2

3. Public hallways/corridors

a) Specify durable wall and floor finishes; research requirements for fire ratings in
corridors, provide listed assemblies where needed. At a minimum, use reinforced
gypsum board for walls, with skim-coat finish. (Gypsum board walls with taped
seams are the preferred wall finish in apartment halls.)

The project design review committee will advise the Designer on the use of carpet
or hard-surface finishes in corridors.

There should be some form of base in corridors for housekeeping purposes,
compatible with floor finish; tile, stone, wood, rubber; review with Project
Manager.

Princeton University employs a range of standard colors for use in apartments;
consult with the Project Manager.

Fire Extinguisher The design of the fire extinguisher in stairs shall be
incorporated with the overall stair design and enclosed in a fire-rated cabinet as
required. See Appendix 3.8-2.

b) In rated corridors, doors and hardware must meet requirements for fire assembly.
Princeton University employs a standard apartment-to-corridor cylindrical lockset,
a storeroom function lever-handle lockset, as well as standard hinges, closers, etc.
See Section 4.4 (Door Hardware). For corridor doors leading to public or social
spaces, consider using smoke detector-activated hold opens.

c) Ceilings: consider routing of utilities early in design; if corridor ceilings are to be
used for utilities, ceilings must be accessible. Minimizing MEP systems above
ceilings is desirable. Appearance is important, and utility runs must be thoroughly
planned and documented to minimize the need for multiple access doors in hard-
finished ceilings. See Section 4.2 (Corridors).

d) Lighting: must meet Code mandated minimum levels, and must meet University
standard levels. Hallways should have lights that are lit 24/7/365, and may be
lighted with ceiling lights, wall sconces, or a combination of both. Apartments,
also, may be lighted with ceiling lights, wall sconces, or a combination of both.
The type of lighting may be dependent on the style of the building. The Designer
is responsible for insuring that all components of lighting - lenses, lamps, ballasts,
wiring connections, etc. - are readily accessible and non-custom, for maintenance
of fixtures. See Section 3.5 (Lighting Design). Code minimums for emergency
egress lighting levels must be met for the entire egress pathway.

Any surface mounted exit sign mounted on edge below 9-0 requires redundant
support along a second edge or side, preferably located at a wall/ceiling
intersection.

e) Sprinklers: sprinkler heads are to be concealed in corridors if possible; if sidewall
sprinklers are to be used; ONLY concealed type are to be used.

f) Security and safety concerns - dead-ends, remote areas, emergency phone location

g) Air handlers and other mechanical equipment placed in eave spaces off corridors
require sound insulation, vibrant isolation and low db rating.

h) Trash Collection The Designer shall evaluate locations for dumpsters on site.
Provisions for recyclable materials containers should be reviewed on each project.
Currently residents bring their trash and recyclables to exterior bins.

i) Electrical Outlets Maximum 25 on center dedicated 20 amp. circuit per corridor
or stair.

D. Social spaces/public common rooms

The mix of social spaces in an apartment building or complex should be determined in
the preliminary design phase in consultation with the review committee.

If a social space is proposed above or near an apartment, specific approval for the location
is required from the review committee.

Some comments on typically provided amenities follow.

1. Lounges / Computer Clusters / Multipurpose

a) The size, shape, and number of lounges, computer clusters and laundry rooms
should be discussed with the committee in the conceptual phase.

b) Provision should also be made for wireless data communications.

c) Vending area is to be provided with an OIT wiring bundle.

Designer is to consider heat produced by vending machines in calculating the
HVAC requirements for lounge areas.

d) Social spaces are considered special areas, and the normal constraints on paint
colors do not necessarily apply to these spaces. These spaces should be child
friendly. Consider the storage needs of these spaces, storage for things like toys
and yoga mats are commonly needed. Consult with the Project Manager.

e) All apartments and common areas should have wireless technology as well as be
outfitted for hard wired telephone, cable and Dormnet.

2. Laundries

Laundry facilities are to be included in each apartment complex. Access to the laundry
room is to be through the interior of the building. Particular attention must be paid to
the nuisance factor of a laundry room - the effect of noise and heat on nearby rooms.
See Section 4.7 (Laundry Rooms). Classroom function locksets are required at
Laundry room doors.

Laundry rooms are to have durable floor finishes and need to include a floor drain.


a) Commercial grade washers that are energy efficient, coin or card operated.
b) Stacking electric dryers, coin or card operated, with individual vents located at the
discharge point. Plan to install one dryer for each washer in the laundry room.
Consult Building Services and the Housing and Real Estate Services for clearance
requirements for maintenance of units; see Section 4.7 (Laundry Rooms) and
Appendix 4.7-3.
c) Motion sensor-activated light fixtures for general lighting (with an unswitched light
in each area).
d) A fixed table or counter with hanging rod, for folding with bins
e) Large-volume trash receptacles
f) An adjacent waiting/study area is desirable; visual connection with adjacent space
or corridor is desirable.
g) Room ventilation system is necessary
h) An emergency phone should be installed in the laundry area. (A panic button may
be necessary for remote location.)
i) For design purposes plan 1 washer for every 25 occupants and 1 dryer (stacked)
for every one washer.
j) Plan one utility sink per laundry room

E. Living Units

1. Living/study/common rooms

Apartment space requirement should meet the DCA or Local Codes. This should
be closely reviewed by the Office of Design and Construction and Housing and
Real Estate Services.

b) Layout
The positioning of the living/kitchen room can be opened if this scenario provides
the best use of space. In efficiency apartments, there should be a reasonable
amount of distance from where one might position a bed in relation to the actual
kitchen area. In one bedrooms and larger, the living area should remain separate
from the sleeping space. Wherever possible, the bathroom should be accessed
from the living room or from a corridor.

c) Location/ Orientation
When possible, the apartments should be accessed from a protected interior
corridor.

d) Finishes

1) Walls: durable finish; skim-coated impact resistant gypsum.
2) Floors: durable finish; wood strip flooring, vinyl tile or approved equal. For
wood flooring, finishes must meet New J ersey requirements for volatile
organic compounds (VOC). (4-coat) water-based finishes have proven
suitable for private rooms.
3) Ceilings: typically gypsum board or plaster; if utilities are run in ceilings or in
soffits in rooms, carefully planned access panels may be required for valves,
junction boxes, etc. Refer to Section 4.4 for specifics regarding access panel
requirements.

e) Doors and hardware: rated doors and hardware may be required for corridors;
unrated doors may be used for doors interior to living units. Best Lock cylindrical
sets are standard. Door viewers shall be installed at all apartment doors.

f) Windows: Apartment renewal projects often include the reconstruction or
replacement of windows original to the building. During the building
investigation enough information should be gathered on the condition of windows
to determine whether rehabilitation/reconstruction is a viable option, based on
cost/life cycle.

New buildings should incorporate new window technology for energy
performance and for ease of maintenance. Within these basic guidelines, a wide
variety of types and designs are available.

Regardless of building type, the following requirements apply:

1) Ventilating sash: habitable rooms require natural ventilation if a mechanical
ventilation system is not being installed in the building.
2) Screens: all operable sashes require screens, and windows at grade or first
floor must be fitted with heavy-duty (.020 wire gage fabric) screens for
security. Emergency egress requirements must be met by screens and
windows; coordinate with building egress plans. Include positive latch from
inside of room only.
3) Shades: all windows in living units are to be supplied with shades. Simple
spring-loaded roll-up shades are standard on campus. Evaluate window trim
and screen operation to avoid conflict with shade operation. Princeton utilizes
a custom shade fabric for apartments. The shades may be purchased through
the University shade shops, or shade fabric may be purchased (via University
supplier) and supplied to the shade vendor.

g) Utilities: System piping and equipment, ductwork, etc. must be carefully planned
and routed to produce an integrated design for the building. Placement of
apartments over or near the buildings steam-to-hot-water converter can be
problematic.

1) Heating/cooling: heating is usually provided by heat pumps. Individual
HVAC controls are to be installed in each apartment.

Ventilation with tempered make-up air is generally provided for laundry
rooms and other spaces with mechanical ventilation requirements. Air-
conditioning is generally provided in new graduate apartments and major
renovations. If a heat pump system is selected for HVAC, consideration
should be given for alternative cooling systems such as geo-thermal wells for
concurrent implementation or at a future date.

2) Power: wiring is typically replaced in renewal projects, with one power
circuit per room. Wiring should be totally concealed. The number of duplex
power outlets is increased to meet current code levels (< 12 feet apart) and
the needs of apartment life. Outlet location should be carefully coordinated
with furniture plans. A quad outlet should be installed at OIT jack locations.

For both new construction and apartment renovation each apartment should be
supplied with its own circuit panel box and provide switched outlets where
appropriate. This decision shall be made in conjunction with Facilities
Engineering after determining if localized A/C units may be installed in the
Living Unit.

pathway and conductor equipment.

3) Lighting: at least one switched outlet should be provided in the living and
bedrooms. Review standard fixture with Project Manager to ascertain
requirements for backboxes, conduit, switching, etc. Of primary concern for
proper light distribution is the mounting height.

Mock-ups of typical apartment lighting schemes are required to confirm final
design layout. All fixtures should also be easily procurable, should the
University need to get replacements.

4) OIT: the presence one two-port data with cable TV outlet with one phone
outlet constitutes a standard OIT outlet. One OIT outlet per room is standard,
with adjacent quad power receptacle. The OIT package should be reviewed
which will include the current standard.

2. Sleeping rooms

a) Doors and hardware: unrated doors with passage or privacy hardware may
typically be used for doors interior to sleeping rooms.

Bedroom doors in apartments are equipped with Best Lock privacy locks, as are
bathrooms within units.

The Designer is advised to review requirements for fire-rated enclosures (and the
lessening of requirements) in dormitories with full fire-suppression systems.
Door viewers shall be installed at all corridor doors at both ADA and non ADA
heights.

b) Windows: the same considerations for common rooms apply to sleeping rooms.

c) Utilities
In general, individual unit metering is preferred for incoming electrical service,
and if required, gas service. Water service is not individually metered by unit on
most projects.

1) Heating/cooling: as with common rooms, heating is usually provided by heat
pumps. Individual HVAC controls are to be installed in each apartment.

Air-conditioning is generally provided in new graduate apartments and major
renovations. For small renovations where through-wall air conditioning is
considered, provide an additional AC power circuit to be installed in sleeping
rooms adjacent to the proposed unit location.

2) Power: duplex outlet placement should meet code requirements (< 12 feet
apart). Coordinate placement with proposed furniture layout; in rooms that
are not in accessible areas, outlets should be mounted at 11 (at renovations
only) above floor to avoid possible conflicts with bed frames. For new
construction, locate duplex outlets away from typical bed locations wherever
possible. Provide quad power outlet at OIT outlet.

pathway and conductor equipment.

3) Smoke detection: locate heads away from possible sources of interference or
damage such as doors, light fixtures, etc. Detectors must be 36 minimum
from air supply outlets. Cooking areas and bathrooms are to be avoided.

4) Fire suppression: concealed heads are preferred, either ceiling-mounted or
sidewall type. If a dry standpipe is run adjacent to a room, access doors for
inspection of the standpipe might be required within the room.

3. Bathrooms

a) Fixture Requirements

Princeton University generally has apartments with private single fixture
bathrooms.

Generally floor-mounted toilets with lids are preferred in concrete or steel
construction. This approach is preferred for both new and renovation
construction.

Soap dishes should be built into the wall of the lavatory and tub/shower area.
Tubs should comprise a high percentage of the bathrooms; shower units are to be
installed to meet code required minimums. Bathrooms should have mechanical
ventilation.

b) Finishes

Provide washable finishes; floors are typically ceramic tile or stone with colored
grout, as are walls to at least the height of mirrors.

Materials must be water-resistant; at a minimum, use water-resistant gypsum
board for walls and ceilings. A smooth plaster finish is preferred. Plan carefully
for access doors that are often needed in bathroom walls or ceilings; minimum
12 square doors are standard, with screwdriver operation. Consider resident
quality unobtrusive location.

c) Lighting and Power

Provide ambient lighting for the room and an additional sconce fixture by the
lavatory/mirror. Provide ground-fault-interrupted receptacles at lavatories.
Provide back-box and power for electric items.

Refer to Section 3.12 (Electrical Systems Design) for allowable electrical pathway
and conductor equipment.

d) Bathtub/Shower Combination Units

These units should include tile surrounds or have an insert. Shower units should
have soap holder shelf built into the unit. Windows should not be located within
the tub/shower area.

e) Accessories

1) The following need to be specified by the Designer: robe and towel hooks,
towel bars, medicine cabinets (or mirror), and residential toilet paper holders.

2) The University may install electric hand dryers in bathrooms in lieu of paper
towel dispensers in common bathrooms located within the complex.

4. Kitchens

a) Full-service Graduate Student Apartment Kitchens. These full-service kitchens
are installed in graduate student apartments. They are installed for the purpose of
providing graduate students kitchen facilities that would be used for daily meal
preparation. The Graduate Student Full-service Kitchen will contain the
following items:
Freestanding 30 electric range with four burners and an integral oven;
Hood above the range with an integral recirculation hood. Option: exterior
ventilation. The designer shall take note to locate any required Fire Alarm
Smoke Detectors as far away from this location as allowed by code.
Microwave oven (not a combination range hood unit), usually on countertop;
Sink with bin, or bins, that is sufficiently sized for cleaning cooking utensils
and equipment;
Kitchen faucet;
Mechanical Ventilation;
maker/dispenser, white, 16 cubic feet;
Overhead and under-counter cabinets;
Garbage disposals will not be installed;
Minimum of 24 or 26 width of available open counter space with a 4 high
backsplash or cabinet to counter finish;
The flooring finish is to be a durable material and is a function of the floor
substrate, linoleum preferred;
There should be a minimum of 4 electrical outlets to accommodate small
appliances; and;
Cabinets should have at a minimum wooden frames and doors. Knobs are
discouraged, flush panel doors are preferred.

See Housing and Real Estate Services for current options for finish and appliance
information.


Each apartment building, depending on layout, will require a custodial storage room of
approximately 35 square feet (and possibly larger in larger buildings) for paper products and
cleaning supplies and equipment for floors with social spaces and common rooms. Exact
janitorial requirements for each building are a program issue to be resolved during design
development. The closets should include utility sinks. Refer to Section 4.3 Custodial Closets
and Storage for more information.

10. Signage Requirements

Prior to submitting signage design package the designer shall meet with the project manager to
determine required locations and signage types. Generally, interior signage for apartment
buildings shall include:

A. Emergency Room Evacuation Signage - To be located immediately adjacent to room side
of corridor door handle, indicating direction of all legal exits.

B. Apartment Identification Signage - To be located on corridor side at entrance to each
apartment. Includes room number and ADA Braille requirements. Each room I.D. sign
shall be designed individual to each project.

C. Stair Egress Signage - Denotes level and levels down to exit. Assigns a stair number and
includes ADA Braille requirements.

D. Common Area Signage Includes door number and ADA Braille requirements.

E. Elevator Signage In accordance with ANSI A17.1 requirements.

F. Electrical Signage In accordance with NEC requirements.

G. Fire Protection Signage In accordance with NFPA requirements.

11. Environmental Issues

Prior to undertaking renovation work in an existing apartment, the University will arrange for a
survey of the building to determine the possible presence of hazardous materials. The University
will engage a separate consultant for any remedial consultation deemed prudent as the result of
this survey, and will attempt to abate any hazardous material prior to the start of construction,
using a separate contractor qualified to perform the abatement work.



Drawings to convert to as-builts. See Section 1.5 (Documentation and Archiving).

END OF DOCUMENT

3.1 Access Control Systems

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.1 Access Ctrl - page 1

1. Introduction

The University requires that all exterior doors of dormitory buildings and selected doors for non-
dormitory buildings are included as part of the campus-wide access control system. This
System is proprietary and is monitored by the Department of Public Safety located at 200 Elm
Drive, and administered by Facilities Life Safety and Security Systems. During Schematic
Design phase of a project, a determination must be made commensurate with the risks posed by
the intended occupancy or use regarding the need for, or desirability of including interior and
exterior door access control and/or intrusion alarm systems and/or ADA power assisted exterior
doors. Reference Section 2.7 (Security) for a review of this process.

The Project Manager, Department of Public Safety Representative, Facilities Life Safety and
Security Systems Engineer, University Code Analyst and CACS (Campus Access Control
System) Designer shall determine the doors that get monitored only and the doors that shall be
equipped with additional security devices such as an access control reader and the doors that
require power assist. The final configuration shall be reviewed by the Facilities Life Safety and
Security Systems Engineer and Code Analyst for approval. The A/E is responsible for the
design and specification of the conduit system, door hardware and door and door frame electrical
pathway. The University Systems Integrator, shall prepare the final system wiring diagrams with
details and location of access control devices. These wiring diagrams will be included in the
A/E design documents.

2. Contacts



C. Life Safety and Security Systems Engineer 306 Alexander, 609-258-6683

D. Site Protection Lock Shop Supervisor MacMillan Building, 609-258-2483

E. Site Protection Alarm Shop Supervisor 306 Alexander, 609-258-3989

F. Card Access System Administrator 306 Alexander, 609-258-9038

PDF AutoCAD
A. Princeton University Typical Plan/Elevation
Security/ADA Features Layout Appendix 3.1-1 Appendix 3.1-1

B. Princeton University Typical Building
Processor Cabinet with UPS Diagram Appendix 3.1-2 Appendix 3.1-2

C. Princeton University Typical Single

D. Princeton University Typical Double

E. Security Programming Checklist

F. Security Programming Document
Appendix 2.7-4

Appendix 2.7-5

G. Sample Secure Zone Diagram

H. Security Standard Device Legend
Appendix 3.1-5

Appendix 3.1-6

4. Code References


B. International Building Code Chapter 10 Hardware

C. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

D. ICC/ANSI-117.1

E. National Electric Code (NEC) NFPA 70

F. Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)


Construction and Facilities Life Safety and Security Systems with the University department
responsible for project initiation. As the project moves toward the construction documentation
and code review phases, it is required that the project construction documents be submitted to the
University for an internal Tech Team review process thru the Office of Design and
Construction for compliance with University standards. Plans are to be submitted for review at:





Team.

appendices.


The university utilizes a proprietary access control system. The designer is to provide
construction documents that conform to the current components and operational features of this
system, including required pathways, wiring diagrams and device specifications. On larger and
or more complex projects a security and or hardware consultant may be required to assist in the
planning process.

During Schematic Design the A/E should consult the Security Programming Document for
CACS programming requirements. Also during design development the security consultant shall
consult with the Project Manager and the Universitys Code Analyst to define code strategies and
to discuss any code interpretations affecting the project. For residential buildings, the Housing
Office will be involved with all locations of access control points. All ADA requirements shall
be defined during this process. In addition, the CACS Tech Team members shall also include the
Facilities Life Safety and Security Systems Engineer, Card Access System Administrator,
Department of Public Safety and the Site Protection Lock Shop Supervisor.

At Design Development, the Designer shall meet with Project Manager, Facilities CACS Tech
Representative and Department of Public Safety Representative to ascertain the type of
building(s) and the extent of access control points. The requirements for the construction
documents will be based on this meeting.


Sufficient documentation shall be prepared for code review of the access control project and
contract bidding of the work. Separate floor plans, riser diagrams, and details shall be prepared
for all CACS construction documentation. This documentation will include, as a minimum:

MEP Design Intent
X
Security Programming Checklist X
Security Programming Document X
Notes & Symbols X X X
Floor Plans CACS devices X X X
Floor PlansRaceway Routes X X
CACS Riser Diagrams X X
Security Zoning Diagram X X X
CACS Door & Hardware Schedule X X
Details equipment Connections X X
Door Elevations X
CACS Specifications X X

8. Guidelines for System Installation and Performance

A. Reportability

1. The access control system communicates between the building processor located in the
remote processor cabinet (RPC) and the host computer located at Office of Information
and Technology (OIT) Facilities at Forrestal via PU LAN. This bundle includes a
private network fiber line as well as other general purpose copper and fiber network
communications. . The Designer shall incorporate the Processor Cabinet and an empty
OIT conduit/raceway for this requirement in the design.

B. New Construction and Renovation

1. All access control devices and junction boxes shall be accessible in accordance with
the National Electric Code.

2. Raceways in finished areas shall be concealed where possible.
3. In the event that exposed raceway must be employed, the Designer shall review the
approach to the layout of the raceway and shall specify the appropriate material with
the Facilities Life Safety and Security Systems Engineer.

4. If hired by the contractor, the requirement for a PU approved hardware integrator
and a PU approved systems integrator must be included in the project security
specification.

5. All electromechanical door hardware shall be reviewed and approved by the Facilities
Life Safety and Security Systems Engineer prior to installation by both integrators.
Doors shall be tested with electrical actuation of the hardware to provide proper
adjustment. Testing equipment will be the responsibility of both integrators. .

C. Accessibility Considerations

1. Standard size reader or larger accessible type

2. Assisted door opener or fully automatic. For doors >2 thick, evaluate and choose
opener whose closer may be integrated with access control system.

3. Placement of card reader and/or accessible paddle, coordinate with swing of door

4. Consult with Section 2.1 (Accessibility) at the programming phase for additional
requirements

D. Interface between Access Control and Fire Alarm Control Panel

1. Doors equipped with delayed egress features and or magnetic hold-open devices shall
have appropriate supervised wiring provided from the building fire alarm panel
release function.

E. Requirements for Access Control Panel Locations

1. The building access control processor cabinets (RPCs) are preferably located in
mechanical equipment rooms or electrical vaults that are in dry locations.

2. Data communication lines as well as emergency power and lighting requirements shall
be provided at the (RPC) location in accordance with the Universitys typical
installation detail.

F. Signage

Each door that is monitored and/or controlled by the card access system has a unique
electronic address. This electronic address corresponds to a door number (assignment) on
the Construction Documents. Each door that is monitored and/or controlled by the card
access system shall be labeled with the door number. See Section 2.8, Environmental
Graphics, for door labeling requirements. The construction documents shall include a
table of all door labeling requirements for the CACS System. Exterior door numbers are
determined no later than the 50% CD phase. A three (3) digit number will be assigned by
the Facilities Life Safety and Security Systems Engineer. Signage shall be provided at
each door in accordance with the CACS requirements.

G. Operational Performance (Doors)

Doors shall be reviewed for proper operation as a single entity, to insure compatibility of
all installed components by a PU approved system integrator. Components shall
include, but are not limited to CACS hardware, hinges, sweeps, etc

H. Spare Parts

One spare unit shall be provided for every (10) of the same type of Electromechanical
Access Control hardware devices installed. In addition, one spare unit shall be provided
for every unique, none standard, Electromechanical device installed. Include spare part
requirements in all specifications. Coordinate with door hardware attic stock.

9. Requirements for Testing & Commissioning

A. Commissioning

1. In all cases Commissioning shall be performed by the PU approved system
integrator.

2. Tech Team representatives from Facilities Life Safety and Security Systems Engineer
and Site Protection shall be an integral part of the commissioning process

3. The procedure for testing shall be followed closely in accordance with the Life Safety
and Security Pre-Functional and Functional (ATP) tests as supplied by PU


access control contractor.

and attending meetings with the Contractor and University personnel to review progress on the
system and to ascertain that the contractor is keeping accurate records of system installation. The

Electronic CAD files with separate layers for access control along with separate CACS drawings
shall be submitted with as-builts and include requirements listed in Section 3.1.7. The Alarm
Shop shall receive a set of Drawings and a Centric link to AutoCAD format Release 2000 or
higher.

END OF DOCUMENT
3.2 Automatic Temperature
Controls and Energy Management System

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.2 ATC- page 1
1. Introduction

Princeton University Facilities Engineering has been procuring, designing, installing, and
maintaining automated HVAC control systems since the 1960s. Currently, Facilities
Engineering maintains a single control center for the monitoring and control of most campus
building mechanical, heating and cooling systems. The depth and level of control within these
systems varies with the date of installed equipment, type of controls and communication
capabilities. Moving forward, systems will employ server based direct digital control systems
connected through the campus network. These will be MS Windows Server -based Energy
Management Systems utilizing Automated Logic (ALC) WebCTRL or Siemens Insight software.
Both systems provide the University with the ability to manage building environmental
conditions and energy costs through web clients (ALC WebCTRL or Siemens Apogee Go) at any
network connected computer.

Princeton University has a variety of automatic temperature control devices from pneumatic to
electronic and Direct Digital Control (DDC). The DDC panel is a microprocessor based module
that provides a wide variety of HVAC control and monitoring capability in a standalone or
network environment using closed-loop, direct digital control. Some of the older systems still
use pneumatic receiver controllers and most of the large buildings have compressed air systems
to serve pneumatic actuators. Over the years through renovation and upgrade work hybrid
combinations of pneumatic, electronic and DDC systems have come in to existence. The
majority of new HVAC equipment, however, has electronic application controllers and zone
controllers. The zone controllers in occupied spaces are typically electronically actuated DDC
with adjustable zone sensors for the occupant. The benefits of DDC have made it the standard
for all future projects.

The current energy management system consists of hundreds of DDC panels that communicate
back to the Central Supervisory Control System (CSCS). These DDC panels utilize campus
Ethernet. All future controls network connectivity will be through campus Ethernet.

The vast majority of current DDC panels are connected to the universitys CDN infrastructure as
its backbone. Princeton has recently constructed a reliable and secure BAS backbone by building
a new network. All new building DDC panels will be connected to this network. Existing
building renovations will need to be handled on a case by case basis until all DDC panels are
migrated.

The current after-business hours alarm management practice includes Public Safety as the
dispatching service for all incoming alarms generated by the BAS systems. This includes those
alarms generated not related to Public Safety.

This current system does not leverage the capabilities of the installed BAS infrastructure nor is it
sustainable as the Universities BAS infrastructure grows. The historical point growth is rate is
13% per year. Princeton now has a system that leverages the remote notification features of the
BAS to inform appropriate staff of alarms without necessarily causing all alarms to route through
the Public Safety staff.

2. Contacts


B. Campus Energy Manager MacMillan Building, 609-258-9008
Facilities Engineering

C. Controls Engineer MacMillan Building, 609-258-5890

D. Maintenance Control Shop Supervisor MacMillan Building, 609-258-5082

PDF MS WORD
A. Master Technical Specification for
Building Automation Systems Appendix 3.2-1 Appendix 3.2-1
Building Automation System (BAS) General
BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices and Sensors
BAS Operator Interfaces
BAS Field Panels
BAS Communication Devices
BAS Software and Programming
Sequences of Operation
BAS Commissioning AutoCAD

B. Symbols Appendix 3.2-2 Appendix 3.2-2

C. Recirc AHU with Preheat, Chilled Water,
Humidifier, VAV, Economizer & Return
Fan Appendix 3.2-3 Appendix 3.2-3

D. 100% Outside Air AHU with Preheat,
Chilled Water, Humidifier, & VAV Appendix 3.2-4 Appendix 3.2-4

E. Recirc RTU with Preheat, DX, VAV &
Economizer Appendix 3.2-5 Appendix 3.2-5

F. Recirc AHU with Preheat, Chilled Water,
Humidifier, CAV, Economizer & Return
Fan Appendix 3.2-6 Appendix 3.2-6

G. 100% Outside Air AHU with Energy
Recovery Wheel with Preheat, Chilled
Water, Humidifier, VAV & Exhaust Fan Appendix 3.2-7 Appendix 3.2-7

H. Kitchen Exhaust / Makeup Appendix 3.2-8 Appendix 3.2-8

I. Clean Room Appendix 3.2-9 Appendix 3.2-9

PDF AutoCAD
J . Bathroom Exhaust Appendix 3.2-10 Appendix 3.2-10

K. Steam to Hot Water Converter Appendix 3.2-11 Appendix 3.2-11

L. Process or Secondary Chilled Water Appendix 3.2-12 Appendix 3.2-12

M. Glycol Heat Recovery Appendix 3.2-13 Appendix 3.2-13

N. Snowmelt Appendix 3.2-14 Appendix 3.2-14

O. Boiler Hot Water System Appendix 3.2-15 Appendix 3.2-15

P. Control of Smoke Purge Interface Appendix 3.2-16 Appendix 3.2-16

Q. Single Duct VAV Cooling Only Appendix 3.2-17 Appendix 3.2-17

R. Single Duct VAV with Reheat Coil Appendix 3.2-18 Appendix 3.2-18

S. Chilled Beam Control Appendix 3.2-19 Appendix 3.2-19

T. Fan Coil Unit Appendix 3.2-20 Appendix 3.2-20

U. Fan Powered Box Appendix 3.2-21 Appendix 3.2-21

V. Cabinet Unit Heater Appendix 3.2-22 Appendix 3.2-22

W. Hot Water Reheat Coil Appendix 3.2-23 Appendix 3.2-23

X. Lab Flow Tracking Appendix 3.2-24 Appendix 3.2-24

Y. Lab Flow Tracking With Fume Hood Appendix 3.2-25 Appendix 3.2-25

Z. CRAC Unit Appendix 3.2-26 Appendix 3.2-26

AA. Heat Pump Appendix 3.2-27 Appendix 3.2-27

BB. VAV Zoned by Occupancy Sensor Appendix 3.2-28 Appendix 3.2-28

CC. Heat Only Dorm Themostat Control Appendix 3.2-29 Appendix 3.2-29

DD. Valence Heat / Cool Thermostat Control Appendix 3.2-30 Appendix 3.2-30

EE. Steam & Chilled Water Monitoring Appendix 3.2-31 Appendix 3.2-31

FF. Compressed Air System Appendix 3.2-32 Appendix 3.2-32

GG. Air Volume Traverse Station Appendix 3.2-33 Appendix 3.2-33

HH. Wire & Cable Riser for Thermostats Appendix 3.2-34 Appendix 3.2-34

II. Wire & Conduit Illustration Appendix 3.2-35 Appendix 3.2-35

J J . ATC Responsibility Checklist Appendix 3.2-36 Appendix 3.2-36

4. Code References


B. ASHRAE 62- 2007

C. ASHRAE 90.1-2007

internal Tech Team review process through the Office of Design and Construction for
compliance with University standards. Plans are to be submitted for review at:





Team.

purpose of the Tech Team review process is if to confirm A/E compliance with the current
version of the Facilities Design Standards Manual including each respective section and


The Designer shall meet with the Project Manager and Controls Engineer to ascertain the number
and location of control points in the Building.

The Designer is to familiarize himself with system requirements and plan the system functions
(sequence of operations), equipment and raceway layout.

See also Building Commissioning Process in Section 3.13 and the Master Technical
Specification for Building Automation Systems for further details.

7. Requirements for Documentation

Along with the specifications, the Designer is to produce sufficient documentation to allow
competitive bid of the Automatic Temperature Control work. Confirm room numbering of
Drawings with Section 3.4 Fire Alarm Systems and 2.8 Environmental Graphics.

This documentation will include, as a minimum:
MEP Design Intent (define seasonal
environmental parameters)
X

MEP Basis of Design (control
strategy)

X
Floor plans showing locations of all
devices including thermostats or
sensors that are part of or connected
to the system;

X

X
Sequence of operation, including set-
points and alarm limits.

X

X
Control Diagram / Flow Diagrams

X

X
Points list for every sequence or unit
using owner approved point names.

X
PU Standard Installation Details X X X
Full Length Specifications (refer to
Appendix 3.2-1)

X X

Show all dedicated power and dedicated communication cabling in conduit on the electrical
series Drawings, in either plan or riser diagram format (shown as power and ATC
communication), per the direction of the Controls Project Engineer.

Mounting heights for thermostats shall be in conformance with both ADA and Manufacturers
recommendations. Temperature sensors however shall be installed strictly per Manufacturers
recommendations. If the work is done as part of a renovation, existing switch mounting heights
should also be considered. See the Master Technical Specification for Building Automation
Systems for further details.


A. General Approach

1. Hardware and software shall include point database, graphical system display and
network interface to a central supervisory control system at the MacMillan Building.
Include 20% spare capacity for hardware and software.

2. ATC contractor shall supply all control point designations to the Owner and shall
program all sequences of operation into the energy management system. Include
energy analysis software variables of information with real-time energy evaluations
that reflect the design load calculation. Tracking and trending energy usage of chilled
water, Kwh and steam is typically the first real-time energy evaluation performed.
These evaluations provide useful input to peak demand control strategies.

3. All hydronic valves shall be protected from system flush with a separate spool piece
including VAV units and fan coils.

4. Bids shall be received from both Siemens Building Technologies and Carrier
Automated Logic Corporation. University Controls Engineer to review scope
document prepared by Construction Manager and Design Engineer prior to bidding.
Design Engineer will participate in bid review meetings.

B. Utility Metering

Meters shall be sized to read at mid-point for the nominal designed system load.
Meters shall not be sized for maximum capacity of the installed system.
CHW and Steam Meter locations shall be clearly shown on piping drawings with
manufactures piping recommendations noted, a separate detail shall also be shown.
CHW and Steam Meters shall be provided and wired by ATC contractor and installed by
Mechanical contractor.

The totalization of utilities consumption (kW, steam flow/BTUs, chilled water flow and
Ton-hours) will be accomplished as follows:

Pulse counting devices shall interface with the building electric meters, and shall send
sufficient data to the controller to calculate instantaneous kW @ 0.5%. The chilled water
metering shall include a 4-20mA signal to the DDC system that indicates flow in GPM
and the DDC will calculate the actual Tons, based on the supply/ return chilled water
sensors. The Steam flow metering with flow processor shall include a 4-20mA signal to
the DDC system that indicates either pressure and/or temperature compensated flow in
lbs/hour. The DDC system will have the capacity to send the meter data recorded to a
historical database for daily, monthly and yearly reports.

In addition, utility meter data is provided over Ethernet to the Universities Energy
Management / Fuel Dispatch program which is currently Icetec.

C. Training

State the hours for each type of training session to be provided. A minimum of 8 hours for
each DDC Panel installed and 2 hours for each Application Controller type installed. Two
separate training sessions for two separate groups will allow onsite training of one group
while the other group is able to respond the normal work requests.

D. Central Supervisory Control System (CSCS) at MacMillan Front End

Historical Data Collection Standard data collection capabilities applicable to all data
points. A minimum historical trend to include all analog points, every ten minutes.
Information Reporting The trend capabilities allows data to be transferred to Excel.
Alarming Monitoring Operators are notified of an out-of-normal condition.
Alarms can be sent to a screen, printer. Alarms can have different priorities and
messages can be directed to different locations depending on the severity of the alarm,
allowing early warning notification for out-of-spec conditions.
Off Hour Alarm Management (Remote Notification) - Alarms that require off hour
response need to be set up to notify appropriate Princeton personnel via email and
phone call.
Preventative Maintenance Collection of equipment runtime allows maintenance to
be performed on a J ust-in-Time or predictive basis instead of incurring unnecessary
and preventable costs due to a machine breakdown. Alarming functions can even
notify the appropriate maintenance crew when service is requested. Run time
information and alarms can also be transferred to a Maintenance Management
package to produce work orders.
Equipment Scheduling Normal operating hours and special events can be
programmed ahead of time so that an operator need not be on-site to turn on
equipment and adjust set points for planned events.
Control Sequence Programming The ALC or Siemens programming code can be
used to automate complex building HVAC systems, sustain strict environmental
conditions and optimize control functions and applications for most of the Facilities

9. Requirements for Automatic Temperature Control System Testing & Commissioning

Testing procedures shall be in conformance with the Master Technical Specification for Building
Automation (Appendix 3.2-1) In general the format consists of a milestone procedure layering
increasing university involvement as the project transitions into occupancy and closeout. These
milestones integrate the commissioning process (if contracted) and are conducted in the
following order

A. Prefunctional Commissioning Testing Spot verification of system supervisory
equipment, pathway & wiring, individual component installation and functionality.
(Deliverables per PreFunctional Commissioning Log -see Section 3.13)

B. Point to Point Checkout Comprehensive control point functionality review
conducted for verification of signal and device response. This shall be done in two (2)
stages:
ATC subcontractor verification
(Deliverable Mfr standard start-up test)
1. ATC subcontractor with P.U. Shop & Design Engineer
(Deliverable Reviewed/Approved Mfr start-up test)

C. Sequence of Operation Confirmation Comprehensive validation of the control logic
for the completed system, typically conducted after balancing report has been
reviewed and accepted. This shall be conducted by the ATC subcontractor and
representatives from Facilities Engineering to confirm the system design parameters have
been achieved. This shall be done in two (2) stages:
1. ATC subcontractor verification
(Deliverable Mfr standard Sequence of Operation Check)
2. ATC subcontractor with P.U. Shop & Design Engineer
(Deliverable Reviewed/Approved Sequence of Operation Check)

D. Functional Commissioning Testing Cross -disciplinary review of the validated ATC
system and its related components such as heating/cooling modes, FA/FP supervisory
controls, and occupancy controls. Functional testing is conducted by the Commissioning
Agent in conjunction with the ATC subcontractor, PU Shops and Facilities Engineering.
(Deliverables per Functional Commissioning Log- see Section 3.13)

System Prefunctional and Point-to-Point checks can be tested incrementally if agreed in
advance. However, Sequence of Operation checks and Functional Commissioning cannot be
conducted without the reviewed and accepted Air Balancing report.

10. Master BAS Specification Implementation Guidance to the Design Engineer

These Guide Specifications set forth guidelines to assist the designers of building mechanical
systems in specifying and procuring the controls for those building systems. This document
provides tools for the designer to specify the appropriate level of control system quality for
reliable control.

Decision-making guidance to the design A/E is provided throughout these specifications
(Appendix 3.2-1) in the form of Editors Notes so that the A/E may make prudent decisions
and specify the most effective requirements for the system being installed and for those that have
to use them. It is ultimately the designers job to assess the systems to be controlled and the
environments in which they will be installed, commissioned, and operated and utilize the
appropriate elements of this specification.

Edits to each specification section shall be performed in Microsoft WORD software. All editing
shall be performed using the Track Changes options with all changes not accepted. This allows
Princeton to review all changes proposed to the Master Documents.

These Guide Specifications apply the following principles to the control systems in the order they
are presented:
Principle 1 The control system must first and foremost provide effective and reliable
control, commensurate with the systems it is controlling. Obviously the types,
complexities and the criticalities of the systems being controlled will dictate the
quality/power of the control system that should be applied to them. The ultimate quality of
the control system is primarily dictated by the components that sense, execute logic for,
actuate, and document the systems they are controlling. These components are generally
specified in Master Sections 15951 (BAS Basic Materials, Interface Devices, And Sensors),
and 15953 (BAS Field Panels). This specification applies the concept of an Application
Category for controllers whereby the performance requirements of the controllers are
grouped into categories, and the Specification must remain unchanged.
Principle 2 The manufacturer and installer must be highly qualified with extensive
experience and must be committed and bound to thorough Commissioning (Cx). While
the control system power/quality is very important, equally or more important is the expertise
and commitment of the installing contractor and their collaboration with the overall
commissioning team. Section 15950 (BAS General) provides for qualifications of both the
installer and manufacturers of the systems. Section 15959 (BAS Commissioning) dictates a
high standard for the Commissioning of the system by the installer.
Principle 3 The control installation must be fully documented as consistently as
practical with nothing required to fully operate and maintain the system withheld from
the University. The system must always be put in the context of how it will integrate with
existing systems and implemented and documented using standard approaches wherever
possible. Point naming conventions, programming logic, network configuration
requirements, security information, etc. must be strictly adhered to and wholly documented.
No element for the continued operation and maintenance of the control system may be
withheld in any way. No part of the installation may be considered confidential or
proprietary information. This specification requires applicable documentation throughout.
Principal 4 - Require sufficient instrumentation. The designer must require
instrumentation to support both the sequence of operations, and the data acquisition
capability to support equipment performance monitoring and building diagnostics analysis.
A listing generally establishing minimum instrumentation requirements is included with the
specifications. This identifies minimum instrumentation for common types of system. The
designer is responsible for requiring additional instrumentation as necessary to support the
sequence of operations, or to supplement data acquisition capabilities when the nature of the
equipment or systems to be installed makes this sensible. Additional higher end devices shall
be specified for control of critical systems or areas in a facility. It is the responsibility of the
design engineer, in consultation with Princeton University Facilities Engineering, to specify
the appropriate products for the application.
Conclusion:
Application of these Principles to a given project requires the designer to research/consider
the project-specific environment and requirements and to edit this specification appropriately.
The specific decision depends on a number of other important variables, including the
specific HVAC control applications being served, the critical nature of the area or facility
being served, the quality and capabilities of the local installer, and operator capabilities.
Only those items listed in Blue Italic Text are to be modified, all other items in the
specification are to remain unchanged unless prior, explicit permission has been obtained
from properly authorized Princeton University Facilities Engineering representatives. The
designer is cautioned to apply or find the appropriate level of expertise to complete this
specification - otherwise, the result could be a specification with inadequate and
contradictory requirements that cannot be enforced.

This specification extensively references detailed control drawings, detailed sequences of
operation, point lists, etc. The A/E and design team must provide and incorporate these into
the design documents.


The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built Drawings prepared by the ATC
and Mechanical contractor.


Shop Drawing information in a sectionalized 8 1/2 x 11 three-ring binder with a Table of
Contents listing all sections. An electronic PDF version will accompany the submittal for use
by the Engineering Department. The contractor shall update all submittals to an as-built
document for use by the University for operation and maintenance of the system. Provide a
PDF version of the as-built blinder on the Facilities Engineering Front-End server that is linked
to the Graphic Display. Provide a printed copy and PDF of each specified report demonstrate
the reported data is accurate and complete. Provide an as-built document in each ATC Panel
showing each system controlled by the ATC Panel, HVAC balancing reports, ATC conduit runs,
boxes and devices with numbers, HVAC control schematic Drawings. All drawings shall be on
AutoCAD.

See Section 1.5 (Documentation and Archiving) and the Master Technical Specification for
Building Automation Systems for further details.

END OF DOCUMENT
3.3 Energy Guidelines

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.3 Energy - page 1

1. Introduction

As part of the Universitys overall commitment to sustainable campus development, Princetons
goal is to reduce carbon emissions to 1990 levels by the year 2020, without the purchase of
carbon offsets. Improving building energy efficiency is a major means to reach 1990 carbon
emissions levels and is targeted to contribute to approximately 35% of the required reduction. In
addition to the energy standards for new construction and major renovations outlined in this
section, a program of aggressive energy efficiency retrofit measures for campus infrastructure
and existing buildings will supplement the targeted reduction.
While the University does not require LEED certification for projects, the equivalent to a LEED
silver rating is sought as a measure of industry benchmarking. This approach is enhanced by a
commitment to Life Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) as a more objective and quantitative approach
to making informed design decisions. This process is outlined in Section 1.2, Sustainable
Building Guidelines.
This Energy Guidelines section outlines targets for energy performance, as well as analysis and
reporting requirements for all project design phases of major design projects, involving both new
buildings and major renovations. Identification of energy efficiency measures, whole building
energy simulation, building envelope design or upgrade, daylighting design, renewable energy,
measurement & verification, and commissioning, are addressed. Small scale renovation projects,
defined as those with existing envelopes and predetermined HVAC systems shall incorporate an
abbreviated effort, while still considering appropriate energy efficiency measures.

2. Contacts

Grounds and Building Maintenance, Real Estate Development, or as applicable)

B. Director of Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5472

C. Energy Plant Manager MacMillan Building, 609-258-3966

D. Campus Energy Manager MacMillan Building, 609-258-9008


PDF

MS Word/Excel
A LEED Green Building Rating System www.usgbc.org

B New J ersey Higher Education Partnership
For Sustainability - Mission Statement (NJ HEPS)
www.njhep.org

C Commissioning Plan Appendix 3.3-3 Appendix 3.3-3

D Outline of MEP Design Intent Appendix 3.3-4 Appendix 3.3-4

E MEP Basis of Design Appendix 3.3-5 Appendix 3.3-5

F Final Commissioning Report Appendix 3.3-6 Appendix 3.3-6

G Index of MEP Pre-Functional Tests Appendix 3.3-7 Appendix 3.3-7
Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.3 Energy- page 2

H Index of MEP Functional Tests Appendix 3.3-8 Appendix 3.3-8

I Commissioning Specifications Appendix 3.3-9 Appendix 3.3-9

J High-Performance Systems Matrix Appendix 3.3-10 Appendix 3.3-10

K US Department of Energy Building Energy Codes
Program Compliance Website
www.energycodes.gov

L ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Appendix G Guidance
Document
Appendix 3.3-12 -

M Utility and Carbon Rate Structure - Appendix 3.3-13

N Input and Output Reporting Spreadsheet - Appendix 3.3-14

O Fan Power Calculation Spreadsheet - Appendix 3.3-15

P Standard Utilization Schedules - Appendix 3.3-16

Q Glazing Factor Calculation Spreadsheet - Appendix 3.3-17

R EPA Energy Star Buildings Website Appendix 3.3-18 -

S Energy Guidelines Deliverable Requirements Appendix 3.3-19 -

4. Code References

A. International Mechanical Code - New J ersey Edition

B. International Building Code New J ersey Edition

C. International Energy Conservation Code New J ersey Edition

D. ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2007


Project Team reviews of issues relating to energy use and building energy systems will occur
within the larger context of the Life-Cycle Comparative Studies (LCCS) process (see Section 1.2
Sustainable Building Guidelines) and, for new buildings, in a focused manner at the Envelope
Reviews during the Pre-Schematic, Schematic and Design Development phases. Project
documents, as indicated below, shall be submitted for review by the Office of Design and
Construction, Engineering and the Maintenance Department at specified design milestones.


Pre-Schematic Design:

Sustainability
Charette

design
Identify energy target category for project
(e.g. new construction, major renovation,
etc.). Identify daylighting coverage goals.
Submit report summarizing target
category, massing model, energy
efficiency measures for study, and
envelope concept.
Massing Energy
Model
design
Develop a preliminary energy model
based on conceptual massing. Use
ASHRAE maximum allowable lighting,
envelope, and HVAC parameters. Use the
energy model to identify target areas for
energy savings.

LCCA Workshop
design after
development of
Massing Energy
Model
Identify group of energy efficiency
measures to study.

Conceptual
Envelope
Workshop
design after
development of
Massing Energy
Model
Identify basic envelope strategy and peak
heating and cooling load targets, as per
Envelope Design Guidelines.
Schematic Design:


LCCA Review 1

Beginning of
schematic design
Review energy efficiency measures to develop
during schematic design.
Submit MEP Design Intent Document
(see Sec 3.13)

Envelope Review 1 100% schematic
design
Demonstrate prescriptive or trade-off envelope
compliance. Review daylighting strategy,
perimeter thermal comfort, and perimeter
HVAC strategy.
Submit Preliminary COMcheck report.
SD Energy Model
100% schematic
design
compliant model with all three baselines. If
lighting is not designed yet, set targets for
lighting power densities.
Submit input/output spreadsheet with
zoning diagram.
Daylight Review 1
100% schematic
design
Glazing factor calculation for typical rooms.
Submit glazing factor calculation
daylight model.

Design Development:


LCCA
Review 2
Beginning of
design
development
Identify which energy efficiency measures
should be kept and which should be
discarded, based on the 100% SD energy
model. Identify additional measures, if
appropriate.
Submit MEP Basis of Design (see Section
3.13)

Envelope Review 2

100% design
development
strategy, perimeter thermal comfort, and
perimeter HVAC strategy.
Submit updated COMcheck report.
DD Energy Model
50% design
development
Test any additional measures identified in
LCCS Review 2. Test a minimum of six
energy efficiency measures individually.
Daylight Review 2
100% design
development
Glazing factor calculation for typical rooms
OR daylight simulation.
Submit updated glazing factor calculation
daylight model.
PS-5
PS-9
PS-8
SD-15
SD-17
DD-7
DD-8

Construction Documents:

CD Energy Model 1
Beginning of
construction
documents
Model only what has been kept in the design
after any value engineering exercises.
Submit updated input/output
spreadsheet with zoning diagram.
CD Energy Model 2
85% construction
documents
compliant model with all three baselines with
no approximated values.
Submit updated COMcheck report,
zoning diagram, input/output
spreadsheet, fan power spreadsheet,
glazing factor calculation spreadsheet
and final energy modeling report.

6. Energy Performance Targets

The objective of setting energy performance targets is to encourage design teams to develop well
integrated energy efficient buildings without restricting their creativity by prescribing specific
technical solutions.

New projects connecting to central chilled water or steam should aim to achieve steady load
patterns of utility usage through designs that promote higher thermal capacity, utility
conservation and effective contextual response to the surrounding environment. The early timing
of this effort is critical in order to have the best chance of effective decisions during the
construction documents phase. For renovation projects, envelope and MEP system enhancements
should achieve similar goals.

This section sets energy targets for new construction and major renovation projects.

Procedures for demonstrating and calculating these reductions are included in the following
section: Modeling Procedures.

New Construction Energy Performance Targets ( 20,000 ft)
Relative Targets Energy Cost
o Four models shall be created in total to calculate energy cost savings: one
Proposed model of the building as designed, and three Baseline models against
which to compare these results. The three baseline models will be used to break out
building side energy efficiency measures from campus plant energy efficiency
measures.

Baseline Model
Number
Description Baseline Cooling Plant Baseline Heating Plant
Utility Rate
(Appendix 3.3-13)
Baseline - 1
ASHRAE 90.1
Baseline Model
Cooling as per ASHRAE
90.1-2007 Appendix G
Purchased steam Rate Structure 1
Baseline - 2
Cost Neutral
Plant Model
Purchased chilled water Purchased steam Rate Structure 2
Baseline - 3
PSEG Baseline &
Additional
Measures*
Cooling as per ASHRAE
90.1-2007 Appendix G
Gas-fired boiler with
minimum efficiency per
ASHRAE 90.1-2007
Rate Structure 3
* see Section 7 below.

o Results of all four models (one Proposed and three Baseline) shall be reported
using the templates described in the following section, Modeling Procedures.
o All new projects shall target a 50% annual energy cost savings when comparing the
Proposed building model to Baseline 1. Although this is an ambitious goal,
PS-13
depending on building size and programming, many projects have an opportunity to
apply innovative strategies to reduce energy usage if discussed early in the design
process and combined with Life-Cycle Comparative Study (LCCS) activities. During
the Sustainability Charette in Pre-Schematic Design, the design team should
determine appropriate energy goals for the project in consultation with the Princeton
University Project Manager and Facilities Engineering staff. Princeton University is
striving to set project goals that spur innovation without distracting a design team
with unrealistic benchmarks. The design team should be aware that Princeton
University is driving for and desires actual energy use savings and the limitations of
ASHRAE 90.1 can sometimes prevent the use of certain strategies if credit is not
given within the framework of the standard. Discussions among the design team
should occur regarding interpretations of the standard and the potential impact on
modeling efforts and predicted savings. Strict percentage improvement figures,
although attractive for simplicity, do not always paint the complete picture especially
when comparing different building types or even different sizes of the same building
type. Certain projects may be better served with a comparison of energy use intensity
to other similar buildings in the Energy Star Target Finder or Labs21 energy metrics
databases. (Project teams should bear in mind that, although Princeton does not
currently pursue formal USGBC LEED certification, a model of the proposed
building as compared to a strict ASHRAE-90.1 baseline building (Baseline-1) would
be required for any potential USGBC submissions as other benchmarking strategies
are currently inapplicable to achieve credits.)
o For projects using a local cooling plant, instead of campus chilled water, Baseline-2
does not need to be run.
o Rate structures available at the start of a project will be used until project completion.
Updates of the rates during the project shall not be reflected.
Relative Targets Carbon
o Carbon savings shall be calculated using the rate structure found in Appendix 3.3-13.

Energy Star Target Finder Performance
o Compare the energy performance of the proposed building to targets set by the EPA
Energy Star buildings program.

New Construction Energy Performance Targets (< 20,000 ft)
Projects shall follow guidance provided by the ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guides
available for free on the ASHRAE website. Projects may alternatively follow the modeling
guidance required for new construction greater than 20,000 ft.

Major Renovations
Targets Energy Use
o Demonstrate either through energy simulation or through measured energy use that
performance of the project meets the criteria for an EPA Energy Star rating of at least
75 using the EPA Target Finder tool.
o For building types not addressed by Target Finder, demonstrate a 50% source energy
savings over the existing buildings source energy use.
o Baseline performance of the existing building may be derived from past energy use
data available from Princeton University Facilities.

7. Modeling Procedures

Introduction
Energy modeling shall be carried out according to the procedures contained in this section.
Results from modeling will be used to track performance in comparison to the targets set in
Section 6.
These guidelines have been written in an effort to achieve greater consistency in modeling
and reporting across University projects.

Modeling - New Construction and Major Renovations
The baseline case shall be established according to the Princeton University ASHRAE 90.1-
2007 Appendix G guidance document (Appendix 3.3-12). This document is meant to be used
alongside the actual standard and provides clarifications tailored to the Universitys campus
infrastructure, building types, and climate.
To streamline comparison and development of modeling inputs and outputs between projects,
several supplements are provided and are required for use according to the project
deliverables table listed in Section 5. The front tab in each sheet provides instructions for use.
o Utility and Carbon Rate Structure (Appendix 3.3-13)
o Input and Output Reporting Spreadsheet (Appendix 3.3-14)
o Fan Power Calculation Spreadsheet (Appendix 3.3-15)
o Standard Utilization Schedules (Appendix 3.3-16)
o Glazing Factor Calculation Spreadsheet (Appendix 3.3-17)

Additional Measures Savings in areas not governed by ASHRAE 90.1
There may be measures in a project design that are above and beyond standard practice and
that will result in energy savings that will not be captured by a standard ASHRAE 90.1
Appendix G evaluation. This guideline allows for the inclusion of some of these measures,
approved on a case-by-case basis with the Princeton Project Manager in Baseline 3.
Examples include:
o Reduction of minimum ventilation rates in labs from 6ach to 4ach
o Reduction in process loads by use of efficient receptacles
This guideline allows for the inclusion of these savings by modifying the parameters in
Baseline 3 to reflect standard practice baselines. The baseline performance for each
measure must be approved by the Princeton Project Manager during the LCC process.
This guidance is separate from that offered in ASHRAE 90.1 G2.5 Exceptional Calculation.
An exceptional calculation can be done for a measure that is traditionally allowed in
ASHRAE 90.1 with a specified baseline (such as natural ventilation, complex system types,
demand controlled ventilation etc.) but that modeling software cannot calculate directly. This
allowance for Additional Measures is a departure from the ASHRAE 90.1 baseline to
demonstrate the magnitude of savings for certain measures where the design goes above and
beyond standard practice.
A library of approved measures and agreed-upon baselines from past projects is in
development.

8. Envelope Design Guidelines

Introduction
Energy, comfort, and daylighting performance of the building envelope must be considered
early on in the design process. Many lower energy HVAC systems require that building
envelope loads be well controlled.
The goal of this guidance is to ensure that building envelope components comply with
ASHRAE 90.1- 2007without trade-offs with other building systems, such as lighting, HVAC,
or service hot water heating.

Definitions
Skylight: a fenestration surface having a slope less than 60 degrees from the horizontal plane.
Other fenestration, even if mounted on the roof of a building, is considered vertical
fenestration.
Vertical fenestration: all fenestration other than skylights. Trombe wall assemblies, where
glazing is installed within 12 in. of a mass wall, are considered walls, not fenestration.

Process
COMcheck (http://www.energycodes.gov/comcheck/ez_download.stm) shall be used to
demonstrate envelope code compliance at three stages in the design process:
o 100% Schematic Design
o 100% Design Development
o 85% Construction Documents

Opaque Building Envelope Components
Opaque element U-values should be derived from ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Normative Appendix
A. For assembly types not listed in Appendix A, provide calculations for envelope thermal
performance. Otherwise, use maximum allowed ASHRAE 90.1-2007 U-values for load and
energy modeling.

Figure 1 ASHRAE 90.1-2007 (2008 Supplement) Building Envelope Requirements for Princeton, NJ
Fenestration
Fenestration components must meet the rating requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 Section 5.8.2.
U-values provided by glazing manufacturers are often center-of-glass values and do not
include the effect of edge spacers, framing, or local thermal bridging.
U-values provided by glazing manufacturers for skylight applications are often center-of-
glass values not corrected for slope. Insulating glass units experience a significant decrease in
thermal resistance when sloped, due to increased convection in the gas cavity.
During schematic design and up to 50% design development, use Table 4 from the 2005
ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook (U-Factors for Various Fenestration Products) to
estimate U-values.
In the absence of credible thermal performance data, ASHRAE 90.1 Table 5.5-5 maximum
U-values and SHGCs (40% vertical fenestration, 5% skylight) must be used for load and
energy modeling.

General Guidance
Energy Code
Consider that ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G allows no greater than a 5% skylight-to-roof ratio
in the baseline model.
Consider that ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G allows no greater than a 40% vertical fenestration-
to-above-grade wall ratio in the baseline model.
Thermal Comfort
Building envelope systems for shallow plan rooms (e.g. enclosed offices) should be evaluated
carefully. During peak cooling conditions, solar radiation may lead to significant local
heating discomfort. During peak heating conditions, downdrafts and low fenestration surface
temperatures may lead to significant local cooling discomfort.
HVAC
Careful control of building envelope gains and losses is required for use of lower energy
systems, such as active chilled beams, radiant systems, and displacement ventilation. High
solar gains in shallow plan spaces may result in excessive supply airflow requirements (>2
cfm/ft
2
).
Visual Comfort
Use of significant amounts of vertical fenestration and/or skylight may result in local glare
issues. Where occupants will be using visual displays (e.g. TVs, LCDs, etc.), consider the
impact of high levels of natural daylight.
External Shading
External shading devices should be considered as a means to reduce direct solar gain.
o South facing overhangs.
o West and east facing vertical fins.
o North facing external shading not required.
o Skylight consider north facing clerestory windows, as an alternative.

Summary of Submission Requirements
COMcheck Envelope Compliance Form (ASHRAE 90.1).

9. Systems Performance

Air conditioning in the dormitories is not normally operated from Labor Day to Memorial Day.
The design team must ensure that the building maintains relatively comfortable living conditions
during this period when the air conditioning is not operating.


High-Performance Systems Matrix
A list of energy efficiency measures to consider is provided in Appendix 3.3-10. This list is not
meant to be all inclusive, but highlights a range of measures that have been evaluated on past
Princeton University projects. Design teams are required to develop a customized high-
performance systems matrix as per the Sustainability guidelines.

10. Daylighting

Daylighting will be utilized as a primary light source in all new buildings for both energy savings
as well as improved indoor environmental quality. The success of daylighting design depends
largely on the building floor to ceiling height, the cross-sectional depth of the building, the
window head height above the finished floor and the visible transmittance of the glazing. In
general, the shallower the depth and the higher the ceiling, the greater the building area covered
by natural light.

Correct building orientation and window treatments are synergistic strategies for effective
daylighting. Mitigation of glare and luminance contrast is critical to creating a comfortable daylit
environment. Passive daylighting measures such as clerestories, atria, light wells, and light
shelves are recommended to mitigate glare and heat load in the building envelope.

A. Daylighting Coverage Goals
Project-specific Daylighting Coverage Goals will be identified at the Sustainability Charette
during the Pre-Schematic Design phase of a project. Typical guideline performance targets are as
follows:
Daylighting
Illuminance at
Work Surface
Space Coverage (unless
otherwise noted at project
inception).
Spaces Occupied for Critical Visual Tasks
These spaces include offices, conference rooms,
classrooms, libraries, auditoriums and laboratories.
25 -50 fc 75%
Lighted Transitory Spaces
These spaces include informal break-out spaces,
meeting spaces and corridors at least 10ft in width with
seating.
15-25 fc (can contribute to 75% of
space coverage for Critical
Visual Task Areas)

B. Glazing Factor Calculations and Computer Daylight Simulation
During the design phases, daylighting issues shall be reviewed at the Envelope Reviews and,
where relevant to selected LCCS study categories, at LCCS Reviews.

Fulfillment of the project Daylighting Coverage Goals should be confirmed through Glazing
Factor Calculations at the conclusion of Schematic Design and Design Development phases,
when deemed appropriate for primary or typical spaces, computer simulation. A calculation
should be completed for each typical space type. Regularly occupied spaces appropriate for
daylight should demonstrate a minimum glazing factor of 2% in the daylit areas occupied for
critical visual tasks and a minimum glazing factor of 1.2% in the daylit transitory spaces. The
glazing factor is calculated as follows:

PS-7

Glazing Type Glazing Geometry Minimum Height
Factor Tvis Factor
Windows
Window area >7'-6" aff vertical 0.1 0.7 1.4
Window area 2'-6" - 7'-6" aff vertical 0.1 0.4 0.8
Skylights
Vertical clerestory monitor vertical 0.2 0.4 1
Sawtooth monitor sloped 0.33 0.4 1
Horizontal skylight horizontal 0.5 0.4 1
Orientation

A spreadsheet is provided as Appendix 3.3-17 for glazing factor calculations.

Conformance to daylighting goals shall also be demonstrated through post construction field
measurement. See Section 3.3.12 (Measurement and Verification).

11. Renewable Energy

The design team should consider the use of on-site renewable energy on projects. Life-Cycle
Comparative Studies (LCCS) will be used to determine appropriate systems. LCCS analyses
should incorporate all available rebates and incentives. These may include programs such as the
New J ersey Clean Energy Program. Refer to Appendix 1.2-1 Sustainability Resources, Funding
Opportunities for Sustainability. Renewable energy includes: wind, solar power, solar thermal
and solar hot water heating systems. Ground-source heat pump systems do not fall under this
category, but rebates may still apply.

12. Measurement and Verification

Measurement and verification will continually confirm that all building systems are operating as
intended and will provide data to inform further operational improvements. Monitoring
equipment should be used for end-uses such as lighting systems, motor loads, and HVAC
equipment. Data from this equipment will be analyzed and appropriate adjustments made to
verify that systems are meeting the energy performance requirements set forth by the design
team. Projects shall comply with the requirements of Section 3.2 (Automatic Temperature
Controls and Energy Management System) and with the project Commissioning Plan as
described in standards section 3.13 Commissioning.

END OF DOCUMENT
3.4 Fire Alarms

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.4 Fire Alarms - page 1

1. Introduction

The buildings on the main campus of Princeton University are typically protected by fire alarm
systems that include automatic smoke and heat detectors, manual pull stations, and audible and
visual alarm devices. Special devices, such as duct detectors, suppression system tamper and
flow alarms and door hold-opens are also incorporated into the alarm systems. Some off-campus
(mostly small residential) Buildings may utilize single-station hardwired devices. The decision
to use any such non-addressable alarm system must be made in consultation with the University
Code Analyst.

The University currently employs an addressable analog alarm system and others, connected via
University fiber to a proprietary system in the Universitys Office of Public Safety at 200 Elm Dr.

The use of addressable analog alarm systems on all University projects shall be determined
through consultation with the University Code Analyst. This process applies to residential
applications and projects with program elements containing hazardous, combustible or other
dangerous materials.

Current acceptable manufacturer for the University alarm systems is Simplex Time Recorder Co.

2. Contacts



C. Manager of Electrical Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5475

D. Facilities Site Protection Manager 306 Alexander Street, 609-258-5270

E. University Fire Marshall 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-6805

F. Facilities Mechanical Systems Coordinator,
Life Safety and Security 306 Alexander Street, 609-258-3659

PDF

A. Master Fire Alarm Technical Specification Appendix 3.4-1

B. Fire Alarm/Signage Nomenclature
Spreadsheet Sample, Princeton University Appendix 2.8-2

C. Fire Alarm Sequence of Operation Matrix Appendix 3.4-2

D. Smoke Damper Sequence of Operation Matrix Appendix 3.4-3

4. Code References


B. NJ UCC subchapter 3 for listing of applicable sub codes and sub code sections



E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

F. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm code


initiation. FM Global is the Universitys current property insurance carrier. Effort should be
made to comply with FM standards. If FM designs are not feasible the design team is to
communicate no compliance with the Project Manager. As the project moves toward the
Office of Design and Construction for compliance with University standards. Plans are to be
submitted for review at:





Team

meetings will be held with respective University shops, University Project Engineers University
Code Analyst, the and other Tech Team representatives as required. The A/E is responsible for
documenting minutes of all these meetings. There, review comments or recent revisions will be
discussed and documented. The Designers shall provide timely and coordinated responses to all
review comments. The purpose of the Tech Team review process is to confirm A/E compliance
with the current version of the Facilities Design Standards Manual including each respective
section and associated appendices.


The Designer is to first review the Princeton University Master Technical Specifications for the
project, and is to proceed into design guided by that specification. Any variations proposed by
the Designer from the master spec are to be reviewed with the Universitys Project Manager,
Code Analyst and Mechanical Systems Coordinator of Life Safety and Security, and, if the
change is to be incorporated, it may be reviewed with the author of the Specifications, Hughes
Associates (through the Mechanical Systems Coordinator). This document is only available to
the design team in uneditable pdf format. All project specific edits by the design team will be
completed by the University. A new project specific pdf file will then be distributed to the
design team.

The Designer is to meet with the Mechanical Systems Coordinator of Life Safety and Security
during the preliminary design phase to familiarize themselves with system requirements.
Manager and the Universitys Code Analyst to define code strategies and to discuss code any
interpretations affecting the project.


Along with the specifications, the Designer is to produce sufficient documentation to allow for
code review of the alarm project and for contract bidding of the work. This documentation will
include, as a minimum:
MEP Design Intent
X
MEP Basis of Design
X
Floor plans showing locations of
all devices that are part of or
connected to the system;

X X X
A complete riser Diagram showing
all devices that are part of or
connected to the system;

X X
Final Room number designations X X X
Specifications X X X
Details for a sequence of operations
(selective signaling, control by
event, etc.)
X X
Details of fire alarm equipment
connections and mounting
requirements;

X
Details of connections between fire
alarm system and any special
devices, and connections between
alarm system and telephone
system, with mounting details.

X
Proprietary design requirements per
IBC 2009 (NJ Edition) 907.1.2
X

Separate Floor Plans are required for Fire Alarm Plans. The drawing number or sheet label shall
use FA as the prefix. The Designer is to coordinate reflected ceiling plans with all trades.


A. Reportability

1. Fire alarm control panel is to report to location at Department of Public Safety via
University fiber; Contractor will provide the communications interface for point I.D. at
panel.
PS-25

2. Designer to consult with Mechanical Systems Coordinator of Life Safety and Security
for details for mounting the communications interface and for related wiring to be
provided by contractor.

B. New Construction and Renovation

1. All fire alarm devices and junction boxes shall be accessible and mounted at heights
compliant with NFPA. If an existing box location is to be reused, the height shall be
discussed on a case-by-case basis.

2. Raceways in finished areas are to be concealed where possible. During programming
and preliminary design raceway layout is to be reviewed with University Project
Manager and manufacturers rep; raceway layout is to be approved by University prior
to design development phase.

3. In the event that exposed raceway must be employed, Designer is to review the
approach to be taken to running raceway, and is to specify the appropriate material.

C. Consideration for the Hearing Impaired

1. In order to provide for variety in the housing stock available for the hearing impaired,
the University typically outfits a number of rooms over and above the number
required by Code. The Housing Office and the Office of the Dean for Student Life
provide information for Designers on the number and location of rooms needed.

2. Special wiring arrangements are required for the strobe unit in hearing impaired
rooms: the device must activate in first alarm condition and must be wired as
separate homerun to the fire alarm control panel.

D. Magnetic Hold-Open Devices

1. In dormitories, all doors from corridors to stairs, and doors dividing corridors from
public spaces are typically outfitted with smoke detector-activated hold-open devices.
Other doors subject to chocking shall be evaluated for installation of smoke detector-
activated hold open devices.

2. Princeton University prefers wall-mounted devices (over floor-mounted or devices for
closers.

3. All locations of proposed hold-opens are to be reviewed with Princeton University,
including Building Services, Facilities Department, and User during the design
development phase.

4. To accommodate accessibility in egress pathways, connect hold opens to activate
within 5 of a detector in alarm, plus the next adjacent door in sequence (in
applicable), unless otherwise directed by the tech review team.

E. Special Requirements Due to Location

Designer is to coordinate selection of detector type with awareness of environmental
conditions in the rooms protected, with special emphasis on the presence of heat-
producing equipment, supply diffusers and return-air grilles, and other equipment that
might prevent the proper long-term operation of the fire alarm devices.

F. Beam Detectors

Due to high maintenance requirements, beam detectors are only to be used in special
cases, typically atriums and other spaces where a smoke detector would otherwise be
above 15 feet in height. Review any proposed installation of beam detectors with
University personnel during design programming phase.

G. VESDA System

Due to high maintenance requirements, a VESDA system shall only to be used in special
cases, typically atriums and other spaces where a smoke detector would otherwise be
above 15 feet in height. Review any proposed installation with the Mechanical Systems
Coordinator of Life Safety and Security during design programming phase.

H. Smoke Control System

If a smoke control system is required every effort should be made to make the system
fully automated, including resetting itself once an activated system is no longer required.
The order of operations will need to be reviewed with the Mechanical Systems
Coordinator of Life Safety and Security and the University Code Analyst. See Section
1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) item 14.

I. Interface Between Fire Alarm Control Panel and Other Equipment

In addition to providing alarm notification to the proprietary supervising station at 200
Elm Drive, fire alarm control panels are generally no longer used used to supervise
building systems and report failures of critical building systems, such as environmental/
HVAC systems, sewage ejectors, refrigeration equipment, etc. Review any additional
requirements with the Project Manager. BAS is the preferred reporting platform for non-
fire alarm related building reporting points.

J . Requirements for Fire Alarm Control Panel Locations

1. Fire alarm control panels (FACPs) are to be located in proximity to other equipment
controls, preferably in mechanical equipment rooms or electrical vaults. FACPs are
only to be installed in dry locations.
2. All wiring leaving the FACP shall be labeled as to its purpose.
3. One OIT outlet shall be installed with each panel that reports to the proprietary system
at 200 Elm Drive.
4. A duplex A/C power convenience receptacle is to be installed below the panel.
5. A four-foot fluorescent fixture (on emergency power) is to be installed over the FACP
with an on off toggle switch in close proximity.
6. Coordinate smoke and heat detector locations to allow for annual maintenance. Ensure
proper clearances for access are provided.

9. Requirements for Room and Device Designations

It is the intent of all projects to have permanent room numbers assigned during the Design Phase.
It is the responsibility of the Consultant to initiate and complete this process, and the Project
Managers responsibility to gather required approvals. All Drawings shall reference the
University approved final room number system as per Appendix 1.5-3.

The Room number assignments must be coordinated with the building signage and FA System
nomenclature designations. A sample spreadsheet for coordinating this can be found in
Appendix 2.8-2. In summary the process is as follows:
Consultant develops final room numbers during Design Development
FA vendor determines device nomenclature using above information and prepares a
submittal for review
Consultant & PM verify nomenclature is consistent with Public Safety requirements.
This can be done through the Mechanical Systems Coordinator of Life Safety and
Security at 258-3659
After approval, vendor inputs device nomenclature into FA panel

The PM and Consultant also are responsible for coordinating the approved device nomenclature
with the approved building signage package. Avoid conflicts with installed signage and the
approved FA room number designations.

After the final fire alarm nomenclature is developed, the Fire Alarm Contractor is also
responsible for producing laminated, secured to a wall, fire alarm floor plans showing all devices
with point I.D. numbers and fire alarm nomenclature. These Drawings shall be done at such a
scale as to be easily readable by those responding to alarm calls, and sized to fit in the immediate
vicinity of the fire alarm panel.

10. Requirements for Fire Alarm System Commissioning

Commissioning shall be performed in accordance with Section 3.13 of this manual and the
requirements of the Master Fire Alarm Technical Specification per Appendix 3.4-1
The extent of Commissioning shall be determined during the schematic design phase of a
project, either using in-house (Single Party), or a Four Party commissioning agent.
Tech Team representatives from Engineering and Grounds Building Maintenance shall be an
integral part of the commissioning process
The Designer is responsible for conducting the final acceptance test with the fire alarm
system representatives and the fire alarm contractor.
Room numbers are to be on all building doors prior to final testing, executed in script on
fire-resistant masking tape acceptable to the University Project Manager.
The Designer is responsible for witnessing and approving the acceptance test. The Designer
shall certify the printout of the test data, including the point I.D. readout at 200 Elm Drive,
and shall deliver a signed and sealed copy to the municipal building official as part of the
occupancy permit process, if allowed by the municipality.


The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built Drawings prepared by the fire
alarm contractor.


SD-38
The as-builts are to include the following as a minimum:

Fire alarm identification points, location and nomenclature
Fire alarm layout plan (complete with all other system interfaces and all components)
Equipment schedule
Final as-builts shall be submitted on AutoCAD files (within 2 versions of current release) and
include conduit/wire runs showing splice locations.
Copy of the Fire Alarm Program File from installation vendor.
Sequence of operation matrix
Updated battery calculations


END OF DOCUMENT
3.5 Lighting Design

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.5 Lighting - page 1

1. Introduction

These guidelines apply to Academic, Administrative and Residential Buildings on Princetons
campus. Energy efficient lighting is the preferred light source for most Buildings and lighting
applications. Incandescent lighting is generally not preferred and would need to be approved on
a case-by-case basis.

Lighting design needs to be based not only on lighting levels but quality and perceived color
rendition for the occupants.

2. Contacts


B. Manager of Electrical Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5475

C. Foreman of Electrical Maintenance Shop MacMillan Building, 609-258-3991

D. Coordinating Architect (OUA) Site Lighting MacMillan Building, 609-258-6046

PDF
A. Outdoor Lighting Master Plan Appendix 2.9-15

B. Princeton University Standard Exterior
Pole Fixture (gas lamp) Appendix 3.5-2

C. Standard Fluorescent
Dormitory Room Wall Sconce Appendix 3.5-3

D. Princeton University Standard Exterior
Pole Fixture (LED) Appendix 3.5-4

4. Code References


B. National Electric Code

C. IES Lighting Handbook

D. Federal Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT)

E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 2007







Team.

appendices.


The Designer shall meet with Project Manager, Design Architect and End User to develop
lighting types for all spaces. During this time, the Designer is encouraged to investigate
emerging technologies of fixtures, lamps and lighting methods. Generally, full scale mock-ups
of emerging technology fixture selections require input and approval by the University Architect
and Facilities Engineering. These prototypes will be previewed for color rendition, energy
consumption, light output, aesthetic appeal, lamp maintenance and established manufacturers,
along with conformance with applicable local ordinances.

Lighting fixture types should be reviewed on a case-by-case basis. When suspended ceilings
(10-0 or above) can be utilized, pendant mounted indirect/direct fixtures are preferred.

In Academic/Administrative Buildings with low ceilings (10-0 or below), or no ceilings, direct
lighting is preferred.

Designer will be required to provide light level calculations and energy efficiency as it relates to
typical spaces for review and compliance with established standards (IES Standard) of light level
quality. Coordinate any dimming requirements with end user.

Preferred type of Room lighting (where applicable):

1. Classrooms Pendant mounted Indirect/Direct energy efficient fixture when ceiling
height allows.
Emergency lighting shall be installed in each assembly space with occupancy of more
than 50 people.

2. Administrative Areas and Offices Pendant mounted Indirect/Direct energy efficient
fixture or recessed energy efficient fixture. Consider accent lighting. Accent lighting
on perimeter walls should be considered.

3. Student Dormitory Rooms (Studies and Bedrooms) Indirect energy efficient wall
sconce. See Appendix 3.5.3. See Section 2.4 Page 19 for acceptable mounting
locations and heights.

4. Laboratory Rooms Pendant mounted Indirect/direct energy efficient fixture

5. Mechanical Spaces Linear industrial protected reflector energy efficient fixture

6. Public Spaces Energy efficient /Decorative based on use of space, quantity and
configuration.


code review of the lighting system and for contract bidding of the work. This documentation
shall be coordinated with all trades and will include, as a minimum:

Lighting Plans X X X
Location and type of control device.
Provide operating logic description for
occupancy sensors, day/night controls and
dimming systems.

X X
Panelboard Schedules X X
Lighting Fixture Schedule including;
Manufacturer dimensions, model
numbers, number of lamps, type of lamps,
watts/fixture, volts, mounting
characteristics and color/finish.

X X
Specifications including product data
sheets for each proposed lighting fixture
X X X
Details X
Coordinated Architectural reflected
ceiling plan and Engineering lighting plan
showing location and types of all fixtures.

X


A. New Construction and Renovation
1. Design shall facilitate ease of fixture maintenance and replacement of lamps. All
fixtures and junction boxes shall be accessible.

2. Raceways in finished areas are to be concealed where possible.

3. Ceiling heights over 15 feet shall be reviewed by Project Manager and Electrical
Maintenance Shop Foreman to address lamp access.

B. Lamps and Ballasts
1. If selected, 4-0 fluorescent lamps shall be T8 and a color temperature of 3500 K
(same for all types of fluorescent lamps) and low-mercury content. For special use
areas, other color alternatives shall be considered. Lamps shall be manufactured by
Oshram/Sylvania, General Electric or Philips. T5 Hi output lamps are acceptable.

2. Minimize the number of different types of lamps per building.

3. Ballast shall be programmable start two, three or four lamp ballasts as appropriate. PL
lamps shall have electronic ballast. Preferred dimming ballast by Lutron.

4. The range of dimming ballasts should typically be 100% to 5% for all dimmable
fixtures.

5. Consideration shall be given for lamp replacement. A minimum of around the
edge of the lamp for hand clearance is preferred for lamp replacement.

C. Exterior Lighting
1. Campus-wide gas style post lamp (208 volts) to be used in the older section of Campus
for both street and walkway lighting. This type of fixture is proprietary, provided by
PU and installed by the contractor. Typical configuration is a 85 watt induction lamp,
spaced 60 to 70 apart. The lamp base is to be installed on a poured in place footing,
no pre-fab footings.

2. Non-Main Campus shoe box fixture to be used in parking and roadway areas,
voltage shall be 480v (208/120v in special applications). See Appendix 3.5-4 for
fixture cut sheet, Check with Landscape Coordination Committee (LCC), Section 2.9.

3. Bollard fixtures. Locations are driven by Landscape Coordination Committee (LCC).
Consider the use of LED fixtures.

4. The control of exterior lighting shall be through a photocell with a Two Position
Test- Auto keyed by-pass switch, maximum height 6-0. Locate photocells on
north face of Building. Consider motion-sensing for instantaneous-on exterior
fixtures.

D. Exit Signs
1. Sign shall be red or green LED with diffuser panel, such that LED sources are not
directly visible.

2. Any surface-mounted exit sign mounted on edge below 9-0 requires redundant
support along a second edge or side. Preferably located at a wall/ceiling intersection.

E. Emergency Lighting Circuiting
1. Emergency Lighting levels in egress paths shall be in accordance with the NEC. In
each stairwell connect a minimum of of the fixtures to the emergency system and
the other to normal power. In each bathroom connect an un-switched fixture over
the sink to the emergency system; avoid using any fixtures located by the door. Each
mechanical and electrical room should have one or more fixtures connected to the
emergency system. These fixtures should be controlled by a switch with a pilot lit
handle located closest to the door buck where the space is entered.

9. Lighting Controls

In general, lighting controls should be considered for energy requirements and to meet dimming
requirements. The Designer should locate the lighting properly so as to not create needless
maintenance, under-use of fixtures, or unreasonably high initial or life cycle costs. Based on
these criteria, the University has identified several areas where controls have been successfully
incorporated into the design.

A. Dimming Controls typically suggested, at a minimum, in the following spaces:

1. Classrooms (See section 2.3)
2. Audio/ Visual areas
3. Dining Halls and other large gathering spaces

B. Occupancy Sensors

1. Typically occupancy sensors will be located, at a minimum, in Restrooms, Offices,
Classrooms, Hallways, Laboratories, Library book stacks, and Locker Rooms. Review
these and any other locations with Project Team. Include manual override feature for
offices and classrooms.
2. Sensors will activate the lighting by a person taking a 1/2 step or the turning of a page.
Contractor will be required to adjust the initial start-up of each sensor. Light shall
remain lit for 15 minutes after occupant has left (30 mins for fluorescent bulb).

C. Daylight Requirements

1. Designer to review with Design Team when and where daylight sensors can be used.
2. Daylighting will be utilized as a primary light source in all new buildings for both
energy savings as well as improved indoor environmental quality. Project specific
Daylighting Coverage Goals are outlined in Section 3.3.7 (Energy Guidelines).


contractor. Designer shall verify all branch circuiting (lighting and power) has been shown in its
entirety including conduit runs, number of wires in each conduit and panel/circuit numbers.


Designed will verify during these regular meetings that the contractor is maintaining record


11. Requirements for Spare Lamps

10% of the total number of lamps in proportion with the various types shall be provided for spare
storage. Location will be determined by the Project Manager. Included with this submittal shall
be a written list of fixture descriptions and their corresponding lamp type. This shall be
supplemented with a copy of the approved light fixture schedule with respective room numbers
designated for each fixture type.

END OF DOCUMENT

3.6 Utility Guidelines

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.6 Utilities - page 1

1. Introduction

The Universitys Facilities Engineering Department holds the responsibility for administering
and planning the utility systems and infrastructure for the Campus. Utilities that can be provided
by the University include steam and condensate, chilled water, pressurized air (localized areas),
electric power, emergency power from regional generators, storm drainage, and fire protection
from regional fire pumps. Voice and data communication is provided by Princeton Universitys
Office of Information Technologies. A summary of service requirements for utilities is provided
as an attachment to this section. Planning for utility requirements to support projects must start
in the programming stages to insure the work is coordinated with ongoing projects and there is
adequate capacity to support the project.

The Campus has its own telephone and computer communication systems.

Designers must contact the Facilities Engineering Department during the Programming or
Schematic Design phases to review all project utility interconnects. Applications for tie-ins to all
non-University owned utilities will flow through the Utility Coordinator. The Designer is
expected to assist Facilities Engineering with any required project data, load calculations or site
conditions effecting such applications.

2. Contacts


B. Manager, Civil Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5471

C. Landscape Project Manager 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-8338

D. Director of Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5472

E. Energy Plant Manager MacMillan Building, 609-258-3966

F. Manager, Electrical Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5475

G. Manager, Hardware Support, OIT 171 Broadmead, 609-258-6042

http://www.princeton.edu/facilities/info/dept/design_construction/ PDF

A. Utility Mark-out for Existing Conditions Survey Procedure Appendix 3.6-1

B. Utility Mark-out Procedures for Excavation Appendix 3.6-2

C. Maximum Burial Depth for Utility Point of Entry Appendix 3.6-3

4. Code References


B. ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power Piping

C. ANSI/ASME PTC 25.3 Safety & Relief Valves

D. National Electric Code
PS-12







Team.

appendices.

See Matrix at end of this section.

Additional requirements for specific areas of documentation are as follows:

Key Map X X X X
Vicinity Map X X X X
Existing Conditions Survey X X X X
Site Utilities Plan X X X X
Preliminary Site Plan X
Overall Site Plan X X X
Coord. Planting/Utility Plan X X X
Demolition and Removals Plan X X X
Grading Plan X X X
Site Lighting Plan X X X
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control X X X
Construction Details X X X
Fire Protection Site Plan X X


The Designer shall meet with Project Manager, Manager, Civil Engineering, Energy Plant
Manager, Director of Engineering to ascertain the type of building(s) and the anticipated utility
demands.

During programming and preliminary design and design development the Designer is to consult
with the Project Manager, Manager, Civil Engineering, Energy Plant Manager, and Director of
Engineering.

Existing Conditions mark out procedure is as follows:
If there is a need for existing utility mark-out during the design phase, the A/E may contact the
Landscape Project Manager who will coordinate through the Facilities Manager, Civil
Engineering to have the utilities staked out. Refer to Appendix 3.6-1 for additional information.

Excavation mark out procedure is as follows:
Princeton University is registered with the State of New J ersey One-Call System. All
contractors prior to excavation on any University project shall contact New J ersey One-Call
System at, 1-800-272-1000. Refer to Appendix section 3.6.-2 for additional information.

7. Positional and Tolerance Requirements for Existing Conditions Surveys

At the beginning of a project the existing conditions survey should be started early in the process
and shall be completed by the of schematic design submission. All existing conditions surveys
indicating the location of Surface Utilities or surface accessible indications of underground
utilities (i.e. Manholes, valves, inverts within manholes, vents, etc.) must locate the utilities to
within 0.01 of a foot, horizontal and vertical.

It is understood that the underground utilities without visible surface structures are not able to be
located at this accuracy at the time of a survey, unless trench or other means of excavation is at
time of survey. Where subsurface utilities are not exposed for location, industry standards for
location are acceptable. The Manager, Civil Engineering is to be notified of any discrepancies
discovered between the field survey and the University base map.

However, if a trench or other excavation is planned during the course of a project, it is expected
that the actual location of subsurface utilities will be obtained and included in subsequent
revisions of the plans.


As early as possible in the programming stage, the Designer is to produce sufficient
documentation to allow for utility system planning and interconnection with the existing
infrastructure. This documentation will include, as a minimum:

A. Provide a table indicating building peak, average, and minimum utility demands
including: electric demand in kW, steam flow in M#/hr, chilled water flow rate in gallons
per minute, and total chilled water capacity in tons, firewater and domestic water flows.
Generally there are two water service entrances per building one for domestic water and
one for fire protection water.

B. Project to plan for exterior water service meter pit on all buildings.

C. Anticipated annual building energy use. (steam, electric and chilled water)

D. Building location and footprint.

E. During preliminary design, a drawing conveying all utility interface points and a table
listing required capacities at the building envelope shall be submitted.

F. Provide invert elevations of all gravity drain piping especially foundations and exterior
below grade stairs.

G. Designer may be required to calculate sewage flow requirement needed for sewer
connection permit. Check with Project Manager.


The Facilities Engineering Department typically performs the installation of most campus
utilities. This shall be confirmed during preliminary design. Requirements for design
services shall evolve from this meeting.

A. All tie-in points for utilities shall be coordinated with Facilities Engineering Department.

B. Indicate on Documents all connections to Building. i.e., direct burial, tunnel, etc.

C. Special attention should be paid to preserve any geodetic monuments. See section 2.9 Site
Planning, item 16.


A. All points of interface with campus utility infrastructure must be documented on the
related building Drawings and schedules. Confer with Facilities Engineering at closeout
for delivery of reviewed as-built site plans to facilitate updating University utility maps.
This shall include but not be limited to: all utilities (including phone & data) enter
building (location & shutoffs, etc.), area draining, outdoor irrigation layout and controls
location. Site plans to be transmitted in both pdf and AutoCAD format.

B. The table listing all campus utility interface points and required capacities at the building
envelope shall be updated with other project Drawings.


END OF DOCUMENT

R
e
l
e
a
s
e

9
.
0

(
M
a
r
c
h

2
0
1
2
)

P
r
i
n
c
e
t
o
n

U
n
i
v
e
r
s
i
t
y

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s

D
e
p
a
r
t
m
e
n
t

D
e
s
i
g
n

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s

M
a
n
u
a
l

3
.
6

U
t
i
l
i
t
i
e
s

-

p
a
g
e

5

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
M
E
N
T
S

F
O
R

U
N
D
E
R
G
R
O
U
N
D

U
T
I
L
I
T
I
E
S

S
T
E
A
M

C
O
N
D
E
N
S
.

C
H
I
L
L
E
D

W
A
T
E
R

D
O
M
E
S
T
I
C

W
A
T
E
R

F
I
R
E

P
R
O
T
E
C
T
I
O
N

E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C

O
F
F

C
A
M
P
U
S

E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C

O
N
-
C
A
M
P
U
S

C
O
G
E
N

O
w
n
e
r
s
h
i
p

P
U

P
U

P
U

N
J

A
M
E
R
I
C
A
N

W
A
T
E
R

N
J

A
M
E
R
I
C
A
N

W
A
T
E
R
/
P
U

P
S
E
&
G

P
U

D
e
s
i
g
n

R
e
s
p
o
n
s
i
b
i
l
i
t
y

P
U

P
U

P
U

P
U
/
A
E

P
U
/
A
E

P
U
/
A
E

P
U

D
e
m
a
n
d

C
a
l
c
s
.

b
y

A
/
E

A
/
E

A
/
E

A
/
E

A
/
E

A
E

A
/
E

P
o
i
n
t

o
f

I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

I
N
T
E
R
I
O
R

I
N
T
E
R
I
O
R

I
N
T
E
R
I
O
R

E
X
T
.

I
N
T
E
R
I
O
R

R
E
V
I
E
W

I
N
T
E
R
I
O
R

P
e
r
m
i
t

o
r

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

R
e
q
u
i
r
e
m
e
n
t

N
O

N
O

N
O

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

R
e
d
u
n
d
a
n
c
y

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

Y
E
S

E
x
i
s
t
i
n
g

u
/
g

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

o
n

F
i
l
e
?

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

N
O

Y
E
S

E
M
E
R
G
E
N
C
Y

E
L
E
C
T
R
I
C

S
E
W
E
R

S
A
N
I
T
A
R
Y

S
E
W
E
R

S
T
O
R
M

G
A
S

D
A
T
A

O
I
T

D
A
T
A

V
O
I
C
E

D
A
T
A

A
T
C

D
A
T
A

S
E
C
U
R
I
T
Y

O
w
n
e
r
s
h
i
p

P
U

P
S
O
C
/
P
U

M
U
N
I
C
I
P
A
L
I
T
Y
/
P
U

P
S
E
&
G

P
U

P
U
/

V
E
R
I
Z
O
N

P
U

P
U

D
e
s
i
g
n

R
e
s
p
o
n
s
i
b
i
l
i
t
y

P
U

P
U

P
U

P
U

P
U

P
U

P
U

P
U

D
e
m
a
n
d

C
a
l
c
s
.

b
y

P
U

P
U

C
O
N
S
U
L
T
A
N
T

P
U

C
O
N
S
U
L
T
A
N
T

A
/
E

N
/
A

N
/
A

N
/
A

N
/
A

P
o
i
n
t

o
f

I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

I
N
T
.

E
X
T
.

E
X
T
.

E
X
T
.

I
N
T
.

I
N
T
.

I
N
T
.

I
N
T
.

P
e
r
m
i
t

o
r

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

R
e
q
u
i
r
e
m
e
n
t

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

R
e
d
u
n
d
a
n
c
y

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

N
O

E
x
i
s
t
i
n
g

u
/
g

L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

o
n

F
i
l
e
?

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

Y
E
S

N
O

R
E
V
I
E
W

R
E
V
I
E
W

R
E
V
I
E
W

3.7 Fire Suppression System Sprinklers and Standpipes

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.7 FP - Sprinkler - page 1

1. Introduction

Princeton University is increasing the number and quality of fire suppression systems throughout
its campus. In addition to the benefits derived from sprinkler system installation in new
construction, the University is likewise upgrading its firecode compliance through similar
installations in renovation projects. The University Code Analyst maintains a record of all
NJ UCC Firecode compliancy records for each building (see Appendix D).The Designer is
encouraged to incorporate the opportunity to upgrade the firecode compliancy of each project by
considering full fire suppression during design

The requirement for standpipes in dormitories is addressed by the referenced codes of the UCC
(Uniform Construction Code) and UFC (Uniform Fire Code).

The University has regional fire pumps to serve dedicated fire mains on campus to various
buildings. Consult with the Director of Engineering and Code Analyst for water service location.

2. Contacts



C. Facilities Site Protection Manager 306 Alexander, 609-258-5270

D. Facilities Site Protection Supervisor 306 Alexander, 609-258-8132

E. Director of Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5472

F. University Fire Marshall 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-6805

G. Manager Underground Services New J ersey American Water, 908-301-3422

3. Index of Reference
PDF
A. Application for Domestic Water Appendix 3.7-1

B. Application for Fire Service Appendix 3.7-2

C. Isometric Riser Diagram for Appendix 3.7-3
Sprinkler System from a Private Main

D. Environmental Safety Risk
Management Master Plan, 2002 Consult Project Manager

4. Code References


B. IBC (International Building Code), NJ Edition

C. NFPA 24 Private Fire Service Mains

D. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems

E. NFPA 13D Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One- and Two-Family Dwellings and
Manufactured Homes

F. NFPA 13R Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies Up to and
Including Four Stories in Height

G. NFPA 14 Standpipe and Hose Systems

H. NFPA 20 Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection







Team.

appendices.


During pre schematic design the Designer is to consult with the Project Manager, Universitys
Code Analyst and University Fire Marshall to define code strategies and to discuss any code
interpretations affecting the project. The Designer is to review system requirements with the
Project Manager and research existing infrastructure and capacities near the project area prior to
laying out the new system.

The Designer, with the Project Manager, is to request from the Code Analyst any available
hydrant or pump test data. In the absence of such data, the Designer shall request that the water
PS-25
utility, New J ersey American Water test hydrants in the project vicinity to obtain the flow test
data needed to design the system.

In early review with the Project Manager and the University Code Analyst, a decision will be
reached whether to proceed with a proprietary design, including full hydraulic calculations,
design, and dimensioned layout of the system, or whether a performance specification will be
used for the project. This shall be determined prior to establishing the Design Fee. The
preference of the University is to have the designer provide a fully researched and documented
design. Failure to confirm the type of design with the Project Manager will mean that it
should be a proprietary design by default.

In consultation with the Project Manager and Code Analyst, the Designer is to determine the type
of sprinkler system to be used in the building or part of a building. Depending on the use of a
building or spaces within the building the following systems might be used:

A. Wet Pipe System
B. Dry Pipe System
C. Preaction System
D. Deluge System (see following Standards Section for special suppression)
E. Standpipes

When Pre-action or Deluge Systems are selected for use in buildings equipped with standard
University addressable fire alarm systems (Simplex), the initiating devices and related
components shall be the same manufacturer and Model as the building system, unless otherwise
directed by the Site Protection Group. Release Modules, UL Listed for the specific operations
designed, shall be used in lieu of packaged systems when possible.

The Designer, with the Project Manager and Code Analyst, must also determine whether
additional suppression methods or equipment is necessary for the project; these may include:

A. Wet Standpipe System
B. Dry/Manual Standpipe System
C. Fire Department Connection
D. Fire Pump

To provide some guidance on this issue, the intent will be to keep standpipes in all buildings that
have standpipes before a renovation. Those buildings that do not have a pre-existing standpipe
can be evaluated on a case-by-case basis with the understanding that standpipes are preferred but
might not be required. The Director of Office of Design and Construction or the Vice President
for Facilities in conjunction with the Code Analyst will make the final decision.

All Dormitory standpipes will be dry and charged using a post indicator valve located near the
fire department connection to prevent unauthorized use and/or vandalism. The sprinkler and
standpipe systems shall be designed so the fire department can pump in to both systems through
the F.D.C. (fire department connection) independent of the PIV being open. A Variation is
required from the Authority Having J urisdiction (AHJ ) to do this as a matter of protocol.


Along with the specifications, the Designer shall produce sufficient documentation for a code
review of the suppression project and for contract bidding of work. If a proprietary design is the
approach chosen by the University, the documentation will include, as a minimum:

Site Plan for utility conn &
PIV locations
X X X
Floor Plans total zoning
package
X

Floor Plans device
locations

X X
Riser Diagram X X
Specifications X X
Floor Plans dimensioned
piping routes

X
Hydraulic Calculation X
Details alarm equip conn &
mounting

X
Hanger locations X
Seismic Restraint details X

The Designer shall coordinate reflected ceiling plans with all trades. All plans,
specifications, hydraulic calculations, shop drawings, etc. shall be signed and sealed by a
professional Engineer or Architect licensed in New J ersey. All contractor prepared
documents and permit applications shall bear the license and certification number of the
Contractor.


A. General Approach

1. Construction Permits are required for all work unless specifically excluded by Section
5:23-2.7, or other Section of the State Uniform Fire Code (UCC).

2. Amended Construction Permits are required for all work not installed per the
approved plans released by the Authority Having J urisdiction

3. Refer to Section 1.4 of this Standard, Regulatory Agencies, for the administrative
requirements of System Installation and Performance.

4. All work and installation of fire protection and alarm systems shall be performed by
Contractors licensed and certified by the state of New J ersey DCA.

5. All sprinkler system components shall be UL listed in accordance with NFPA
Sprinkler Requirements.

6. Sprinkler piping is to be concealed where possible in finished areas.

7. In areas with finished ceilings, use concealed pendant heads, unless otherwise
approved by the Project Manager in conjunction with the Code Analyst. Typically,
provide factory-finished heads of a color to match ceiling finish.

8. When sidewall sprinklers are used, flush heads are required for exposed installations.
Concealed (flat cover) sidewall heads shall be used in finished walls and soffits unless
otherwise approved by the Project Manager in conjunction with the Code Analyst.
Consult with University Code Analyst for location and types of sprinkler heads.

9. Heat trace is generally not preferred. Any heat trace proposed for the project is to be
reviewed and approved by the University Code Analyst, Facilities Site Protection
Manger and the Facilities Site Protection Supervisor.

10. Install dry pipe valves in basement or lowest level of the building with proper means
for drainage, unless not physically practical (as confirmed by the Facilities Site
Protection Group).

11. Install PIVs for Private Fire Mains. The PIV shall be a lockable control valve, or a
OS& Y valve with a Tamper Switch in a pit and installed in accordance with NFPA
24.

12. Provide additional sprinkler coverage, as required, in areas obstructed by surface
mounted equipment, i.e. lights, projection screens, fan coil units, etc.

13. Air compressors need to fully charge the system within 30 minutes.

14. For Fire pumps, the straight length of pipe into the suction of the pump, must be 10
times the diameter of the pipe.

15. Check valves are to be installed on feeds to new building fire protection systems,
especially when fed from a fire pump that supplies more than one (1) building.

B. Piping

1. The following types of piping are acceptable for use:
a) Schedule 40 Steel, screwed or grooved; galvanized for exterior
applications, dry and pre-action systems as well as drains in wet systems;
b) Type K or L copper (for underground, type K only);
c) Schedule 40 CPVC (with University Code Analyst and Facilities Site
Protection Supervisor approval prior to design);
d) Cement-lined Ductile Iron (for underground use only).

2. Drain lines, inspectors test valves, and fire pump test headers for sprinkler systems
are to be piped to the exterior to a location approved by the University Facilities Site
Protection Manager and Facilities Site Protection Supervisor.

3. Drain valves, control valves and inspectors test valves are to be readily accessible for
maintenance and test personnel: valves are to be accessible from floor level (not to
exceed 7-0 A.F.F.) and are not to be blocked by piping, fixtures, ductwork, or the
like. Review proposed locations with University Facilities Site Protection Manager
and Facilities Site Protection Supervisor prior to beginning system installation.

4. Adjustable drop nipples shall be UL or FM approved.

5. Flexible drop assemblies to have a rating of 200 psi.

C. Heads

1. Sprinkler heads are to be Bellville spring seal type, such as those manufactured by
Viking or equal. Sprinkler heads relying on O-rings for seal are NOT to be used.

2. Concealed pendant heads are to be used in finished ceilings.

3. Concealed sidewall heads are to be used in finished walls and soffits.

4. Listed sprinkler head cages shall be installed for all heads mounted 7 or lower or
subject to mechanical damage.

D. Valves

1. Control valves shall be equipped with a port to monitor street side of system. Valves
to be by Kennedy (OS&Y) and Kennedy for butterfly valves.

2. Double-check valve and RPZ/backflow preventers are to be by Ames.

3. Dry system activation valves are to be by Viking or Victaulic.

4. Alarm check valves are to be by Viking or Victaulic.

5. PIVs shall be Kennedy, lockable, with no supervisory provisions.

E. Flow Indicators and Supervisory Devices

Flow and tamper switches and any additional supervisory devices are to be manufactured
by Potter.

All flow and Supervisory devices shall initiate a building alarm, and report the condition
to the Public Safety Dispatch Desk through the building fire alarm system-signaling unit.
(Simplex).

F. Inspectors Test and Drain

Drain shall be AGF model 1000. Install a valve at the lower end of the main line to
remove air from system.

G. Standpipes

1. Include post-indicator valve on all manual dry systems for all R2 Dormitory Projects.

2. Install a locking device on exterior valve (not a tamper switch).

3. At entry point, install OS&Y valve with an auxiliary port for testing; provide 1/2
ball valve with capped outlet on test port.

4. For Manually Dry Standpipes: Note that if piping is concealed in building it must be
visually accessible for inspection (by mirror and light at the least). Plan and provide
access doors with the appropriate fire resistance rating in building finishes as
necessary to provide for inspection.

5. Provide valves at the base of risers. All valves must be accessible (public areas) and
must drain to exterior of building at grade level. All drain valve location must be
reviewed.

H. Backflow Preventer

1. Ames Silver Bullet

2. When chemical treatment is utilized, an Ames 4000 RPZ backflow preventer shall be
installed with valves provide drain line to closest floor drain.

I. Fire Department Connections (F.D.C.)

1. Guidelines require that fire department connection be within fifty feet of a fire
hydrant, and outside the exterior collapse zone of the building served. After
determining preferred location, review location with the local Fire Official, and obtain
approval.

2. Pipe threads for connection of fire department equipment shall be NST (National
Standard Thread)

3. All connections to be 5 Storz large diameter hose outlets. Supply a sleeve over
piping to match the head (brass/chrome) as well as an identification sign.

4. The F.D.C. shall be UL listed.

J . Air Compressors

1. For dry and pre-action systems, air compressors are to be by General unless otherwise
directed by the University Facilities Site Protection Manager.

K. Microbiological Influenced Corrosion (MIC) Treatment

1. MIC chemical treatment shall be installed as directed by the Site Protection Group.
The SPG shall determine the manufacturer of the chemical treatment system to be
used.

9. Requirements for Suppression System Testing

The system is to be ready for testing prior to scheduling a test with the local enforcement agency.
A pre-test is to be conducted prior to scheduling the official test for approval. The system shall
be ready for inspection.

The procedure for testing shall be followed closely in accordance with NFPA 13. A
Representative(s) of the University Facilities Site Protection Group shall be present for the
hydrostatic and acceptance tests of the system, and the local Fire Subcode Inspector.

The contractor will be responsible for the acceptance test for the local enforcing agency, and for
any remedial work and re-testing required. Contractor is responsible for draining systems as
needed for test or repair, and for recharging system so they are left in operating condition.
Hydraulic calculation placards shall be installed at main sprinkler risers prior to acceptance
testing.


The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built Drawings prepared by the Fire
Suppression Contractor.

Designer will verify during these regular meetings that the Contractor is maintaining record

The as-builts are to include the following as a minimum: layout plan complete with all other
system interfaces and all components, riser Diagram, equipment schedule, hydraulic calculations,
etc.

The University Project Manager is responsible for distributing copies of the as-builts to the
appropriate University representatives for review prior to project closeout. In addition to posting
of all as-built documents to Centric Project, a hard copy and electronic copy (CD) shall be
provided to the Facilities Mechanicl System Coordinator for Life Safety and Security.


11. Requirements for Spare Parts

A spare head cabinet(s) is to be provided near the entry point of the sprinkler system to be
determined by the University Facilities Site Protection Group. A minimum of six replacement
heads, or each type used in the system, are required to be provided with the cabinet. The proper
sprinkler head wrench(s) for replacement of heads will be required. Include spare part
requirements in all specifications.

When dry heads are installed and there are more than three (3) pieces of the same length, the
Contractor should provide a spare head to match.

END OF DOCUMENT
3.8 Fire Suppression System - Chemicals

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.8 FP - Chemical - page 1
1. Introduction

Fire suppression chemical installations today range from protecting rare book collections in
Firestone Library and the painting storage rooms in the Art Museum, to providing life safety in
more typical locations such as an exhaust hood in a Dining Services food preparation area.

Dormitory food preparation areas require discussion of the requirements for hood suppression at
cooking sources. Generally, the hood suppression requirement is a function of the type of usages
programmed for the dormitory kitchen considered. This discussion must occur in conjunction
with the Housing Office and University Code Analyst.

Chemical fire suppression systems also include hand-held extinguishers, distributed in buildings.
Note that the local fire code official has jurisdiction regarding the placement of fire
extinguishers.

2. Contacts



C. Facilities Mechanical Systems Coordinator,
Life Safety & Security 306 Alexander Street, 609-258-3659

D. Facilities Site Protection Supervisor 306 Alexander Street, 609-258-8132

E. Director of Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5472

F. University Fire Marshall 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-6805

G. University Safety Engineer Office of Env. Health and Safety, 609-258-5849

PDF
A. Environmental Safety & Risk
Management (ESRM) See Project Manager

B. Princeton Fire Extinguisher Use Matrix Appendix 3.8-2

4. Code References





E. IBC (International Building Code)

F. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers

G. NFPA 11A - Medium- and High-Expansion Foam Systems

H. NFPA 12 - Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems

I. NFPA 12A - Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems

J . NFPA 15 - Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection

K. NFPA 16 - Installation of Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems

L. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations

M. NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

N. UL 300 - Kitchen Systems







Team.

appendices.


During pre schematic design the suppression Designer is to consult with the Project Manager,
Universitys Code Analyst and University Fire Marshall to define code strategies and to discuss
any code interpretations affecting the project. The Designer is to review system requirements
PS-25
with the Project Manager and research existing infrastructure and related systems near the project
area prior to laying out the new system.

In early review with the Project Manager and the University Code Analyst, a decision will be
reached whether to proceed with a proprietary design, including full chemical calculation, design,
and dimensioned layout of the system, or whether a performance specification will be used for
the project. This shall be determined prior to establishing the Design Fee. The preference of the
University is to have the designer provide a fully researched and documented design. Failure to
confirm the type of design with the Project Manager will mean that it shall be a
proprietary design by default.

When a Clean Agent Suppression System is selected for use in buildings equipped with standard
University addressable fire alarm systems (Simplex), the initiating device shall be the same
manufacturer and model as the building system. Release modules, UL Listed for the specific
operations designed, shall be used in lieu of packaged systems when possible. The actuator for
releasing the Clean Agent suppressant shall be a solenoid type, compatible and listed for use with
the building fire alarm system Releasing Module, and capable of reuse after reset.

Kitchen Hood Suppressions Systems shall be UL Listed, and designed to provide suppression
commensurate with the type of cooking proposed. The system shall be equipped with a
proprietary control panel from the manufacturer, and shall be interconnected to the main building
fire alarm panel (Simplex), when available. In all cases, the system shall be compliant with State
Uniform Construction Code.

In consultation with the Project Manager, University Code Analyst, Facilities Site Protection
Manager, Facilities Site Protection Supervisor, and the Designer is to determine the type of
suppression system to be used in the application. Depending on the use of a building or spaces
within the building the following systems might be used:

A. Carbon Dioxide Gas (for renewal of existing systems)
B. Halon 1301 Gas (for renewal of existing systems)
C. Halon 1211 Gas (for renewal of existing systems)
D. FM 200, Inergen, or the FE line of clean agent fire extinguishers (laser labs)
E. Dry Chemical/Ansul (kitchen hoods and some labs)
F. Wet chemical range hood systems
G. Water misting systems
H. Hand-held extinguishers (in general use)
I. Additional specialty suppression systems not noted (i.e. chemical deflagration systems)

The Designer, with the Project Manager, must also determine whether additional suppression
methods or equipment is necessary for the application or the particular project.


Along with the specifications, the Designer shall produce sufficient documentation for a code
review of the suppression project and for contract bidding of work. If a proprietary design is the
approach chosen by the University, the documentation will include, as a minimum:


Required Documentation Pre SD SD DD 50% CD 85% CD
Code Analyst Meeting X
Site Plan for utility conn &
PIV locations

X X X
Floor Plans device
locations

X X
Fire Extinguisher Cabinet
Locations

X X
Specifications X X
Sequence of Operation for
Clean Agent

X X

Floor Plans dimensioned
piping routes

X
Hydraulic Calculation X
Details alarm equip conn &
mounting

X
Hanger locations X
Seismic Restraint details X

The Designer shall coordinate reflected ceiling plans with all trades. All plans, specifications,
hydraulic calculations, shop drawings, etc. shall be signed and sealed by a professional Engineer
or Architect licensed in New J ersey. All contractor prepared documents and permit applications
shall bear the license and certification number of the Contractor


A. General Approach
1. Construction Permits are required for all work unless specifically excluded by Section
5:23-2.7, or other Section of the State Uniform Fire Code (UCC).

2. Amended Construction Permits are required for all work not installed per the approved
plans released by the Authority Having J urisdiction

3. Refer to Section 1.4 of this Standard, Regulatory Agencies, for the administrative
requirements of System Installation and Performance.

4. All work and installation of fire protection and alarm systems shall be performed by
Contractors licensed and certified by the state of New J ersey DCA.

5. UL listed systems and components are to be used.

6. Pre-engineered listed systems shall be utilized when possible, e.g., listed kitchen hood
used in conjunction with make-up air unit tested as part of manufacturers pre-
engineered system.

7. Complete system is to include all options, e.g., breathing apparatus for CO2
systems; seals, HVAC interlocks, dampers and controls, purge systems, alarm tie-ins,
etc. for systems as applicable.

B. Piping
The following types of piping are acceptable for use:

1. Schedule 40 Steel, screwed or grooved (only if approved and must be listed);
galvanized for exterior applications and kitchens;

2. Cleanable surface within hood and exposed in kitchen: stainless steel or chromed.
(NSF approved)

C. Heads
1. Match the UL listed system

D. Valves
1. Control valves - Milwaukee with tamper switch

E. Tanks
1. All clean agent tanks shall be fitted with liquid level indicators. If agent stored in tank
prohibits the use of liquid level indicators, provide and alternative means of measuring
agent quantity (other than weighing).

F. Supervisory Devices
Supervisory devices or shut off valves are to be manufactured by Milwaukee (shut-off
tamper combination). If there is an over-riding reason not to use the preferred
manufacturer, Designer will review requirements with University Code Analyst.

G. Supervision and Reportability
Suppression systems shall be tied into the building fire alarm system panel (Simplex) and
will report to the Universitys proprietary system. In a building that has no fire alarm
panel, one shall be designed unless in the opinion of the University Code Analyst a panel
is not required. In addition, shunt trip devices may be required to disable other
surrounding electric appliances when the suppression system activates. Shunt trip
breakers shall be designed to disable only associated devices under kitchen hood, and not
other equipment in the space.

9. Requirements for Suppression System Testing

The system is to be ready for testing prior to the suppression contractors scheduling of a test
with the local enforcement agency. A pre-test is to be conducted prior to bringing code official
on site for testing, so that system is leak-free and otherwise ready for inspection.
The procedure for testing shall be followed closely in accordance NFPA. Representatives of the
University Facilities Site Protection Group are to be present for the hydrostatic tests of systems.
Project Manager is to be present for any pressure testing of room-sealant systems.

The contractor will be responsible for the acceptance test for the local enforcing agency, and for
any remedial work and re-testing required. Contractor is responsible for draining systems as
needed for test or repair, and for recharging systems so they are left in operating condition.
If suppression system is tied in to building fire alarm system, representatives of the Maintenance
Alarm Shop are to be present.

10. Fire Extinguishers

The New J ersey Uniform Fire Code governs (refer to NFPA 10) the placement of fire
extinguishers in buildings. The Designer should review Fire Code requirements for
extinguishers and carefully plan for them in the project; however, the local Code Official has
jurisdiction regarding placement of extinguishers under the code. Designers should review
proposed locations with the University Code Analyst prior to finalizing plans.

See Appendix 3.8-2 for recommended types of extinguishers for particular uses and locations.

The preference for mounting extinguishers is in cabinets recessed into hallway walls (and in
other required room locations). Cabinet doors shall have glass panels so extinguishers are
visible. If the building is to have standpipes, the preference is to house extinguishers in a
combination extinguisher/standpipe cabinet. Doors without vision panels shall have proper
signage identifying the standpipe and extinguisher.


The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built Drawings prepared by the fire
suppression contractor.


documents.

The as-builts are to include plans, details, sequence of operation of any tie-ins to other systems,
such as fire alarm, electric, plumbing, and HVAC systems.

The University Project Manager is responsible for distributing copies of the as-builts to the
appropriate University representatives for review prior to project closeout. In addition to posting
of all as-built documents to Centric Project, a hard copy and electronic copy (CD) shall be
provided to the Facilities Mechanical System Coordinator for Life Safety and Security.

END OF DOCUMENT
3.10 Heating, Ventilation and
Air Conditioning Systems Design

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.10 HVAC - page 1

1. Introduction

Each Project is assigned a Facilities Engineering representative to track the progress of all
Mechanical design and construction issues. All issues pertaining to system programming,
selection and performance are reviewed with the Facilities Engineering representative. The
Design Engineer is encouraged to initiate and sustain open communications throughout the
Project to achieve that end.

2. Contacts


B. Manager of Mechanical Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-3934

C. Maintenance HVAC Shop Supervisor MacMillan Building, 609-258-3446

D. Director of Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5472

3. Index of Appendices
PDF AutoCAD

A. Pipe Support Detail Appendix 3.10-1 Appendix 3.10-1

B. Building Pipe Entrance Detail Appendix 3.10-2 Appendix 3.10-2

C. Single Steam Coil Piping Detail Appendix 3.10-3 Appendix 3.10-3

D. Single Steam/HWConverter Piping Detail Appendix 3.10-4 Appendix 3.10-4

E. Steam Condensate Pump Detail Appendix 3.10-5 Appendix 3.10-5

F. Flash Tank Detail Appendix 3.10-6 Appendix 3.10-6

G. Parallel Steam PRV Station with
Safety Shut-off Valve (Pneumatic) Appendix 3.10-7 Appendix 3.10-7

H. Chilled Water Coil Piping Schematic Appendix 3.10-8 Appendix 3.10-8

I. Plate and Frame HX Detail Appendix 3.10-9 Appendix 3.10-9

J . Pump Piping Detail Appendix 3.10-10 Appendix 3.10-10

K. Expansion Tank/Make-up
Water/Air Separator Piping Detail Appendix 3.10-11 Appendix 3.10-11

L. VAV Box Detail Appendix 3.10-12 Appendix 3.10-12

M. Hot Water Reheat Coil Detail Appendix 3.10-13 Appendix 3.10-13

N. Multiple Steam Coil Piping Detail Appendix 3.10-14 Appendix 3.10-14

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.10 HVAC- page 2
O. Multiple Steam/Hot
Water Converter Piping Detail Appendix 3.10-15 Appendix 3.10-15

P. Medium Pressure Drip Trap Appendix 3.10-16 Appendix 3.10-16

Q. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Detail Appendix 3.10-17 Appendix 3.10-17

R. Fan Coil Unit Appendix 3.10-18 Appendix 3.10-18

S. Pipe Sleeve Thru Floor Plan Appendix 3.10-19 Appendix 3.10-19

T. Air Handler Filter Appendix 3.10-20 Appendix 3.10-20

U. Pressure Powered Pumps Appendix 3.10-21 Appendix 3.10-21

V. Side Stream Shot Feeder Appendix 3.10-22 Appendix 3.10-22

W. Multiple Room Valence Piping Appendix 3.10-23 Appendix 3.10-23
Schematic Elevation

X. Steel to Copper Connections Appendix 3.10-24 Appendix 3.10-24

Y. Pipe Identification Schedule Requirements Appendix 3.11-25 Appendix 3.10-25
(MS Word)
Z. Commissioning Specifications Appendix 3.3-9 Appendix 3.3-9
(MS Word)
4. Code References


B. International Mechanical Code

C. ASHRAE 62.1 -2007

D. ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard, 2007

E. International Energy Conservation Code


it is required that the project construction documents be submitted to the University for
verification of an internal Tech Team review process thru the Office of Design and
Construction for compliance with University standards. Plans are to be submitted for review at:





Team.

The A/E shall provide timely and coordinated responses to all review comments. The purpose of
the Tech Team review process is to confirm A/E compliance with the current version of the
Facilities Design Standards Manual including each respective section and associated appendices.


The Designer shall meet with the Project Manager and Facilities Engineering to ascertain the
number and types of systems to be installed in the building. A formal process for documenting
this data can be found in the Building Commissioning Standards in Section 3.3 (Energy
Guidelines). Designs must meet the requirements of Section 1.2; Sustainability Guidelines and
Section 3.3; Energy Guidelines.

A. Design Conditions

1. Summer Outdoor 90F/74F (ASHRAE 1%); for critical spaces and labs 89F/78F
(ASHRAE 0.4%)

2. Winter Outdoor 10F (ASHRAE 1%)

3. Indoor Design conditions are 72F (winter) and 75F (summer) for comfort
conditions. The Facilities operation policy is to operate the systems to provide a
minimum of 68F in winter and a maximum of 78F in summer to occupied spaces.
Comfort consideration must be given to envelop radiant effects, as describes by the
mean radiant temperature.

4. Non-laboratory indoor relative humidity shall be maintained within the ASHRAE
recommended thermal comfort zones, roughly between 20% (winter) and 60%
(summer).

5. Laboratories shall be designed to maintain 74F (2 F) with 30% winter and 55%
summer humidity, unless the research program requirements are different. These
differences should be documented in the basis of design records.

6. Design for 60F (Winter) in Mechanical Equipment Rooms and non-occupied space.
Provide mechanical ventilation for these spaces where temperatures may exceed 85F.
Provide ventilation air per ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007. Mechanical Equipment
Room cooling is only provided by exception with the approval of the Facilities
Engineering Project Technical Representative

7. Review and document in Basis of Design the desired NC (decibel ratings) for all
spaces in building or where HVAC equipment is to be placed adjacent to occupied
spaces.

8. Attics shall not be heated without prior approval from Facilities Engineering.

PS-26
B. HVAC Zoning

1. Thermostats Avoid placing thermostats or sensors on outside walls, in direct
sunlight, in the way of potential obstructions such as filing cabinets, or in supply air
path.

2. Dormitories shall be designed to have tenant accessible zone control for each living
unit (i.e. one zone per suite or one zone per room).

3. Offices with similar load profiles on the same exposure, and floor, may be placed on a
common zone as a cost saving measure. Corner offices, however, should be on
separate zones. Review with Engineering.

4. Each Conference Room and Classroom must be unique zones separated from all
surrounding spaces.

C. Considerations for Maintenance

1. Design shall allow for adequate and safe access to all mechanical equipment. Where
appropriate in construction documents, indicate areas to be kept free of obstructions
for service access, including replacement of equipment. Equipment requiring routine
maintenance should preferably be mounted at or near the floor. Consider if rigging is
required and provide adequate path width to building exterior. Equipment in ceilings
should be accessible with an 8-ft. ladder. For heavy equipment mounted above the
floor, provide access for rigging equipment. Where the opportunity arises, install
equipment above hallway ceilings rather than above office or classroom space.
Coordinate work with Architect to provide maintenance access including adequate
access doors and clearances. Where possible consider the use of lay-in ceilings, which
permit greater maintenance access and more flexibility for future system renovations.
Where hard ceilings are required, review access door locations with the Architect &
Engineer

2. Coordinate all MEP design work with structural system early in the design process, to
ensure piping systems are drainable, properly pitched, and that piping and ductwork
offsets are not excessive. Coordinate placement of louvers, plenums, and other
wall/roof penetrations with structural system. The Designer is responsible for
providing a workable MEP design that demonstrates a thorough coordination between
disciplines.

3. Locating of equipment on roofs should be minimized. When it is required, provide
adequate & safe access for maintenance.


Along with the Specifications, the Designer is to produce sufficient documentation to allow for
code review of the HVAC project and for contract bidding of the work.

Specifications shall include the requirements listed in these Design Guidelines and Appendices.
Delete equipment and references not applicable to the project.

The Design documentation will include, as a minimum:

MEP Design Intent
X
MEP Basis of Design
X
Notes & Symbols X X X X
Floor Plans Major Equipment
and Chases

X X X
Floor Plans Mech Rm w/ Piping
and Duct Mains

X X
Floor PlansDuctwork & Dampers X X
Floor PlansPiping X X
One Line Diagrams Air Flow &
Hydronic Piping

X X X
Plan - Utility Connection Points X X
Equipment Schedules X X
Details equipment & piping
Connections

X X
Ventilation Schedule Compliance X
Vertical Sections as required X
Mechanical Specifications X X

Coordination Drawings field produced by Contractor(s) Facilities Engineering Department will
review 3/8 scale Coordination Drawings of all equipment to be installed in Mechanical Rooms.
This will be done as a concurrent Shop Drawing submittal or as part of a Coordination
Meeting(s) which includes University participation.


A. Campus Utilities

1. Campus Chilled Water System

a. General
The campus chilled water plant contains all chillers, distribution pumps,
expansion tank, and chemical treatment equipment. Wherever possible,
use campus chilled water as the preferred method of cooling and
dehumidification.
b. Design Pressure
Available differential pressures vary throughout the campus ranging from
100psi to 10psi at remote buildings. Peak supply pressure varies from
200psig near the plant to 135psig at remote buildings. Return pressures
vary upwards from 100psig at plant. Control valves must be capable of
tight shutoff against 100psig differential. Control valve body ratings to be
250#class where used on plant-chilled water. Use 300 psi class butterfly
valves at building entrance. All other CHW isolation valves may be 150#
rated.


c. Chilled Water Design Temperatures
Equipment using campus chilled water should be selected at 45F entering
water temperature from April through October, 50F from November
through March. Chilled water coils in systems using 100% outside air
should be designed for a minimum of 24 temperature rise. Other chilled
water coils and plate and frame heat exchangers in buildings with
significant air recirculation should be designed for a minimum of 20F
temperature rise (i.e. 45-65).

d. Building Distribution Systems
The use of primary chilled water is generally reserved for air handling
units and plate and frame heat exchangers producing secondary chilled
water. Branch connections to mains shall be made at or above horizontal
midline of piping. The use of booster pumps must be reviewed with
Engineering. Three way valves or uncontrolled flow on primary chilled
water are not permitted. FCI (Flow Control Industries) or Belimo pressure
independent control valves should be used where appropriate. When using
pressure independent valves, do not use circuit setter. Buildings that use
multiple cooling terminal units such as fan coils must use a secondary
chilled water system. Avoid dual temperature piping systems.

e. Design Velocities
Water velocity within occupied areas of buildings should be less than 6
fps. Provide consideration for future extensions of building systems.

2. Campus Steam/Condensate System

a. General
Steam is distributed through a network of low (nominally 15psig) and
medium pressure mains (currently 65-100psig) to most buildings on
campus. Condensate is collected and returned to the Cogeneration Plant.
Utilities are generally installed by Princeton University from exterior up to
house valves inside the building and project work should include
extending from this point. Where project conditions require contractor to
provide exterior utilities, discuss with Facilities Engineering
the details on tunnel design, insulation, inverts, etc.

b. Pressure Regulating Valve Stations
Medium pressure steam entering a building is reduced to low pressure
(between 5 and 15psig) steam for distribution within building. Existing
buildings served only by low-pressure steam mains and remote from plant
may have entering pressures as low as 5psig. PRV station control valves
shall be Leslie model GPK and/or model DDBOY. Contact The Edwin
Elliot Company, [email protected], for specific design criteria. Note
that the preferred method of overpressure protection is a Normally Closed
Safety Shut-off Valve, rather than a relief valve. See details for piping
arrangement.

c. Building Steam/Condensate Distribution Systems
Steam shall be used for preheat coils, hot water converters and
domestic hot water generators. Design pressure entering heat transfer
devices is nominally 2psig. Air unit steam coils in contact with mixed
or outside air, shall be non-freeze type. Mount coils high enough to
permit complete drainage of tubes by gravity thru the trap and to the
condensate receiver! For floor mounted air handling units, this may
require raising the unit off the floor, installing the coils above the floor
of the unit, or providing trenches in Mechanical Room floor. Steam
traps and the equipment they serve must both be within the same room.
Consultant should make sure this is clear on Construction Drawings.
Provide drip traps at all low points in piping. Traps should drain by
gravity to condensate pump sets. Do not design traps to lift. Low-
pressure traps shall be Spirax Sarco F&T model FT-15 with non-
asbestos gaskets. Steam traps for service between 15 and 125 psig
shall be Spirax Sarco F&T model FT-125, Sarco thermodynamic trap
model TD-52, or bucket trap Sarco type B. Discuss with project
Technical Representative the use of Steamguard or Proficient traps in
lieu of F&T and thermostatic traps. Branch connections to steam
mains shall be made at or above horizontal midline of main piping.
Do not provide trap bypasses or double trapping. Engineers shall size
steam traps on Design Documents. For condensate piping systems, use
eccentric reducer as required with bottoms of piping level. Do not mix
gravity returns with pumped returns without review by Facilities
Engineering.

Condensate pumps shall be duplex type Domestic ITT Model CB/CBE
or Skidmore low NPSH type rated for 210F condensate with steel or
cast iron receivers. Do not specify package unit starters for condensate
pumps. Motor starters shall be purchased by Electrical Contractor.
Review with Engineering the possible use of pressure powered pumps
where flooding of pumps is possible (i.e. Basement Mechanical
Rooms) and where medium pressure steam or compressed air is
available. Pressure powered pumps to be Spirax Sarco or Armstromg
with stainless steel check valves. Where steam is used as a pumping
medium, vent must be routed to building exterior. No fluids from any
other source may be introduced to the steam condensate system.
Review the piping arrangement to minimize the potential condensate
contamination scenarios.

Steam vacuum breakers shall be J ohnson Corp. (Three Rivers,
Michigan) stainless steel body, ball and spring with FPT
tapping at inlet. See detail drawing.

Modifications to existing building steam heating systems shall use
steel fin tube convectors and self-contained Macon control valves
where zone control is required. Where feasible, use hot water for
comfort heating.
B. Piping and Piping Accessories

1. Piping Materials

System Piping Material Fitting Material Strainer (stm. Rating)
Hot Water Heating &
Secondary Chilled
Water Systems
2 and smaller
Type L Copper
Sch. 80 Steel
See Note (1)
Wrought copper with 95-
5 solder 125#Cast iron
threaded
Sarco bronze model BT or TBT
Or Cast iron Model IT
Hot Water Heating &
Secondary Chilled
Water Systems
2-1/2 and larger
Sch. 40 Steel

Std. Weight Butt
welded steel

Sarco cast iron Model IT

Low Pressure Steam
2-1/2 and above
Sch. 40 Steel
(Std Weight
12+)
Std. Weight butt welded Sarco Cast iron
Model CI-125
Flanged 125#
Low Pressure Steam
2 and smaller
Sch. 80 Steel 125#Cast iron
Threaded
Sarco Cast iron
Model IT
Medium Pressure
Steam 2-1/2 and
above see note (2)
Sch. 40 Steel
(Std Weight
12+)
Std. Weight butt welded Sarco Cast iron
Flanged 250#
Medium Pressure
Steam 2 and smaller
see note (2)
Sch. 80 Steel 250#Cast iron
Threaded
Sarco Cast iron
250#
Steam Condensate
2-1/2 and larger
Sch. 80 Steel Hvy. Weight butt welded Sarco Cast iron
Model CI-125
Flanged 125#
Steam Condensate
2 and smaller
Sch. 80 Steel 125#Cast iron threaded Sarco Cast iron
Model IT

Primary Chilled Water
2 and smaller
Type L Copper
(preferred)
Sch. 80 Steel
See Note (1)
Wrought copper with 95-
5 solder
250#Malleable iron
threaded
Sarco bronze model
BT or TBT
Sarco Cast iron
Model IT (250#rated)
Primary Chilled Water
2-1/2 and larger
Schedule 40
Steel

Std. Weight butt welded

Sarco Cast steel
Flanged 150#

AC Condensate Type L Copper
or PVC Sch. 40
Copper or Solvent weld
PVC
N/A
Table Notes
(1) Piping shall be type L copper, except where a minor modification to an existing steel piping system is
required. Review with Princeton Engineering.
(2) For projects using steam pressures over 100 psi review with Facilities Engineering

2. Strainers

Use Y type strainers as shown above. Screen shall be stainless steel with mesh size as
follows:
Steam service - .032 perforation (20 mesh)
Hydronic chilled water heating systems and steam condensate service 0.125
perforation

3. Hydronic Piping Systems

Use Amtrol or equal diaphragm type expansion tanks. Provide a Watts series 007
backflow preventer at the makeup water line. Provide isolation valves at all control
valves and equipment requiring maintenance. Layout piping to avoid or minimize air
pockets. Provide and indicate, on contract drawings, sectionalizing valves, including
drains, to isolate areas of main and sub-main piping runs, for servicing work and
future tie-ins, for example at floor take-offs from main. See Appendix 3.10-1 for pipe
support details.

4. Fittings

Where use of dissimilar materials is unavoidable, review with Engineering
Department. Use 150#brass couplings, Victaulic dielectric waterway, or dielectric
flanges. These fittings may be used only in where they are accessible for inspection,
preferably in Mechanical Rooms. Dielectric unions are prohibited. For to 2
diameter branch connections to steel mains use thread-o-lets, or 3000#forged
couplings, welded nipples are not permitted. For steel branch connections 2-1/2
diameter or above, use new tees. Use tees for all copper branch connections. All steel
nipples (6 or less in length) shall be schedule 80. Close nipples are prohibited.
Connections to equipment should be made with unions (up to 2) or flanges (2-1/2
and up).

5. Flange Gaskets

For all steam and steam condensate gaskets, use Flexitallic spiral-bound
temperature-sensitive gaskets or Gar-Lok Flex-Seal. For hydronic service only, use
Klingersil Green Ring, model C-4401.

6. Valves

Provide isolation valves to permit service of equipment without draindown of system.
Use valves at coils, traps, control valves, strainers, etc. Provide isolation valves and
riser drains at the base of each main distribution risers. Provide stem extensions as
required to clear insulation.
Ball valves shall have stainless steel ball and stem, TFE seats.

Butterfly valves shall have gear operator for sizes 6 and above. Provide chain
operators for butterfly valve mounted 10ft. above floor or higher.
Gate valves and plug valves may not be used on any system

Butterfly valves for chilled water at building entrance shall be 300#rated J amesbury
(830L-11-22HBMT or 830L-11-2236ZX) or 300#Adams MAK. Butterfly valves at
Building entrance for medium pressure steam to be 300#Adams MAK. For buildings
on low pressure steam use 150#Adams MAK or J amesbury.

Isolation valves shall be specified in accordance with the following table:

7. Air Vents/Drains

Provide manual ball valve vents and drains (Apollo 70 series stainless ball and stem) at
all local high/low points, and pitch piping towards drains so that system may be
completely drained and purged of air. Provide automatic air vents with ball isolation
valves at major piping risers and elsewhere as necessary. Pipe auto vents with (soft)
copper tubing to suitable sanitary waste connection point. Pipe manual vents clear of
riser insulation. Major drain locations shall have hose adaptors. Automatic air vents
shall be per table below.

System Automatic Air Vent Type
Primary Chilled Water Spiro Therm 300#
Hydronic (other than PCHW)
Systems and Equipment
Spirotherm 150#

8. Pressure Gages

Provide gages where shown on details, with 4 minimum dial. Select gage range to read
near center of range during normal conditions. Provide isolation ball valve at each tap.
Where differential pressure measurement is required, use single gage with isolation
valves on upstream and downstream taps. P&T plugs are not permitted. Gage cocks are
not permitted. Use siphon tubes and snubbers on steam service. Gages are to be visible
from the floor.

9. Thermometers

Provide 5 dial adjustable angle thermometers with stainless steel wells (not brass) at
building entrance and other locations useful for balancing and troubleshooting. See
detail drawings.

System Pipe Sizes 2 and Smaller Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 and Larger
Steam and Condensate Full port ball valve
Apollo 82-100 series,

High performance lug type
butterfly valve
J amesbury 815L-11-22 HBMT
or 815L-11-2236XZ

Primary Chilled Water Conventional port Ball valve
Apollo 70-100/200 series

J amesbury butterfly (as above)
Apollo 88A-100 Series
Heating Hot Water,
Secondary Chilled Water
Conventional port Ball valve
Apollo 70-100/200 series

J amesbury butterfly (as above),
Apollo 88A-100 Series
10. Balancing Valves

Where balancing flowmeters are required, use B&G, Taco or Tour & Anderson circuit
setters. Do not use circuit setters as a positive shutoff device. For larger pipes, a
butterfly valve with memory stop is acceptable as a balancing device, but should have
a second butterfly valve as a shutoff device. Triple duty valves are not permitted.
Circuit setters must be selected to measure flows accurately at the design flow rates. In
some locations low flow circuit setters similar to B & G RF series, or reduced
piping sizes would be required.

11. Control Valves

See Section 3.2 Automatic Temperature Controls

12. Pressure Transmitters

For input to DDC system use Robertson-Halpern for hydronic systems, Modus for air
systems (control), Dwyer 605 (monitoring only).

13. Flowmeters

Steam and Campus Chilled Water flows are to be metered at building utility entrances
and connected to campus BMS. Provide local readout capability. Inline meters shall
have isolation valves. Meter bypass is not required. Meter sizing must be reviewed
with Facilities Engineering. They are typically one size smaller than line size in order
to measure typical flows. The design must allow for the required entry and exit
conditions.

a. Steam Meters
Steam usage shall be metered using EMCO Vortex Shedding Flowmeter
connected to the BMS at the MacMillan Building. Observe
manufacturers installation piping configuration design guidelines. Meter
body to be insulated.

b. Chilled Water Meters
Chilled water shall be metered using Toshiba Magnetic Flowmeters model
LF400 with LF410 (wafer) or LF430 (flanged), Siemens Magnetic
Flowmeter, or Controlatron Ultrasonic Flowmeters. Meters shall be
connected to the BMS at the MacMillan Building.

14. Standard Controls Details

See Section 3.2 (Automatic Temperature Controls) for Design Guidelines.

15. Expansion J oints

Avoid the use of expansion joints. Design piping with sufficient offsets to absorb
expansion. Where their use is unavoidable, review with Engineering and provide
service valves and drain connection.

16. Water Treatment

Flush new piping until water runs clean, remove and clean strainers. Remove
temporary strainers and install new prior to system turn over.

For all new closed loop hydronic systems, water treatment will be (and provided by
our current campus wide sole source vendor, Ondeo Nalco Chemical Company,
subcontracted through the Mechanical Contractor. Water treatment required due to
modifications of existing closed loop hydronic systems will be arranged by Princeton
University. Steam piping does not need to be flushed. When first energized, each
strainer must be blown down. New condensate piping shall be cleaned by flushing
condensate through the receiver tank to drain (8 hour minimum). Provide pot feeders
for new hydronic loops.

C. Mechanical Equipment

1. Equipment Mounting

Floor mounted pumps, heat exchangers and air units shall be installed on 4 high
concrete pad. Steel equipment supports subject to moisture shall be treated with rust
inhibiting paint. Equipment (with moving parts) installed below noise sensitive spaces
shall be floor mounted, not hung. Provide adequate service area around equipment.

2. Pumps

Base mounted pumps shall be B & G series 1510 or Taco. Where vibration isolation is
required, use spring isolators at base and American Boa flex connections on piping.
All pumps shall have mechanical seals. In-line pumps shall be Taco or B&G series 60,
80 or 90. Pumps used on primary chilled water in buildings near the chilled water
plant must have a pressure rating of 250#. B & G PL series may be used for pumps
below hp.

3. Converters

Steam heating hot water service shall be shell and tube by B&G or Taco. Tubes shall
be Cu/Ni. Alternatively, plate and frame heat exchangers may be used.

4. Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers

For Secondary Chilled Water service shall be 304 stainless steel plate, EPDM gaskets,
rated and labeled for minimum 200psig operating pressure when used with Primary
Chilled Water. Review with Engineering the possibility of providing frame space for
future capacity increases. Approved manufacturers are; APV, Mueller, ALFA Laval.
Steam to HW exchangers may be considered where appropriate, to be approved by
Engineering.

5. Electric Heat

The use of electric heat is generally prohibited, but may make economic sense in some
applications. Proposed use must be reviewed with the Facilities Engineering.

6. Fin Tube Convection

For perimeter hot water systems use copper tube, aluminum fin convection units. Use
heavy gauge covers in public spaces and dormitories. Basis of design shall be Vulcan
or Sterling. Runtal steel convection units may also be used. Allow adequate access to
service and control valves. Specify in-place mock-ups for review by Design Team.

7. DX Systems

Piping shall be flare fittings for copper sizes 7/8 and smaller, brazed copper for larger
piping. For systems over 5 tons, provide low ambient control, suction accumulator,
filter dryer, sight glass/moisture indicator, liquid line solenoid valve and refrigerant
service valves. These are typically used when central chilled water is not available.
Provide Energy Star rated products where applicable.

8. Motors

Motors below 1/2hp (in fan coils) shall be 120v single phase. Motors below 1/4hp
shall be PSC type. Motors 1/2hp and above shall be 3 phase, premium efficiency type.
Starters shall be mounted in Motor Control Center where practical. Motors used on
VSD applications must be constructed specifically for that duty and shall be reviewed
by Facilities Engineering. See Electrical Specifications Appendix 3.12-1.

9. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)

VFDs shall be specified by the Electrical Engineer. Review requirement for drive
bypass with Princeton Engineering. See Appendix 3.12-2, as provided by the
Electrical Contractor. The only exception is drives on factory assembled domestic
water pressure booster systems, which may be provided by the Mechanical Contractor.

Where not part of prepackaged unit the Electrical Engineer shall specify. See Section
3.12 and Appendix 3.12-2.

VFDs for mechanical systems may require auxiliary points to control dampers. Only
ABB and Yaskawa are acceptable manufacturers.

10. Fan Coils

Fan Coils for use in occupied spaces shall be selected at low speed, or medium speed if
extra capacity is needed. To minimize noise, fan coils should be ducted and installed
behind an acoustic barrier such as lay-in ceilings or cabinetry. For spaces with NC 35
or lower ratings, use of fan coils will require a mock-up during construction that will
be reviewed by Princeton Engineering. During layout & design, carefully consider
accessibility of components requiring maintenance. Coordinate location with other
trades and expected furniture placement. Controls components, including speed
switches shall be provided by the controls contractor. Provide extended drain pan and
/ or cabinet as needed to permit adequate room for valves and insulation.

11. Valence Units

Valence units shall consist of a heat transfer element, support structure, architectural
enclosure, mounting brackets, stainless steel pan with external closed cell insulation,
valves fittings, and condensate drain connection. Heat transfer element shall consist of
minimum 5/8 copper tubes and 0.10 aluminum fins with minimum spacing of 6 per
inch. The element shall be supported by 12 gauge aluminum members along both sides.
Wall brackets shall not be greater than 12ft. apart. For longer enclosures, an intermediate
cantilever bracket shall be mounted to the outside wall.

The enclosure shall be minimum 0.030 aluminum. Enclosure shall be finished with
semi-gloss baked on enamel, the color and paint to be specified by Princeton. The ceiling
baffle shall be aluminum painted to match the enclosure and designed to fit tight against
the ceiling. The drain fitting shall be connected to a 3/4" schedule 40 PVC drain piping
system with stainless steel clamps. The invert of the drain pipe in the wall must be no
higher than the lowest point of the drain pan. Provide valves, and other hydronic
specialties in piping in accordance with Appendix detail 3.10-23. Acceptable
manufacturer is Sigma Corp.

12. Chilled Beams

Chilled Beams- Active or Passive Beams may be used for areas with light thermal loads.
Supply piping must be monitored and controlled to maintain water temperatures above
ambient dew point. Provide integral condensate drip tray (un-piped) where possible.
Where Chilled Beams are used, mock-up of first installed beam with controls and
insulation in place should be reviewed by Princeton and design team. Support method and
piping connection details must be reviewed with Facilities Engineering early in design.

D. Air Distribution Systems

1. Indoor Air Quality

Comply with latest version of ASHRAE Standard 62. Provide to Princeton
Engineering, backup design assumptions and calculations to verify that design meets
this standard. Design systems to make use of outside air for free cooling where
economically viable. Include airflow measuring stations to monitor and trend outside
air delivery for systems supplying more than 1000 CFM outside air.

2. Humidification

Where humidifiers are used provide stainless steel duct section minimum 2ft. upstream
and 6ft downstream of manifold. (Provide insulated stainless steel access door for
inspection.) Provide duct configuration as recommended by manufacturer for proper
steam absorption. Drain bottom of humidifier duct section, or air unit section by
pitching or cross breaking to drain fitting. Use Armstrong series AM with
modulating control valve operator and temperature switch to prevent operation before
condensate is drained. Do not oversize humidifiers. Humidifier shall not be placed
directly up stream of the fan drive

3. Air Handling Units

Air handling units (nominally over 2,000 cfm) shall be double wall construction, with
internal fan and motor vibration isolation. Belt-drive motors should be mounted on
screw driven adjustable base. Include gasketed doors with large handles spaced for
adequate access for service and controls installation. All power & Control wiring shall
be in conduit or liquid-tight conduit and junction boxes. Exposed wires, cables, and
splices shall not be allowed. For units 20,000 cfm and above specify vapor proof
lighting inside access sections factory wired to an external switch. Include access
sections between coils for inspection and sensor installation. Provide gasketing or
safing of all pipe and conduit penetrations. For belt-drive fans contractor shall furnish
& install fixed pitch sheaves on fans after balancing. All electrical equipment and
wiring inside air handlers shall be supplied in accordance with the NEC for inside
plenum installations. Acceptable manufactures include but are not limited to:

For Laboratory areas:
Ventrol, Ingenia, Air Enterprises, Haakon

For other services:
Carrier 39 series, York Solutions, Trane Climate Changer

4. Dampers

For outside air service shall be low leakage type with vinyl blade edge and stainless
steel spring gasketing at jambs. Provide access doors for inspection and servicing.
Provide damper shaft extensions, including for dampers mounted in air handling units,
as required to mount operators outside of airstream. Duct mounted dampers should be
provided by the Controls Contractor.

5. Coils
a. Chilled Water coils shall have copper tubes 5/8 x 0.030 minimum wall
thickness, 10 row maximum depth, with aluminum fins 0.008 minimum
thickness, mechanically bonded to tubing. Maximum fin density is 12 fpi.
Coil casing shall be stainless steel. Drain pans shall be stainless steel,
pitched to completely drain condensate from pan. Chilled water coils
exposed to mixed or outside air shall be freeze protected by freeze pump
for laboratory, auditorium, or equipment requiring year round cooling.
Freeze pumps to be fed by emergency power. Use dry lay-up system for
other mixed or outside air-cooling coils. See Appendix 3.10-8 for details.
Maximum design coil face velocity shall be 500fpm or lower to provide
for a future air quantity increase.

b. Steam Coils in contact with mixed or outside air shall be non-freeze type
with 1-1/8 O.D. x 0.035 outer tube and 5/8 x 0.025 inner tube with
galvanized casings. Mount coils high enough to permit complete drainage
of tubes by gravity. For floor mounted air handling units, this may require
raising the unit off the floor, installing the coils above the floor of the unit,
or providing trenches in Mechanical Room floor. Steam traps and the
equipment they serve must both be within the same room. Air handlers
and their steam coils must be designed so that the steam trap inlets
are a minimum of 15 below the coil discharge connection.
Condensate piping must pitch from trap outlet continuously towards inlet
of receiver. Consultant should make sure this is clear on Construction
Drawings. Where modulating control of coil discharge is required, use
1/3, 2/3 control valves or Wing coil. Avoid face and bypass
arrangements. Provide adequate space for coil pull. Where appropriate,
consider blenders as an alternative to pre-heat coils.

c. Reheat Coils shall be hot water where possible, with 5/8 x .025 wall and
galvanized casing. Provide access doors to inspect upstream coil face.

6. Air Conditioning Condensate

Shall be piped to storm or grade. Provide sloped drain pans, properly configured drain
traps and low face velocities to prevent carry over from coil face. Consider recovering
condensate for other building uses.

7. Filters

Pre-filters for outside air shall have a minimum (dust spot) efficiency of 35%, similar
to Farr 30/30. Provide bag type final filters, as required to meet project requirements.
Provide adequate access for filter service. In the design documents provide a filter
schedule listing the clean and dirty static pressures for each type of filter.

8. Fans

Provide proper fan orientation, inlet and discharge conditions to avoid problems with
system effect. Direct-drive fans are generally preferred. For belt-drive fans, after air
balancing, Contractor shall install fixed sheaves. Volume control on VAV systems
shall be accomplished by using variable speed motor drives.

9. Air Mixing

Where air mixing is required, provide air blenders or demonstrate to Facilities
Engineering that inlet geometry allows for thorough air mixing before contacting coils.

10. Ductwork

Ductwork shall be constructed per latest version of applicable SMACNA duct design
guidelines. All ductwork shall be seal class A. For work in occupied buildings, field
applied sealants must be free of noxious fumes (water based). Design Drawings must
indicate duct pressure classifications and leakage class. Galvanized duct thickness
shall be as prescribed by SMACNA, except 24 gage shall be the minimum thickness
permitted. For moisture laden air (laundry, shower, etc. exhaust) use aluminum grills
and registers, aluminum or stainless steel duct, pitched to drain condensate. For
dishwasher exhaust use stainless steel. Discuss requirements for duct testing with
Facilities Engineering.

11. Noise Control

The use of duct liner shall be minimized and reviewed by Princeton Engineering.
Where used for noise control, it should be double wall construction with perforated
internal liner, or where double wall construction is not possible, the lined duct should
be considered to be an item requiring maintenance. Liner shall have mold resistant
acrylic coating on airstream side. Use metal nosings to protect upstream edges of
liner. Provide access doors upstream of all reheat coils, fan-powered boxes, and VAV
boxes to permit inspection and cleaning of coils. Sound traps shall be sized for a
maximum velocity of 1200fpm.

Provide sound data by octive band readings for all air handling units over 3,000 CFM.
Sound data to be taken at 5 feet from discharge and entrance of the air handling unit.
If the dBA of the AHU is over 80 select the next larger AHU with octive band ratings.

Select outlet velocities and fan tip speed for quiet operation. Higher outler velocity
and satic pressure result in increases sound output . Balance cost and space against
sound and efficiency.

12. Balancing Dampers

Balancing dampers shall be provided at all branch take-offs rather than at diffusers to
minimize noise.

13. Fire Dampers / Fire & Smoke Dampers

Use style B dampers (blades out of airstream) wherever possible. Provide access doors
for inspection and replacement of links. The use of Fire & Smoke Dampers should be
minimized. Review quantity & location of Fire & Smoke Dampers with Facilities
Engineering and Code Consultant.

14. Heat Recovery

For large conditioned exhaust airflows, examine the feasibility of providing heat
recovery to make-up air. Where payback is marginal, provide access for future
recovery system. Consult with Facilities Engineering to ensure analysis conforms to
Princeton University standards.

15. Flexible Duct

Maximum length of flex duct sections shall be 6ft. Provide proper support to avoid
kinking duct.

16. Louvers

Inlet louvers shall be designed at not more than 500fpm over net free area. Provide
1/4" mesh screen. Coordinate with site plan to avoid placement near or downwind
from odor sources, or large deciduous trees. Coordinate with structural system so that
airflow through louver to filters/coils is unobstructed. Avoid air inlets near ground
level, due to excessive maintenance required to keep them free of debris. Where this is
unavoidable, review with Facilities Engineering. Inlet louvers to be storm proof
design (take into account snow loads/drainage).

17. Duct VAV Boxes

Sound attenuators and lined duct must be protected from dirt and debris until installed.
Provide factory installed access door to inspect reheat coil and damper operation.
Install VAV boxes such that all control components and valves have adequate access.
VAV boxes to manufactured by Nailor or Enviro-Tec.

18. Diffusers, Register and Grilles

The noise criteria level in the space must be no greater than scheduled on the drawings
or in the BOD. Where the space is not scheduled the noise criteria lever will be 30.
Provide a diffuser, register and grille schedule on the drawings capturing at minimum:
Size (including neck size) Throw
CFM Material/Finish
Noise Criteria Frame Type

E. Insulation

Designer shall coordinate with Architect to insure that there is sufficient access around
piping and ductwork in the field to install and seal joints on insulation system. It is
crucial that systems operating at temperatures below ambient dewpoint have continuous
unbroken vapor barriers. Where access is limited indicate sequence of construction on
Design Documents (i.e. pre-installing insulation). This is of critical importance and must
also be monitored in the field during construction. See Appendix 3.10-1 Require the
contractor to provide mock-ups of insulation systems for approval during construction.

1. Piping Insulation

Table below is adapted from ASHRAE Standard 90.1 - 2004. Use fiberglass with
premolded or Zeston covered fittings. Cold piping must have a continuous vapor
barrier. Pipes shall be suspended using hangers, inserts and shields outside insulation.
The use of elastomeric insulation must be reviewed with Facilities Engineering.
Where piping is installed less than 2 feet above floor and subject to damage cover with
continuous PVC or aluminum jacket.

Tables taken from ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Addenda bi and bt
2. Ductwork Insulation

Exposed ductwork in mechanical spaces or other areas of heavy traffic, shall be
insulated using fiberglass board with minimum 4.2#/c.f. density and foil facing. J oints
shall be taped with foil tape. Secure board with field glued pins and speed washers.
Pins to be clipped flush after washer installation. Where ductwork is concealed and
protected from damage use duct wrap blanket secured with pins and washers. Do not
use lined ductwork within 10 of humidifier.
3. Equipment Insulation

Designs shall include removable blanket insulation on Steam PRVs, pressure powered
pump bodies and flash tanks.
F. Piping and Ductwork Identification

1. For all ductwork and piping, provide identification and directional flow arrows at
intervals not greater than 20 ft. Ductwork ID should be stenciled showing system
number. Piping ID should be adhesive film type with full circumference flow arrows.
All Pipe markers and color schemes shall conform to current ANSI/ASME 13.1.
Verify user-defined color requirements with Facilities Engineering. See appendix
3.10-25 for Pipe Identification Schedule Requirements.

2. Equipment Identification: steamtraps, major valves and scheduled equipment shall
have permanent stamped metallic or phenolic ID plates which must be easily visible
after installation is complete.

G. Control Compressed Air Systems

Princeton University prefers Quincey duplex reciprocal air compressors with Hankinson
air dryers and water separators as needed. See also Section 3.2 Automatic Temperature
Controls and Energy Management Systems.

H. Laboratory Systems

1. Laboratory Waste Systems

Piping shall be Enfield, Orion or Fischer polypropylene with mechanical or socket
welded heat fusion joints. Do not use fuse-seal joints Provide unions at traps.

2. De-ionized Water

De-ionized water system use Hydro Services, Inc. processing equipment. Piping is
polypropylene with mechanical unions (where exposed) or socket welded joints (where
concealed). Piping must be supported in a continuous channel. Shutoff valves are
polypropylene ball valves.

3. Process Cooling Water

Also referred to as Laser Water Systems. These systems are recirculating 100k ohm-
cm clean water loops cooled by Primary chilled water. Piping is PVC schedule 80.
Supply water temperatures are typically 60F. Insulation is required where piping is
exposed to wet bulb temperatures above chilled water temperature.

4. Laboratory Compressed Air

Various science buildings have central laboratory compressed air systems.
Compressed air systems shall be Beacon Medaes Model LPS-15Q SD240-H single
point scroll air compressor system. The system shall have the number of 15
horsepower compressors needed for the system plus spare capacity to allow future
compressor overhauls or replacements. Piping shall be copper Type L.

5. Nitrogen

There are several different N2 systems on campus of varying levels of purity and
pressure. Unless otherwise indicated use 304 or 316L stainless steel tubing with
Swagelock tube fittings. Tubing and fittings to remain capped and sealed until
installed.

6. Vacuum

Various science buildings have central laboratory vacuum systems. The vacuum
system shall be a Nash self-contained, oil-less, fully re-circulated, water sealed vacuum
packaged unit as manufactured by Gardner Nash. The system can be duplex, triplex,
quad-plex, etc. as needed to provide ample vacuum capacity with spare capacity when
repairs must be made to a vacuum pump. Vacuum piping shall be copper Type L.
Valves shall be ball valves per hydronic specifications.

7. Laboratory Exhaust Systems

Ductwork may be galvanized steel, unless the extra cost of stainless steel or PVC
coated steel can be justified. New fume hood systems shall be face velocity controlled
using variable volume exhaust boxes. Occupancy sensor setback and/ or automatic
sash repositioning should be considered. Exhaust boxes and all moving components
shall be stainless steel. Provide general exhaust boxes in parallel with variable volume
hood exhaust boxes. Fume hoods should be provided with Magnahelic gages reading
local suction pressure. During balancing, readings must be taken correlating suction
pressure with proper face velocity. Heat recovery shall be considered based on cost
factors provided by Princeton Engineering.

I. Underground Utilities

See Section 3.6; for information on campus utility systems. Review project impact on
utilities with Facilities Engineering. Consultants must update Facilities Engineering on
estimated utility loads during various design phases in order to assist University utilities
planning functions.

J . Temporary Heating and Cooling

The use of new equipment, to provide heating, cooling, or ventilation during construction
must be reviewed with project team during design so that the appropriate steps are taken
to protect the equipment and minimize energy use. During construction, the Construction
Manager shall present a plan for the use of this equipment and campus utilities for review
by the Project Team. The equipment must be turned over to the University at occupancy
in like new condition with full warranty, extending from the occupancy date. Steam and
chilled water usage must be metered during periods requiring temporary heating and
cooling. Include these requirements in project specifications.
9. Requirements for HVAC System Testing & Commissioning

A. Testing, Adjusting, Balancing

Consulting engineer shall consider and review with Princeton during design, the necessity
of expanding the scope of traditional TAB work to include the likes of vibration/sound
testing, or IAQ testing. The TAB Contractor shall be hired directly by the Construction
Manager. Specifications shall indicate that before TAB work begins, TAB contractor
shall meet with Owner & Design Engineer to develop and approve TAB
strategies, procedures and reporting format. TAB reports shall be reviewed and approved
by Design Engineers to verify that the design intent has been met. As these reports are
essential tools for Facilities during troubleshooting, the reports shall include single line
schematic diagrams showing locations of HVAC system components, balancing devices,
measurement locations. Also include make, model and settings for drive components.
Balancing devices shall be marked by the Balancer to indicate final settings. Provide
single line system schematic with pressure profile.

Specifications shall provide a minimum day service from Balancing Contractor to
demonstrate and reproduce measurements shown in balancing report. The system
measurements will be selected by Facilities Engineering.

1. If recheck yields measurements that differ from the final report measurements by
more than the tolerances allowed, the measurement shall be noted as FAILED.

2. If the number of FAILED measurements is greater than 10% of the measurements
checked during this final inspection, the balancing report shall be rejected.

B. Piping Testing

Test new hydronic systems or modified sections of existing systems with water at 1.5 x
design operating pressure for 1 hr. (Small sections of steam piping may be tested with
campus steam, provided there are isolation valves for modified sections.) Engineering
shall be notified 2 days before scheduled test so that we have the opportunity to witness
tests. See also Building Commissioning Standards Section 3.3. Test pressures are to be
specified by the A/E.

C. Commissioning

1. Commissioning shall be performed in accordance with section 3.13 of this manual

2. The extent of Commissioning shall be determined during the schematic design phase
of a project, either using in-house, or a four party commissioning agent.

3. Tech Team representatives from Engineering and Grounds Building Maintenance
shall be an integral part of the commissioning process

4. The procedure for testing shall be followed closely in accordance with the Project
Specifications and Pre-Functional and Functional tests as outlined in section 3.13 of
this manual

10. Requirements for As-built Drawings

The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built drawings prepared by the
Mechanical Contractor.

and attending meetings with the Contractor and University personnel to review progress and to
ascertain that the Contractor is keeping accurate records of systems installation. Designer will
verify during these regular meetings that the Contractor is maintaining record drawings to
convert to as-builts.

The mechanical/HVAC As-Built Drawings shall include the following information as a
minimum:
1. All major pieces of equipment accurately located.
2. Location and identification (valve chart) of major isolation valves, vents and drains,
including sub-main isolation valves.
3. Location of control valves and balancing valves.
4. Access panels and access doors.
5. Sheetmetal dampers, fire dampers, filters and flow measuring stations.
6. Main runs of piping with labels and flow arrows.


11. O & M Documentation

In addition to the requirements shown in Section 1.5 (Documentation & Archiving) and Section
4.8 (Mechanical Rooms), O&M documentation for Mechanical equipment shall include the
following;
Approved submittals
1. Performance curves for fans & pumps showing design operating points.
2. Written sequence of operation with final commissioned control set points.
3. Maintenance information including safety & performance information, start up &
shutdown procedures, detailed servicing requirements.
4. Other project specific information determined by the Facilities Engineering and design
team

Information provided by the contractor shall be reviewed and supplemented as required by the
design engineer.

END OF DOCUMENT

3.11 Plumbing Systems Design

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.11 Plumbing- page 1

1. Introduction

Each Project is assigned a Facilities Engineering representative to track the progress of all Plumbing
design and construction issues. All issues pertaining to systemprogramming, selection and performance
are typically derived through the assistance of this representative. The Design Engineer is encouraged to
initiate and sustain open communications throughout the Project to achieve that end.

2. Contacts


B. Manager of Mechanical Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-3934

C. Supervisor of HVAC/Plumbing Shop MacMillan Building, 609-258-3446

PDF AutoCAD
A. Princeton University Instantaneous Domestic
Water Heater Piping Detail,
dated February 15, 2002 Appendix 3.11-1

B. New Jersey American Water
Service Entrance Detail Appendix 3.11-2 Appendix 3.11-2

C. Commissioning Specifications Appendix 3.3-9 Appendix 3.3-9
(MS Word)
D. Plumbing Details Appendix 3.11-3 Appendix 3.11-3

E. Apollo Valve Numbering System Appendix 3.11-4

4. Code References

A. New Jersey UniformConstruction Code (NJUCC)

B. National Standard Plumbing Code

C. National Fuel Gas Code

D. Princeton Borough AC Condensate Discharge Ordinance (Public Document)


Initial planning and preliminary design will be conducted thru the Office of Design & Construction and
Facilities Engineering with the University department responsible for project initiation. As the project
moves toward the construction documentation and code review phases, it is required that the project
construction documents be submitted to the University for an internal Tech Team review process thru
the Office of Design and Construction for compliance with University standards. Plans are to be


B. Completion of Design Development;



E. At 100% completion of construction documents, if required, at the discretion of the Tech Team.

With the assistance of the Project Manager and Facilities Tech Teams, discipline review meetings will
be held with respective University shops, University Project Engineers, and other Tech Team
representatives as required. The A/E is responsible for documenting minutes of all these meetings.
There, review comments or recent revisions will be discussed and documented. The Designers shall
provide timely and coordinated responses to all review comments. The purpose of the Tech Team
review process if to confirmA/E compliance with the current version of the Facilities Design Standards
Manual including each respective section and associated appendices.


During preliminary design, designer is to consult with University project manager to ascertain the
requirements for plumbing use and installation. The designer is to coordinate his work with other
disciplines so a cohesive set of documents is produced for the mechanical/plumbing work (include
considerations for any specialty lab systemand or specialty gases). The Designer is reminded to refer
to Section 3.13 Commissioning for requirements, including submittals for schematic and design
development phases, particularly as they relate to design intent and Basis of Design.

During preliminary design and design development the designer is to consult with the project manager
and with University Engineering Department to define systemdistribution strategies and to discuss any
obstacles that might be existing in a building, or problems inherent in a particular design or structural
system.


Along with the Specifications, the designer is to produce sufficient documentation to allow for code
review of the plumbing systemand for contract bidding of the work.

Specifications shall include the requirements listed in the Princeton University Design Guidelines and
Princeton University Engineering Specifications. Delete equipment and references not applicable to the
project.

PS-26
The Design documentation will include, as a minimum:

MEP Design Intent
X
MEP Basis of Design
X
Floor Plans Plumbing Equipment X X X
Floor PlansPiping Routes X X
Riser Diagrams Sanitary & Vent
Piping

X X
Riser Diagrams Domestic Water
Piping

X X
Plumbing Fixture Schedule X X
Details equipment & piping
Connections (including pipe chase
layouts)

X X
Vertical Sections as required X X
Plumbing Specifications X X

Coordination Drawings field produced by Contractors Facilities Engineering Department will review
3/8 scales Coordination Drawings of all equipment to be installed in Mechanical Rooms. This will be
done as a concurrent Shop Drawing submittal or as part of a Coordination Meeting(s) which includes
University participation.


A. Domestic Water Systems

1. City water meter at building entrance will be provided by New Jersey American Water Co.
See Appendix 3.11-2. Use Watts 909 backflow preventer, 2 & smaller, Ames Silver
Bullet for sizes 2 & larger, where required by codes (no substitutions). Trap primers
should be avoided, use deep seal traps where possible. Use Watts for domestic water
pressure reducing service. Domestic water pressure booster pump package by Goulds
Aquavar. Contact The Pump Shop, Inc., [email protected], for specific design
criteria. The University Mechanical Engineer shall specify to the designer the model(s) of the
pressure reducing device(s) for each project. Dormitories and lab buildings require two
backflow preventers in parallel (see appendix 3.11-3). All domestic water valves to have
extended stem-sized pipe insulation thickness.

B. Domestic Hot Water Systems

1. Wherever possible consistent with demand, use campus steamfor hot water generation. Use
ACE Boiler Company semi-instantaneous water heaters with Cu-Ni tubes, single wall
design, DDC control valve, Sarco traps, Taco circulator. See piping detail (appendix 3.1-
11). Contact Diversified Thermal Equipment, [email protected], for specific design
criteria. Include recirculation loops where feasible. For low demand remote usage where
steamusage is impractical, use electric heaters as specified below. Avoid the use of mixing
valves. Include balancing valves between HW piping and HW recirculation piping at the end
of the run. Use Johnson vacuumbreaker (stainless steel).

C. Sewage Ejectors

1. Sewage ejectors shall be Metropolitan MPC close coupled. Sump pumps shall be
Metropolitan MPC or Hydromatic SP. Provide adequate floor drain coverage with
proper floor slope in mechanical spaces. Provide hose bibs in mechanical rooms for use
during maintenance. High temperature sump pumps for steamcondensate pits to be Zoller
M3098 or Little Giant HT10. Include dry contacts on pump controls to accommodate BMS
systemreportability. Substitute Apollo 6P ball valves for factory supplied gate valves.

D. Plumbing Fixtures & Accessories

Variations fromapproved products below will require review with Engineering:

Lavatories American Std. Lucerne American Std. #0355012.020 or Roxalyn #0195.073
as required for wall hung installations. Use Wolverine #53336 stop-valve no key type stops
permitted.

Lavatory Faucet American Std. #5402.142H blade handles, 4 o.c. or #5401.142H.002
with pop-up drain for residential applications. Where touchless (motion sensor) type faucets
are used, specify Sloan EFB 650-0607.

Kitchen Sink Single bowl 18ga. Elkay #2521 with American Std. #6279000.002 faucet with
spray, #4175500.002 faucet without spray, or #4175501.002 single lever kitchen faucet. Use
Elkay LK-99 or Wolverine drain assembly #807.

Aerators 1 gallon/ minute maximum Neoperl

Lavatory/Sink Traps McGuire #8902C P-trap

Slop Sink Faucet Commercial - American Std. #8344.112 with vacuumbreaker
Residential Gerber #49-531

Sink Drains Grid type only for campus buildings McGuire #155-A.

Instantaneous Hot Water Heater Are to be installed in all kitchen sinks and water fountains,
where requested. ISE (In-Sink-Erator) Instahot H-778-10 (or H990 for handicap service)
under sink type

Water Fountain Elkay HEWDL or EHWMZ14C
Filtrine #107-14-HL with optional bottle filler; non-refrigerated

Hydration Station Elkay - #LZWSMDK non-refrigerated

Water Cooler ODAK #23A Cosmetal Connect; non-refrigerated

Tub Americast by American Standard

Shower Base Terrazo base with internal drain
Shower Stall Consider one-piece unit as alternative for residential applications (Best Bath or
approved equivalent).

Shower Valve Delta R100000 UNWS with trimkit T17030. If exposed in shower
compartment, include shroud for protection of pipes.

Shower Head Nigara Conservation 1.5 gpmshower head manufactured by Sustainable
Solutions International

Urinals Use Sloan model WEUS-1000.1001-0.13

Water Closets Floor mount: Sloan 1.28 flush WETS 2000.1001 or ADA equivalent
2020.1001-1.28; Wall hung: Sloan 1.28 flush WETS 2050.1001 or ADA equivalent all with
Sloan #111 flush valve and Sloan Royal 111-1.28 SMO automatic flush operator.

Water Closet Seat Church or Bemis Color: White

Water Heaters A.O. Smith. The University Mechanical Engineer shall specify to the designer
the model(s) of water heater(s) on the project.

Instantaneous Tankless Water Heater For under sink: counter type Chronomite
#E-60-S
For larger applications: Hubbell Tankless model TX

Water Hammer Arrestors Smith or Amtrol

Floor Drains Smith, Zurn or Josamnickel bronze or stainless, to be installed in all commercial
bathrooms per National Standard Plumbing Code. University preference is for deep seal traps
in locations that will see infrequent use.

Grease Trap Selection is based on specific Project requirements, either MIFAB Stainless
Steel, MI-G or MI-G-L series. Review municipal regulations for water temperature and waste
treatment requirements with Engineering, GBM and the University Code Analyst.

Stop Valves Wolverine

Wall Hydrant Jay R. Smith non-freeze

Flanges 150#brass sweat flanges
Trap Adaptor Install trap adaptors on all P traps for lavatories, sinks, water fountains, etc.
Thermometer Dial type with stainless steel wells; 2 diameter
Laundry Washing Machine Hoses 6 braided stainless steel.
Laundry Box Water-Tite Box Watts valve mounted in box; model #W2800
Slop/Mop Sink Base American Standard or Fiat
Emergency Eye Wash Speakman or Guardian
Emergency Shower Seakman of Guardian

E. Plumbing and HVAC Valves refer to Apollo Index Sheet for sizing (Appendix 3.11-4)

System Pipes 2 or smaller Pipes 2 or larger
Domestic Hot &
Cold Water
N/A

Flanged Ball Valve 2 and
up; Apollo 6P Series
Domestic Hot &
Cold Water
Solder Full Port; 3 Piece
Part #82-240-00
Domestic Hot &
Cold Water
Threaded Full Port; 2 Piece
Part #77-140-00
Domestic Hot &
Cold Water
Sweat Full Port; 2 Piece
Part #77-240-00
Domestic Hot &
Cold Water
Sweat Standard; 2 Piece
Part #70-200-00
Heating Hot Water Threaded Full Port; 3 Piece
Part #82-140-00
Apollo Series 88A240
Heating Hot Water Solder Full Port; 3 Piece
Part #82-240-00
Heating Hot Water Threaded Full Port; 2 Piece
Part #77-140-00
Heating Hot Water Sweat Full Port; 2 Piece
Part #77-240-00
Heating Hot Water Threaded Standard; 2 Piece
Part #70-140-00
Heating Hot Water Sweat Full Port; 2 Piece
Part #70-240-00
F. Plumbing Piping Materials
Note: Pro-press fittings are not to be used by outside contractors.

System Piping Material Fitting Material
Domestic Hot &
Cold Water
(Above Ground)
Type L Copper

Wrought copper with water safe
solder 2.5 or larger to have
Victaulic or Grov lok fitting
Sanitary Waste,
Storm
(Above Ground)
Cast Iron, hubless, service weight, or
PVC DWV
C.I No Hub extra heavy
couplings
or PVC DWV
Sanitary Vent
(Above Ground)
C.I. hubless, service weight or PVC
DWV
C.I. w/stainless stl. Clamp or
PVC DWV
Sanitary Waste,
Vent, Storm
(Below Ground
within building and
5ft of exterior wall)
C.I. extra heavy weight, hub and
spigot, neoprene gasket OR D.I. with
rubber gasket, hub and spigot, or
SDR21PVC, or PVC DWV
C.I No Hub extra heavy
couplings
D.I
Neoprene Push Joint, DWV
glue fittings
Domestic Water
3 and larger
(Below Ground)
Ductile Iron, rubber gaskets, rods Ductile or gray iron
Domestic Water 2
and smaller (below
ground)
Copper Type K, bituminous coating Cast Bronze, or Wrought
Copper Brazed or Compression
Joint
AC Condensate Type L Copper or PVC sch. 40 Copper or Solvent weld PVC
Natural Gas
2 and smaller
2 and larger

Schedule 80 steel
Schedule 40 steel

Threaded Malleable
Welded

9. Requirements for Plumbing System Testing, Sterilization & Commissioning

A. At the completion of all piping work, and before any insulation is applied, all piping shall be
tested in accordance with the following schedule:

Service Duration Pressure
Domestic Water Service Piping (4) hours 100 psig
Cold Water Piping (4) hours 100 psig
Hot Water Piping (4) hours 100 psig
Hot Water Return Piping (4) hours 100 psig
Sanitary Sewer Lines (1) hour 10 of water

B. All new water piping and equipment shall be thoroughly flushed to remove foreign material. A
University approved plumbing Disinfection Company shall be hired to sterilize all plumbing
piping in accordance with the National Standard Plumbing Code.

C. Commissioning

1. Commissioning shall be performed in accordance with section 3.13 of this manual

2. The extent of Commissioning shall be determined during the schematic design phase of a
project, either using in-house, (Single Party) or a Four party commissioning agent.

3. Tech Teamrepresentatives fromEngineering and Grounds Building Maintenance shall be an
integral part of the commissioning process

4. The procedure for testing shall be followed closely in accordance with the Project
Specifications and Pre-Functional and Functional tests as outlined in section 3.13 of this
manual

5. Witness and sign off for floor drain flow testing.

6. Where tying into a sewer main, an additional video of the line is required fromthe building
perimeter to the connection point with the sewer main.

10. Plumbing System Electrical Alarm Requirements

The University Plumbing Shop requires the alarming of certain critical plumbing systemareas. The
following areas may have alarmand/or standby electrical power requirements:

Elevator Sump Pumps
StormSump Pumps
Sewage Ejectors
Area Drains
Domestic Booster Pumps

Refer to Sections 3.2 (Automatic Temperature Controls) and 3.12 (Electrical).


The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built drawings prepare by the Plumbing
Contractor.

The Designer is responsible, at regular intervals during the construction process, for scheduling and
attending meetings with the Contractor and University personnel to review progress on the systemand
to ascertain that the Contractor is keeping accurate records of systeminstallation. Designer will verify
during these regular meetings that the Contractor is maintaining record drawings to convert to as-builts.


END OF DOCUMENT
3.12 Electrical Systems Design

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.12 Electrical - page 1

1. Introduction

The Facilities Electrical Engineering Department shares responsibility for programming selection
and performance review of the various electrical disciplines with its staff and the Grounds and
Building Maintenance Electric Shop. The Electrical Designer is encouraged to contact each
respective discipline Engineer to ascertain required information. This approach should continue
through final closeout.

2. Contacts


B. Manager of Electrical Engineering MacMillan Building, 609-258-5475

C. Electric Shop Supervisor
Grounds and Building Maintenance MacMillan Building, 609-258-3991

D. Electrical Planner -
Grounds and Building Maintenance MacMillan Building, 609-258-9399

PDF AutoCAD
A. Switchgear Package Typical single end
and double end Appendix 3.12-3

B. Campus Area Emergency Generator
Power Plan See Manager of Electrical Engineering
C. New J ersey One-Call Memorandum Appendix 3.12-5

D. Arc Flash Label Types Appendix 3.12-6

E. Event Power Appendix 3.12-7 Appendix 3.12-7

F. 5kv Switch Box Appendix 3.12-8

G. Use of MC Cable for Offices & Dorm Rooms Appendix 3.12-9

H. Commissioning Specifications Appendix 3.3-9 Appendix 3.3-9
(MS Word)
4. Code References


B. National Electrical Code (NEC)

C. IBC (International Building Code)







Team.

appendices.


During preliminary design and design development the designer is to consult with the project
manager and with University Engineering Department to define system distribution strategies and
to discuss any obstacles that might be existing in a building, or problems inherent in a particular
design or structural system.

Along with the Specifications, the Designer is to produce sufficient documentation to allow for
code review of the electrical project and for contract bidding of the work.

Specifications shall include the requirements listed in the Princeton University Design
Guidelines and Princeton University Engineering Specifications. Delete equipment and
references not applicable to the project.
PS-26
The documentation will include, as a minimum:

MEP Design Intent
X
MEP Basis of Design
X
One Line or Riser Diagram -
Power
X X X X
Power Plans X X X
Lighting Plans X X X
OIT Plans X X X
Security Plans (CACS/CVMS) X X
Equipment Schedules X X
Panelboard Schedules X X
Lighting Fixture Schedule X X
Electrical Specifications X X
Details X
Vertical Sections as required X
Short Circuit and Coordination
Study, Arc Flash Study

X

7. Design Guidelines General Programming Issues

A. Criteria for building load evaluation including elevators
Design to NEC
Compare peak demands to projected load
Determine proper service and feeder protection in conjunction with Manager of
Electrical Engineering

B. Existing Site Utilities Review
Use existing site Utility layout in order to optimize the best possible feeder location
and minimize relocations.
Coordinate feeder location with architectural design process.

C. Service Entry Points
Locate substation near service entry point to minimize cable runs.
Separate OIT communications cable entry point from electric service entry point.
Basement is preferable for Mechanical/Electrical Equipment Rooms. Should
Designer not be able to accommodate, state reason.

D. Utility vs. Princeton University Distribution System
Size of Building and location affect decision.
Timing of maximum load (day vs. night)
Location of other site utilities
If Building will be on University power, Designer needs to specify a Princeton
University approved electric meter (with data connection). See Appendix 3.12 - 3
All of the above need to be discussed with Manager of Electrical Engineering.

E. Emergency Service Needs Assessment
At minimum, emergency power required by Code (Lighting)
Discuss whether emergency power comes from local (within building) or regional
source.
Discuss which equipment receives emergency power - life safety or standby.
Mechanical sump pumps and freeze pumps shall be on standby emergency power.
Discuss fire pumps on emergency generator with Facilities Engineering Department.
Avoid elevators on emergency generator if possible. If multiple elevators are
required on emergency power, sequence such that only one elevator at a time operates
to reduce the load on the generator

F. Event Power Needs Assessment
Contact Grounds and Building Maintenance Electric Shop supervisor to assess
whether event power is needed for exterior events and lighting.
If power is required it usually will be recessed on the exterior of the Building with a
brass box cover. Verify if in-ground location may be preferable.
If event power is deemed necessary, the main distribution panel shall accommodate
these requirements.

G. Daylight Harvesting Assessment
Dim lighting in Atriums or other areas where daylight provides necessary light levels.
Use occupancy sensor in conjunction with photocell to achieve this function. See
Section 3.5 Lighting Design for additional information.

H. Specialty Power Assessment (UPS, Surge Protection, etc.)
Surge Protection Device (SPD) required on building incoming electrical service and
on power panels serving sensitive electronic equipment.
Assess with all users and Engineering Department representative which systems
require computer grade power (UPS). (Normal power supplied from the campus
electrical distribution system is utility grade.)
Determine which systems need to be on UPS or standby emergency generator power.

I. Neutral Line Loading/Harmonic Current Assessment
Determine K rating. If high (areas of many computers) size neutral accordingly.
Neutral shall be doubled for loads with significant third harmonic content.
Separate neutral conductor for all circuits. No shared neutrals.

8. Design Guidelines Schematic Design Phase

A. Power Distribution Configuration
Determined by type of Building
Residential 120volt
Non-Residential 277volt lighting 480volt equipment
Voltage class based on Building typology, residential vs. non-residential.

B. Service Point Design
Generally deep Basements come in with feed overhead and include junction box on
wall.
First Floor or shallow Basements come in with feed below slab.
If on PSEG power grid, follow their design criteria.

C. Double vs. Single Ended Services
Where continuity of power is required (such as Laboratory Buildings, large Buildings,
Computer Centers, area substations), service shall be double ended.

D. Switchgear Lineup Determination
5kV systems bring (2) feeders into Building (A&B) using a primary selective scheme.
Reference Appendix 3.12-3
Preference is for a line-up of switchgear.
No secondary fused disconnects.
Install switchgear on housekeeping pads. Switchgear/substations installed below
grade in vaults or directly underground (plazas, etc.) shall have drip pans installed
over the switchgear.

E. Transformer Types
Discuss efficiency and temperature rise requirements
5kV Substation liquid filled silicone transformer
Low Voltage Transformers shall be dry type, 115 rise, Transformer efficiency shall
meet or exceed DOE CSL-3 ratings.

F. Electrical Room Locations (see Section 4.5 Electrical Rooms for additional requirements)
Basement preference vs. upper Floors
If multiple Electrical Rooms required, disburse on multiple Floor Levels.
Discuss during programming
Design for future expansion including sleeves and/or spare conduits.
Maintain all working clearances (spaces about electrical equipment) in accordance
with NEC.

9. Design Guidelines Design Development Phase

A. Separate Subpanel Feeds vs. Riser Panels
No riser panels without University approval.

B. Subpanel Distribution through Building
Minimize distance between panels for future circuit expansion requirements.
Review normal and emergency panel locations during Design reviews.
Review locations with Architect as well for aesthetic continuity.
Preference for horizontal vs. vertical circuit distribution.

C. Requirements for Spare Circuits
20% spare capacity minimum per panel (30% at main distribution panels).
All spaces equipped to accept circuit breakers including distribution panels.
Lighting panels fully equipped with breakers; no blank spaces.

D. Conduit vs. Greenfield or ENT With THHN Stranded Wire Pathway Parameters
Specify conduit to individual rooms, or to individual devices.
If room has accessible space/hollow wall, Greenfield or ENT raceway is then
allowable.
For non-residential buildings the preference is to not allow for MC cable.
When MC cable is used for wiring to receptacle the following shall apply:
Each room or office shall have two feeds (whips) per circuit into the room. Each
cable entering the room shall feed half of the receptacles on that circuit in the room
(office). Use stranded conductor cable only. Wiring from panel to the junction box
shall be in conduit. (See Appendix 3.12-9)
Use MC cable for whips and for fishing in existing walls. Use stranded conductor
cable only.
Use steel set screw fittings for all EMT and Greenfield connections. Die-cast type
fittings will not be allowed.

10. Design Guidelines Construction Documentation of Equipment and Devices

A. Wire and Cable
Wet locations/below grade 600volt to be U.S.E.-2. All below grade cable splices
shall be accessible and protected with heat shrink kits.
All wire #14 and larger shall be copper stranded, type THHN
No pole lights shall be fed with UF cable, use 1 PVC with U.S.E. 2 wire.
5kV feeder cable type MV-105 copper minimum 500KCMIL full copper taped shield.
5/8kV rating manufacture shall be by Okonite.

B. Panel boards and Fuses
Fuses only for control, not power circuits.
All panelboards shall be circuit breaker type, 225 Amp. bus minimum.
Panel trim (lockable) shall have door-in-door double hinged construction.
No aluminum bus
General Electric, Square D, (Cutler Hammer acceptable in residential installation)
In renovation work: rebalance 3 phase electric power and list amperage at panel
board.

C. Receptacles and Devices
Discuss color with Design Team and Grounds and Building Maintenance Department
(GBM) to standardize in Building.
Stand-by receptacles red
Isolated ground receptacles orange
Cover plates standardize to ivory/brown/stainless steel, or as agreed to by GBM.
Non-metallic cover plates shall be nylon not plastic.
Dormitory Bathrooms shall have nylon plates and screws.
Receptacles rated at 15amp. (as part of a 20amp circuit), may be specified for branch
receptacle circuits. In this case the minimum gauge wire shall be #12 copper
stranded.
Mounting heights may vary in renovation work. Requires field verification during
layout.
Receptacles in laboratory buildings shall be labeled with panel and circuit feeding
receptacle.

D. Motors and Drives
Variable frequency drives should be utilized for energy savings or system control
requirements. Use ABB ACH550 or Yaskawa Series Z1000. Bypass and alternating
capability requirements should be reviewed by PU Engineering. All VFDs should
have integral MCP disconnects, door-mounted keypad, HOA/bypass selector
switches, and direct communications interface to either Siemens APOGEE system or
Automated Logic. Line and output reactors should be used per manufacturer
recommendations.
Motors 3-phase for 1/2hp and above. For fraction HP motors in fan coil units single-
phase allowable.
Pump motors shall be 3-phase (480volt if available) with premium efficiency.
Motors on 208volt shall be rated at 200volts (not 230volts)
Motors for use on drives shall meet NEMA Design Standards Part 31. Definite
purpose motors for use on inverters should withstand repeated voltage peaks of
1600volts with rise times of 0.1 mircoseconds and greater.
All starters shall be minimum size #1 with hand - off auto and red run lights (Use
NEMA starters), no IEC type starters, use motor circuit protectors, no fuses. Motor
starters shall be purchased by Electrical Contractor. GE Series 300 Starters preferred.
Consult Engineer for package unit with starters.

E. Grounding
All ground conductors shall be installed with non metallic or non continuous metallic
hardware.
Installation in PVC pipe preferred
All ground bus connections shall be bolted lug type with double bolts.

F. Motor Control Centers Parameters
An MCC shall be specified in areas where 3 or more starters are located.
MCC shall be used for distribution centers, if a main distribution panel is not
available.
Elevators fed from MCC should not have starter, only breaker.
Install MCC units on housekeeping pads.
Protect all MCCs from direct sprinkler discharge.
GE Series 9000 preferred.

G. Hand Dryers
Preferred in Buildings of large public access.
Hands-free type
Acceptable manufacturer, World Driers

H. Arc Flash / Short Circuit and Coordination Studies
Arc Flash, Short Circuit and Coordination studies are to be completed and submitted
with the 85% CD package.
If available, existing arc flash studies will be provided to the Designer for
modification in conformance with final design. If no study exists, the Designer must
perform their own study per NFPA and IEEE standards and submit to the Facilities
Manager of Electrical Engineering for review. ETAP format preferred.
11. Design Guidelines Emergency and Stand-By Power Systems

A. Fuel System Requirements
Diesel fuel only.
Base tanks preferred.
Supplemental fuel filter shall be supplied.
Fill location to be accessible by truck.
Preferred to be within Building/discuss early with all parties.
Fuel vent shall have a line whistle.
Fill cap shall be manufactured by Scully.

B. Generator Equipment
Metering
Blockheater
Load Banks
Sound Attenuation

C. Exhaust Issues Location, Noise, Exercising
Location to be determined early during programming.
Air Dispersion modeling Study to be considered.
Exercising time may impact location of unit.
Exhaust system shall use a critical grade muffler and welded iron pipe.

D. Transfer Switches
Zenith with MX250 controls, A1-E contact, and Modbus TCP/IP interface for remote
monitoring capability. The minimum size ATS should be rated at 80 amps.
Conduits for communication to fire alarm panel with 6 conductors and to the campus
electric SCADA via OIT outlet in switchgear room.
Critical applications (Labs, Computer Centers) use transfer switch with by-pass
switch for maintenance.

E. Connected Items on Emergency System
Half stairwell fixtures on EM Power half on Normal Power, connect diagonally.
One fixture over each bathroom sink.
All outdoor egress fixtures, use non-HID lamps.
Select receptacles in mechanical and electrical spaces use red devices (i.e. sump and
sewage ejection pumps).
Fire alarm and card access systems.
Elevator cab, shaft and Machine Room lighting.
Labs one fixture by each entrance door.
Use only fluorescent and LED light sources on EM systems, no HID lamps with
quartz restrike designs. (incandescent in special circumstances)

F. Transformers and Panelboard Requirements
Install in locked locations. Install emergency service labeling on equipment.

G. Optional Stand- By Systems
Typically the University does not supply standby or emergency power on academic
research and other items than those listed above. The need for project specific needs
should be reviewed early in the design process with Facilities Engineering.

12. Procedural Guidelines Other Design Considerations

A. Requirements for Labeling
All equipment to be labeled with engraved lamacoid fastened with mechanical
fasteners.
Each label shall include; panel designation, voltage and where panel is fed from.
(black background with white lettering for normal panels and red background with
white lettering for emergency panels.)
Panel directory labeling to be done after final Room number designations established.
(See Appendix 2.8-2 Room Name Spreadsheet.)
All electrical distribution equipment shall be labeled per the accepted arc flash
analysis (See Section 3.12.10.G). Equipment shall include (but not be limited to)
switchgears, switchboards, panel boards, motor control centers and transformers.
Specify per Appendix 3.12-6 for standard University label types.

B. Maintenance Accessibility
All fixtures in stairwells shall be accessed with a ladder, without requiring
scaffolding.
All Electrical Rooms shall be designed and utilized for electrical equipment. Storage
for other use is not permitted.
Allow space for removal and replacement of equipment.

C. Keys and Security Issues
All cores by Princeton University. All mechanical and electrical spaces EM core. All
Generator and Elevator Rooms AS core. Substations and HV Distribution Buildings
use HV core.
Determine need to secure equipment not located in separate Electric Rooms.

D. Snow Melting
DDC point required from snow melting panel to Building Automation System (BAS).
The Contactor for snow melting shall have a 3 position switch hand-off-auto.
Install current transformers to verify function and feedback indicating status.

E. Lightning Protection
The Designer should review with the Project Manager the need for lightning
protection on the building. If a system exists, or if a new system is proposed, the
Designer should recommend the preferred method of installation.

F. Vehicle Battery Charging Stations
Typically at Dormitory or other entryways.
Discuss need for exterior outlets to charge vehicles with GBM.
Recessed brass box with cover flush with masonry.
Each charging location shall have a dedicated 20amp. duplex GFI receptacle.

13. Procedural Guidelines Commissioning, Warranty Notification

A. Commissioning
Commissioning shall be performed in accordance with section 3.13 of this manual
The extent of Commissioning shall be determined during the schematic design phase
of a project, either using in-house, (Single Party) or a third party commissioning
agent.
Tech Team representatives form Engineering and Grounds Building Maintenance
shall be an integral part of the commissioning process
The following electrical systems will be included in the commissioning process
Power Distribution
Fire Alarm & Smoke Detection
Auto Temp Controls
Lighting
Generators
UPS
Motors & Drives
Grounding

B. Warranty Period Notification
Establish/notify Shops of date of substantial completion. If multiple phases are
constructed, Contractor to provide comprehensive list of all dates per individual piece
of equipment. Typically, this is a one-year process.


The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of As-built Drawings prepared by the
Construction Contractor and any systems installer.

The Designer is responsible, at regular intervals during the construction process, for
scheduling and attending meetings with the Contractor and University personnel to review
progress on the system and to ascertain that the Contractor is keeping accurate records of
system installation. Designer will verify during these regular meetings that the Contractor is
maintaining record Drawings to convert to As-Builts.

Provide Switchgear Drawings on AutoCAD. See also as-built requirements in Section 1.5
(Documentation and Archiving), and Section 4.5 (Electrical Rooms).

END OF DOCUMENT

3.13 Commissioning

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 3.13 Commissioning - page 1

1. Introduction

Princetons commissioning process is a quality assurance program for new buildings or major
renovations. This process is designed to ensure buildings meet the needs of the University, and
are built and operated as intended by the design team. The process focuses on environmental
quality, LEED, Green Design, Indoor Air Quality, resource and conservation strategy, energy
requirements, options for minimizing energy usage and life safety considerations.

If commissioning is a required A/E service, then, depending on the project, the University will
implement one of two (2) possible commissioning models:

Single Party relies on the University MEP Project Engineer (Commissioning Agent) to
perform the commissioning functions as specified within the A/E contract documents.

Four Party requires the participation of the Design professional, a consulting
Commissioning Agent, the Construction manager, and the University

2. Contacts

Grounds and Building Maintenance, the Construction Management Office, or as
applicable)

B. University MEP Project Engineer 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-8589

C. Program Manager of Standards 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-1330

PDF MS Word

A. Commissioning Plan Appendix 3.3-3 Appendix 3.3-3

B. Outline of MEP Design Intent Appendix 3.3-4 Appendix 3.3-4

C. MEP Basis of Design Appendix 3.3-5 Appendix 3.3-5

D. Final Commissioning Report Appendix 3.3-6 Appendix 3.3-6

E. Index of MEP Pre-Functional Tests Appendix 3.3-7 Appendix 3.3-7

F. Index of MEP Functional Tests Appendix 3.3-8 Appendix 3.3-8

G. Commissioning Specifications Appendix 3.3-9 Appendix 3.3-9

H. Fire Alarm Commissioning Specifications Appendix 3.13-1 Appendix 3.13-1

I. Fire Protection Commissioning Specs Appendix 3.13-2 Appendix 3.13-2

J . Mechanical Commissioning Specifications Appendix 3.13-3 Appendix 3.13-3

K. Electrical Commissioning Specifications Appendix 3.13-4 Appendix 3.13-4

L. BAS Commissioning Appendix 3.2-1 Appendix 3.2-1
PS-11


with University standards. Documents are to be submitted for review at:

A. Completion of Schematic Design


C. At 50% completion of construction documents

D. At 85% completion of construction documents

Team.

appendices.

5. Procedural Gui del i nes Commissioning Approach

Design Phase

During preliminary design, the University Project Manager and the University MEP Project
Engineer (Commissioning Agent) will ascertain the requirements for Commissioning, single
party or four parties. The Designer shall cooperate with any adjunct professionals providing
assistance to the University, and coordinate their work with other disciplines to produce the
required commissioning documents.

1. Single Party Commissioning The University has developed an internal single party
commissioning process compatible with most Construction Management (CM) contractual
projects. An internal (University) Commissioning Agent is provided thru the Office of Design &
Construction to assist the A/E thru this process. This process is preferred unless the MEP project
scope requires the full time on-site participation of a Commissioning Agent, with specialized
monitoring and testing equipment. The latter is generally limited to Laboratory buildings and
specialized plant related projects.

The Commissioning Model is outlined in Appendices 3.3-3 thru 3.3-9. If Single Party
Commissioning is chosen, the designer is required to provide the following, during the respective
design phases indicated:

Project Summary & Design Team Members
MEP Design Intent (Appendix 3.3.4)
Basis of Design (Appendix 3.3.5)
Commissioning Specifications (Appendix 3.3.9)
Final List of PreFunctional and Functional Tests

Commissioning specification Appendix 3.3-9 includes most of the contract documentation
required for single party commissioning. The designer should use the applicable
specifications, in Appendices, as part of the project documentation. Additional Master
Technical specifications for Building Automation Commissioning is available in Appendix 3.2-
1)

2. Four Party Commissioning requires the participation of the Design professional, a
consulting Commissioning Agent, the Construction Manager, and the University.
This approach is generally limited to Laboratory buildings and specialized plant related projects.

If a Four Party approach is chosen for a project, an RFP will be developed by the university
during preliminary design defining the services of the consulting Commissioning Agent. The
designer is required to coordinate all required commissioning-related contract documentation
with the chosen Commissioning Agent. See Appendix 3.13-5 for a sample of Comprehensive
Commissioning Services Requirements to be used by the designer for coordinating with the
selected 4-Party Commissioning agent.

The consulting commissioning agent shall be involved strategically throughout the project from
Design Development through the warranty phase. The primary role of the commissioning agent,
during the design phase, is to review the A/E detailed commissioning specifications prior to each
Tech Review, while the secondary or optional role of the commissioning agent is to review the
design to ensure it meets Princeton Universitys objectives.

Construction Phase (Single Party & Four Party)

During the Construction Phase of a project, the commissioning agent, whether single or four
party, will develop and coordinate the execution of a testing plan, which includes observing and
certifying all systems performance to ensure that the systems are functioning in accordance with
the Princeton Universitys Design Standards, the project requirements and the contract
documents. The documentation developed during the design phase will be periodically updated
to meet current project requirements.

In addition to the documents developed during the design phase, the following documentation is
required;
Commissioning schedule
Submittal Log
Issues Log
Progress Reports and Site Observations
List of Pre-Functional Tests
List of Functional Tests
Pre-Functional Tests (Appendix 3.3-7)
Functional Tests (Appendix 3.3-8)
Final Commissioning Report (Appendix 3.3-6)

In addition to the above listed requirements, the commissioning agent shall review the O&M
Manuals and record of Project Closeout Best Practices Meeting Comments. The commissioning
agent may be required to perform follow up testing post occupancy after the first heating or
cooling season depending on the completion of the project.


Project Team reviews of issues relating to commissioning will occur within the larger context of
the design reviews conducted throughout the project Documents, including the Commissioning
Plan and other noted documents, shall be submitted for review by the Office of Design and
Construction, the Maintenance Department and the Engineering Department at specified design
milestones.

The documentation will include, as a minimum:

Required Documentation
(Design Phase)
SD DD 50% CD 85% CD
Commissioning Plan X X X X
MEP Design Intent X X X X
MEP Basis of Design X X X
Full-LengthSpecifications X X
List of Eqt to be Commissioned:
Major Equipment X X X
Remaining Equipment X X
List of Pre Functional Tests X
List of Functional Tests X

7. Building Commissioning Process

The Commissioning Process will include, but is not limited to, the following Mechanical,
Electrical and Plumbing (MEP) systems.

Mechanical Electrical Plumbing
Hot Water Power Distribution Fire Suppression
Chilled Water & Condenser Fire Alarm & Smoke Detection Storm & Sanitary Drainage
Water Auto Temp Controls Domestic Water
Steam & Condensate Lighting Piping Specialties
Water Treatment Generators Exp J oint & Loops
Air Handling UPS Pipe Flushing & Cleaning
Exhaust Motors & Drives Water Balance
Auto Temp Controls Grounding
Unit Heaters
Air Balance
Vibration

8. Measurement and Verification

Measurement and verification will continually confirm that all building systems are operating as
intended and will provide data to inform further operational improvements. Monitoring &
measurement equipment should be used for lighting systems, motor loads, and HVAC
equipment. Data will be analyzed, recorded on the Pre-Functional & Functional Test forms and
appropriate adjustments made to verify that systems are meeting the energy performance
requirements set forth by the design team.

9. Other Commissioned Systems

The following building systems are currently commissioned by third parties (typically led by sub-
contractors / system integrators).

Audio-Visual Systems (2.2 Audio-Visual Standards)
Building Security Systems (3.1 Access Control Systems)
Fire Alarm System: Based on code requirements (3.4 Fire Alarm Systems)
Fire Protection Systems: Based on code requirements (3.7 Sprinklers & 3.8 Chemical)

Building Envelope: Discuss the need for an Envelope Consultant early in the planning process.
If required the Envelope Consultant should be brought on board by the end of schematic design.

10. Requirements for Commissioning Documentation

The commissioning agent is responsible for providing the following documentation at the
indicated project milestones

Construction, Project Closeout and Post-Occupancy:

A. During the Construction phase - Phase 2 Commissioning Plan documentation shall be
maintained as described in Appendix 3.3-3 Commissioning Plan.

B. At Project Closeout - Pre-Functional Tests ( See Appendix 3.3-7), Functional Tests (See
Appendix 3.3-8), Final Commissioning Report including review of O&M Manuals (See
Appendix 3.3-6) and record of Project Closeout Best Practices Meeting Comments.

C. Post Occupancy - record of Project Closeout Follow-up Best Practices Meeting
Comments.

END OF DOCUMENT

4.1 Communication Closets

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.1 Comm Closets - page 1

Standards for Communication Closets-
Office of Information Technology

The need for communication closets must be addressed in the early stages of design in a Building
project. Designer shall meet with the Project Manager, OIT and Telephone Departments to
determine the number and size of the closets. This will be determined by the location and
number of outlet devices in the Building.

1. Communication Closets

Princeton University designates Communication Closets as either BDF (building distribution
frame) or IDF (intermediate distribution frame). BDF is the initial entry point for
communication wiring into the building which takes entry cables for telephone and data wires
and decentralizes them into feed cables sent to IDF Closets for further processing into
individual station cables sent to respective Rooms. BDF Closets may also be considered IDF
or have station cables running to them if there is a minimal load required in the building. For
larger loads, several IDF Closets may be required in addition to the main BDF Closet. An
important consideration is that no more than 295 of cable is allowed between termination points
and the IDF Closet location, including all bends. See section 2.6 Office of Information
Technology for building wide technology systems design.

A. Construction and Fire Rating: Review need for fire-rated enclosure and door assembly,
including door closer

B. Finishes

1. Walls Masonry: Block/Gyp Bd. Water protection on outside wall for new
construction. Existing construction, water seal exterior wall .

2. Floor Concrete, Sealed or Finished Floor

3. Ceiling Exposed structure is preferred. If rated ceiling is required; plaster ceiling
should be specified.

4. Door 36 minimum width; outward swinging doors are preferred to preserve
floor space

C. Utilities/Equipment

1. Power Quad receptacles with (4) dedicated 20 amp. circuits 18 A.F.F.
(new) may be higher than 18 A.F.F. (renovation). Two (2) quads are
to be placed on emergency power supply; two (2) quads on standard
building power. No separate UPS required.

2. Lighting All lighting shall utilize energy efficient fixtures. If selected,
fluorescent lamps shall be T8 with a color temperature of 3500K.
Lighting shall be switched at each door into room.

3. Ventilation Exhaust ventilation with make-up air based on size of closet and
careful evaluation of total equipment heat load and its
configuration/concentration within the closet. Coordinate all HVAC
issues with OIT. (2 air changes per hour minimum)
Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.1 Comm Closets - page 2

4. Piping, etc. Maintain headroom of 9-0; piping, conduit, ductwork, etc. to be
installed above that level.

5. Detector Smoke detection may be required; review use.

6. Sprinklers Provide upright pendant with wire cage in Buildings with suppression.

D. Equipment Requirements (BDF or IDF)

1. New construction No other systems, storage or J anitors equipment allowed in these
rooms.

2. Renovation Coordination with other utilities during renovation projects is essential.

Eliminate high voltage (440 volts or higher) including pass thru lines. OIT
cable/raceway must have a minimum of 10 clearance from high voltage systems.
Avoid installation of OIT cable near or thru Elevator Machine Rooms.
OIT termination panels should have a minimum of 20 clearance from high
voltage systems.

3. Overhead Cable Tray As designed by OIT

4. Floor-mounted Racks (Preferred) Minimizes cross-connections (patch cords)
between equipment. Must be floor bolted for
certification. Typically used for video boxes,
UPS and surge protectors.

5. Wall-Mounted Racks For telephone cut-down blocks. Locate closer to door to
minimize OIT interference.
E. Miscellaneous

1. Door lock Door lock shall be keyed with University EM core in a Best cylindrical
Lock or a Salto keyless lock.

2. Consolidation Points Not used. Ignore Siemon requirements.

END OF DOCUMENT
4.2 Corridors

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.2 Corridors - page 1

Standards for Corridors-
Grounds and Building Maintenance
Building Services

Hallways/Corridors/Stairwells

A. Construction and Fire Rating

Building use and occupancy load on corridors affect the fire rating requirements for a
corridor or hallway. The New J ersey Uniform Construction Code (UCC), the New J ersey
Uniform Fire Code (UFC), and the International Construction Code (ICC) must be
reviewed for these requirements. Note that the installation of a fire suppression system in
a building may reduce the requirements for fire rating of exit components; consult
NJ UCC and IBC.

B. Finishes

Must meet requirements of UCC, UFC, and IBC (as applicable); maintainability and
appearance over time are key concerns.

Finishes are project specific and should be determined within the context of the building
design, and with the consensus of the project team and the Universitys review
committee. Consideration should be given to the application of green wall, floor, ceiling
and trim finishes. Final decisions for each product shall be determined through applying a
Life-Cycle Cost Study (LCCS) in conformance with Section 1.2 (Sustainability).
Preferences for finishes from a maintenance and housekeeping perspective are:

1. Walls - masonry: brick, ground-face or painted block, glazed block,
ceramic or stone tile, plaster-finished masonry;

frame: with plaster finish over lath, rock-lath, Imperial board, or
abuse-resistant gypsum board decorated with a level 5 finish in
corridors and common spaces (refer to Appendix 4.13-2). The
Designer should attempt to incorporate breaks, reveals, or other
architectural details to divide large expanses of painted surface,
particularly in the vertical direction. This is especially true in high
traffic areas, areas using high pigment paints, or locations that are
especially subject to abuse.

To avoid cracking above door frames along corridors, include a control
joint at door hinge side, refer to ASTM C840 System XIII

2. Floors - masonry: concrete, terrazzo, stone, quarry or ceramic tile (all
properly sealed to resist staining);

vinyl composition tile, rubber tile;

carpet (in a color and pattern that can hide wear);
wood: oak, maple, or vertical grain Heartwood Southern pine strip
flooring with (VOC-compliant) water-based finish for halls and
corridors. Parquet floors have been problematic at Princeton.

entrance mats: specify polypropylene carpet-type walk-off mats with
flexible vinyl backing.

3. Ceilings - exposed masonry, steel, or wood (meeting code requirements);

concealed spline acoustic tile (in areas with no, or very low,
requirements for access above ceilings);

lay-in acoustic tile (in non-dormitory use);

framed plaster (preferred) or gypsum board, with all required access
panels indicated on reflected ceiling plans and MEP plans where
minimal systems exist; all public-area access panels below 9-0
A.F.F. are to have Best cylindrical locks (refer to section 4.4).

4. Trim - There should be some form of base in corridors for housekeeping
purposes, compatible with floor finish; tile, stone, wood, rubber;
review with Project Manager.

Rubber base in 4-0 lengths is preferred over vinyl base, where
appropriate. Manufactured inside and outside corners are not to be
used.

C. Utilities

All utility piping and conduits should be concealed within finishes. Points requiring
access should be centralized as much as possible -- group valves, junction boxes, etc.
near one another to minimize the need for multiple access doors or panels.

Designer is to produce typical corridor cross-section Drawings to illustrate all typically
required coordination of piping, duct, and conduit runs, and installation of devices.
Maximize ceiling heights while providing for utility runs.

1. Power Outlets -Maximum 25 between outlets in corridors; provide outlets in stairs at
each floor level. 20 amp. dedicated circuit per corridor.

2. Lighting - Recessed in ceiling or wall-mounted sconces; standardize lamp types
(26 Watt quad fluorescent, e.g., w/ common base configuration) to
minimize need for storing multiple replacement types. Coordinate
normal ambient lighting with emergency lighting; use campus
emergency power network where available for emergency lighting. A
list of replacement lamps is to be included in the closeout
documentation required of the contractor.

3. Ventilation - Determine requirements and need for heating and ventilation in
corridors early in project; review with Project Manager.

Plan duct runs for ventilation and make-up air and coordinate with
ceiling installation and other utilities. Consider impact of duct
distribution on structural frame depth in corridor.

New J ersey code review agencies normally request a written
ventilation schedule showing compliance with fresh air requirements
on the approved Drawings. Make-up air is generally required to be
tempered.
4. Fire Alarm - Provide required smoke detection, pull stations, and alarm signaling
devices. Maintain required clearance between smoke detectors and
HVAC supply diffusers. Coordinate device placement with other
corridor systems and with architectural finishes by preparing elevation
Drawings showing pull stations, horn/strobes, hold-open devices, exit
fixtures, etc. with other required devices, systems, and elements.

5. Sprinklers - Concealed pendant heads preferred; concealed sidewall heads are an
option.

In new construction and major renovation, exposed piping and exposed
sidewall heads are not acceptable.

6. Extinguishers - Coordinate location of hand-held fire extinguishers with standpipe
hose cabinets. Provide recessed cabinets for storage of extinguishers.
Review proposed locations with Project Manager, and with local fire
official as directed.

D. Doors and Hardware

Stair openings typically require rated assemblies (frame, door, and hardware); doors must
meet temperature-rise requirements. Provide detector-activated wall or floor hold-opens
on stair doors and smoke doors to eliminate use of wedges and chocks. Coordinate hold-
open devices with fire alarm system design.

Review the need for rated assemblies in corridors in buildings with fire-suppression
systems.

See Section 4.4 (Door Hardware) for requirements for hardware in corridors.

E. Miscellaneous

Designer should be aware of security and safety concerns: limits on dead-end corridors in
codes; control of access to remote areas; provision of emergency phones in appropriate
areas.

Review the need for signage and accessories such as message boards in corridors.
Drinking fountains are required by code, and water chillers are desirable; consider the
possible inclusion of hot-water dispensers with water chillers. Water resistant floor
materials should be used at drinking fountain locations. Consider use of splash guards at
wall surfaces as well.

END OF DOCUMENT
4.3 Custodial Closets, Storage and Special Facilities

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.3 Custodial/Sp Fac- page 1

Standards for Custodial Closets and Storage-
Building Services

The need for space for custodial purposes must be addressed in the programming phase of design in
a building project. It is important that early design review of custodial closets in storage rooms
occur with the Director of Building Services (609) 258-3713. Each building will require a custodial
storage room of approximately 150 square feet (and possibly larger in larger buildings) for paper
products and cleaning supplies and equipment. Ideally, custodial storage rooms should have a door
width of 40 or greater to allow for passage of larger cleaning machines. These closets are not to be
programmed with building mechanical and electrical spaces. Exact janitorial requirements for each
building are a program issue to be resolved during design development.

Buildings up to 10,000 square feet will require at least one janitors closet of approximately 35
square feet, and one of equal size on each additional floor level of the building.

Buildings up to 50,000 square feet will require two to three janitor closets, a minimum of one per
floor level.

Buildings up to 100,000 square feet will need three to four janitors closets minimum, at least one
per floor level; larger buildings should be programmed for additional closets at the rate of one per
25,000 square feet.

Buildings requiring a Custodial Office shall receive an OIT outlet in the office adjacent to a two-
gang electrical outlet, in accordance with Section 2.6.


A. Construction and Fire Rating: review need for fire-rated enclosure and door
assembly, including door closer.

B. Finishes

1. Walls - masonry: brick, block, glazed block, ceramic tile
frame with plaster finish: smooth finish, gloss painted finish
frame with level 4 GWB finish, gloss painted finish
NOTE: stainless steel backsplash above floor receptor

2. Floor - concrete (properly sealed), terrazzo, ceramic or quarry tile
coved base to match floor; no floor drain required

3. Ceiling - exposed structure is preferred if rated ceiling is required, plaster finish
should be specified

C. Utilities/Equipment

1. Receptor - floor receptor with raised rim is preferred, 36 square, with 24 high
stainless steel backsplash wall-mounted sink only; if receptor cannot
be used faucet with hose connection, short length of hose; provide
water-tight connection at receptor

2. Power - GFI receptacle on wall away from water supply
Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.3 Custodial/Sp Fac - page 2

3. Lighting - 4 utility fluorescent w/ guard at ceiling, wall switch

4. Ventilation - exhaust ventilation with make-up air; review requirements for
tempering make-up air

5. Piping, etc. - maintain headroom of 90; piping, conduit, ductwork, etc. to be
installed above that level.

6. Detector - smoke detection may be required; review use

7. Sprinklers - provide upright pendant with wire cage in buildings with
suppression

8. NOTE - in dormitory bathrooms not within vicinity of a janitors room,
provide hose bibbs with hot and cold water under lavatory. Use
hose bibbs with key stops.

D. Miscellaneous

Accessories - in one closet per building (typically), install cleaning chemical
dispenser over receptor

friction-type mounting brackets for mops, brooms, etc. on wall
over receptor (not under chemical dispenser)

12 - 14 stainless steel shelving high on third wall, 8 total if possible

2. Custodial Supply Areas

A. Construction and Fire Rating (same concerns as with janitors closets)

B. Finishes - durable finishes, painted walls and ceiling

C. Shelving - provide metal shelving, 16 deep minimum, 48 length (+/-), provide a
minimum of 22 clear between shelving; maintain required clearances for sprinklers

D. HVAC - meet minimum requirements for heating and ventilation

Standards for Special Facilites Shop Space-

A series of buildings on campus are maintained by dedicated Grounds and Building Maintenance
crews. These groups known as Special Facilities work in buildings due to the special programmatic
needs of the respective facilities. During the Pre-Schematic phase the design team will receive
direction from the Project Manager about Special Facilities programming requirements as approved
by the Grounds and Building Maintenance Special Facilities Manager (609) 258- 8539.

It is important that early design review of special facilities needs be conducted with the Project
Manager and representatives of GBM as designated by the Manager of Special Facilities.
Programming of the Special Facilities space should be discussed as well as proximity similar spaces
in adjacent buildings. It is important to understand what services can be shared between buildings
and what are the unique needs for this project. Exact Special Facilities size and program
requirements are defined by:

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.3 Custodial/Sp Fac - page 3
1. Equipment needs
2. Finishes
3. Special safety/ fire protection
4. Lighting/power and OIT
5. Plumbing requirements
6. Other project-specific issues

END OF DOCUMENT

4.4 Door Hardware

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.4 Door Hware - page 1

Standards for Door Hardware -

1. General

Early in the planning stages of the project, the Designer must meet with the University Project
Manager and with Facilities Grounds & Building Maintenance Department Lock Shop
Supervisor to review both the design standards and the program needs for locks and hardware in
the proposed project.

Also early in the project, a determination must be made regarding the need for or desirability of
including a card access system in the building. If card access is to be part of the building
program, that system must be designed to meet University standards (see Section 3.1 Access
Control Standards). It must also be determined whether Facilities Grounds & Building
Maintenances Lock Shop or Best Locking Company will be supplying and/or installing the cores
and providing the operating keys. All locksets are to be cylindrical unless otherwise
recommended by the projects security consultant in writing for review by the project team.

Due to the historically high incidence of errors in hardware schedules, every effort must be made
by the designer to have a first pass of the door hardware schedule and hardware specifications
prepared by the issuance of 50% construction document submission. A complete hardware
schedule with full hardware set specifications is required for the 85% construction document
submission.

Documentation will include, at a minimum:
Document
X X
Door Schedule X X X
Details Head, jamb and sill
conditions
X X
Security Layout -
Zoning/Elevation
X X
First pass with hardware sets,
manufacturers, etc.
X X
Complete
X

Prior to shop drawing submission, a hardware coordination meeting is to be scheduled with the
Project Manager, User groups, Facilities Lock Shop Representative and Construction Manager to
discuss project-specific issues related to lock functions, coordination, and delivery.

Princeton University utilizes hardware from a number of manufacturers; because of ongoing
maintenance needs, and normal modifications within buildings, it is important that the Designer
specify the standard manufacturers.

2. Standard: Non Electrified Hardware

For renovation work, the Designer shall not reduce the level of quality or service provided by
existing hardware when specifying replacements without prior approval by the Tech Team.

A. Cylindrical Locks - Best Locking Company, 7-pin removable core, #14 heavy duty lever
handle as a standard; the majority of locksets used in projects on campus are to be of the
cylindrical type. Any deviation must have the approval of the Facilities Grounds &
Building Maintenance Lock Shop Supervisor.

B. Panic devices - non-electrically operated - Von Duprin - Exposed vertical rods (not
concealed) are to be used at paired doors.

1. Panic Device Function to be established on a door-by-door basis by hardware
supplier in conjunction with the Lock Shop Supervisor (and Facilities Life Safety and
Security Systems Engineer where electronic card access applies).

C. Hinges - Stanley, full-ball bearing type, brass for exterior, steel for interior. The hinges
for all doors with access control and/or any type of closer are to be of the brass type with
ball bearings and non-removable pins, or approved non-electric continuous type (in
special cases).

Pemko heavy duty or Roton heavy-duty non-electric continuous type (see section 3.1
Access Control Standards)

D. Closers - LCN overhead (4041)
Rixson recessed floor closer #27. Specify heavy-duty for doors >2 thick.

E. Miscellaneous - door bumpers by Ives, Rockwell; security peepholes by Ives; dead stops
by Glynn-J ohnson

3. Key Schedule and Core Installations

Where it has been established that the cores will be combinated and installed by Best Locking
Company, the Project Manager is to arrange a meeting with the Designer, the departmental
representative for the project, the Facilities Grounds & Building Maintenance Lock Shop
Supervisor, and a representative from Best Locking Company during the shop drawing submittal
phase of the project. The purpose of the meeting is to determine requirements for lock function,
keying and for levels of master keying and sub-masters, and any access control issues.

Room numbers are to be finalized prior to this meeting, and the numbering and room
designations used in the key schedule are to be consistent with those used in fire alarm
nomenclature (see 3.2 Automatic Temperature Controls and 3.4 Fire Alarm Systems). Best
Locking Company (or Facilities Grounds and Building Maintenance Lock Shop, if contracted) is
to prepare the key schedule for review by the other parties, and is to proceed with setting up lock
cores upon receipt of the approved key schedule.

During or before this meeting of the project, whichever group is contracted to combinate and
install the cores shall be given sufficient notice to schedule the installation of the cores in the
finish hardware. It is critical that the specification require that the contractor retain all factory-
supplied lockset tailpieces needed for lock core installation; tailpieces are to be turned over to the
contracted party for core installation.

Specifications are to include requirements for employing only experienced, qualified mechanics
for installation of finish door hardware.

4. Electrified Hardware and Access Control Considerations

Refer to Section 2.7 Security for guideline to establish general security goals for the project.

See Section 3.1 for Access Control Systems guidelines. If an access control system is required,
all exterior doors, including mechanical room and mechanical penthouse doors which allow
access to other parts of the building, must be incorporated into the CACS design. Inclusion of
access control hardware may limit door design possibilities. Card readers are generally installed
on the building exterior, with conduit and door/frame preparation integrated with the envelope
design. While desirable for ease of system maintenance, card access readers installed in
vestibules may pose a security concern, depending on the design of the vestibule. Review
proposed installation with Project Manager and the systems administrator from Life Safety and
Security Systems and the Systems Engineer for Life Safety and Security Systems.

Campus Access Control System (CACS) Hardware Specifications Electro-mechanical as
follows:

A. Panic Hardware
All electro-mechanical Panic Hardware shall be manufactured by Von Duprin or Sargent.
Exceptions, e.g., Blumcraft may be considered based on Architectural design constraints.

1. Panic Bar with Electric Trim Release (24V Fail -Secure Operation)
This type of hardware has the locking function in the outside lever trim.
Electrical solenoid activation releases the locking mechanism allowing the lever
handle to withdraw the door latch. This type of locking hardware is standard on all
exterior dormitory doors. Key override shall be Night Latch function (NL).
Request to Exit switch shall be provided (RX-LC).
Door mounting configurations shall be RIM or Surface Vertical Rods (SVR).
Typical RIM model number: RX-LC98L-E996-US26D-3 (Von Duprin)
55-70-8874-LNB-32D (Sargent)
Typical SVR model number: RX-LC9827L-E996-US26D-3x7 (Von Duprin)
55-70-8774-LNB-32D (Sargent)
A Von Duprin Power Transfer Device (EPT-10 Von Duprin) (CEPT 10 Sargent)
shall be included with each panic bar installation. SVR type installations will require
a Panic Threshold, e.g., NGP 800 series.
Panic bar, trim styles and finishes to be specified by the Architect.

2. Panic Bar with Electric Latch Retraction (24V Fail-Secure Operation)
This type of hardware has the locking function in the bar. A special high current
power supply is required to retract the door latch. This allows for the use of standard
pull handles as outside trim. Commonly used on the exterior doors of Administrative
and Academic buildings. Required on all ADA motorized doors. Key override shall
be Night Latch function (NL). Request to Exit switch shall be provided (RX-LC).
Typical RIM model number: RX-LCEL98NL-US26D-3(Von Duprin)
55-56-70-8804-LNB-32D (Sargent)
Typical SVR model number: RX-LCEL9827NL-US26D-3x7(Von Duprin)
55-56-70-8710-LNB-32D (Sargent)
The following equipment shall be included with each EL panic bar installation:
a) Von Duprin Power Supply (PS914)
Double leaf doors only require one power supply.
b) Von Duprin Power Transfer Device (EPT-10)
Sargent Power Transfer Device (CEPT-10)
c) SVR type installations will require a Panic Threshold,
e.g., NGP 800 series.


3. Panic Bar with Delayed Egress function
This type of hardware has all the same requirements of a standard Latch Retraction
panic bar but with a Delayed action release scheme when exiting. Building code
requires that the hardware must be interconnected with the Fire Alarm System for
immediate release in case of fire.
Typical RIM model number: CX98L-07-US26D-3(Von Duprin)
Or Equal by: Sargent or Best
Typical SVR model number: CX9827L-07-US26D-3x7(Von Duprin)
Or Equal by: Sargent or Best
The following equipment shall be included with each CX panic bar installation:
a) Von Duprin Power Supply (PS873-2)
Double leaf doors only require one power supply.
b) Von Duprin Power Transfer Device (EPT-10)
Sargent Power Transfer Device (CEPT-10)
c) SVR type installations will require a Panic Threshold,
e.g., NGP 800 series.

B. Mortise Lockset Hardware (24V Fail-Secure Operation)
Electrified mortise locksets are the preferred hardware for all Access Controlled doors
that dont require panic egress. Key override shall be Night Latch function (NL).
Request to Exit (RX) switch shall be provided as well as a Door Status monitor switch
(DSM). The manufacturer of choice can be:
1. SCHLAGE - RXL9080BEU series, and modified by COMMAND ACCESS
TECHNOLOGIES as typical model #ML180.
2. Sargent RX 70-8271-24V LNB x 26D
Trim styles and finishes to be specified by the Architect.

C. Cylindrical Lockset Hardware (24V Fail-Secure Operation)
Electrified cylindrical locksets are only to be used on Access Controlled doors in place of
the mortise type when there are specific Architectural constraints.
Key override shall be Night Latch function (NL). Request to Exit (RX) switch shall
be provided. The manufacturer of choice can be:
1. SCHLAGE - RXND80BEU series, and modified by COMMAND ACCESS
TECHNOLOGIES as typical model #CLN80BEU-RHO-626-24V-REX.
2. Or Equal by Sargent or Best
Trim styles and finishes to be specified by the Architect.

D. Motorized Door Operators (ADA)
The LCN 4600 series is the overhead operator of choice.
Exceptions, e.g., Horton may be considered based of Architectural design constraints.
Concealed underground operators will be considered only as a last resort and must be
reviewed/approved by the Life Safety and Security System Engineer.

E. Combination locks - Trilogy battery powered programmable lockset by Alarm
Lock is currently being used. These are typically installed by the university Lock Shop,
but are to be specified by the Designer.

F. Keyless Locks Keyless locks by Salto is the campus standard. Refer to Facilities Life
Safety and Security Systems and the Universitys Keyless Lock Program for an update on
specific recommendations (including the potential need for Hot Spots and/or WIFI).

5. Requirements for Mechanical Rooms, Penthouses, Roof Access

Specify cylindrical lockset with storeroom function. If padlocks are to be used (on roof hatches,
e.g.), specify Best Locking interchangeable-core padlocks; use weathertight locks for exterior
application.

6. Millwork and Cabinetry Locks

Specify Best deadbolt or dead latch cabinet locks for custom dormitory cabinetry or millwork.
Use Best 5L7RD2 for all custom applications which includes interchangeable cores.

Specify National, CCL, Olympus or Best deadbolt cabinet locks for non-dormitory
applications of custom and, wherever possible, contract furniture. Use National C8173, CCL
0737, or Best 5L7RD2.

Media Services lecterns and media cabinets are to be keyed with the media module (915).

7. Access Panel Locks

Access panels are commonly used for the maintenance of building utilities and are typically
required to be locked. Those which exist in maintenance (non-public) areas do not require locks;
those in public spaces are required to be lockable. Exceptions may be made in the case of very
high ceilings (above 9-0 A.F.F.) or other unusual locations and should be reviewed by the
Building Maintenance Tech Team Coordinator.

Depending on the access panel manufacturer, locks should be either Best rim cylinder (model
1E72) or mortise cylinder (model 1E74).


contractor.

documents.

The as-builts are to include as a minimum: Door & Hardware schedule with all installed items
(mfg. model, finish), details of doorways (sections).


END OF DOCUMENT

4.5 Electrical Rooms

Release 8.0 (March 2010) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.5 Elec Rooms - page 1

Standards for Electrical Rooms -
Building Services

Electrical Rooms must be considered in the early stages of the Design Phase, and consideration
must be given to location, size and number of Electrical Rooms. Service Entrance to Building
usually determines location for Transformer Vault. All Transformer Vaults must remain free of
other systems not associated with electrical distribution systems.

Main distribution with switchgear shall be designed in a separate room if the building
program allows the space and location.

1. Design Review Facilities Engineering Department and Maintenance Department
shall review electrical systems at the following phases.
a. Design Development Major Equipment to be Shown
Switchgear
Transformers
Distribution Panels
Generator
Motor Control Centers
Automatic Transfer Switches
Feeder Distribution

b.50% CD Major Equipment to be Shown
Schematic Phase Equipment Plus:
Branch Panels
Panel Schedules

2. Room Construction
a. Walls: Masonry, Block/Concrete: Preferred for transformer and
switchgear.

Gypsum Wall Board: Can be used for Distribution Closets.

b.Floor: Concrete: Preferred. Concrete slab in Basement shall be sealed.
Above grade epoxy seal slab. Check with Project Manager for any
other proposed floor construction/finish.

Sleeves in slabs above grade shall be raised 1.

See Appendix 4.11-2 for pipe sleeve and firestopping requirements
based on wall/floor materials.

c. Ceiling: Exposed structure or if sound attenuation is a consideration,
sheetrock with insulation above.

d. Door: 36 minimum size. Transformer/Switchgear Vaults size as
dictated by code requirements.

Door lock shall have University core EM. Area Substation,
Elevator Machine Rooms and Generator Rooms shall be cored
with AS.

3. Distribution of Electrical Rooms
a. Location: Careful consideration shall be given to Transformer Vaults and
Switchgear Rooms. If the building program allows, locate away
from program space.

b.Quantity: Minimum (1) panel per floor and each panel shall serve that floor.

No feed-through or riser panels. (Individual feeds required to each
panel)

4. Clearances Between Equipment
a. Code Minimums: 3-0 minimum for branch distribution panels.
Transformer Vaults and Switchgear Room clearances
vary. Refer to code requirements.

b.Working Clearances: Consider back access for equipment, code driven
requirements.

Dry type transformers, floor mounted. Use cork pads
for vibration isolation.

c. EMF: Locate Transformer Vaults and switchgear away from program
spaces. Project Manager to coordinate with program.

5. Housekeeping Pads
a. Size/Strength: 4 high, rounded edges, minimum 2500psi. Doweled to
existing slab. Include WWF for reinforcement.

b.Type of Equipment on Pads:
Generators
Motor Control Centers
Transformers
For multiple pieces of switchgear lay channel frame on
edge and pour concrete around.

6. Equipment Mounting
a. Recessed/Surface:
Surface mount in Mechanical Rooms
Recessed in finished areas. (Spare conduits run to above
ceiling. Enough conduits to fill-out spare circuits. Box or
trough at end of conduit stubs. Must be accessible)

b.Unistrut Channel On exterior walls or existing walls not plum.


7. Coordination Between Other Services
a. HVAC

Equipment
Ductwork Not allowed in Transformer/Switchgear Rooms
Piping

b.Sprinkler Piping (Protect critical electrical equipment from water damage)

c. Elevator Equipment Rooms and Shaft No other equipment not associated
with Room or Shaft.

d.OIT Provide standard OIT station outlet at any new Switchgear and transfer
switch for SCADA requirements.

8. Heating and Ventilation Requirements
a. Exhaust/Ventilation. Review code requirements to meet standards. Maintain
ambient outside temperature or 55 in Winter.

9. Lighting Type, Convenience Receptacles and OIT outlets
a. All lighting shall be utilize energy efficient fixtures. If selected, fluorescent
lamps shall be T8 with a color temperature of, 3500K. Lighting shall be
switched at each door into room.

b.At least one light shall be circuited to the emergency panel. Light shall be
switched and handle shall be lighted in the Off position. Locate switch
closest to door frame.

c. One 20 Amp. convenience receptacle per 150 sq. ft. floor space or not more
than 25 feet apart. One receptacle (red) on stand-by circuit in Main
Mechanical Rooms, Switchgear Rooms. Each space shall have a minimum of
one receptacle or more.

d.At least one OIT outlet required for connecting selected equipment to the
campus electric SCADA system.

10. Scaled vertical section cut(s) at major horizontal distribution pathways (such as
horizontal pipe chases and above congested hallway ceilings), showing a coordinated
depiction of all MEP systems at multiple locations;

11. Refer to Section 3.12 (Electrical Systems Design) for allowable electrical pathway and
conduit equipment.

12. Requirements for As-Built Documentation
a. On the as-builts, the contractor is to highlight changes made to submittals and
approved documents.

b.The as-builts are to include the following as a minimum:
Switchgear and related switches
Electrical riser Diagrams
Electrical power and lighting floor layout plans with conduit and circuits
shown as-built.
Electrical fixture schedule with actual mfr. data.
Electrical panel schedules including mfr. data.
Motor Control Center schedule

END OF DOCUMENT

4.6 Elevators

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.6 Elevators - page 1

Standards for Elevators -

The following standards set forth the criteria to be utilized by Designers for the installation of new
elevators at Princeton University. The standards have been prepared for use by Designers to
properly specify in-ground hydraulic elevators and geared traction elevators in a manner satisfactory
to Princeton University. The Technical Guide Specifications for hydraulic and geared traction
elevators in Appendix 4.6 shall be utilized to prepare the Contract Specifications for the elevators.
The Technical Guide Specifications are available through the Index of References (below).
Although the standards apply specifically to new elevators, they should be used as a reference for
upgrading existing elevators as well.

1. Contacts



C. MEP Systems Manager MacMillan Building, 609-258-2540

D. Elevator and Electrical Shop Supervisor MacMillan Building, 609-258-3991

PDF MS Word
A. Technical Guide Specifications for a
Conventional In-Ground Hydraulic
Elevator at Princeton University Appendix 4.6-1 Appendix 4.6-1

B. Technical Guide Specification for a Geared
Traction Elevator at Princeton University Appendix 4.6-2 Appendix 4.6-2

C. Elevator Emergency Telephone Detail Appendix 3.9.2

3. Codes and Standards




D. NJ UCC subchapter 12 for requirements for elevator safety

E. IBC (International Building Code)

F. ASME A17.1 Elevator and Escalator Code

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

4. Review and Procedural Guidelines

Early in design development the Designer should arrange a meeting with the Project Manager,
the MEP Systems Manager in Grounds and Building Maintenance, the Elevator and Electrical
Shop Supervisor in Grounds and Building Maintenance and the University elevator consultant to
discuss the programmatic requirements of the proposed elevator, and to begin to set technical
requirements. The meeting should be followed up with a review session with the same attendees
and the Universitys Code Analyst.

At 50% completion of contract documents for the project - when the second round of internal
reviews generally takes place for a new building or renewal project -- the mechanical design of
the elevator should be nearly complete and the architectural and MEP coordination required for
the installation of the elevator should be near completion as well. The elevator documentation
should be included with the contract documents in the 50% review.

Shop Drawings are to be submitted to the construction manager, who is to forward the
submission to the Universitys Project Manager. Note that elevator plan review and inspections
in the Municipality are performed by the State DCA Elevator Safety Unit.

The Universitys Project Manager will turn the shop Drawings over to the University Code
Analyst who makes the official review submittal to the State DCA. Shop Drawings for permit
review must be signed and sealed by a licensed professional Engineer (or Architect).

A copy of the shop Drawings is also to be provided to the Project Manager for review by the
MEP Systems Manager and the Elevator and Electrical Shop Supervisor.

5. Design and Installation Guidelines General

A. Elevators shall service all floors of a building. Access to floors may be limited, if
necessary, by key switches or access control card readers. Review requirements for
limiting access with Project Manager.

B. Two- to Six-Floor Structures, maximum rise of sixty feet: Use of an in-ground hydraulic
elevator or geared traction elevator is required.

C. Seven-Floor Structures and above, or greater rise than sixty feet: Use of a geared traction
elevator is required.

6. Design and Installation Guidelines - Elevator Machine Rooms

A. Elevator machine room walls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of
the IBC.

B. The Elevator Mechanical Room shall be adequately ventilated and accessed by means of
an outwardly swung fire rated door measuring at least 3-0 x 7-0. The door must be
outfitted with a spring closer and lockset. The lockset installed on the Elevator
Mechanical Room doors shall be keyed like the Universitys other Elevator Machine
Rooms and shall automatically lock when closed.

C. Non-elevator related equipment; piping and conduit shall not be located in or run through
the elevator mechanical room.

D. The elevator mainline electrical disconnect and the mechanical room light switch must be
located adjacent to the mechanical room door and arranged so they may be accessed
without entering the room.

E. Clearance shall be provided for all control panels and equipment cabinet doors to open at
least 90 degrees, and at least a three feet area free of obstructions shall be provided in
front of control panels and equipment cabinets. Access to hydraulic pump units and
geared traction machines shall be adequate for maintenance and shall meet code
requirements.

F. The mechanical room must be provided with a minimum of one wall mounted ten- pound
fire extinguisher. The extinguisher is to be mounted adjacent to the door on the exterior
of the Elevator Control Room.

G. Provide 30-foot candles of fluorescent lighting in elevator machine rooms. Lighting shall
be positioned so it will not create shadows while service personnel are working on major
equipment items.

H. Two elevator hoistway door keys shall be provided to the University Elevator Shop. On
site key requirements to be discussed with the MEP Systems Manager and the Elevator
and Electrical Shop Supervisor and the University Code Analyst.

I. Paint elevator mechanical room floors with two coats of light gray semi-gloss oil based
paint. Paint elevator room walls and ceiling with two coats of white paint.

J . Elevator Machine Rooms are required to be ventilated and cooled as necessary to
maintain a room temperature not exceeding 78 degrees F or lower as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer. Utilize chilled water if available or specify stand alone unit.

K. Elevator machine rooms shall be located in areas not susceptible to flood water damage.

7. Design and Installation Guidelines - Elevator Hoistway and Pit

A. Hoistway walls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of the IBC

B. A pit ladder is to be installed.

C. Non-elevator related equipment, piping and conduit shall not be located in or run through
the elevator hoistway or pit.

D. All lighting shall utilize energy efficient fixtures. If selected, a 3500K color temperature
fluorescent light fixture (Kenall Model R848-2-32-EB1-120-KO only) with two 4 foot
long T-8 tubes on the hoistway wall at each Floor Level, in the refuge space at the top of
the hoistway and in the elevator pit. Light fixtures must have lense covers. The lighting
shall be operable from a switch located in the pit and at the top floor.

E. A duplex GFCI electrical receptacle is to be installed three feet above the finished pit
floor for use by elevator mechanics.

F. Provide a 24 by 24 deep sump pit in the elevator pit with a rigid aluminum grating.
Install an oil-sensing sump pump in the sump pit. The effluent from the sump pit shall be
piped to a mechanical room and directed to a floor drain connected to the sanitary sewer
system via a funnel type floor drain cover plate. Note the discharge must be into open air;
sump pit effluent piping must be piped into the sewer system by means of a double
indirect drain. (This requirement may vary depending on municipality.)

G. Single Non-GFCI receptacles on independent dedicated circuits must be installed for
the sump pump and elevator scavenger pump (hydraulic elevators) coordinated to the
location of the pump equipment.

H. Provide alarm signal wire to Engineering Department Energy Management section to
alert personnel of a shutdown of the sump pump due to oil in the sump.

I. Ensure proper venting of the elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME A17.1 Elevator
and Escalator Code.

J . Ensure proper refuge space is provided on top of the car enclosure in accordance with
ASME A17.1 Elevator and Escalator Code.

K. Paint elevator pit floor and walls (up to the sill) with two coats of light gray semi-gloss
oil based paint. Paint all exposed metal in hoistway (except guide-rails) with two coats of
rust inhibitive paint.

8. Design and Installation Guidelines - Related Work

For proper installation of an elevator, appropriate related work must be included in the project.
The following list, not necessarily all-inclusive, contains some of the work needed to be included
in other sections of a project specification.

A. Smoke and heat detectors shall be installed per the American National Safety Code for
Elevators, ANSI A17.1 (latest edition accepted by the State of New J ersey) and
interconnected with the fire fighter provisions of the elevators control system. Smoke
detectors shall be installed at the top of the shaft, in the elevator machine room and at the
interior elevator lobbies and shall be the sole devices to initiate Phase I Elevator Recall.
Heat detectors shall be installed in Elevator Machine Room, at top of hoistway and in
hoistway pit.

B. A shunt trip circuit breaker shall be provided on the main power feed to the elevator any
time the hoistway and or elevator machine room is sprinklered. Anytime the elevator
hoistway or machine room is sprinklered, a fixed temperature heat detector (with a
temperature rating lower than the sprinkler head) shall be installed in close proximity to
each sprinkler head and wired to the main power shunt trip circuit breaker. Activation of
a heat detector shall cause the main power to the elevator to disconnect.

C. Fire service key switches will be available at each elevator inside of key lock boxes. Fire
department will have key to lockboxes (all keyed alike).

D. Cab Telephones All cabs must be equipped to accept an elevator telephone as specified
by the elevator guide specifications, which have been coordinated with the
Telecommunications Office. Accommodation for mounting the telephone must include
holes tapped to accept standard mounting machine screws.

E. The preference for cab lighting is 4 T-8 fluorescent fixtures connected to the emergency
system.

9. Requirements for Testing and Training

A. The elevator subcontractor is responsible for conducting the final acceptance test with the
local or State inspector, with a representative of the Universitys elevator maintenance
shop in attendance. Project Manager is to be advised of the schedule for inspection and
testing.

The procedure for testing shall be followed closely in accordance with code requirements.

The construction manager is responsible for witnessing and approving the acceptance
test. The elevator subcontractor shall certify the report of the test data, and shall deliver a
signed and sealed copy to the Project Manager prior to final payment.

B. At a minimum, prior to seeking final acceptance of the completed project as specified by
the contract documents, the contractor shall conduct a four (4) hour training program on-
site with University elevator maintenance personnel. The session shall provide
instructions on the proper safety procedures to be utilized in assisting passengers that may
become entrapped inside the elevator car. The session shall also provide instructions on
the use of each control feature and its correct sequence of operation. Control features
covered shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Independent service operations;
2. Emergency fire recall operations, Phase I;
3. Emergency in-car operations, Phase II;
4. Emergency power operations, if applicable;
5. Emergency communications equipment;
6. Security operating features;
7. Interactive systems management, if applicable;
8. Remote monitoring/controls, if applicable.


The Designer is responsible for checking the accuracy of as-built Drawings and documentation
prepared by the elevator contractor. On the as-builts, the contractor is to highlight changes made
to submittals and approved documents.

The as-builts are to include details of any tie-ins to other systems, such as fire alarm and electric
systems, including elevator shaft wiring and details. At the time of final testing, the contractor is
to turn over to the Project Manager three copies of the bound maintenance manual and operating
instructions. The manual is to contain wiring Diagrams, parts list, list of recommend spare parts,
and list of manufactures of major components of the elevator, along with operating and
maintenance recommendations.

The Project Manager is responsible for distributing copies of the as-builts to the appropriate
University representatives for review prior to project closeout and final payment. These
representatives include members of the Facilities Engineering and Grounds and Building
Maintenance Departments.


11. Non-conformance with Standards

Any requests for exceptions to elevator standards at Princeton University shall be presented to
the Project Manager, with written argument detailing the reasons for the requested exception.
The Project Manager will review the request with the MEP Systems Manager, University Code
Analyst, the Elevator and Electrical Shop Supervisor, and with the Universitys elevator
consultant if deemed appropriate. The exception will be granted only if such action is in the best
interests of the University.

END OF DOCUMENT

4.7 Laundry Rooms

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.7 Laundry Rms - page 1

Standards for Laundry Rooms -
Building Services

These standards apply specifically to laundry rooms in dormitories and similar residential facilities;
departments, such as Athletics, which include laundry facilities, establish standards individually.
The Designer should consult with the client-department for applicable requirements.

Laundry facilities are included in each upper-class dormitory and in residential colleges. Access to
the laundry room must be through the interior of the dormitory. Particular attention must be paid to
the nuisance factor of a laundry room - the effect of noise and heat on nearby rooms.

Laundry rooms are to have durable epoxy floor finishes or stained and sealed concrete and must
have adjustable floor drains in proximity to washers and in any other critical area.


A. Heavy-duty washers with optional pedestal, non-coin/digitally operated in dormitories.
Number will vary with space available, but there should not be fewer than three washers.
Consider vibration isolators under unit feet in wood frame structures. See Appendix 4.7-1
for current model cuts; current model is MAYTAG "Neptune" high efficiency front-
loading non-coin washer. The ratio of students to washers/dryers is 25-1.

Recessed combination supply and drainage boxes should be used, with integral shut-off
valves for hot and cold water lines; Watts Water Tite with the valves mounted in the
box Model #W2800. Standpipe should not be set lower than 34 above floor or base of
washer. Washing machines should sit on optional pedestal.

B. Stacking electric dryers should be used. Current model is MAYTAG stacked, non-coin,
digital timer 240V/60 Hz-flat front (This requires two (2) - 30 Amp outlets at each stack);
see Appendices 4.7-2 and 4.7-4 for current model cuts.

Gas dryers are not used in dormitories, due to requirements for carbon monoxide
monitoring in installations in residential occupancies. The dryers should not be coin
operated in dormitories.

A bulkhead should be designed around ganged dryers to alleviate visual, acoustic, and
safety concerns. 4 of maintenance and access space is needed behind the dryers.

Dryers should be fitted with individual vents running to a plenum located at the discharge
point. There should be no additional screening added between the dryer and the plenum.
All plenums must be accessible for cleaning. Clean outs to be supplied at all elbows.
Discharge hoods should be fitted with gravity louvers if possible; even large-mesh
screening tends to become clogged with lint.

Care should be taken to avoid discharging vents near student room windows.
Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.7 Laundry Rms - page 2
Plan to install one electric dryer (stacked) for each washer in the laundry room. Please
note that one stack dryer is actually =two dryers. Consult Building Services to confirm
current model numbers, and for clearance requirements for maintenance of units.

Laundry storage cubbies will be installed at a 1:1 ratio with dryers. The dimensions
should be approximately 2w x 2h x 2.5d. Additionally, a white board will be mounted
in each laundry room, the dimensions should be approximately 3hx 5w.

See Appendix 4.7-3, Typical Ganged Dryer Exhaust Isometric.

C. A fiberglass floor-mounted laundry sink with a hose bib should be provided in the
facility.

D. Motion sensor-activated light fixtures should be used, with an unswitched fixture in each
room, on the emergency lighting circuit. Standard fluorescent fixtures should be used (T8
tubes, 3500K; see Section 3.5 Lighting Design).

E. A fixed table or counter with hanging rod for folding, with built ins for bins

F. Large-volume trash receptacles

G. Waiting/study area is desirable; visual connection with adjacent space or corridor is
desirable.

H. Room ventilation system is necessary; review requirements for tempered make-up air for
ventilation and dryer exhaust.

I. An emergency wall phone should be installed in the laundry area. (A panic-button may
be necessary for remote location; review with Project Manager and Department of Public
Safety.)

J . A fire extinguisher in an extinguisher cabinet; recessed cabinets are preferred. See
appendix 3.8-2.

K. A university standard roll-type paper towel dispenser and a university standard soap
should be installed in each Laundry Room. These dispensers are supplied by Princeton
University and to be installed by the contractor.

L. Coordinate installation of Laundry View laundry monitoring system with OIT

M. Attention to detailing of a shelf like structure that prevents items from falling and
accumulating behind the machines is preferred.

END OF DOCUMENT
4.8 Mechanical Rooms

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.8 Mech Rooms - page 1

Standards for Mechanical Rooms -
Building Services

Mechanical Rooms must be considered in the early stage of the Design Phase, and consideration
must be given to location, size and number of Mechanical Rooms. Adequate Mechanical Room
space will be achieved only through regular review of the required spaces. All equipment must
have enough space around it for maintenance work.

1. Design Review Facilities Engineering Department shall review Mechanical Rooms
and associated systems at the following phases.
a. Schematic Phase Major Equipment to be Shown on Final Schematic Layouts
Air Handlers, Fan Coil Units
Air Compressors
Heat Exchangers
Pumps
Water Heaters/Converters
Condensate Handling Systems
Backflow Preventors
Fire Pumps
Building Services Backflow Preventor

b.Design Development Major Equipment to be Shown on Final Design
Development Submission
Schematic Phase Equipment Plus
Large Bore Piping 4 and Above
Ductwork Sizing
Wall-Mounted Equipment and Controls

c. Construction Documents
Remainder of Equipment, Piping and Distribution
Scaled vertical section cut(s) at major horizontal distribution pathways
(such as horizontal pipe chases and above congested hallway ceilings),
showing a coordinated depiction of all MEP systems at multiple locations.

d. Coordination Drawings Field Produced by Contractor (s)
Facilities Engineering Department will review 3/8 scales coordination
Drawings of all equipment to be installed in Mechanical Rooms. This will
be done as a concurrent Shop Drawing submittal or as part of a
Coordination Meeting(s) which includes University participation.

2. Room Construction

a. Walls: Masonry, Block/Concrete Preferred wall system. Check with
Project Manager if other materials are to be used. Specify fire
safing systems and sleeving per attached schedule.

b. Floor: 6 Concrete Sealed in Basement, epoxy painted or broadcast
slabs above grade.

c. Ceiling: Exposed structure (no ceiling)

d. Door: Metal or kickplate on push side. Minimum 36 width. Double
doors at major equipment rooms.

Penthouse elevator shall have rooftop access for
removal/replacement of equipment.

3. Distribution of Mechanical Rooms

a. Location and Quantity: Related to Site Conditions and Program
Basement Preferred for heating equipment.
Penthouse Noise consideration for spaces below Penthouses. Equipment
Rooms in Penthouses must have elevator rooftop access.

4. Clearance Between Equipment All final equipment designs must demonstrate
that equipment clearances have been considered and
function per the equipment layout.

a. Code Minimums Electrical Panels 3-0 clearance. Mechanical
equipment refer to manufacturer recommendations.
Review all clearances during Schematic Phase.

b.Working Clearances Fans, 20 clearance to bearings/belts/motors.Refer
to manufacturer clearance recommendations for:
Coil removal
Filter replacement
Tube bundle replacement for heat
exchangers

Minimum 2 to 3 clearance around pumps and
compressors

5. Equipment Mounting Discuss floor vs. ceiling mounted during Design
Development.

Do not hang equipment from wood frame
construction. Basement area and all equipment
should be floor mounted to eliminate vibration
above.

Mount air handling units high enough to allow for
adequate condensate pitch to drain.

Check seismic requirements.

a. Unistrut Channel Bolt to pads where possible.

Consolidate near, like systems.

b.Housekeeping Pads 4 high, rounded edges, minimum 2500 psi.
Doweled to existing slab. Include woven wire
fabric for reinforcement.

Install concrete curbs around duct penetrations or
multiple pipe penetrations.

Sleeves shall be 1 above slabs, for vertical pipe
penetrations.

See Appendix 4.11-2 for pipe sleeve and
firestopping requirements based on wall/floor
materials.

6. Coordination Between Other Services

a. Electrical Motor Control Centers shall be in Mechanical Rooms.
Coordination for MCC/starters by Electrical Contractor.
Electrical Contractor shall provide all starters. This
coordination must be shown on electrical documents.

b.Telephone (1) house phone per Building in Major Mechanical Room.

c. OIT Must be kept away from high voltage (440 volts and over).
OIT closets shall be dedicated for OIT equipment only.

7. Heating & Ventilating Requirements

a. Exhaust/Ventilation. Review code requirements to meet minimum standards.
Equipment heat loads and make-up air requirements must be considered.

8. Lighting Type and Convenience Receptacles

a. All lighting shall utilize energy efficient fixtures. If selected, fluorescent
lamps shall be T8 with a color temperature of 3500K. Lighting shall be
switched at each door into room.

b.At least one light shall be circuited to the emergency panel. Light shall be
switched and handle shall be lighted in the Off position.

c. One 20 Amp. convenience receptacle per 150 sq. ft. floor space or not more
than 25 feet apart. One receptacle (red) on emergency circuit in Main
Mechanical Rooms and Switchgear Rooms.

50 Amp. 208 volt 3-phase dedicated receptacle circuit in Penthouse
Equipment Rooms for welding purposes.

Type of receptacle shall be NEMA approved.

9. Miscellaneous

a. Floor Drains In all Mechanical Rooms

b.Install floor trenches in Basement Mechanical Rooms where needed for;
condensate drains from air handlers and steam condensate drains.

c. Provide hose bib in all Mechanical Rooms (key stop).

d.Provide fire extinguisher in all Mechanical Rooms, preferably within a glass-
fronted cabinet, recessed preferred.

e. Provide Mechanical Room ventilation.


a. On the as-builts, the contractor is to highlight changes made to submittals and
approved documents.

b.The as-builts are to include the following as a minimum:
Scaled layouts based on coordination Drawings.
Sump pump details (mfg., serial number).
Exterior hose bib locations.
Waste, water and vent riser Diagrams.
Storm water and roof drain riser Diagram.
Schedule of plumbing components including backflow preventers
(mfg., model number, size).
All HVAC Drawings with final component (including motors) sizes
and locations (unit mfg. an model #, serial #).
HVAC components in each room labeled with source number (Valve
Tagging Chart).
HVAC piping riser Diagram.

END OF DOCUMENT

4.9 Painting

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.9 Painting - page 1

Standards for Painting -

Paint finishes, once a new building or a renovation project has been completed and occupied, may
require frequent maintenance if a building is to be kept presentable. The frequency of maintenance
depends on the type of facility, the quality of the finishes, and the nature of use - or abuse - the
occupants subject the building to. Regardless of the frequency of maintenance required, the task of
repainting a space or a building most often falls to the Maintenance Paint Shop, rather than to a
contractor.

It is important for the Designer to know that Princetons Paint Shop stocks a limited number of
paint colors, has the capability of mixing a fairly wide range of colors, but should not be expected to
provide an infinitely varied palate. The University employs a number of standard colors that are to
be used for common spaces such as corridors, offices, classrooms, laboratories, dormitory rooms,
and the like. The Designer is normally allowed greater latitude in selecting colors for special
spaces such as lobbies, lecture halls, lounges, and similar spaces.

The Designer should attempt to incorporate breaks, reveals, or other architectural details to divide
large expanses of painted surface, particularly in the vertical direction. This is especially true in
high traffic areas, areas using high pigment paints, or locations that are especially subject to abuse.
Consider locations of items such as trash / recycling containers relative to accent paint locations, as
these areas are subject to frequent marring and require a higher degree of maintenance.

Regardless of the colors used in a project, the Designer is expected to produce a color schedule for
approval by the University (through the Project Manager). This schedule is to be updated at the end
of the project and converted into a record of color selections that is turned over the Maintenance
Paint Shop foreman. Record should be provided on the as-built Room Finish Schedule, updated per
project conditions, as well.

Unless otherwise requested in writing by the Facilities Grounds & Building Maintenance Paint
Shop Supervisor, all excess paint shall be removed from the construction site.

1. Interior
The Designer should be aware of New J erseys requirements for minimizing the volatile off-
gassing compounds (VOCs) in products such as paint finishes, and should specify products
accordingly. The preferred manufacturers used for paint are; M. A. Bruder (MAB), Benjamin
Moore or Sherwin-Williams.

A. Preferred finishes: see the chart below titled Interior Paint Finish Recommendations for
New Buildings and Major Renovations.

B. Refer to Appendix 2.4-3 Memo: Standard Dormitory Paint Colors dated 1/18/2000 for
dormitory projects.

C. In areas of heavy traffic, such as hallways and corridors, consider the use of a wainscot finish
(with or without appropriate trim), which would allow for an easily cleaned and maintained
finish on the lower surface, and lower-luster finish on the upper, reflective area.

D. For wood flooring, finishes must meet New J ersey requirements for volatile organic
compound compliance. Water-based finishes have proven suitable for private rooms, but oil-
Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.9 Painting - page 2
based finishes wear better, and should be specified for public spaces such as corridors. Meet
or exceed manufacturers recommended minimum number of coats. To achieve color match,
consider staining prior to the application of water-based protective coatings.

E. Interior wood finishes require careful review of sanding and sealer procedures as they relate
to staining and finish coating. Long-term UV protection is essential.

F. If interior walls are exceptionally high (such as atriums or loft areas), consider the installation
of a break in the upper wall, such as a picture rail or second contrasting color, to allow for
less maintenance painting over time.

2. Exterior

A. Proper preparation, cleaning, and priming of surfaces are essential to a durable exterior paint
application. Proper techniques should be specified and stressed during construction.

B. Exterior wood: for exterior wood trim, doors, and windows painting is preferred over a
clear finish with stain; high-gloss or semi-gloss preferred for longer life of finish and
substrate. If a clear finish is specified, a gloss spar varnish should be used; satin or matte
finishes exposed to the elements typically require refinishing within the year.

C. Exterior metal: again, proper preparation is critical, as is the primer. Insure that primer is
compatible with the finish specified. Gloss finishes are preferred on metal as well as wood
for longevity of finish.

3. Special Coatings

Long-lasting exterior finishes are encouraged, and special coatings may be specified as part of a
planned low-maintenance building project. Among the special coatings that can be used are
anodized finishes, tnemic paints, and epoxy paints. Shop-applied special finishes are preferred to
site-applied, due to better control of conditions.

Exterior metals must be coated if not naturally weather-resistant such as copper and brass. Steel
should be galvanized prior to receiving finishes, unless the specifications for a special coating
will not permit galvanizing.

Regardless of finish used, manufacturers instructions for on-site application and touch-up of
finishes are to be followed. As part of the submittal process, those instructions are to be
provided to the Project Manager, with a copy for the Maintenance Paint Shop foreman.


Prior to completion of construction and occupancy, the painting subcontractor is required to
provide the university Paint Shop a detailed schedule of actual paints used in each space of the
project, including manufacturer, color name or formula, sheen applied, etc.

Additionally, provide an electronic version of the final room paint schedule as part of the As-
Built documentation for the project.


END OF DOCUMENT
R
e
l
e
a
s
e

9
.
0

(
M
a
r
c
h

2
0
1
2
)

P
r
i
n
c
e
t
o
n

U
n
i
v
e
r
s
i
t
y

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s

D
e
p
a
r
t
m
e
n
t

D
e
s
i
g
n

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s

M
a
n
u
a
l

4
.
9

P
a
i
n
t
i
n
g

-

p
a
g
e

3

I
n
t
e
r
i
o
r

P
a
i
n
t

F
i
n
i
s
h

R
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d
a
t
i
o
n
s

F
o
r

N
e
w

B
u
i
l
d
i
n
g
s

a
n
d

M
a
j
o
r

R
e
n
o
v
a
t
i
o
n
s

B
u
i
l
d
i
n
g

T
y
p
e

W
a
l
l
s

C
e
i
l
i
n
g
s

P
l
a
s
t
e
r
/

V
e
n
e
e
r

P
l
a
s
t
e
r

T
a
p
e
d

S
h
e
e
t
r
o
c
k

B
r
i
c
k
/

M
a
s
o
n
r
y

C
.
M
.
U
.

P
a
i
n
t
e
d

W
o
o
d

(
1
)

S
t
a
i
n
e
d

W
o
o
d

D
o
r
m
i
t
o
r
i
e
s

(
2
)

H
a
l
l
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

N
/
A

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
a
t
i
n

f
l
a
t

P
u
b
l
i
c

S
p
a
c
e
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
s
e
m
i

N
/
A

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
a
t
i
n

f
l
a
t

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

R
o
o
m
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

N
/
A

N
/
A

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
a
t
i
n

f
l
a
t
/
e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

B
a
t
h
r
o
o
m
s

(
4
)

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

N
/
A

N
/
A

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
a
t
i
n

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

(
5
)

A
c
a
d
e
m
i
c
/
A
d
m
i
n
i
s
t
r
a
t
i
v
e

H
a
l
l
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

f
l
a
t

P
u
b
l
i
c

S
p
a
c
e
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

f
l
a
t

C
l
a
s
s
r
o
o
m
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

f
l
a
t

O
f
f
i
c
e
s

f
l
a
t

f
l
a
t

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

f
l
a
t

B
a
t
h
r
o
o
m
s

(
4
)

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

N
/
A

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

(
5
)

L
a
b
o
r
a
t
o
r
i
e
s
/
R
e
s
e
a
r
c
h

F
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s

H
a
l
l
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
s
e
m
i

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
s
e
m
i

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

P
u
b
l
i
c

S
p
a
c
e
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
s
e
m
i

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
s
e
m
i

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
s
e
m
i

L
a
b
o
r
a
t
o
r
i
e
s

(
6
)

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

N
/
A

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
s
e
m
i

L
e
c
t
u
r
e

&

C
l
a
s
s
r
o
o
m
s

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
f
l
a
t

s
t
a
i
n

o
r

s
e
m
i

(
3
)

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

e
g
g
s
h
e
l
l
/
s
e
m
i

B
a
t
h
r
o
o
m
s

(
4
)

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

N
/
A

e
p
o
x
y
/
s
e
m
i

s
e
m
i
g
l
s
/
s
a
t
i
n

s
a
t
i
n

s
e
m
i
g
l
o
s
s

(
5
)

(
1
)

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r

o
i
l

b
a
s
e

f
o
r

p
a
i
n
t
e
d

w
o
o
d

t
o

i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

d
u
r
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

(
2
)

S
e
e

m
e
m
o

d
a
t
e
d

1
/
1
8
/
2
0
0
0

f
r
o
m

C
o
m
m
i
t
t
e
e

f
o
r

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

D
o
r
m
i
t
o
r
y

P
a
i
n
t

C
o
l
o
r
s

(
t
o

J
o
n

D
.

H
l
a
f
t
e
r
)

r
e
g
a
r
d
i
n
g

d
o
r
m
i
t
o
r
y

p
a
i
n
t

c
o
l
o
r
s
;

s
e
e

A
p
p
e
n
d
i
x

2
.
4

3
.

(
3
)

R
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d

l
e
a
v
i
n
g

b
r
i
c
k

a
n
d

m
a
s
o
n
r
y

i
n

n
a
t
u
r
a
l

f
i
n
i
s
h
,

u
n
l
e
s
s

t
h
e
r
e

i
s

a
n

a
e
s
t
h
e
t
i
c

c
o
n
c
e
r
n

o
r
,

f
o
r

e
x
i
s
t
i
n
g

m
a
s
o
n
r
y
,

t
h
e
r
e

i
s

a
n

e
x
c
e
s
s
i
v
e

a
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

s
o
i
l
,

s
t
a
i
n
,

o
r

m
i
s
m
a
t
c
h
e
d

p
a
t
c
h
i
n
g
.

(
4
)

U
s
e

Z
i
n
z
e
r

m
i
l
d
e
w
-
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
t

p
a
i
n
t

i
n

b
a
t
h
r
o
o
m
s

w
i
t
h

s
h
o
w
e
r
s

(
5
)

S
m
o
o
t
h

c
e
i
l
i
n
g

f
i
n
i
s
h
e
s

o
n
l
y

a
r
e

t
o

b
e

u
s
e
d

i
n

b
a
t
h
r
o
o
m
s

(
6
)

U
s
e

L
a
t
e
x
-
b
a
s
e
d

p
a
i
n
t

f
o
r

a
r
e
a
s

w
i
t
h

l
a
b

a
n
i
m
a
l
s

t
h
a
t

m
i
g
h
t

b
e

a
f
f
e
c
t
e
d

b
y

v
o
l
a
t
i
l
e

p
a
i
n
t
s

4.10 Masonry, Roofing and Waterproofing

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.10 Roofing - page 1

Standards for Masonry, Roofing and Waterproofing -

These standards apply to new and replacement roofs for academic, administrative, athletic, and
residential buildings on Princetons campus. For buildings off campus, the Designer should
consult with the Project Manager or the Facilities department involved for requirements.

1. Contacts

A. Project Manager for department initiating project

B. Project Manager, Building Envelope; MacMillan Building, (609) 258-6607

C. Preservation Architect, Building Envelope; MacMillan Building, (609) 258-0499

D. Office of Environmental Health and Safety (for on-site safety); (609) 258-5294

PDF AutoCAD

A. Built Up Roofing, Construction Details Appendix 4.10-1 Appendix 4.10-1

B. Detail of Ridge for Slate Roofs (3pp) Appendix 4.10-2 Appendix 4.10-2

C. Rooftop Drainage Requirements and Details Appendix 4.10-3 Appendix 4.10-3

D. Typical Flashing Details
(wall/roof, curb/roof) (2pp) Appendix 4.10-4 Appendix 4.10-4

E. Tremco Roofing Reference Guide,
3rd Edition Appendix 4.10-5

F. Roofing for the Design Professional,
Tremco Roofing Division Appendix 4.10-6

G. Contractor Safety Advisory, by the Office
of Environmental Health and Safety,
Princeton University Appendix 4.10-7

H. Stone Parapet Cap with Mortar J oint Appendix 4.10-8 Appendix 4.10-8

I. Through Wall Flashing at Parapet Details Appendix 4.10-9 Appendix 4.10-9

J . Typical Ornamental Coping Detail Appendix 4.10-10 Appendix 4.10-10

K. Sheet Metal Coping Appendix 4.10-11 Appendix 4.10-11

L. Garden Wall Stone Cap with Mortar J oint Appendix 4.10-12 Appendix 4.10-12

M. Below Grade Waterproofing Appendix 4.10-13
Concrete and CMU Foundations
N. Below Grade Waterproofing - Appendix 4.10-14
Rubble Stone Foundations
PDF AutoCAD
O. Selected Sarnafil Details Appendix 4.10-15 Appendix 4.10-15

P. Roof Penetration Details Appendix 4.10-16

Q. Below Grade Penetrations Appendix 4.10-17

3. Codes and Standards

A. New J ersey Uniform Construction Code and adopted subcodes unless superseded by
other NJ UCC references (see section 1.4 Regulatory Agencies):
http://www.state.nj.us/dca/codes/. Note that the subcodes contain references to material
and construction standards that must be met to comply with the NJ UCC. These
standards, promulgated by such groups as the American Concrete Institute, the American
Institute of Steel Construction, the American National Standards Institute, ASTM
International, et al. are included in the Referenced Standards chapter of the
International Building Code.

B. Various standards by the U. S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (refer
to Appendix 4.10-7 for information)

C. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual

D. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (details for soldered lock-seam joints, e.g.)


Initial planning and preliminary design of a project may be conducted with the University
department responsible for project initiation. As the project moves toward the construction
documentation and code review phases, it becomes important that the project be submitted to the
Engineering Department, the Grounds and Building Maintenance Department, the Office of
Design and Construction, and the Department of Public Safety for review of compliance with
University standards. Proposed roofing systems, in particular, are to be reviewed with the
Preservation Architect/Building Envelope and the PM/Building Envelope in the schematic design
phase when the roof shape and general type are determined.

Any proposed plazas, terraces, or balconies over occupied areas, all green roofs and roof gardens
are to be reviewed as roofing projects by the University Grounds and Building Maintenance
Department. Similarly, any below-grade building or a portion of a building constructed with a
ceiling/roof structure waterproofed to prevent water infiltration is to be reviewed as a roofing
project.

Roof plans are to be reviewed with the departmental Project Manager and the Project Manager
for Building Envelope early in the project in order to locate areas of particular concern and agree
upon an approach to best address them. Through-wall flashing for the project is also to be
reviewed with the PM/Building Envelope.

The design approach for the exterior envelope is to be reviewed during schematic design with the
departmental Project Manager and the Preservation Architect. Proposed techniques for
waterproofing and flashing cavity backup wall and/or the drainage plane for rainscreen systems
are to be presented by the designer for review and discussion.


internal review, any required code review of the roofing project, and for contract bidding of the
work. This documentation will include, at a minimum:

A. Roof plans showing roof layout and drainage, and any projections through the roof or
equipment mounted on the roof; plans for any waterproofing work in the project;

B. Project-specific details of the roofing/waterproofing systems and any modifications
required for the new work;

C. Details of flashing systems, details of each flashing type required for the project, and
details of any roof penetrations or below-grade penetrations;

D. Details showing U.L. assemblies required to meet fire rating requirements for roofing
system.

E. Roofing and flashing shop Drawings are to be submitted to the PM/Building Envelope in
the normal course of submittals during a project. Shop Drawings for any roofing
accessories, such as skylights and hatches, are also to be submitted to the PM/Building
Envelope. Shop drawings for wall flashings and flashings for stone trim, windows,
architectural features, etc. are to be submitted concurrent with submittals for masonry
materials and other envelope materials.

Designers are to respond to review comments of University personnel, either in revision
of documents to comply with comments, or in writing if there is an overriding rationale in
not complying with University standards.

Roof Plans General X X X X
Roof Plans Location of
drains
X X X
Roof Plans Locations of
equipment and projections
X X X
Details Parapets and
copings
X X
Details Through Wall
Flashing
X X
Details Sheet metal or other X
Below Grade Waterproofing X X
Utility Penetrations X

6. Guidelines for Installation and Performance Roofing

A. Installation

Of prime importance to the University is the quality of the initial roof installation and the
provision of a long life warranty for any roofing system installed on campus. For flat roofs
in particular, and for waterproofing systems used under plazas and for green roofs, it is
imperative that the roofing manufacturer provide full-time supervision during the roofing
work, and that a twenty-year system warranty be provided to the University upon
completion. Standards for roofing include the following:

1. Flat Roofs (Conventional): the University Grounds and Building Maintenance
overwhelmingly supports the use of petroleum-based built-up roofing systems on flat
roofs. The use of single-membrane systems is discouraged, and must be explicitly
approved by the PM/Building Envelope before being allowed for a project.
A four-ply built-up system with a two-ply vapor barrier (where appropriate) is the
University standard for a low-slope roof.

a) Hot System: a hot-applied system is preferred but may not be suitable for use
on existing or new buildings where fumes during installation might affect
occupants or those nearby. If a hot-applied system is to be used, Therm-50
with hypalon flashing by Tremco meets Princeton University requirements for
maintainability.

b) Cold System: Burmastic-200 with hypalon flashing by Tremco meets
Princeton University requirements for maintainability and is the preferred
system for flat roofs.

c) Surfacing: White aggregate surfacing meeting the manufacturers
specifications is to be applied as part of the roofing system. arctic white
granite chips from the George Schofield Co. provide the desired level of
reflectivity. Exposed surfaces of hypalon flashings are to be covered with
Double Duty Aluminum, a reflective coating.

2. Green Roofs: vegetation-covered roofs, whether employing loose growth medium or
trays, are to be treated in a similar manner to plazas, balcomies, etc. Grounds and
Building Maintenance recommends loose-laid single-ply PVC membrane, such as that
produced by Sarnafil. See requirements for waterproofing systems and review
proposed product with the Project Manager and the Roofing Shop. Refer to Appendix
4.10-15 for approves Sarnafil installation details.

3. Below-grade structures: See requireemtns for waterproofing systems and review
proposed product with the Project Manager, Building Envelope. When applying a
horizontal membrane over below-grade structure (particularly in cases where plantings
or soft cover are planned as a top surface) a 4 concrete protection slab should be
applied over filter fabric and drainage mat, which in turn is installed over the
waterproofing system. This will ensure protection of the treated areas from penetration
by fencing, tent spikes or the like. The added depth of the slab should be taken into
consideration when planning grades and planted areas.

4. Structure, Accessories, Miscellaneous:

a) Roof decks: concrete is the preferred decking material, sloped to drain. If
sloped concrete cannot be used, concrete with tapered insulation or another
material meeting the construction classification required for the building may
be considered. Consult with the Project Manager.

If there is a mechanical penthouse in the project, the floor of the penthouse
should be concrete; a steel roof or roof deck is acceptable over the penthouse.

b) Insulation: Roof insulation is to be part of the roofing system and is to be
covered by the roofing warranty. Point loading and uniform loading
requirements must be considered in the choice of insulation material and
method of installation. Insulation should be 2 thick minimum, R-20
minimum (or greater to meet code requirements for energy conservation).
Insulation is to be installed in two layers with staggered joints; insulation is to
be fastened to vapor barrier using fastenfree adhesive, and successive layers
of insulation are to be fastened with the same adhesive. Ioscyanurate
insulation should be covered with minimum DensDeck (or equal). On flat
decks, insulation is to be tapered to roof drains; drains are to be installed in 4-
0 x 4-0 sumps to provide positive flow to the drains. Any roof penetrations
(i.e.: conduit, lightning protection, fall protection, MEP system, etc) should be
on roof plan for coordination of constructability.

c) Do not use pressure treated wood blocking, use Douglas fir, or where damp
conditions are anticipated, wood blocking is to be cedar to prevent decay.
Alternately, consult with roofing Tech Team representative for project specific
options.

d) Through-wall/counter flashing is to be receiver-type to allow for re-roofing.
Flashings are to be locked and soldered at seams and corners. Flashings at
roof penetrations, curbs, and transitions should extend up a minimum of 8
above the surface of the roof. Copper and Freedon Gray copper are the
preferred material for flashings; 20 oz weight is standard. Coordination of
through-wall flashing is very important. For through-wall flashing, details
shall eliminate the need for sealants; sealants or caulking are not to be relied
on for water-tightness.

At parapets all drains shall have an overflow scupper to divert water off the
roof in times of drain blockage. Overflows shall be 2, minimum, below
lowest point of base or wall flashing.

e) Copings: Metal copings should be designed to allow for expansion without
bending or flexing. Expansion joints should be installed within four feet of
corners and at every third joint along walls (at twenty feet on center +/-). Use
loose-locked-and-caulked joints or use splice joints for expansion. All other
joints are to be locked and soldered. Copper and Freedom Gray copper are the
preferred material for copings; 20 oz weight is the standard.

f) Installation of equipment on a flat roof is to be avoided if possible. Where
equipment must be installed on a roof, NRCA design considerations are to be
followed. Clearance requirements for ease of re-roofing are to be met;
equipment supports are to be detailed so that re-roofing can be easily
accomplished. Curbs are to be 12 above the finished roof surface and use of
pitch pockets is to be avoided. To the extent possible, equipment and supports
should be located a minimum of 6-0 from drains. Prefabricated walks are
to be provided with the roof for maintenance access to the equipment and to
roof hatches or access points.

g) Warranty: The entire roofing system is to be covered by the manufacturers
warranty including, without limit, the insulation and any recovery board, the
roofing material, the flashings, any through-penetration systems or
fabrications, equipment mounting curbs or saddles, etc.

h) Temporary Waterproofing: During construction, a two-ply vapor barrier
applied directly to the concrete deck has been used successfully as a temporary
roof. Such a surface can bear construction traffic. Any damage must be
repaired and completed at the time the permanent roof is installed.

5. Pitched Roofs: The majority of on-campus buildings at Princeton University with
pitched roofs are finished with slate. There are a number of buildings at the University
that have metal roofs; the typical metal roof at Princeton is standing-seam copper or
Freedom Gray copper, with all joints locked and soldered. Finally, there are a few
roofs with synthetic roofing materials (terracotta or ceramic tile, e.g.); if a synthetic
roof is used, an adequate supply of replacement tiles or shingles should be specified. If
synthetic surface roof is proposed, or a metal different from copper, review selection
and system requirements with the Project Manager, Building Envelope and the
Preservation Architect in the schematic design phase of design.

a) For new roofs, slate is to be a minimum 3/8 - 1/2 thickness and meet
requirements for Vermont slate, S-1 architectural grade. The Designer should
note, on repair projects in particular, the thickness of the existing slate to
insure that the new material is compatible with the existing.

b) Copper for standing-seam roofs should be 20 oz. Hard drawn. Lead-coated
copper has been used extensively in the past at the University, but is now
considered problematic; Freedom Gray copper by Revere is an acceptable
alternative.

c) Flashings are to be copper (for both slate and copper roofs), 20 oz. minimum
for standing vertical flashings, valleys, through-wall flashings, and areas
subject to excessive wear. Materials, including slates, shingles, felts, metals,
fasteners, etc. are to comply with the requirements of the NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual and the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,
and be fabricated and installed in compliance with good practice and the
details listed in Appendices 4.10-3 and 4.10-4.

d) Saturated asphalt felts or an approved synthetic underlay with a rosin slip
sheet are the typical underlayment for most pitched roofs, with a rosin slip
sheet used between felts and metal roofing material. Codes require eaves and
other areas subject to the effects of ice dams to be protected with cemented
underlayment or waterproofing membrane. A self-adhering, self-sealing
membrane is the preferred ice shield.

6. Lightning Protection: The Designer should review with the Project Manager the need
for lightning protection on the building. If a system exists, or if a new system is
proposed, the Designer should investigate the method of installation, if any, suggested
by the roofing manufacturer. The Designer should review the options for installation
with the departmental Project Manager and the PM/Building Envelope, and prepare
proper details and other installation information for the system. Provide details at and
through roof assemblies.

B. Performance

The interest on the part of Princeton University in using the quality materials listed above is
in producing a facility that will provide long years of service with a reasonable maintenance
effort. The materials listed have in the past produced such results, but only with the proper
care taken during the initial installation.

As noted above, roof warranties are to cover the installed system, not simply the roofing
material. For membrane roofs, full-time jobsite inspection by the manufacturers trained
representative is required.

7. Guidelines for Installation and Performance Waterproofing

A. Plazas, balconies, etc.: for areas, over sub-grade structures, finished with pavers or other
traffic surface, Grounds and Building Maintenance recommend a loose-laid single-ply
PVC membrane, such as that produced by Sarnafil. Review proposed product with the
PM/Roofing. Refer to Appendix 4.10-15 for approved Sarnafil installation details.

This is the preferred method of waterproofing horizontal areas below grade.
B. Below-grade structures: When applying a horizontal membrane over below-grade
structure (particularly in cases where plantings or soft cover are planned as a top
surface) a 4 concrete protection slab should be applied over drainage mat and filter
fabric, which in turn is installed over the waterproofing layer. This will ensure protection
of the treated areas from penetration by fencing, tent spikes or the like. The added depth
of the slab should be taken into consideration when planning grades and planted areas.

C. Below-grade penetrations: for piping, conduit, and similar services, individual sleeves
for each pipe are to be installed in new construction, and individual cores for each pipe in
existing construction are to be used. Penetrations are to be spaced to allow a minimum of
6 clear area in all directions for proper application of waterproofing assembly; a four-
inch conduit, for example, will require a frame approximately 16 inches in diameter.
Clear space requirements for adjacent penetrations are allowed to overlap one another.

Space between core or sleeve and conduit or pipe is to be sealed with a mechanical link-
type seal. Any deviation must meet with the approval of the Facilities Grounds &
Building Maintenance Roofing Shop Project Manager. The exterior wall at the
penetration is to be primed and coated with a bitumastic waterproofing membrane, such
as Bituthane. The bitumastic is to be formed around the pipe or conduit, and outward
4(+/-) to allow a stainless-steel clamp to be installed around the extended membrane.
Termination bars are to be applied, picture-frame style, to finish the edges of the
membrane. Review proposed product and details with the PM/Roofing.
Refer to code requirements as needed for utility penetration spacing where these pass
through foundation walls. Where University requirements exceed code requirements,
spacing is to meet the more stringent requirement.
D. Concrete or CMU and Rubble stone foundations:

1. Concrete or CMU foundations: when concrete or CMU foundations are part of the
waterproofing design, insure proper curing, cleaning and preparation of the wall prior
to the application of the bituthane waterproofing system and subsequent mirror drain
fabric.

Refer to Appendix 4.10-13 for requirements for below grade waterproofing of concrete
or CMU foundation walls.
2. Rubble stone foundations: when existing rubble stone foundations are part of the
waterproofing design, careful evaluation of new waterproofing requirements must be
made. Include provisions for sandblasting, parging and mirror drain fabric in addition
to approved University material specification of a membrane applied.

Refer to Appendix 4.10-14 for requirements for below grade waterproofing of rubble
stone foundation walls.
E. If masonry work is planned as part of a rainscreen system (or if metal or glass panels are
planned as part or a combined masonry/metal/glass rainscreen system, the designer is to
review proposed system and proposed waterproofing techniques with PM/Building
Envelope. It is expected that redundant systems will be included as part of the design, so
that the failure of the primary water-shedding system will not result in total system
failure.

Particular care is to be taken in designing interfaces of masonry anchors and
waterproofing membrane and in placement of through-wall flashings to bring any water
that penetrates the system out to the exterior. A reliable weep system is to be designed
for the wall, including mesh to prevent mortar build-up in the cavity and at the weeps.
The designer is to specify water-testing of the weep systems during construction at
approximately four foot vertical intervals.

In specifying masonry walls, the designer is to consider the permeability of the veneer or
facing material used. If a relatively porous material is to be used to face the building
(such as limestone, brownstone, and some types of brick), a nonporous material (such as
granite) is to be used as a base course, extending approximately eight inches above finish
grade.

8. Guidelines for Protection and Maintenance

A. Roofing specifications are to contain the following statement:
The Construction Manager, roofing contractor, or any of the contractors agents shall not
move equipment or materials over, or in any way modify the existing roofing that will
remain during or after the completion of roofing work unless the roofing is fully protected
from damage. It is required that an infra-red roof scan be performed prior to
commencement of work so that pre-construction conditions may be recorded, with a
second scan performed at the completion of construction to verify the roof has been
adequately protected. The Construction Manager will be responsible for repair or
replacement of defective material, improper installation, or damage resulting from work
performed through the project prior to the University accepting the roof as completed.
Other forms of testing (other than infra-red) may be deemed acceptable pending
consultation with the Universitys Project Manager of Roofing Trades.

B. All new roofs are to be designed for ready access to all areas during adverse weather
conditions with a minimum use of portable ladders or other lift conveyances.

9. Design Guidelines for Safety in Roofing Maintenance

The Designer is to consider requirements for safety in the maintenance of the building in
designing the roof for the building. Early consideration is to be given to providing parapet walls
for flat-roofed areas so that OSHA recommendations for roof work can be met. Fall protection
systems, where needed in the absence of parapet or other structural components, are to be
installed in all new construction projects and in major renovation/alteration projects. An
alternative may be a built-in system of permanent mounting points for safety railing; see
Appendix 4.10-1. The Designer is encouraged to review proposed solutions with the Project
Manager and the PM/Building Envelope, along with the Office of Environmental Health &
Safety.

The Designer is to be aware that the University considers the installation of safety-line tie-offs
insufficient for the promotion of roofing safety.

For slate roofs, a detail has been developed that provides for both venting at the ridge and for
securing ridge slates to the assembly. See Appendix 4.10-2. Review with the Project Manager
the need for diverters installed over building entries where roof slope is not directed away from
entry.

10. Garden or Landscaping Walls Exterior Masonry

Garden or landscaping walls should have thru-wall flashing under coping caps to prevent water
penetration and prematurely destroying the wall. Review proposed flashing details with the
Project Manager for Roofing and Masonry (see Appendix 4.10-12). J oints of coping are then
pointed (not caulked). On stone walls specify thru-wall flashing near the top of wall under
stones, using lead flashing to conform with irregular shapes. If over an occupied space (below)
set thru-wall flashing at waterproofing level in addition to coping detail.

11. Non-conformance With Standards

Occasionally the use of new products is found to be in the best interest of Princeton University.
Requests by the Designer to use new or non-standard products or techniques will be evaluated
based on comparison of the following characteristics:

Flexibility/Elongation Coefficients
Durability
Wear Characteristics under traffic
Repairability
Quality Control in manufacture and application
Warranty - for labor and material covering completed roofing system as installed, including
roofing materials, flashings, accessories, etc.

Use of a new product at a specific facility does not mean its use in other similar cases will be
automatically approved. An unspecified testing period will be employed for new products.

A Designer who desires to use a non-standard or new product on a project should approach the
Project Manager with the proposal. The Project Manager, after review will consult the
PM/Roofing on the proposal. In support of his proposal, the Designer should prepare his
argument, listing the above characteristics, as applicable, and present a clear and concise
rationale for using the non-standard product.


roofing contractor.


documents.

The as-builts are to include, as a minimum, roof plans with:

Location of roof drains and expansion joints
Flashing details
Location of roof hatches (including mfg., model and serial number)
Roofing System sections (including mfg., product number)


END OF DOCUMENT

4.11 Toilet Rooms

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.11Toilet Rms -page 1

Standards for Toilet Rooms -
Building Services

Toilet rooms will typically be designed as part of the core building space in new construction.
Location of bathrooms in alteration or renewal projects may be limited by building configuration
or utility location, but should nevertheless be located for easy access in a logical location in the
building.

PDF
A. Pipe Sleeve and Fire Stopping Requirements Appendix 4.11-2

B. Shower Base Detail Appendix 4.13-3

2. Toilet Rooms

Note that the University preference is to establish permanent room numbers for a building that
are used on the construction documents. The Designer should review the proposed numbering
scheme for the building with the Project Manager to be sure that the scheme is consistent with
other campus buildings. Bathrooms should be included in the numbering scheme, to allow for
easy reference in later maintenance work. Room numbers may include suffixes of F and M or
Women and Men. Dormitory bathrooms are gender-neutral in design, and may be designated
for males one year and females the next, so physical room numbers for dormitory bathrooms
should be only semi-permanent.

The minimum number of plumbing fixtures required for a project can be determined by the New
J ersey Uniform Construction Code and the National Standard Plumbing Code. The code-
mandated minimum count is just that - the minimum. The Designer, working with the Project
Manager and the end user, is to determine the number of fixtures that should reasonably be
included in the project.

The Designer should consider acoustic isolation techniques in the choice of walls surrounding
bathrooms, and in piping materials and enclosures. This is particularly important in dormitories,
where high bathroom usage can be a nuisance factor for adjacent rooms.

Ideally, there will be womens and mens facilities on each floor of a building. Moreover, these
facilities will be accessible and barrier-free. In some instances, a building may be too small to
have facilities for each sex on each floor. A review of the proposed use of each space, and the
disposition of staff, should then be done in order to place facilities in the most useful locations.

In some cases, single-fixture unisex toilet rooms may be adequate and appropriate for a project.
Single-fixture toilet rooms should be designed to be barrier-free.

A janitors closet should be located in the vicinity of toilet rooms. See Section 4.3 (Custodial
Closets and Storage) for additional information.

The Designer should review the requirements of the plumbing code for other fixtures such as
drinking fountains. See Section 1.4 (Regulatory Agencies) for information regarding codes.

Princeton University has developed a specification for plumbing and mechanical work on
campus; see Appendix 4.11-1.

Bathroom Design Considerations
The following list includes items that the Designer should take into consideration when planning
a project that includes toilet rooms:

1. Construction and Fire Rating

Review need for fire-rated enclosure and door assembly, including door closer.

See Appendix 4.11-2 for pipe sleeve and firestopping requirements based on
wall/floor materials.

In fire-rated walls of bathrooms, review placement of any recessed fixtures or
accessories for compliance with required assembly rating.

At all floor penetrations in wet areas use integral water barrier sleeve device such as
Hilti Water Barrier Module or FM approved equal

2. Fixture Requirements

This section deals primarily with multiple-fixture bathrooms.

At a minimum, requirements of the NJ UCC and National Standard Plumbing Code
must be met for number of fixtures (including drinking fountains). It is prudent to
maximize the fixture count of bathrooms in academic spaces, particularly if large
lecture facilities are provided that might be used by the general public for special
events. The same is true of any buildings that include performance spaces. The
code-required minimum fixture number is often unrealistically low for number of
toilets and lavatories in particular, and the Designer should review the users
preferences during the programming phase.

For dormitory bathrooms, Princeton University Housing Office has developed the
following ratios as a desirable goal: students per shower 5.5/1; students per toilet
5.5/1; students per lavatory - 4.5/1. Bathtubs are generally not installed in dorms at
Princeton.

At least one floor drain should be installed in each bathroom, more if layout dictates.
Floor drains should be installed in each barrier-free shower.

In bathrooms that are not adjacent to a janitors closet with a service sink, hot and
cold hose bibbs should be installed for custodial use. The hose bibbs should have key
stops rather than handles. The preferred location is under a lavatory, approximately
18 above the finish floor.

3. Preferred Fixture Types and Fittings

See Design Standard Manual Section 3.11 Plumbing. This section contains
information beyond that presented here regarding fittings and fixtures for use in
University projects.

a) Toilets - floor mounted preferred, with flush valve (rather than tank). If headroom
in room below is problematic or there are other overriding concerns, wall-
mounted toilets may be considered. Review with the Project Manager in
preliminary design stage.

b) Urinals - wall mounted, American Standard Linbrook or Washbrook, with Sloan
186-1 flush valve. NJ UCC requires low-flow urinals. (Urinals are not typically
installed in dormitories, due to the need for flexibility in gender distribution in the
buildings [on a yearly basis, a dormitory mens room may become a womens
room, and vice versa]).

c) Lavatories - preferred generally over vanities for institutional-type use; American
Standard New Lucerne, Heritage faucet sets, no pop-up drains (strainer only).
NJ UCC requires low-flow fittings. Provide shelf above each lavatory mounted
high enough to permit accessibility to service the faucet.

d) Showers - a precast terrazzo shower base is preferred, with masonry or frame
walls with ceramic tile finish for the surround. One option is to provide a back
wall or demising wall to contain valves and piping, with partitions forming the
other wall or walls.

If frame walls are utilized, the substrate should be plaster on metal lath, or
cementitious underlay such as USGs Durock or National Gypsums PermaBase.
Consider requirements for rated assemblies if the shower wall is part of a corridor
wall.

Provide shower stalls with curtains or doors, and a drying area which is, at a
minimum, screened. Princeton traditionally used marble for partitions, but most
recently has used the solid color reinforced composite (SCRC). Metal partitions
have been found to be too susceptible to damage and corrosion and are generally
not used. Specify soap dishes for shower stalls (preferably ceramic recessed).

Princeton University Building Services will provide custom-cut shower curtains;
Designer should specify length to adequately cover terrazzo curb. Any other
special requirements should be brought to the attention of Building Services.
Full-length heavy-duty tubular shower rods (typically stainless steel) should be
specified for shower stalls. Rods should be securely mounted in retaining cups
fastened to shower substrate. Make note of any blocking required for this purpose
in frame construction.

The Designer is to be conscious of waterproofing requirements for these bases at
all wall, floor and drain locations, especially where occupied spaces may be below
the showers. Install underlayments incorporating integral waterproofing
membrane and pre-formed inside/outside corners meeting ANSI 118.1. System to
match Schluters Kerdi/Ditra or equal (see appendix 4.13-3). Use only
integrated drains and tailpieces.

e) Wall stops - Wolverine 53336 with integral handle.
f) Valves See Design Standard Manual Section 3.11 Plumbing,
g) Hose Bibbs with keyed handles.
h) Floor Drains - See Design Standard Manual Section 3.11 Plumbing,
i) Cleanouts - See Design Standard Manual Section 3.11 Plumbing,
j) Drinking Fountains - See Design Standard Manual Section 3.11 Plumbing,

4. ADA and Adaptability Requirements

The Designer must become familiar with the barrier-free requirements in the NJ UCC
and the sub-code ICC/ANSI A117.1. Some latitude in the provision of and location of
barrier-free baths is allowed. The Universitys goal is to have accessible bathrooms in
areas served by accessible entries and along accessible routes, but it may not be
practical to make every bathroom barrier-free. The project design review committee
will review the proposed location and layout of accessible baths on a case-by-case
basis, for continuity with the Universitys master plan for accessibility.

5. Security

Bathroom entry doors may be equipped with combination-lock hardware to provide a
measure of security within buildings. See section 4.4 Door Hardware. This
requirement is to be reviewed with University prior to documentation.

6. Finishes

Provide washable finishes; floors are typically ceramic tile or stone, as are walls to at
least the height of mirrors. Specify 10% attic stock for each type of tile to be delivered
to University shops. This is to include field tile(s), coves, accent and each type of
bullnose. Ceramic soap dishes should also be included.

Materials must be water-resistant; at a minimum, use water-resistant gypsum board for
walls and ceilings. A smooth plaster finish is preferred. At tiled walls, backer
materials to have a glass mat facing with a moisture resistance gypsum core at a
minimum. Plan carefully for access doors that are often needed in bathroom walls or
ceilings; minimum 12 square doors are standard. Coordinate access panel locking
requirements with section 4.4 Door Hardware.

7. Lighting and Power

Provide area lighting for the room, and (generally) a light at each fixture or
compartment. Motion detectors may be used for control of selected light fixtures, with
at least one unswitched fixture per room on an emergency circuit. Ideally the
emergency fixture is to be located above the sink.

Provide ground-fault-interrupted receptacles at lavatories, one centered between every
two lavatories, or at individual fixtures.

Provide back-box and power for future electric hand dryers in the vicinity of the
lavatories, where towel dispensers are to be located.

8. Partitions

Provide toilet partitions with doors, shower stalls with curtains or doors, and a shower
drying area which is, at a minimum, screened. In addition to traditional metal/stainless
partitions, solid color reinforced composite (SCRC) dividers have been installed.

9. Accessories

a) Vendors for Building Services provide many of the accessories used in
Princetons toilet rooms, including soap and paper towel dispensers and large-roll
toilet tissue dispensers. Building Services provides shower curtains for the
dormitory bathrooms. Consult Project Manager and Building Services for current
information.

b) The following need to be specified by the Designer: trash disposal units (recessed
units in academic buildings, large volume baskets in dormitories); feminine
napkin disposal units; mirrors (typically standard units, individually framed for
ease of replacement, often with attached stainless steel shelves); full-length
mirrors can be considered in most uses; surface mounted soap dishes for shower
stalls; heavy-duty one-piece tubular shower rods; heavy-duty robe and towel
hooks (in dormitories; discuss material and style with Project Manager) Shelves
for purses or pocketbooks are often requested in toilet stalls and at lavatories in
academic/administrative uses, and should be considered by the Designer.

c) Hot and cold hose bibbs may be required, as noted above.

d) The University may install electric hand dryers in multiple-fixture bathrooms in
lieu of paper towel dispensers. Paper towel dispensers may be temporarily
installed over dryer outlets, until the decision on hand dryers is finalized.

10. Heating and Ventilation

Exhaust ventilation with make-up air is generally needed; review code requirements
for providing fresh air, for tempering make-up air, and for providing heat to the
bathrooms. In-floor radiant heat has seen limited but successful use in bathrooms, but
must be carefully coordinated with fixtures and any subsequent mounting hardware for
partitions, etc.

11. Fire Suppression and Fire Alarm/Detectors

Review code requirements for fire suppression and heat detection for the project and in
the proposed bathrooms.


On the as-builts, the contractor is to highlight changes made to submittals and
approved documents.

The as-builts are to include the following as a minimum:

Waste, water and vent riser Diagrams
Schedule of plumbing components including backflow preventers (mfg., model
number, size)


END OF DOCUMENT

4.12 Waste Removal and Loading Docks

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.12 Waste / Loading - page 1

Standards for Waste Removal & Loading Docks -
Building Services

Waste removal must be considered in the site planning phase of building design, and
consideration must be given to the way materials and equipment are received at a building.

Requirements for loading berths are included in the land use ordinances of both Princeton
municipalities, and must be indicated on site plans presented to the local zoning and planning
boards. Typically, local officials will expect to review plans for all services during site plan
approval; vehicular movement on the site will be reviewed, as will enclosures or screen plantings
for dumpsters and recycling containers.

Princeton University is currently implementing options for controlling traffic in the historic
section of campus. Of concern are the size of waste-hauling vehicles and the frequency of pick-
up required for recycling and garbage removal. The use of smaller vehicles for trash pickup is
being employed, and there are sites being developed for regional compactors to control volume.
The Designer should consult with the Project Manager to ascertain the current status of this issue.

PDF

A. Standard Recycling Receptacle Appendix 4.12-1

2. Guidelines for Installation and Performance

A. Waste Removal Services within Building

Trash storage within buildings is minimized.

Access to small semi-concealed trash holding areas from within building is important.

Housing and Building Services are trying to end the practice, in dormitories, of the
permanent placement of trash containers (from each dorm room) in hallways. Trash
chutes have proven to be an effective tool in trash removal and are the recommended
method of handling trash removal and recycling. Chutes are to be the type that allows
access for cleaning. Other possibilities include the placement on each floor of a
trash/recycling center that students will be required to use for their trash disposal.
Another possibility would be the creation of a trash room(s) in the building, with the
requirement that students take their trash there. Such a facility would need to be emptied
daily, at a minimum.

The Designer should be prepared to review the possible solutions to trash handling and
removal.

The University utilizes a standard recycling bin. Peter Pepper Products, Inc. model Nos.
1034 through 1039. (See Appendix 4.12-1).

PS-29
B. External Trash Staging Areas

There is a movement afoot to reduce the number of dumpsters visible on campus, and to
reduce the size and visibility of dumpster enclosures. At the same time, as noted above
there is a desire to reduce traffic and the size of vehicles that have access to the historic
area of campus.

Trucks currently used by Building Services for servicing dumpster areas have a turning
radius of forty-five feet; paths to dumpster enclosures should be planned to accommodate
these trucks, unless smaller vehicles are to be used.

As stated, there is a desire to make dumpster enclosures smaller, and to make them less
visible. Enclosure to consist of shadowbox type fencing and a pad min of 210 SF
(21x10).

C. Area Trash Compactors

Compactors are being considered as possible means to reducing the number of dumpsters
required, and thus the number of vehicle trips required to remove trash and recycling.
Compactors would need to be limited to the perimeter of campus, due to the fact that the
containers are significantly heavier than a standard non-compacted dumpster, and a full-
size removal vehicle is needed. Depending on size (over 3 cubic yards), vehicular access
would need to be straight on to the compactor, because the containers are too heavy to be
rolled into place for pickup. If a compactor is to be included in a project, the Designer
should consider placing it near the loading dock to minimize access needs for the building
(although volume of use at the dock might preclude this). Where space permits, install
Marathon VIPRL3 self-container compactor. The footprint of the actual unit is 10w x
5d x 7.7 h. Additional discussions needed with Building Services Technical
Representative prior to purchase and installation. This scenario is best used in complexes
wither they could serve to tidy a dock area in creating a smaller footprint in a larger
facility/complex with larger trash demands.

Compactors would need to be placed away from dormitories to minimize noise
complaints.

2. Loading Areas

In academic uses, if there is a custodian dedicated to the new or renovated building, the optimal
custodial office location should be determined during the early stages of design. In dormitories,
the same is true, but an overriding concern is that the custodian be available and accessible to the
students in the building.
The building custodial supply room location should also be given careful consideration based on
the needs for access.

A. At-grade Facilities/Loading Berths

1. Area requirements - minimum determined by local zoning ordinances; see Section 1.4
(Regulatory Agencies) for information regarding municipal regulations.

2. Elevator dock/leveler - typical for dining facilities and for science buildings.

3. Access to/from building - with limitations on big trucks in much of main campus,
Building Services is turning to small scooters, with 4 by 8 beds (at a minimum). The
Designer should discuss the need for any larger vehicular access with the Project
Manager, Building Services, the project design committee, and the Landscape
Coordinating Committee.

B. Loading Docks

1. Area requirements - minimum area requirements at dock may still apply; review local
zoning regulations.

2. Height above grade - varies according to truck or trailer type to be used; review needs
with Project Manager and client user.

3. Width/Depth/Overhead clearance requirements: consider number of deliveries per
hour to determine need for more than a one-position dock. Review unloading
techniques and any pallet-moving equipment to be used; insure adequate depth for
maneuvering loading equipment and personnel, as well as size of anticipated crates,
boxes, etc. for delivery.

Doors from the dock to the building should be as high as the trailers to be received, if
possible. Double doors should be used, to provide at least a six-foot wide opening.

If overhead clearance is to be less than fourteen feet, review with Project Manager and
client user for any precautions to be taken.

4. Automatic dock leveler locate with proper clearance from any building projection to
prevent vehicle damage to building; provide docking clamp to secure trailer to dock
during loading operations.

5. Access to/from building full-fledged loading docks require proper approaches and
turn-around areas. Turning radius of large vehicles must be accommodated; review
requirements with Project Manager and client user.

In planning the location of a loading dock, the truck approach should be considered
carefully. Preference should be given to providing a pull-up space to drivers side to
reduce blind spots during the backing-up process. Pull-up space needs to be
approximately sixty feet long, if a tractor-trailer combination is to service the building.

Any railings need to carefully placed so they are not in the back-up path.

Likewise for bollards and guards. Bollards and railings should be painted a light color
so they are visible in low light conditions, or they should have reflective bands on
them.

The loading dock should incorporate a stair to grade (if there is not one provided
convenient to the dock within the building). The stair must be placed to avoid conflict
with parked vehicles.

6. Material - sealed concrete with a non-slip finish is recommended for the dock surface.
The leading edge should have a steel nosing.

Bumpers should be provided to protect the leading edge of the dock, and the building,
if necessary. Lighter colors are preferred, for visibility at night.

7. Lighting: provide adequate lighting at and around the loading dock for safe operation.
See Section 3.5 (Lighting Design) for information. Exterior lighting such as that for
loading docks will generally be reviewed by the Landscape Coordinating Committee
(LCC).

8. Drainage: provide for storm water drainage from the loading area; this is particularly
important for areas that are at depressed grade. The drains need to be able to bear the
accumulation of dirt and debris that are often generated during the loading process.
Trench drains might be considered for greater drain area. Any drain type must be
easily cleaned, and cleanouts for the storm drainage piping should be place in the
immediate area. Provision should also be made to provide a screening device within
the trench drain to limit pipe blockages. For more information, contact the Facilities
Grounds and Building Maintenance Roof Shop Project Manage.

9. Coordinate requirements for water and electrical service to the loading dock.

10. Consideration of exterior temperatures shall be given when designing sprinkler
systems in loading docks within partially covered areas

C. Off-loading/Storage Area

If a loading area serves more than one building, or if the building storage room is not
adjacent to the dock, an off-loading and temporary storage area may be needed. The area
should be carefully designed so that it does not turn into a catch-all.

3. Vehicular Access

A. Access by large vehicles to the Historic Campus is to be limited. See Appendix 2.5-2
Campus Delivery Map for access routes for deliveries. Daily delivery and pickup needs
for main campus should utilize the perimeter road systems as much as possible.

B. Traveling on or crossing pedestrian paths should be minimized, particularly during
backing-up operations.

END OF DOCUMENT
4.13 Carpentry Standards

Release 9.0 (March 2012) Princeton University Facilities Department Design Standards Manual 4.13 Carpentry - page 1

1. Introduction

While the Design Standards Manual covers basic principles of several different project elements
and building blocks, considerations for a host of other issues related to the construction and
maintainability of facilities continues to develop. The Grounds and Building Maintenance
Departments missions concerns the upkeep, maintenance, and continued performance of the
buildings on campus. As a result, there is considerable interest in the use of abuse-resistant and
sustainable materials as well as methods of assembly which allow for long-term maintenance and
corrective procedures.

This section addresses preferred construction practices, material selections and methods of
assembly which have repeatedly arisen in carpentry Tech Reviews and reflect the experience
gained in maintaining and servicing scores of campus facilities. These items are not intended to
be limiting or prescriptive, but rather to eliminate some of the guesswork for the Designer by
giving better insight into what the University has found to be successful for its use and demands.

2. Contacts

A. The Project Manager (in Office of Design and Construction, Office of the University
applicable).

B. Program Manager Design Standards 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-1330

C. Architectural Engineer 200 Elm Drive, 609-258-6247

D. Building Trades Coordinator, Architectural Trades MacMillan Building, 609-258-9791

PDF
A. SSMA - Steel Stud Manufacturers Association
http://www.ssma.com/documents/ssmatechcatalog.pdf

B. Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish Appendix 4.13-2

C. Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual,
19
th
Edition (or latest) GA-600-2009

D. Shower Base Detail Appendix 4.13-3

E. Wood Entry Door Standards and Details Appendix 4.13-4

F. Tile Council of North America Installation Handbook,
2009 Edition (or latest) http://tileusa.com/publication_main.htm

4. Code References

A. New J ersey Uniform Construction Code (NJ UCC) with International Building Code;
See 1.4 Regulatory Agencies for additional information


D. NJ UCC subchapter 7 for barrier-free requirements

5. Review Guidelines - General


A. Completion of Schematic Design, if required;

B. Completion of Design Development;

C. 50% completion of construction documents;

D. 85% completion of construction documents;

E. 100% completion of construction documents, if required, at the discretion of the Tech
Team

appendices.

Additional requirements for specific areas of documentation are as follows:

Floor Plans
X X X X
Millwork (on plans)
X X X
Millwork (details)
X X
Partition Types
X X
Window Types
X X X
Window Details
X X
Screen Details
X X
Blocking and Framing Details
X X
Wall / Floor Assemblies and
Details
X
Finish Schedules
X X
Color Selections
X
Outline Specifications
X
X X

6. Considerations for Design

A. Cold-Formed Metal Framing Assemblies

16 centers required
Cold-formed metal , 20 gage typical
Refer to SSMA limiting height tables
(http://www.ssma.com/documents/ssmatechcatalog.pdf) and provide intermediate
bracing as required

B. Rough Carpentry Requirements

Fire-resistant wood grounds, furring, blocking, nailers, etc required within rated
interior steel stud framed partitions to facilitate fastening of interior wood window
and door frames
Supply specified fastening methods for Tech Team review

C. Millwork Fabrication Requirements

Specify compliance with AWS (Architectural Woodwork Standard) Premium
Grade standards
Specify Premium Grade per HPVA material fabrication standards per ANSI/HPVA
HP-1-2004
Edge banding to be hardwood, minimum of 3mm thick thermo-set solid hardwood
Plywood construction for cabinet carcasses and shelving, typical (no particleboard);
veneer core plywood is acceptable complying with American plywood Association
PS-1 Standards
Substrates allowed as follows:

Countertop Material
Allowable Substrate Materials
MDF MR
MDF
Plywood Combination
Plastic Laminate
X X X
Wood Veneer
X
Stainless Steel
X X X
Solid Surface
No Substrate Required
Millwork Finish Material
(panel products)
MDF MR MDF Plywood Combination
Plastic Laminate
X X X X
Plastic Laminate / Melamine
X X X
Hardwood Veneer
X X X X
Metal Panel
X X X
SCRC
Millwork Finish Material
(casework)
MDF MR MDF Plywood Combination
Plastic Laminate
X X
Plastic Laminate / Melamine
X
Hardwood Veneer
X X
SCRC

Notes for the tables above:
1. Combination substrate material refers to an MDF cross-banded softwood
veneer cored panel
2. MR refers to Moisture resistant. Use as needed in wet areas.
3. Fire-resistant substrates may be used based on code requirements

D. Millwork Installation Requirements

Specify compliance with AWI Premium Grade standards
Blocking details and locations are to be indicated clearly on plans / elevations. At
millwork installations, standard wood blocking or a manufactured steel stud backing
system (i.e.: Dietrich Danback or equal) is acceptable.
Countertops are to be scribed to fit to ensure no gaps remain. Countertops are to be
caulked prior to the installation of back/ side splashes. Caulk required at top of back/
side splashes as well.
Blocking Methods of Application:

Light Duty 20 Gauge Steel Flat Stock per SSMA
Medium Duty 20 Gauge Steel Stud / Track per SSMA
Heavy Duty Wood Blocking
Extreme Duty (ie: grab bars / shower seating) Solid Wood Blocking
Blocking, anchoring and fastening methods are to be as tested in accordance with
applicable ASTM weight rating standards, per applied loads
All millwork applied to existing construction shall be anchored with methods
appropriate for the wall construction as well as the anticipated maximum load
requirement of the fixture.
Toe kicks are to be a minimum of 4 high

E. Wall Mounted Shelving Installation Requirements

Specify compliance with AWI Premium Grade standards
Blocking details and locations are to be indicated clearly on plans / elevations. At
millwork installations, standard wood blocking or a manufactured steel stud backing
system (i.e.: Dietrich Danback or equal) is acceptable. 20 gauge steel flat stock is
only acceptable for light duty applications (i.e.: toilet accessories, not in support of
applied loads)
Blocking Methods of Application:
o Light Duty 20 Gauge Steel Flat Stock per SSMA
o Medium Duty 20 Gauge Steel Stud / Track per SSMA
o Heavy Duty Wood Blocking
o Extreme Duty (ie: grab bars / shower seating) Solid Wood Blocking
Blocking, anchoring and fastening methods are to be as tested in accordance with
applicable ASTM weight rating standards, per applied loads
All shelving/fixtures and or wall standards applied to existing construction shall be
anchored with methods appropriate for the wall construction as well as the anticipated
maximum load requirement of the fixture.

F. Gypsum Wallboard Applications

Refer to ANSI A 137.1 for standard practices pertaining to onsite storage and
handling
Specify compliance with ASTM C-1396/C-1396M standards of applicable panel type
per location criteria
Specify compliance with ASTM C-1047 for wallboard system accessories standards
and specify structural drywall interior trims with co-polymer cores and paper faces.
Plastic trims are to be glued, not stapled.
Refer to Appendix 4.13-2 for requirements for levels of gypsum wallboard finish
Specify Level 5 decorative wall finishes in dormitory rooms and critical lighting areas
including hallways, stairs and common areas where a uniform finish is required
No lightweight joint compound for finish coats. Avoid level 3 finishes except in
mechanical and electrical closets.

G. Ceramic Tile Applications and Shower Installations

Installation to follow TCNA Tile Installation Handbook (current edition) standards of
application
Where possible, specify pre-formed corners and trim units. Where pre-formed pieces
are not available, specify a silicone caulk (not grout) or a manufactured movement-
free profile at all movement joints.
Grout is typically sanded at floor applications (anything with >1/8 joint) and
unsanded at wall applications. Grout should be sealed per manufacturers
recommendations at showers and floors
Where tile applications meet with a dissimilar material (i.e. doorways), provide a
raised saddle (1/4 above floor elevation)
Substrates are to be mold / moisture / mildew resistant, refer to GA-238-03,
guidelines for prevention of mold growth in gypsum board
Kerdi membrane to be used beneath tiled wet walls.
Specify adhesive to set tiles <8 x 8 in floor applications and <4 x 4 (nominal) in
wall applications
Consider use of floor drains where possible / feasible
At all floor penetrations in wet areas use integral water barrier sleeve device such as
Hilti Water Barrier Module, or FM approved equal
Refer to Appendix 4.13-3 for shower base details for positive drainage

H. Wood Window Requirements

Specify compliance with AWI and WDMA Premium Grade quality standards for
the fabrication, reproduction, repair and installation of wood windows.
For wood repair, specify structural adhesive putty (no Bondo)

I. Attic Stock

Specify attic stock requirements for ceramic, ceiling, and carpet tiles based on
availability due to color and size. Note that extra tile should be provided for all but
the most standard ceramic tiles as dye lots vary and will present difficulties with
matching in the future.

Specify that attic stock be separated out and stored off-site upon arrival at the project.
The Universitys Grounds and Building Maintenance group may be able to assist in
the short-term storage of attic stock if needed.

J . Firestopping

Meet UL 1479 and ASTM 814 fire test standards based on the floor and wall
assemblies planned. .

At fire-rated slab penetrations, there is a preference for the use of integral fire stop
sleeve devices such as Hilti cast-in (or equal). Refer to Appendix 4.11-2.

END OF DOCUMENT

Princenton Proposal

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Princenton Proposal

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Princenton Proposal

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Princeton University

Office of Design and Construction

You might also like